Advertisement
I know nothing about the following... I just thought some of you might find it interesting. Brian Wallace passed it to me, and I have read some, but not all. Anyone know more?
I find the tone hard to read, too confrontational. Your thoughts?
-C
+++++++
Holy Shift by The Thieves in the Light (rough draft) Page 1 of 177
Introduction
The Shift is to be broadcasted and promoted by your organization now, because as you received this, “Your” organization is now “OURS.” We the people of Earth own everything on Earth to share and share alike now. You just didn’t know it until now, as this movement has been growing underground and is in the first attempt to surface in your area of broadcasting. The progress of OUR Shift is the only thing that is to be broadcasted now by OUR broadcasting systems that you were “Working” for; now you are “Cooperating” with us; all of us. “We, the people of Earth, are calling for a world wide truce; a ‘Time-out’ after understanding the new evidence that is contained in this handbook.”
Broadcasters say this:
{This mentally challenged man was about to give up, but thought that just in case you would listen, he’d try one more time.
“I have news: ‘The Shift’ is here! All of the workers on Earth are to uniting into one labor union to free ourselves of the mental stronghold that divides us and free ourselves from the empires of Earth.”
“All teenagers of Earth are to form one word-to-mouth communication system called, ‘Jah Grapevine.’ One outcome for teens of this final movement of the people of Earth is the freedom to marry and be considered adults at age 12; like, the tribes do.”
“All the circles for freedom, truth, peace, human rights, are to come to one communication circle with the teenagers.”
“All the indigenous tribes of Earth are to come to the circle as well.”
“All the poor, oppressed, and dis-eased are to join also.”
“All the leaders of all of the religions are to join the circle.”
“Take off your masks, and build bridges between you and the rest will follow.”
We have translators for every language now.” “We can have a World Wide PUBLIC Broadcasting System Now. All the people of Earth can talk to each other with one loud voice, if we work together, all at one time, and say, ‘Let’s focus on all the things that humans have in common and start from there.’”}
What is the Shift? Well for starters, it’s where the people of Earth organize themselves into one communication system that is controlled only by the people of Earth. At the same time (now) all of the working classes of Earth are uniting into one labor union by means of our ONE VOICE to take charge and share the workload that is necessary to feed, clothe, house, and heal all of the people on Earth; basically, a true world wide social security system for all.
This handbook is primarily for teenagers, so they can lead themselves to freedom now; in doing so they will lead the rest of us. The outcome for teenagers all over the world is the freedom to marry and be considered adults by puberty (or age 12; whichever comes first) as they should be free adults. True freedom is the outcome for all.
All teenagers of Earth are forming one “Teenager Communication Circle;” starting with those of the strong empire countries that have access to the communication systems, and those tribal teens and teens of poor countries that also have access to communication; be it computer, word-to-mouth, or even homing pigeons if that’s what it takes. All circles for peace and human rights are uniting together into one communication circle with the teenagers. All indigenous circles of the different tribal names are uniting with the peace, freedom and human rights circles. No longer are we working alone, or in scattered groups. We, the people will talk as ONE, plan as ONE, and act as ONE to have control of Earth for as long as the Earth has humans on it. The entire world of workers shall join this circle to rid the world of competition and the empire systems that controlled us for far too long. We will not defy any government, or empire, until we all agree on how we will act.
This handbook is a complete circle. In the introduction and throughout the book, we plant seeds or ideas in your mind. As you read on, those seeds will get watered, germinated, and fertilized, and you’ll start to sprout with excitement as the awareness of the Shift comes to your consciousness. You’ll see that together; WE shall bloom. Stay calm and read the entire handbook.
This is a world wide (R)EVOLUTION to show ourselves that we, the people of the world, can take control of the world and govern ourselves and to show those who still think they are in control that they are no longer in control, then they’ll join us and bring their “gifts” to the circle, as they are part of us. We will be very careful, as we seek out “Win-Win” situations for all; that means bringing everyone on Earth to financial equality and starting economically anew (the rich people may be a little distraught at first, but they’ll see things OUR way soon enough. Since we are thieves in the Light, we can steal most of the “Gnashing of teeth,” or burning egos, part from the prophecies, too).
In order to help the teenagers of the empires, We have added everything in this handbook to help them deal with their enslaved and over-controlling parents, and achieve the support they need from them; unlike, the parents of the freedom fighting “Flower Children” of the 1960’s, who started our circle; against all odds, and with a double edged sword of Truth. This handbook is for teenagers in every way.
In gaining the teenagers’ favor, we start with the first chapter for them, then throughout the rest of the book, there’s more ammunition for them, and we know they won’t understand everything, but throughout this campaign they’ll study amongst themselves and their parents until they understand everything that’s going on now, and many will become experts at the simple-to-understand “Underground” communication system.
We are basically forming a world wide labor union to where, eventually, no one will ever have to work for a “Boss” again. Before that can happen, we have to get organized into a solid communication system, and before that can happen, everyone in the world must know about it and know what to do; which is happening now. Basically, it is all happening at the same time; now.
Hello, our names are anonymous because we want to stay alive. We have spiritually adopted all of the people on Earth. We are married to all of you by God. We are only humans, but we have another label; “Rainbow Warriors.” Which means we come from all the different directions of Earth, and all the different countries, religions, languages, and classes, and we all have different shades of the same color of skin called, “Human.” We are here now to help bring the people of Earth “Home.”
The Rainbow family, along with all the other circles of freedom by peace, truth, understanding, forgiving (Love) and conscious social cooperation throughout the world, has over 100 million people scattered all over the world. We are always calling everybody “Home” to unselfishness and the human family; the ONE tribe. We were organized by only the Truth and the Love that is held in our hearts and minds, and many are shedding their selfish habits of old on a day to day basis, and many are new who, understandingly, are still holding on to “Their” selfish habits from yesterday’s nightmare.
The Rainbow tribe is here to help bridge the gaps between all of the other tribes (countries, empires, etc.) in the world.
Currently, in the United States, there are many Rainbow warriors still camped out in Louisiana while we operate our make-shift shelters and kitchens to help feed thousands of people daily, and many of those hurricane Katrina survivors have been ignored by their own government and the mainstream media. Have you heard about our efforts to help the hurricane survivors over mainstream media? No? There’s a reason why the Empire’s broadcasting systems don’t want the minds of the masses to know that WE even exist… I’ll get to that later, but it’s basically because we are against the “Empire System,” or “Babylon,” and we are for all of the people.
As a tribal member, the first thing that we learned was that we may not have permission to speak for the tribe or for anyone in the tribe. We have not gained any permission to speak for them; we are speaking for everyone who is lost in the polluted seas of the years of compounded deception, or for those who can’t speak for themselves because they are literally starving to death now. Tomorrow, no one will ever starve to death on Earth again, but we have some cooperating to do today.
As selfish as we think we are, Americans, we have really been trained to be unselfish about our freedom by this empire system, all we did was work and stay busy; therefore, we didn’t have the time to really live a happy life, or get involved with the political issues to make the changes that must be made in favor of the workers.
Fortunately, more and more American people were angrily saying, “There is something wrong with this system!” And there is over 7 Billion of WE, the “Workers” on Earth, and only about 144,000 “Emperors.” That’s quite a ratio, don’t you think; 144 to 7,000,000? A handful of the spoiled, selfish, and most deceived were controlling the oceans of workers “Under” them with money, but not to worry, as their foundation has only been solid ice (deception) and we are warming up very quickly now; in fact, WE the people of Earth are getting very hot with the Truth; WE are shifting. Welcome home!
All the people on Earth shall organize as one body to defy the entire empire systems of the world. WE shall stake our claim of freedom, and “Govern” ourselves. We shall turn this planet into a pillar of health, because we now can. Teenagers of the most defiant to the most conformed, and Elders, who have had no choice but to conform, shall get us started… IGNORE ALL RUMORS OF CANCELLATION, WE HAVE BEEN BUILDING THIS CIRCLE FOR OVER 40 YEARS (that we know of, but really it started thousands of years ago) AND WE SHALL CONTINUE TO GROW, and now it’s time for our growing snowball of Light to save the last suffering male and female of Earth; wherever they are, we can find them all, and rescue them. These two helpers of the last suffering, enslaved, and ignored shall always succeed. Once that is done, we have saved all of us from ever suffering for our basic human needs. WE shall have world wide social security of everyone’s basic human needs that shall be free for all; at all times, and forever! Other powerful helpers shall be called forth, and they are everyone else who can help.
What is better; putting up borders to keep the sick and diseased (dis-eased with violence, too) people from spreading their diseases to other countries, or feeding, and healing all the people on Earth to where all diseases are maximally minimized, thus giving more people the feeling of security as WE freely travel the planet? WE can do both now; since the borders are still up; therefore, WE shall while WE plan for the fences, flags, and borders that divide humans to come down.
This “Movement” has been growing for thousands of years, as we look at our past as mere stepping stones to our future. We finally have learned from our mistakes, and we are all leaving the last stepping stone, which WE, the people of Earth have been stranded on like an island. That last stepping stone to our new home on Earth was the “Empire System;” which has been the dark shadow that has fallen on all of Earth. We will fully expose that system to you by using the United States’ empires as an example, so you’ll know and understand that WE have truly been mere sheep with no shepherd; all of us. We’ll see clearly that wolves (Deceived sheep) have been our “Shepherds,” in disguise.
Vision: (Doubt kills visions, so see that you don’t do that, or let others’ doubtful influences invade your mind; stay focused).
We are writing this vision like a history book; like, we are an old woman who’s telling the children a story before bed, and we would like your help. We are making history; therefore, this book is continually being written as you read it! Remember that the word, “Shift” is an action word as a title; we are really shifting, and it is a quick action as we are evolving quickly now.
It’s a vision of the Shift, and how the teenagers under the Empire system; starting with the ones that are most defiant, led their parents and the rest of the world to true freedom, and became our new volunteer police force of the world. They now protect us.
WE are thinking as One, organizing as One, planning as ONE, and acting as ONE. The only action for starters, is merely spreading the word of the Shift; along with the numbers of people that are joining our circle, and while we spread the word we’ll be organizing at the same time. We’ll plan to do what is necessary, and what is possible, and then we’ll act; we’ll do what WE once thought was the impossible as we leave the last stepping stone to see the Light of the new day.
WE are simply blooming where WE are planted. You don’t have to do anything. The teenagers who have been invited to become Rainbow warriors (All humans of Earth are invited, too) are doing all the “Legwork” for us; along with all the other well-established circles, and while they are doing it, they are being rewarded with their own freedom as they stake their claim of it. They’ll decide amongst themselves how to stay organized, plan and act; with or without our guidance; they are free now.
Vision of the conscious start of the Shift
For thousands of years, there was a powerful and violent virus of the minds of the masses on Earth that fed off of all the people in the world. It is called, “The Empire System.” The name of this system and how it functions was kept very quiet from the people by those in control of it, but the name the empire of the United States’ government gave itself was “The Eagle.” Then in the 1960s AD, a circle idea was born of the most defiant and truth seeking people of and against the American Empire, they were called “The White Dove” (of Peace). When the teenagers of the 1960’s burnt their draft cards to stand up together in protest for our basic human rights and put an end to random drafting into the American empire’s military, is when the Dove had chained its leg to the leg of the Eagle. For 40 years the Eagle dragged the Dove around the planet. And as the torn and tattered Dove of peace was trying to keep up with the powerful violent Eagle throughout the years, feathers would fall off the Dove. From them more circles of peace were born wherever the feathers landed. All at once, in 2006AD (maybe 2007?) the people of peace decided to connect the circles, and when they did, they found that they were just as powerful as the Eagle and the two birds instantly married and the Shift was conceived. Now there are billions of White Eagle chicks (TEENAGERS) as well as a few old tired White (haired) Doves to help them prepare for flight.
History of the start of the freedom movement in the 1900’s in the United States:
Fueled with life were the teachers of Hank Williams Sr. and Elvis Presley who taught the people under the United States’ government to live again during the 1950’s. Their teachers were former slaves of the skin color that was once known as “Black,” and it appears that they are ancestors of the biggest, oldest, and happiest recognized tribe in the world; the “Truth Knowing” tribe. They taught Hank and Elvis who were once known as “White” to be brave enough to overcome their shame-based pasts and take off their invisible masks and dance even if they didn’t know how. Together, they taught the enslaved-by-shame empire people of the United States rhythm, and to move our bodies to the music any way we wanted; the “Boogie Woogie,” and “Rock-a Billy” was a few of the names for the freedom dancing, then we changed it to simply “Dancing” as the revolution of “Rock n’ Roll” music brought freedom from the shame of freely dancing in public whenever the people wanted. After Elvis and Hank, and the rest of the musicians that jumped on the band wagon, many teens were dancing happily and freely to the music, as they realized how bored and controlled they have been throughout the ages.
Then in the 1960s, all at once many teenagers, who were enslaved under the empire system, rose up in awareness and let down their invisible masks of shame and ego, and the outcome of that movement was a circle of people that started to grow. For forty years, many circles for freedom by truth, peace, understanding, forgiving, and conscious social cooperation for happiness for the entire world where formed, and their numbers grew to over 100 million people that were scattered all over the world by the year 2000AD.
A question of despair was earlier broadcasted by the Empires’ broadcasting systems from a tired Truth Knower King of the people after riots happened because of the racial and economic injustice that prevailed in the United States, “Why can’t we all just get along?” The question had unfortunately too many answers, so it was turned around on the “Alpha and Omega meter” to a better question, “How can WE all just get along?” There were still many different confusing answers, but the question was a quest of hope; especially, when the answer was in the question that was the bridge that linked the Alpha and Omega; “WE all just get along.” WE is the key that unlocks the door to freedom, and WE are the locksmiths.
Then another bi-lingual King of the Truth Knowers named, “Quino,” who had “Power To The People” tattooed on his heart, and was the lead singer with a crystal clear spirit voice of the band called, “Big Mountain,” who brought us the “House for the Seeker” on their CD entitled, “New Day.” It was an idea to bring all the spiritual leaders of all the different religions with all the necessary translators to one circle to learn about each other’s true beliefs, and to find what they all have in common, and rid the world of the nasty rumors that were spread about these religions that kept the people divided, and to bring their true teachings to clear view, along with all the good things about every religion for all of the people of Earth to benefit. They cooperated together to bridge the gaps between the different languages, and find those beliefs that all religions have in common, and figured out how all religions of the world can be rid of the empire systems of control (which includes the unwritten laws of shame and guilt) while still maintaining their organizations, as many people found God through these religions, and weren’t ever going to give up their connection to them.
More tired Truth Knower Kings appeared, like the Hawaiian Hip Hop/Reggae group called, “Sudden Rush,” whose energetic tribal spirit voices called for all the tribes of the world to unite as ONE as an “Indigenous Up Rise!” Especially, those tribes of the United States with their CD entitled, “Ea.” Then in 2006, King “Farrakhan” (did I spell it right?) bridged more gaps as he called for the “Blacks,” and “Poor Whites,” and “Mexicans” and “Native Americans” of the United States to the circle with his “Millions More” campaign, as his tired old radical spirit voice shrieked through the airwaves just under the radar of the Empire to confirm this world wide union. Also in 2006/7, Stephen Stills, Jackson Browne, and Pearl Jam (along with many others of the United States) came out with new “Anti-War/Anti-Empire” songs, and in doing so, they built a bridge back to the 60’s movement, and then all the old (people empowering) peace and freedom songs of that era came back to the public focus (Mainstream, or the “Mass-mind”) as well as all the happy songs of the 70’s, and as the onslaught of Rap music invaded the empires, it helped to bring truth to the deceived, and enough wisdom that the people could finally understand the words to this CD by John Trudell: “AKA: Graffiti Man.” John made the CD back in the 90’ after the first bombings of Iraq; when innocent women and children were killed by the thousands, but the public was too asleep to even listen to his words, or understand them.
The final climax of the shift started when the tribes and the circles of peace and basic human rights reunited and networked together. They were lead together by the teenagers of 2006/7AD. The new generation of teenagers were very savvy, and quickly brought a simple-to-understand “Underground” communication system to the people fifty years after the assassination of a man named, “Gandhi;” who taught the world about non-violent resistance when he organized his people with a communication system of no idle words. Gandhi was a great teacher for the entire human tribe, and his followers of India had one simple united voice, and they were able to defy the evil British Empire enough in the 1900’s that the British simply left the country that they once claimed was theirs, when all the time the people of India knew the country belonged to the people who lived there, and that they should only be “Governed” by themselves. (Currently, in 2006AD, India has been invaded by the empires again, and they are back in business; controlling and enslaving the mass minds of the people).
While the teens of 2006/7 were starting the countdown to oneness, they connected to the newest tribe of “Misfits” known as “The Rainbow Family of Living Light.” These “Rainbow warriors” were made up of all different colors, languages and religions, and they were all over the world; their main guide was the true Love of others and the truth that all the people of the world are really all of just one tribe called, “Human” and they were already able to assist with the “House for the Seeker,” because in the Rainbow tribe, we already had many scholars of scripture, children of pure Love, and spiritual teachers. The Dalai Lama of Tibet was already considered by many of us as ONE with all, as he made this simple proclamation of Truth, “Any religion is a good religion, if it makes you a better person. What matters the most is that you are happy” (If you are happy, then you can spread happy; you can raise happy children; if you aren’t, you can’t).
Many Rainbow warriors are merely long-haired friends of Jesus’ true teachings and frequently organize themselves into prayers circles to pray for world peace, but many despised the, so called, “Christian” religions that operated like empires to control the people with deception, and “Beliefs;” while ignoring the facts on Earth. We became the bridge builders who built bridges between people who still believed that they were different than anyone else; all-the-while we were living in peace and love with each other, our neighbors, as well as all fellow humans.
Yes, back then the people were not only divided by confusion and beliefs, they were divided by borders, countries and languages, and no one could travel anywhere out of “Their own country” without permission from the “Emperors.” As I said before, George Bush Sr. and the entire “Bush Klan” was just the most powerful emperor at the time, there were actually about 144,000 of them that were all networked together to continue to keep control of the people with mass mind manipulation and idle words through the broadcasting systems that they owned with their money system. But the system was only working for them while nearly 7-8 billion people were working too hard and/or suffering because of them.
With the encroachment of the Empire system over control of all the people of Earth, and since the United States was the “Bulldog” of the empire system that was still able to enslaved the minds of the masses enough to continue to produce a huge violent military to secure their control over the people and the nearly $144 Trillion (?) on Earth that the empire had slowly continued to print over the years in order to continue to stay richer. Well, it only seemed natural to convert the US (the Divided states of America, really) to true unity first, and they became the “Father” of the shift. The bulldog became “Man’s best friend.”
As the Rainbow tribe started connecting the dots, all the tribes were discovered, from the Truth Knowers to the innocently ignorant, and the people found that nearly half the world was immediately in the circle. “Jah Grapevine” was what the communication system was called; now it’s just “The Circle.” The circle that was growing since, perhaps the days of Jesus, was slingshot into the final climax of the Shift by the teens of the 1960’s (who were still alive; most of them) reunited with the teens of 2006/7 and after a few adjustments they’ll always be in control of it; there’s no stopping them now as they are supported by all.
Famous people immediately started to come “Home” to the human tribe and walk among us. Then Oprah Winfrey, the famous talk show host of America; who was a leader of the women’s empowering movement, realized that she had been fooled, distracted with money, and the fact that the slave masters of yesterday had just cashed in their whips for money, laws and contracts; were keeping her from blooming and thus, she was ignoring her spiritual response-abilities, as she discovered that all the money and fame was seducing her, and it all went to her head (ego). She surrendered her ego and came home to the people via the Public Broadcasting Systems, and many of her wealthy friends followed; people Like Paul McCartney, Elton John, Stephen Stills, Jackson Browne, Madonna, Hank Williams Jr., Robert Redford, Val Kilmore, John Travolta, Sting, Tom Cruz, and Jon Voight; just to name a few. When that happened, it was like everything that all of the famous people ever done in the past for charity; like “Live Aid” and “Farm Aid,” was really just setting up the stages for what they were going to do. Free concerts to celebrate and generate our Oneness were staged, as Oprah lit the torch of the statue of liberty for the entire world to live in the Light of true freedom with her “Homecoming.” She was called, “The Mother of the Shift,” and she became one of the many English speaking spokespeople for “The House for the Seeker,” and held their publicized conferences on our rebuilt and “World Wide Public Broadcasting System,” along with the conferences of the “Center Circle” of Jah Grapevine once the people took full control of all the broadcasting systems, as the people declared that no government or private entity shall ever be free to deceive and/or tempt the minds of the masses in any way by broadcasting again. The Truth shall prevail over Earth.
2006/7 was the time where no one, was 100% happy before the shift, but everyone knew that WE were headed towards 100% happiness for all. The people were happier as they headed towards more happiness. The entire planet was on the way towards a World Wide Social Security system that brought world health, peace, and happiness for all the tribe, as more and more people started to recognize each other as a family member of the only tribe; Human. The people celebrated as soon as they got the word, because they saw enough of the big picture, or the whole truth. While in celebration, they built the Circle and the people’s mass mind shifted towards freedom of living for today by truth, peace, understanding, forgiving, and conscious social cooperation.
All the empire country’s governments were converted, and the people had control of all the military and outer space equipment and they put it to work for all the people on Earth. Believe it or not, the president of the US, George W. (war) Bush was one of the first emperors to cross the ego line to start his journey home to the people, for the people (he had no choice, really) when Oprah made her move.
The Shift was the ending of the final wars amongst the people and started with a call for a world wide truce, or “Time-out.” The wars ended when everyone in the world became aware of their own egos that had led them to a lost place. It was the war of the minds of the masses turned against themselves by the empires. The wolves had all the sheep scattered. The onion peels of ego that surrounds and protects the broken hearts of men fell and turned to gourds of ashes, as shame had become the highlighted part of the virus that needed to be treated with a strong dose of the medicine called, “Forgiveness.” Shame and guilt are unwritten laws, and there were too many unwritten laws in favor of the empires, as a result of the wolves’ dirty work over the past millenniums.
The people celebrated by quickly rescuing others. Here’s a translated quote from the last slave mother rescued, “We were starving. The bosses all mysteriously disappeared (Many will hide like cockroaches when the Light comes on, but then later, they’ll see that it’s safe to just be human and step across their ego lines, take down their invisible masks, and come out of hiding and come home) and nobody had to work. I was happy because nobody was raping the women, or whipping my children any more, but they stopped bringing food… and all of a sudden we heard noises… It was music and people singing songs; all kinds of different people of all the different colors of skin, clothes and hair styles. I thought they were aliens from outer space, but they were humans; smiling and they were filled with Spirit, and with a joy that I’ve never seen before… and they were all carrying food; fresh fruit… they were running towards us… (Happy tears bled down her cheeks again as she spoke) …we didn’t know that they came to rescue the last suffering people on earth! Everyone in the tribe was healed and happy and they said that this was the way life is now in the whole world; everyone is in the same tribe now, and we all now have the security from ever having to be enslaved by our own basic human needs again, and from ever having to pay taxes again. They said the whole world is celebrating now, because they found us, and now everyone is ‘Home.’ They said, ‘You are free!’ They used the fastest planes on Earth, along with helicopters, other planes, and aircraft carriers! They did it just for us! They called themselves ‘Rainbow warriors.’”
Today all the people are relieved, free and equal and WE all know it, even the emperors have all come home.
While the excitement and freedom of the teenagers was in full bloom, the fear of the largest baby-boom to ever reach Earth was upon us, as the Center Circle quickly organized the growing of the healthiest food possible all over the planet; while teaming up with modern technology to bring the food, hospitals and health care, etc. to all directions of Earth for all the people.
In 2012 AD, and due to the freedom of the teenagers, and world wide happiness, the population had exploded to nearly 10 billion happy, healthy people. They didn’t even feel the need for a “Savior” to show up, but WE were wondering if that 10 billionth baby was going to be someone special to teach us more about spiritual healing, growing, astral traveling, walking on water, etc. (That’s where the vision skips forward, because when it comes to spiritual truths, we are just pawns on that chessboard. We are not scholars of scripture; We are students of pure love {Love Eternal’s, “Creation” CD} and we are children of the true Light; apprentice priests/shamans, which means that we are set-up to learn “Truths” quickly, and at this time we would like to believe that WE, all together in one tribe, are the “Omega;” the spirit of the Christ, or The Oneness, who have been guided home, mysteriously, by God).
By 2012, WE were convinced that WE could easily produce more food to feed many more billions of people, but then something else happened as time went by, more and more people continued to shed their selfishness all on their own, and the planet stayed at about 10 billion; where it is today.
By the end of 2012, no one was working for time again (time was money). Time as WE knew it, stopped. Mother Earth was the only dictator of time. WE grow food by her clock; she is our only “Emperor” now. Even all the alarm clocks that everyone was “Programmed” to use to get out of bed “On time;” to get to work (school is work) “On time” were destroyed; except for those used for our “Basic Human Needs Circles.” We even changed the New Year again to year 1AS (After the Shift) instead of calling it 2013AD.
All this time the people are building the infinite “Tower to God” by continuing to just love their neighbors a little more with each passing day. The loving friendships, care, and trust that grows between humans is the only “Tower to God” we ever had to build, as WE rebuild Babylon the right way; OUR way. Babylon shall fall and be converted, as neighbors are our only true social security, and we all know it now, as we look for God in the eyes of our neighbors.
Welcome home to the one tribe, WE are still all different colors, beliefs, etc. And WE are all one family: Human.
Welcome to the Truth Knowing tribe, of those who seek-out the truth of how humans are actually supposed to live together and share Earth.
Feeding the Elders
We ask all Elders of the world to get into circles and discuss this campaign. We have watched families torn apart because of selfishness and competition that has been brought on by the mental stronghold of the Empires. The selfishness is brought on by starvation of freedom, and then temptation to desire something else. When we are starving for something (like a basic human need of the physical, mental, emotional, or hormonal kind; or simply freedom, happiness, rest, etc.) but don’t know what it is, because of too much distraction by temptation and working all the time; then sometimes we can’t stop selfishness. It’s simple; we were trained to focus on work, desires, and beliefs that divide humans; ahead of the facts of living together on Earth.
If we can put a man on the moon (over forty years ago!) then we can figure out how we can all live together without working so much (everyone). The average “40 hour a week” working parent in the United States was actually working from the time the alarm clock rings to the time they go to bed. We worked hard just to get the kids fed and to school or daycare on time, then we had to get ourselves to work. We were already working two hours a day while we got our families used to splitting apart for the entire day and going in different directions, and then we worked eight hours more of the day away; then we picked up the children, got home, cooked dinner, cleaned-up, and pushed the kids to do their homework. That is a full 12-14 hours! And we were supposed to do that, independently, while maintaining a happy family for 20 years or longer? Who had time for you; elder?
After everyone was tired from working all day, that’s when we were supposed to spend “Quality time” with our children. It couldn’t possibly be quality time if everyone was tired, so once the work was done, most parents fell a little short by ignoring their neighbors and children, collapsing on the couch, and staring at the Empire’s main weapon of mass destruction; the television. They manipulated us with it; all ways, always. They brought us what they wanted us to see, hear, and care about. As long as we were watching their TV businesses, they were in control. We needed leaders that will listen to the people, and not talk at the people. We needed leaders that will give. Those leaders are now WE; the tired teenagers, the tired workers, and the re-tired workers.
We pray: “Elders (all of them) shall be treated like Kings and Queens, now (but that’s not going to happen in your lifetime unless a major movement happens… It’s here now; stay calm). You shall be treated like Kings and Queens of Love. You shall be looked upon as if you are God, as every weak person on Earth shall be looked upon as if they are God. WE shall be relieved now, and we shall evolve to a world of people who spend all of our time in quality and equality. Amen. So be it.”
As spiritual “Brethren” it is our job to feed those that cry out the most, first. But how could we do that when we were beggars? Beggars united! I THINK THAT YOUR PART IS YOUR GIFT TO THE WORLD. Thank you, and what you may not realize is that for all these years we have just been setting up the stage for a major movie; “Move.” My job has always been to find a way to bring more reinforcements to the circle; that’s my gift to the tribe. “I’m out of my mind, and into OUR mind.” This is not about me; it’s all about WE. Come together… right now… over WE. Marry me by God, but if that sounds uncomfortable with you; marry the suffering children by God. I am married to God; therefore, I am married to you with Love; always remembering who our real father is; not I or any other human on Earth. God is our father, and it’s time we all listen to God, together as ONE (WHATEVER YOU ENVISION GOD TO BE, as there are many names, or ideas, or gods; of the same God). Remember, with God all things are possible.
Teens Lead 11-15-06 (Remember: this is a rough draft that is to be used as the final draft; therefore, understand that parts of it may be a little redundant and lengthy as we are trying to talk to 12 year olds and people of other languages, too)
Gaining the Teen’s Favor (continued from the introduction – read the introduction)
1. Teens Lead
1. Jah Grapevine 101 - training
1. Main Circle of Humans – the heart of the human tribe
1. Home – human baseline truth
2. Circle Training
2. Eggshell 101
1. Human baseline truth
2. Egg, etc.
3. The Empire System
1. Exposing the negative
2. Highlighting the positive (Goliath gave us the slings and stones to slay him, and we now have sharpened double edged swords of Truth) Go to page?, later.
3. Outcome for teens of the entire world (Introduction)
1. “You can’t fight against the youth… We’re rude rude people!” _Bradly James Nowell
2. Age Thing
3. School Thing? Shame Shame Shame
4. Conscious Party _Ziggy Marley
1. Building the Communication System
2. Conscious Dance
3. Protesting 101
4. Truth based drug education
1. Plan l, Now armed with the swords of Truth we march
1. The start of the end for all empires of Earth
2.
2. Plan 2, Adjusting the first plan
3. Plan 3 to infinity (We’ll keep coming up with plans, if we have to, until we get it right!)
Jah Grapevine
We are starting a simple and solid communication system for all of the people on Earth. It will eventually become the one world government with no leaders; just us; WE, the people. This system is simple and will require just a little reading, thought, and training on your part.
The communication system discussed here, “The Circle,” or “Jah Grapevine,” is simply a stepping stone, or stairway, for the system that we will use in the future. We must have a back-up plan; therefore, this is the back-up plan that needs to be used and understood. It is a way for you to see the steps that WE are taking to do what is needed to achieve everyone’s basic human needs for free on Earth; therefore I’m showing you the necessary, and the possible, then the “Impossible.” Look at it as playing a game. In this game all we need are most of the players and WE, the people, win.
Gandhi: “The only way to organization is solid communication of no idle words.”
How can the people all communicate as one in order to get organized; simply and non-electronically (the empire owned the electricity) while aligning the necessary translators at the places where languages need to be bridged over the entire world, so we can all speak one “Language” (the language of truth and intention) now; without the interference from the empire? WE can translate every language to and from English now! In a way, WE already can speak one language.
Gandhi led his country to freedom, because the people all communicated as one and stood together as one. Today there are 100 Million people, or more, who are ready to come together in one organized circle all over the world. This idea can connect the dots quickly, while doing it in the Light (not hiding what WE are doing) because it’s a circle that continues to grow. WE, the people, are uniting while the empires watch, and soon the emperors will come home to the circle.
The perfect circle is just a model for us to go by, but may be actually what we do. It is simple, so most of the intoxicated beggars of the world can understand it, along with almost every adult by the age of 12, who have been raised in an empire country like the United States.
The Circle: An underground communication system that has a vacancy for all the people of the world, should WE decide that WE are living in that science fiction movie, where it’s Humans against a machine.
The perfect model will start with one hundred people in a circle, and WE will call them the “Center Circle,” but for Training purposes we are going to start with nine people to help you grasp the concept easily, then we’ll grow from there.
b. Eggshell 101
Human Baseline Truth (Home base) Home
The home is the awareness that you have one of your two feet planted in the one heart of all humans. You are conscious that all humans share the same basic human needs, and that if we all just cooperated together for those basic human needs, we wouldn’t really have to work much at this time in history, because we have modern technology.
Home is in your mind. Do you worry about fitting in? Because here you don’t have to worry about it; you are in if you know it. You don’t have to prove yourself to anyone for any reason. If you are not accepted for just whoever you are, then those people who don’t accept you are still immature. They are the ones that need to grow-up more. You don’t have to work much for anyone else, because you are here for everyone in the world. Home is walking towards unselfishness; leaving “Me” and heading towards “We.”
If you are working for everyone of Earth, and your foot is planted in the middle with everyone else’s one foot, then you are working for yourself, and at that point, we’ll stop calling it work and start calling it cooperating.
For now, we can call “Home,” your awareness of being a tribal member of the only tribe of Earth; the humans. You are a part of one body, and this one body is in need of some healing. The main healing that has to happen first is that most of us simply need to come home.
Now you can also say that you are a member of the “Truth Knowing” tribe. We aren’t necessarily talking about spiritual truths, because we are actually living right here, and now, on Earth. We are seeking spiritual truths, but the primary focus of this campaign is to seek the truth of the way humans are supposed to live here on Earth, and how we can; right now, and together. As a member of the Truth Knowers, it doesn’t mean that you know any truth of how humans are supposed to live, but that you are seeking the truth, and trying to live your life the way that you have just become aware. In other words, you are evolving as you learn and become aware of the correct way that we are supposed to be living together. All the humans in one communication circle have all the knowledge that it will take to bring this planet into a heavenly world to live for all; equally.
We are all living together on Earth anyway; we are all sharing the planet, so whatever it is that all humans have in common is the highlight of this campaign; therefore, that is our home; where all are welcome. Welcome home!
The Eggshell is where WE belong.
Ben and Jerry’s ice cream put an advertisement out over our mainstream television that showed us a sad farmer who was standing by his milk cow, and he said to us, “We are losing our farms to corporations.” It was not a deceiving advertisement that we are normally use to seeing, with phony people (actors) smiling in the background. It was an advertisement to bring the Truth to the public’s consciousness; to bring the Truth to the mass mind. Then the caption read, “We are losing 214 farms a week to corporations.”
We are losing our food supplies to the maximize profits/minimize loss corporations. The spiders are taking control of our food supplies. They can monopolize our food supplies if they get the majority of them, and then we will be enslaved by them even more. It’s time for the change… Shift! Welcome the good people at Ben and Jerry’s Ice Cream home to the circle.
Natural American Spirit Tobacco Company is actually on our side. Even though they are selling tobacco, they are actually competing against the evil tobacco companies. The big ones are putting many different chemicals in their tobacco to make their cigarettes burn more evenly, and become more addicting as an acquired taste of their brands are different then others, and becomes more addicting to our subconscious minds with the additives. The argument is that perhaps raw tobacco wouldn’t cause cancer as much if it wasn’t laced with highly toxic chemicals. Natural American Spirit Tobacco doesn’t put additives in the cigarettes, and I have smoked and quit smoking many times in my life. I found them easier to quit then the others. We welcome the good people at Natural American Spirit Tobacco Company home to the circle
There are a group of people who are not organized, and are not on the eggshell, but they believe in tribal ways. Guess who they are? I’ll give you a hint. Do you remember when everybody started getting tribal tattoos on their bodies about ten years ago? Them; the tattoos are here to stay, and so are they. We welcome them home to the circle.
There’s a much bigger group of unorganized people out there as well that also have something in common, and only a few of them were ever on the eggshell at any one time; they are they people who believe in Marijuana freedom. Welcome home!
Back in 1993, I was riding my motorcycle on a hot summer day in the foothills above Sacramento, California, USA. I was about 32 years old, and I have been riding motorcycles since I was ten, so I didn’t see the need to have a motorcycle license, because I had a driver’s license to operate a car. And I knew that it recently became illegal to operate a motorcycle without a helmet on, because of the propaganda that the insurance industries put out over mainstream media to cause the people to pass the new law. You know I’m a rebel against corporate control, so I risked riding my bike without a helmet on. A police officer, who appeared to be someone that I would have picked on (back in
grammar school) because I didn’t know any better at the time (you know, the “Not very tough, or cool guy”) pulled me over. As I watched him and noticed that his badge and his gun were bigger than he was, he seemed to enjoy writing me the citation for driving a motorcycle without a license, and without a helmet, as it was his turn to pick on people. Then he said that I had to walk my bike home, because he couldn’t allow me to ride it home without a license! As soon as he drove out of site, I rode it home.
Then I went to a Biker Helmet Law Rally that was held on the steps of the state capital in Sacramento on the 4th of July to protest the helmet law. I guess there were about 400 Bikers there. They said to not pay the citations that everyone was given; in protest of the law. I said to myself, “These biker’s can’t be serious, there’s no way that they’ll ever stand up against the insurance industry without more people to join them.” So I set out to recruit more people, and that was the start of this booklet, to get more people for them. Welcome the Bikers home to true freedom, along with the entire Harley Davidson empire… Welcome home… I never paid the citation!
The next page is a picture that is worth a million words. It shows our eggshell expanded with the use of the Circle to where we bring all the managers, police officers, accountants, and lawyers home to the eggshell, and cut the tops off of all the money pyramids to take control.
Every corporation belongs to all of the people now. We, the people of the world, are united, as we all come home to the egg of humanity. The Babylon system of commerce and competition shall be no more.
Jah Grapevine
The Plan for teenagers
These are exciting times for the entire world. We are making history. You will be telling stories to your children and grandchildren about these days for the rest of your lives. Take pictures, videos, and write things down to help you remember so you can have your version of the Shift. Save newspaper clippings, and record news events, etc.
Keep in mind that the freedom circles for human rights, which includes the labor unions; the circles for peace by Truth, understanding, forgiving, and conscious social cooperation; the circles for the environment; the tribal circles as well as many religious circles; all add up to over 100 Million people! We are ready to support you.
According to our model of “Jah Grapevine,” we have an established center circle that is well hidden. We have all the people to make a 2nd, 3rd, and completed 4th generation.
You are called to action. In doing so, you will unite us and bring the big circle, the 5th generation, home. Welcome Home!
For those who haven’t really “Got it” yet; haven’t realized how exciting this movement is, you will. There’s a lot more to add to the plan; a lot more details, and clarification, and the excitement will come to you as you read on and discuss this handbook with your family, friends, and neighbors.
We are all going to experience a natural “High” that has never hit this world before; people are going crazy. “Governments don’t know what to do when ‘Their’ people go crazy… plumb, full-tilt bozo” _Robin Williams. Welcome Home, “Nano Nano!” “We are standing on a threshold of a dream… I want to live!” _John Denver. “People get ready… there’s a train a coming!” _Bob Marley. “Everyone on the peace train!” _Van Morrison. “We have to face who we really are… at some point we have no choice.” _John Trudell. “Music is the doctor!” _The Doobie Brothers. “Come Together…Right Now… over WE” _The people.
We are not conspiring to over-throw the government, but even if we were; is it not legal for friends and neighbors in the “Christian” based countries to love each other and talk to each other about the possibilities of a revolution? Are we not free to talk to our neighbors about anything? We are conspiring to cooperate with all the governments and empires to Shift the world quickly and peacefully by the people taking control immediately. The governments will show us that they are either with us or against us, as we eliminate the rich man’s corruption within our empire systems. Babylon shall fall peacefully and our, so called, “Leaders” of yesterday are invited to join us as we welcome them home to the humans. We will not fight them; we’ll ignore them as we move forward, and invite them to help us with their “Gifts.” They are welcome to come along... HOME!
Jah Grapevine
Plan 1 for teenagers
Step 1. We are going to assume that you are the first teenager in your school to get this handbook, and that we are at the start of the Shift. Think of it as playing a game… It’s the “Circle of Peas” game; where we are all different shades of green in the same pod. Keep in mind that this handbook is being copied, translated, and sent all over the world as fast as we can now, and that it is still “Underground.”
Assuming that you understand a little bit about the circle system; means that if you have a copy, your entire school has a copy. But, if you loose it, or get it taken away from you before you get a copy to a friend, then your entire school has lost the only copy, so try to keep it a secret from authority for now. You’ll want the “Bosses” to be the last to know. “Bosses” are your parents, teachers, etc. Part of the game is keeping it a secret until you have 100 other teenagers involved. Think about how fast your school can come up with 100 people; you start telling people, they start telling people, and so on.
Find a way to a copy machine, scanner/printer, etc. and make at least two copies; one for you to keep in good shape so you can use it to print more copies later, and one to give to a friend. If you use the copy machine at school, be smart. If you know a friend that already has a scanner/printer, they should be one of your first contacts.
Step 2. You know your friends better then I, so think of whatever you can say to get them to read it. “YOU’VE GOT TO READ THIS!” with excitement and joy on your face might work just fine, and tell them about it enough so they’ll be interested.
Step 3. Assuming you found someone who is interested in playing this game with us and building a circle, decide who, what, when, where, how, and (You already know why). Oh yeah, if you get asked questions by a “Boss” about what you are doing, think of it as playing a game. You are playing a game to see if we can take control of the world, but you don’t have to tell them everything; don’t lie, but let their own egos deceive them with your half-truths, and know that you are deceiving them; don’t be in denial; “It’s a school project.” If you do get caught and they demand that you tell them who you gave copies to, don’t tell them unless they physically torture you; that’s part of the game; don’t tell on your circle.
Step 4. Make more copies and get more people to play. It all starts now, and if you can find a way to send this through the internet, spend all the time you can, and send it to everyone you can; especially to other countries.
Step 5. How many students are in your school? That’s how many people that are in your circle, they just don’t know it yet.
Step 6. Once you have a circle of seven, you are growing quickly from here on out. Make plans for four of you to visit another school near you; these are teens that your school plays sports with, etc. Introduce yourselves and give them copies of this handbook, and all four of your phone numbers/contact information, so the other three of you stay hidden and protected for now. Your circle is now growing in other schools while it’s growing in your school. They’ll be in communication with you from here on through the Shift.
Step 7. This is of greatest import/export: If you know someone in your school that is bi-lingual, give them a copy and ask them to translate this in their other language and try to
find a way to send it to the countries that use that language. That is their gift to bring to
our circle. This was written in simple English, so it will be easy for them. Hopefully,
they’ll have other people who can help them with it, so they can share the chore and split the booklet up, so each of them can translate a section and then discuss and proof read it, and put it back together. They are to put their translations on the back of each page, so that this gets sent with it’s English version as well; for example, the first page should be in English, as page 1, then on the other side, should be page 1 in their other language, and so on. It’s a big job, so give them as much support as you can.
Step 8. Anyone in your circle who has teenage relatives in another part of the country/world should try to get a copy sent to them as soon as possible; they are already in your circle, too, and they need to know it. Anyone who can send this through the internet, or snail mail to soldiers in the military should try to do that immediately, so they’ll know from us what’s going on now.
Step 9. Make plans to go to another school, and do the same. As your circle grows, you’ll be talking to each other about things that you are going to do, and how, etc., so let’s assume that you have made it to 100 people. The only news that we are spreading through the circle at this time is the number of people who are “In.” “Purple” is replaced with the number of people that are in your circle who understand enough of this handbook to know what’s going on now.
Building Energy with Excitement
For the teenagers of the United States, I’m going to jump ahead a little, and after you read the rest of the book, you’ll see the importance of telling you now where we are going. The broadcasting systems of the empire will not help us advertise our growth, or even our existence; without our persuasion.
Once you have over 100 people in contact with each other (hopefully, you can wait until your entire school is in the circle) it’s now time for a “420 party.” What?
Now that your circle has grown this big, there’s no stopping it now as you continue to tell more and more people, so it’s time to “Go public.” Every teenager in your circle is to now give this to their parents and give them time to read it.
“420” has many different meanings at this time in history, and has been purposely kept from the public consciousness by mainstream media, so as to not promote the use of Marijuana. This is not a movement to promote its use; this is a movement to promote freedom by truth.
The 100 teenagers are the leaders (representatives) for their families. In the United States, there is an average of 4.2 people per family household. Multiply 4.2 by 100, and you come up with 420. What a coincidence!
While your circle of 100 teens continues to grow, you just added the rest of the family; they were already in your circle, but didn’t know until now. Ask the parents if they’ll help organize the 420 party. Keep in mind that by the time you organize the party, to the time that you actually start partying; thousands of people will be coming to the party!
The 420 party
Once the party starts, it’s not going to stop until all of the people in the United States, and then the world, are in the circle. What? That’s right! The party is not actually going to be in a building. The party is a “Coming-out” party; where we organize ourselves in groups to go in public and advertise the circle. It’ll look like a protest, but we aren’t protesting; we are advertising.
The bigger the groups, the better, but groups shouldn’t be any smaller then seven people. Pick a date when the party starts, and then here’s how we’ll move after you organize your volunteers:
1. For starters, volunteers will all put on white arm bands (a white flag; tied around your arm) or wave white surrender flags, and if we run out of white surrender flags, hold up the peace sign with your two fingers while we go out in public. A few volunteers will purposely not put on white surrender flags, so they can be witnesses, and act just like the general public. Your group should have a video camera, or at least a camera with them at all times, so we can record any possible foul play by the police departments. Organize yourselves to split up and go to places where other teenagers gather, and have as many copies of this booklet as you can to pass out, along with your contact information.
2. Before you do anything, your circle shall make a special copy of this entire handbook and send it to the president of your country, with your signatures on it. This is our petition. The first police officer of any city who gets this will take it immediately to his “Bosses,” but hopefully he reads it first, and takes it to other police officers first, as we want his “Boss” to be the last to know, also. When that happens, every police department in the country and then the world will get this to be prepared for the movement. Every officer in uniform (that means everyone soldier in our militaries) is to have a white arm band on to protect them and to show us that they are in our circle. Whenever a police car drives by our party, we are to wave white flags at them and point our fingers at them if they do not have a white flag attached to their vehicle for everyone to see. Once you see a police vehicle driving by with a white flag on it, let them go by freely without any harassment; their job is to protect and to serve the people, and they may be on the way to save a life.
Some of you are to volunteer (4 per 100?) to keep the circle’s communication flowing smoothly and to keep track of the numbers of people who join, but don’t worry if you lose track because of the big rush, when that happens stop worrying about it, unless the empire strikes back (There’s plans for that in this handbook, too). During the big rush, there won’t be any time to sit down and try to draw circles on paper with names to the dots, because they’ll be too many people coming in at once and you’ll be too excited and too overwhelmed; that was just the back-up plan, remember; the steps to show you that we can do it now? But other countries that don’t have all the slings and stones as we do (Internet, cell phones, etc) will need to understand the basic circle idea, so they can keep up with the word-to-mouth communications with us all.
3. We are to bombard the White House with copies of this; one copy per circle of 100 teens, and if you can find addresses (email, or snail mail) of famous people; especially, Oprah, bombard them with this booklet as well. You’ll be talking with the other circles all the time and we’ll know how many copies of this got sent to all of the people that are mentioned in this book; this will excite the ones that we already know that are on our side, and they’ll help us.
4. Organize a party to gather around as many broadcasting stations as you can without spreading yourselves too thin (You’ll find them in the phonebook under, “Radio stations and broadcasting companies” or “Television stations”). Do not call them and let them know that you are coming; surprise them in this way, and remember more and more people are coming to the party, so have many copies of this handbook to give to the broadcasting stations and to the people who come up to you to ask questions, or send them to web sites that your are developing: Have people in different cars drive by the station(s) and honk their horns and wave white flags out the windows as they drive by to make your party look bigger than it is. Your group will have at least one cell phone with you, and you’ll always be in contact with each other so no more than one “Drive-by” for every five minutes, or so, happens. Those that drive by one station are to make a tour of all the other radio stations in your big cities that we gather around and do the same thing as we grow and spread our movement throughout the land.
5. If you have a “Public Broadcasting Station” near you, they should be one of the first that we start with, because there’s a good chance that they’ll start broadcasting for us immediately. The next station should be the ones that teenagers listen to and the alternatives, and the next should be the big ones if you have any in your city; if you don’t, don’t worry, we’ll have a big party gathering around the big ones soon enough; ABC, CBS, NBC, ect. They will eventually cooperate with us, because if they don’t we will all know, because of our word-to-mouth broadcasting system.
6. Our job is to attract attention, so the general public comes up and asks questions, make sure you have answers, a copy of this booklet to give to them, or a website address to send them to. They’ll be back in a few hours or the next day with more copies to give back as they join the party after they read the handbook. When all of the broadcasting stations are surrounded in your city as we are growing fast now, and more and more people are coming to the circle, then spread out to other places of your cities where cars are channeled; like over-passes on highways, so those who drive by can see many white flags waving. The more people that come out, the more we spread out to advertise.
7. People are going to have a hard time sleeping through all the excitement, so teenagers are to take the time off from school once this party starts, but parents are to go back to work and spread this throughout their workplaces. (You’ll see why in the pages to follow, as you read on)
8. For those of you in San Francisco, organize a march on both sides of the Golden Gate Bridge as soon as possible (there are people committing suicide, because they haven’t heard about the Shift yet). The Brooklyn Bridge needs marches too, and the White House lawn in Washington D.C. shall have a big party on that lawn. The police of all cities are to cooperate with us to make sure everyone is safe and traffic flows smoothly, and we might need to cooperate with them to limit the amount of people who come out to party. Those who are on the White House lawn are to hand-deliver a copy of this to the security officers there, so you know that the President got it.
9. The first 420 party starts the countdown to oneness; it means that we have grown and are continuing to grow quickly. It means that you are in communication and talking with other teens all over the map of the world about what is going on, as they’ll be doing the same thing in their cities. The excitement will generate more energy, and while you are organizing your party, others in the country are building their circle, too. Eventually you’ll know about each other, and that should really excite everyone, as we merge our circles into one.
10. The broadcasting systems will engage with us, as they become one with us, and the size of our circle, along with the numbers of people that continue to join will multiply quickly and that number will be updated frequently and broadcasted by them, and we’ll all know that we are in control of the mass minds of the people (ourselves) instead of the empires being in control of us through mainstream media.
11. Trading of the stock market is to shut down throughout the truce; otherwise the rich fools will panic and crash it, to cause more panic of the people. Don’t panic; we know that some are very scared, be happy now, and know that we are in control. They may want us to panic, so we’ll look to them to fix everything. They aren’t our leaders anymore. We are going to fix everything because we can now; don’t worry, be happy; will figure it all out.
12. The first 420 party starts the 420 party forever; starts the world wide truce forever; starts the family reunion forever; Shifts the world forever. This can happen in one day, if we move carefully and stay focused, but it might take a few days! Don’t get ahead of yourself; make sure you have 100 teenagers in your circle who are continuing to tell others, before you go public.
13. Thank you teenagers and welcome home, and now you have proven yourselves worthy to be considered adults which you are now. You are free to marry by God or on your own accord. Congratulations, and happy New Year’s forever and ever. Today is a NEW DAY!
14. Ladies and gentleman, start your circles
a. Outcome for Teens of the Entire World: Freedom.
After reading this book, you will have all the knowledge it takes to be a peaceful warrior (journeyman) for freedom by Truth, understanding, forgiving, and conscious social change by focused cooperation of the working class (basically all the people of the world shall see the Light).
You’ll be a rebel against the Empire. Definition of rebel: Stand against authority. That doesn’t mean using violence… ever. In this case, we won’t actually be standing against authority once we have built the bridges between the workers and the emperors. The teenager’s job is an easy one: You’ll stay in school for starters, but you are sick of going to work for the empire without being paid for the work you do in school, and you’ll start talking while building our underground communication system, “Jah Grapevine;” or “The Circle.” This basically means that you are going to talk to the people you are closest, and your circle will have to have at least one expert at the communication system, and it’s so simple to learn, that even a bright child could learn it. WE need you now to go to work, and play. Your parents will support you… sooner or later, as they’ll read and understand what’s happening now; you are asked to give them a copy of this after you read it and take action.
First off; I’d like to say that I wish I had learned a lot more about life before I became completely brainwashed and graduated public high school (United States’ governmental school for adults of ages 14-18?) And that’s the main reason as to why I’ve written this handbook, because high school is simply a big baby-sitter for the Corporate Machine to keep us, and form us into being brainwashed children for the rest of our lives. I’m not really talking about the actual schools doing the forming as much as I’m talking about the time frame; the teenage years. It’s a time where we are all mature enough to be adults, but aren’t allowed to do so; instead, we are made to just be children and keep the immature habits of children, and ignore the idea of being adults… or free.
Teenage years are truly hellish in the U.S. We have a big problem in our country: There are too many bored and unhappy teenagers that are sick with an acquired attention deficit handicap that was brought on by modern technology, and there is a clash that goes on between them and their parents, because they are made to live with them too long. What’s worse is that this has been going on for so long that it’s now considered “Normal,” and accepted to the point where we just keep doing it. The problem is that we don’t allow teens to grow up. Laws make parents financially ensued for the actions of their unhappy teen, so they are forced to control their young women and men too much, and make them stay children until they are 18 years old, and when people (in general) are controlled too much they are naturally going to rebel or become defiant; especially now that the truth is told.
Do you think that you are a child? How old are you? Do you know enough to look both ways before you cross the street? Or does someone need to hold your hand? At twelve years old, is a person old enough to know right from wrong, and learn from their own mistakes; to go out on their own… a Journeyman? (Journeywoman)
Going back in history we find that Jesus started learning on his own at twelve years old. Is there a spiritual message for us to learn from here? Gandhi; the spiritual leader of India, was married back in the 1800s when he and his bride were both 12 years old (do the research yourself, if you don’t believe me; it’s in the movie, “Gandhi,” with Ben Kingsley and Candice Bergman). Today, we can still find ‘’Native’’ people on this planet, who go through a ‘’Rite of Passage’’ ceremony at puberty, and are considered men and women who are free to marry, and then they are expected to be contributors to the tribe, or response-able, as they were already taught to be adults by the time they were 12 (The true meaning of “Responsible” is not of a controlling stand; it’s that of offering your services, because you can; you are able-to-respond). And in the animal world, we see that once an animal matures to where they are able to reproduce, they do it immediately because they have been prepared for it. God would not give us a body that is fully capable of reproducing without a brain that is fully capable of handling it, would he? (Whatever you envision God to be)
How many parents over the age of 18 make mistakes on a daily basis anyway? How many parents are not emotionally ready to be adults at age 30, 40, or 50 years old? How many live in fear? Too many. Many of us are self medicating with anti-depressant/anti-anxiety drugs, alcohol, Marijuana, tobacco and other “Pacifiers” to help us cope with life in the United States. Why, then, are we having to wait until we are 18 years old in the U.S. before we go from being a child, one day, to an adult the next? I’ll answer that question later. The reason for the question is to show you how absurd our society treats teenagers. We are fully capable at learning from our mistakes by age 12 and we are capable of just about anything that older ‘’Adults’’ can do,
For instance; how hard do you think it is for adults in the U.S. to move into a house? You fill out some kind of application; it’s simple English. You call the electric company to hook up, again; simple English... the phone company… the garbage company… water, sewer, etc. They make this stuff so easy now that it’s idiot proof, because they want our business (money). All we had to do is have money, and an income. Now look at all the people who drive automobiles, and you can see that a 12 year old can learn to drive a car, it just takes a little practice.
Oh, there’s more... Most jobs that adults do in the US are completely idiot proof nowadays. Over the years of companies having to maximize profits, and pay for employees’ accidents and injuries, has caused most jobs in the U.S. to be so safe to do now that, yes, even children can do them easily. So why, then, are teenagers still considered to be just children?
It’s all about money.
Not preparing you for adulthood by age 12, and keeping you believing that you are a child means that you’ll act like a child. If you see something in the store that you like, means that you want it. You don’t care where the money comes from to buy it, that’s your parent’s problem. Your parents love you (most of them) and want you to maintain a certain level of happiness, so they consider buying it for you. The next time you go in the store it starts all over again. Now multiply that by the 70 (or so) Million children and teenagers in our country and we’re talking about a lot of money that keeps the economy and the rich people happy. It’s called “Cash flow.” Think about it some more: In stores, notice how they put the candy at eye level for children by the checkout; it’s so when we are forced to stand there and wait, the kids have something to want. They put the candy there for a reason; temptation. They don’t care about anything else. They don’t care how hard it may be for the stressed out parents who have to stand there and wait with their children staring at the candy (Yes, people of the world; the growing group of “Lower Class” people in the United States have to stand and wait in long lines, too.)
Let’s go a step further with another example: Teens are not allowed to have the sex that they want (it’s not illegal, it’s against the imaginary desired morals of the controlling religious fanatics and/or the Corporate Machine; therefore, casting shame on those who do, or want to do what is natural) and what’s worse is that teens, along with most everyone else in our culture are afraid to be seen exchanging affection with others (it’s another “Shame” cast upon us to control us) while affection has been proven to be a major need of human beings, and it doesn’t cost anything. Teens are starving for affection, sex, and most of all; freedom! And since they can’t get what they need, they’ll settle for a “Pacifier.” And usually that pacifier costs money; like excessive food, candy, soda pop, toys, computer games, TV, clothes, cars, drugs, etc. Get the picture?
We are being trained. We are made to stay children for five or six more years, so we’ll acquire a habit of being selfish. When you are starving for one thing; like freedom, sex, affection, or just attention; you can’t help but be selfish, and buy stuff to try to make you happy, while you forget what it is that you really want; like, FREEDOM. It’s a brainwashing so the rich can get richer off of the people whose minds are controlled. Are you starting to see it yet? Stop and think about it …it’s big and it’s heavy. And it doesn’t stop once people turn 18 years old.
There’s more: School; 13 years of brainwashing ought to do it. The main job of a teacher is to take control of the class; one person controlling 20-50 students. The teacher is standing while the children are sitting. The children are made to listen, learn, and not question whether or not what they are learning is true or not. (Columbus, for example, couldn’t have discovered America;
America was already here and there were humans already here, but we were taught the lie by our own government that perpetuates racism and segregation of our human tribe).
They start us getting into a habit of submitting ourselves, as a mass of people, to a dominant source; by allowing ourselves (as a group) to be trained for 13 years to sit and be controlled by one person, and not really being happy, sets us up for the rest of our lives to maintain the habit of sitting and being controlled, and not really ever knowing happiness. It causes us (the working class people) to allow the empires to pass laws against the people, and for the benefit of the rich; while the people, who are kept too busy working, just sit and watch like it is all one big confusing TV show, and the confusion on our part causes the delay on our part to change the world.
Once you graduate High School, you get congratulated for a job well done, but you never wanted to do the job anyway, and at graduation is where the post-hypnotic suggestion gets “Locked-in” to the minds of the masses. You are happy you are out of school and its summer vacation again, but with the big ceremony as if it is our “Rite-of-passage” into adulthood, they’ll have you believe that you are happy for graduating and doing all that work for them for free! Therefore, you completely forget about all the work and training you went through over the last 13 years, and you forget about the people that are now going through it, because you are 18 and hungry for the freedom you now have, but should have had it at 12, but now you’ve become so selfish that you can only look forward for whatever is in the future for you; instead of being in the habit of enjoying “Now.” But what you don’t realize is that you have been trained to obey and programmed to get out of bed to an alarm clock and go to work for a boss. You have been trained to live a life of mental slavery, as everyone who goes to work gives up all of their freedom to a boss for 8 hours a day; plus travel and preparation time.
Many older people of the U.S. have this very heavy and, perhaps, subconscious belief that it’s simply “Un-American” to protest anything. It’s partially motivated by denial; they don’t have the time to care, because they are too busy working all the time (And selfish, and tired). They see, on the news, where protesters are protesting something and they immediately make fun of them without even knowing why they are protesting; even when the protestors are protesting for us. Oh, this is very common; it’s called ignorance; too tired, too selfish, too busy, so they ignore any reason to get involved to the point where they use denial (lying to themselves) and push the idea away; they go in the wrong direction.
Sex starvation is sexual abuse. Making adults at age 12 refrain from having sex until 18 (or older) causes us to want it more; so much so, that our human bodies start starving for it to the point where we make a big deal about it. It’s just sex that everyone over the age of 12 (puberty) has a God given right to (as long as they are married, according to some religious circles)! But with starvation, comes selfishness; therefore, if you look at the big pool of sex-starved people in the United States, you can see (Statistically) that many people that have been sexually violated in this way, and tempted with sexual commercialism (everyone in the US) are going to violate others, because of this starvation that perpetuates selfishness.
(Figure) If we take a long look at the big picture, we see a pool of people that are told that they can’t have sex until they are married, but realistically many teenagers defy the system, and have sex in secret. Still, many don’t get that chance. In this big pool of people, there are many who don’t desire sex as bad as others, so they’ll conform, and wait until they are married. In the middle of this pool many finally get a chance to break away from their parent’s watch and secretly have sex with a partner before marriage, but some have been influenced by dysfunctional habits to desire sex even before puberty. In the United States, sex is made-out to be a big deal, because of this starvation for it. Sexy people are broadcasted on TV, and used to sell stuff in hopes that those who are starving for sex will sit and watch a sexy person advertise something. To sit and watch sexy people makes you even want sex more; especially, if you already were starving for sex to begin with; it’s a vicious circle. The biggest problem with our pool of sex starved people is, of course, those who have become so sick with desire and try to trick by deception a child or young adult into doing it against their will. Of course, our pool of sexually starved, and abused people will always produce a few that do worse things to people, until we stop starving people for years from having it, and stop tempting with sexual commercialism and allow people to marry at puberty, as God has given us free will to do. There shall be no law, or economic situation that keeps people from marrying at age 12.
Going back to the tribal thinking, people get married at age 12, and have sex immediately, unless they have a Holy plan for their life. They aren’t waiting for years, they aren’t starving for it; therefore, they don’t make a big deal out of it, and the abuse is minimal, but they may have a big hurdle in the other ways if they don’t just stick to the same partner; sexual diseases. Perhaps, some are too free with their sex, but if you live in a world where everyone appears to be suffering and working too much and the only thing that you have for fun is sex; even though sex doesn’t make people happy, it just gives them a temporary “Relief” like doing drugs, or drinking or any of the other pacifiers; then you may do it to the point where it is health threatening; especially if sex is your only pacifier.
Sex isn’t as fun as everyone makes it out to be because of this; it’s not true joy, and happiness… it’s just a temporary relief; like all the other pacifiers. Sex doesn’t make you happy… except for five minutes of the day (ha ha ha). Sex is not what we really want and the proof of that is this; we want someone else to be with us when we are having sex, when we as humans can have sex alone. You see it’s more than just the sex that we want; we want the affection that comes with it. Spend all the time you want thinking about sex and you’ll get more and more unhappy, but many can’t help it now.
Homosexuality: Let’s use an example. At this time in the history of the United States as I stated before, young men are teaching young men what women want, and young women are teaching other young women what men like. Does anyone besides me see a problem with this? There’s an awful lot of sex talk and sex influence within immature young men. We have the internet and we can all access the dirty advertisements that come upon the screen called, “Porn.” Just these advertisements fool people, and cause them to see things that are very deceiving. There’s a big fear out there amongst a lot of men in the name of shame. The fear for many is that their penis is not big enough to make women happy, as if size matters. Size only matters to the Harlot, or whore. But don’t let me insult you if you are a loving wife to a man that has a big one.
When a woman loves a man and marries him for him, and he has a big painful penis, out of love she’ll try to accommodate him and try to enjoy his painful penis. As time goes on through their marriage, she’ll get used to it, and as more time goes on, she’ll learn to like it. But if she get’s divorced, and then marries a man with a normal size penis, it starts all over again; out of love she’ll accommodate him, too. The key here is to make sure that the person that you are marrying is the one that will stay with you for the rest of your life, because you are marrying for love.
Now take a young man that is worried about the size of his thing and has been fanaticizing about the perfect sex partner for years, and he frequently satisfies himself while watching porn on the internet. No one can sexually satisfy you better then you, so he is getting used to satisfying himself, and he is getting use to fanaticizing about the perfect sex partner. And while staring at porn, he sees the size of the big star’s penis that is magnified by the camera; which tends to cause him to feel inferior. After years of this, and the fact that sex with a women is made out to be a big deal, he finally tricks a young women into having sex with him, but not out of love; out of desire.
Some men get very nervous on the first time with a woman and find that their penis doesn’t get erect, due to the fact that he is nervous, and the fact that he satisfies himself too much, and the fact the young woman that he’s with doesn’t know what to do; like the partner in his fantasies. What can happen is nothing. If it doesn’t get erect in front of her, and he starts worrying more and more, it just won’t happen in some cases. And he’ll feel very ashamed and humiliated; especially, if he thinks that she’ll tell others of the experience.
Some time again he’ll try it again with another woman and the same thing happens. What may be going on in this young man’s mind is very agonizing if he doesn’t know what’s happening to him. He’ll eventually say to himself, “Why won’t it get up when I’m with a woman… Oh no! Does that mean that I’m gay?” He’ll have no one to talk this over with, as the shame of the whole ordeal is very private, so he’s going alone with his own mind to find happiness. Years could go by before he ever tries it again with a woman as he’ll become so afraid that he’ll humiliate himself again and again, because he doesn’t know what’s going on, as he continues to satisfy himself. Depression and thoughts of suicide may start to come to his mind. In many cases he’ll try to look at a man as a possible sex partner, but the thought of having sex with another man is about as appealing as eating a live tarantula spider.
He’s got an awful lot of inner turmoil going on that’s tearing him up inside. Then add to his problems the other pacifiers that we are taught to reach for when we are depressed, and there’s a big chance that he’ll start drinking excessively and doing drugs to help him deal with the agony, and forget about his secret problem.
If he didn’t desire sex as much, and he went after women with the thought of finding a loving wife, then he wouldn’t be pressured so much in his own mind, but as I said before, this society makes sex a very big deal that it has too many of us very sick.
Let’s throw something else into the equation. One morning he wakes up and discovered that he just had a homosexual nightmare! More agony and fear set’s in, and he starts wondering if he really is gay. He really is a human with some real problems that are sex related. Now add to the equation that his parents got divorced when he was a fragile child, and he really misses his father. He misses a man in his life. That adds more weight to the homosexuality scale here.
This would explain why a lot of people believe they were born gay, but still I don’t want to offend those who stand on their beliefs and have labeled themselves gay, and there’s a little more discussion on this subject; later. The only label I’ll give them is human, and this was just one example of the many different variables of potential problems that go on between the two genders, because of all of the dysfunction and shame that is prevailing in our world.
This shift must encompass the whole world, and the world must be educated about the strong sicknesses that come from having too much sex, as well as starving for sex with the temptation always in their faces that causes near-sightedness for it; the desire to always want sex on their minds.
More sexual abuse. As children in the United States go to public school, there’s a big division that happens. Boys are separated from girls, by having different things to do, and not allowing them to share the bathrooms is a big divider amongst the sexes. The Empire doesn’t want the boys to engage in activities with girls, and visa versa. It’s designed to make sure that tough, mean men are continually being produced, so they can become soldiers for the military, and easily manipulated to want to kill. Example: If boys start hanging out with girls enough, they’ll actually acquire connections to their feelings, but the definition of “Tough” is ignoring your feelings, and the feelings of others to exist. That’s a hell of a way to live; don’t you think? But that’s exactly what’s been going on, and on purpose. Because the bottom line of every empire, is its food supply and military. That’s why the United States still has a strong military. WE continue to produce tough, angry (sex starved) and mean young men to join the military and enough food to feed many other countries; that’s not saying that every man who joins the military is this way; just the leaders.
Add to that is the fact that every television show is based on a short story. The short story always has a conflict; therefore, our subconscious minds are used to, or ready for, a conflict. Disney’s Beauty and the Beast cartoon shows children a violent conflict that ends in the “Bad guy” getting killed, and then everyone lives happily ever after. We are fed these things by the Empire through Hollywood, along with all the other violent shows that we have become bombarded with that subconsciously promote violent conflict; therefore, bringing our children closer to becoming murderers for the military. The “Cowboy” characters that John Wayne and Clint Eastwood acted as murdered without conscience to get through their conflicts in all their movies. Add to that the attention deficit that’s brought on by all the fast-paced computer and video games that are mostly violence related, so our young men then become so different from women, scattered by ADD, and influenced to be violent from cartoons to football that when they graduate high school, many of them are very lost; both socially and while mentally handicapped with ADD to the point where they think that they need someone to push them through life, so they join the military to get out of the “Hole” they are in, and become perfect soldiers who do what they are told, because they couldn’t direct themselves to happiness. Where do most of these soldiers come from? The lower class of the US; why?
Rich people have more time to give one-on-one Love to their children, and organize and plan ahead. The lower class parents have to work all the time, so they just throw pacifiers at their children for all their childhood; mostly the pacifiers are fast-paced cartoons that promote ADD. It’s not fair to the lower classes! An ADD cartoon, as well as commercials every 15 minutes is the killer to those who want to raise children to be focused, and have will power. Everyone under this empire system has ADD from one degree to another, because of the TV.
ADD is the product of electronic entertainment; nothing is nearly as exciting to a young mind then fast-paced cartoons. That’s one reason why many keep their children involved in other things, but the lower class workers, have more hurdles then those who were born from an upper class womb, and they’ll always be challenged with life more until we get on the same page, as far as providing all children with healthier lifestyles; therefore, many parents of the lower classes allow their children to stare at the television more.
As these children watch the television they are taught more shame by over-dramatic reality type cartoons. Shame is known as a “Demon” by Author and Psychologist, John Bradshaw. Shame is a prison to those under the Empire, as all of us are always worried about what others (peers) see, or hear of things that we say and do from one degree to another, and most in the public schools are controlled all of the time by the unwritten laws of shame. Shame causes us to hesitate to act or speak until we know what we say and do will be accepted by the others.
Here’s a compare and contrast story of shame: Tribal elders, shamans, witch doctors, priests, etc. have brought therapies to the tribes for thousands of years to bring simple happiness to their people. When a child of a tribe (the happy tribe) gets hurt and starts crying, all the other children around go over to the crying child in a big hug circle and start crying with the child until they all start laughing. This practice helps the children feel “at one with all.” Therefore, not singled out as inferior for having feelings or being different, and helps the whole tribe to know that there is no shame within, and to always have the feeling that they are loved by the whole tribe. Therefore, with these types of practices to promote oneness with the whole tribe throughout a child’s (and adults) life, they grow up never feeling alone inside or segregated from the group; they are mentally freer and they walk through life with confidence and joy.
But in the United States; however, when boys are playing together; like Baseball and a boy gets hurt and starts crying, some bully or older brother will make fun of him in front of everyone else, and call him a “Pussy.” Put yourself in the little boy’s position, and you can see where he would feel alone; especially, now that the bully is in control of all the other boys, and they are afraid to go and see if the hurt child is alright, so they all just watch him cry until he gets over it; which he never does; ever. Now think about all the other boys. Now they are controlled by shame, they can’t cry now if they get hurt, or else someone will point fingers, single them out and make fun of them, so they all have to become tougher (Tough: ignoring your feelings and the feelings of others). Under the empire, as I stated before, we are subconsciously trained to follow the dominant source, so this is the reason why the biggest bully leads the pack, but in the happy tribe there is no bully; those who try get ignored, and are controlled by the group. Those who try to attract more attention to him/her self get ignored unless what they are doing is giving or entertaining for the others.
Shame is everywhere under the Empire. Watch the cartoons that your children are watching and you’ll see it all over; teaching your children to be controlled by an imaginary force; being made fun of. In the United States, young women in high schools shame each other by criticizing their appearances only, even if their criticisms are positive, because everyone knows that they are being judged all the time. Both sexes are shamed into not engaging in affection towards each other by their own peers. It’s called “Public display of affection,” but really they aren’t giving each other affection for display, they are just engaging in what is natural, and shouldn’t feel the need to hide it. If we feel that we can’t kiss each other at anytime we want, because of this imaginary shame, then we are not free.
This segregation causes us to be real weak. We feel alone, so we do whatever we think our peers, parents, bosses, etc. think we should do. When I was 12 years old, I felt that I wasn’t “Cool” (to my peers) unless I had sex with a woman. I wasn’t cool if I wore clothes that my mother bought for me to wear; I wasn’t cool if I didn’t drink, or smoke pot; I wasn’t cool if I wasn’t tough and mean; I wasn’t cool if I hung out with girls; I wasn’t cool unless I was crazy. Shame makes us all play “Follow the leader” and only do what we think our peers would want us to do.
Here’s something that just happened after the 9/11 incident. We were told that it had something to do with Iraq, and the president wants revenge (he called it Justice, but Justice isn’t revenge, Justice is equality for all). So he told us that we are going to war with Iraq after they got us all believing that the attack was from Iraq (the Taliban?). To build his military for the war he had the economy lowered. Lowering the economy means that every business had to cut back in order to make their profits; which meant jobs were harder to find; which meant jobs for lower class teenagers were harder to find; therefore, it was a way to get more starving (for happiness, freedom) young men to join the military; especially, when the president had funding cut for welfare programs of the lower class. We all suffered, so the president can get what he wants, instead of what we want. All this time that we are in Iraq, we are being distracted by our own mainstream media empires from the suffering children in all other parts of the world; especially, Africa.
Protect yourself and your friends: stay in groups and police yourselves.
You must be kind to everyone; yes, I mean your parents, too. In a short while, you can become more mature than they are, and don’t lower yourself to their level, rise above that old routine, be as kind, and as understanding and as selfless as you can. Unselfishness is the road to maturity.
Remember, this is a world wide, “Time-out” or “Let’s all stop and think about things for a minute” attitude; a truce. This is not a time for family feuding. Don’t bother telling your parents to not talk to you like you are a child anymore, just let the world warm-up to the ideas while you talk about this stuff with your friends. Your parents have simply been more brainwashed then you were, because they have been playing follow-the-leader longer. We are all changing together, so just be happy while we move through this process.
Be kind to those kids who get the good grades, we’ll need them on our side later, because the changes that we are making now, may or may not happen over night (it has already been taking over two thousand years that I know of; yeah, Jesus was tortured to death and put on public display as an example of what happens to people who defy the Empire) and as I write this, I don’t know what the outcome will be, or how long it is going to take; that will be decided by how well we cooperate together. The kids that get the good grades will become, doctors, teachers, etc. for us. Most of all, be kind to everyone and help anyone who asks for help.
Don’t stick to the same old habits as before; don’t shame people for being human and trying too hard to be accepted; trying too hard to “Fit in;” just know that you are already “In” because you are a human, and so are they. You are in; therefore, you don’t have to prove yourself to anyone for any reason. Everyone can be selfish (We seem to have a license to be selfish in the U.S.). Anyone can be mean, tough, bad, and cold. Anyone can be violent. Anyone can pull a trigger on a gun, but it takes real power to not be violent. The real challenge is to not be selfish. It takes giving; giving out energy, not sucking it out of people. Give it out; it will come back to you some day. Think of yourself as a star. You “Shine” on others; giving them energy. It helps them to shine back to you; giving you energy. You are a star; please do your job the best that you can…Shine!
If you decide to free-up and start having sex, be careful and I’d advise that your partners be your age, because there will be those dirty old men who are always looking for a young “Thing” to get alone with, and the older these sick men are, the more chances they have had to acquire sexual diseases. Make friends first. You can get married without the law of the land keeping you from it. You may marry now, and you don’t need someone who is legally responsible as long as you are being married by God; all you need is a witness, but check with your religious circles before you just believe me.
Know the people in your circles; some kids are more independent than others… the strong people are here to protect the weaker ones… weak at one thing, usually means; strong at another … a group of people are stronger, together, than all the individuals added up. Come together and make your groups bigger. Be safe, smart, and selfless; stay in groups to protect yourselves from the predators; yesterday’s victims of the empire system.
Parents follow
High parents,
It didn’t matter if we graduated High School or not, we have all discovered that we are practicing the action of “Blind Obedience.” Basically doing what everyone else is doing until we die. We didn’t think that we have the power to actually turn this planet into heaven on Earth, or that we can do anything to stop corporate control, mostly because we are too busy working and raising our children to ever have time to figure out what to do, so we just trod along with the same old daily routine and never step back to look at the big picture. In that sense we are blind, and simply working, paying taxes, and spending money on other goods and services is exactly what this empire wants us to do; therefore, we are obedient.
By doing this and working to get our children to do the same is causing the perpetual motion of the empire to continue to roll along. We are waisting our lives within their system, or we are letting them kill us slowly; we have not really lived, until now. Now is what we are living for.
Since we have been doing this longer then our teens, then we can say that we are mentally “Locked-in” more then them. We are brainwashed to make our children do the same things that we are doing, so they can compete against each other for a living. We have family problems all over the country, but no one looks at the fact that work is what gets in the way of family. Work keeps us from visiting with our relatives, and simply spending more time with our friends and neighbors. We now can slow down and relax, because we are going to all take a nice long break soon. Just follow OUR teenagers lead and you’ll be headed in the correct direction. Stand behind them, and that’s all you’ll have to do, and thanks to many parents who have endured many struggles to make it this far; stay alive, you won’t want to miss this.
The Positives of the Empire System
With our double edged swords of Truth, we cut a hole big enough in the Achilles tendon of Goliath for us all to crawl up inside of the giant, and take control of his body.
We are in a world wide truce as we spread this booklet all over the world to inform every violent rebel against the empire systems that encroach on their lands that we now understand where they are coming from. This is an attempt to reason with them enough, so that they’ll put their plans of violent retaliation on hold. We, the people of the world, are asking for their cooperation and asking them to come home, as we are taking control of the world for all of the people to share equally. To help them believe us, we must now order our presidents to either step down and let the people of peace have a chance, or we’ll do it without them, but that would take a little longer, and that would cause more people to die, so it would be best if all the presidents, and all the business men that call themselves, “The United Nations,” come home to the people, and cooperate 100% now! In order to get them to help the violent rebels believe us, we must start making arrangements immediately to seek, find, feed, shelter, and heal (health care) all of the people on Earth who need it now, because we can do it now with the aid of all of the empires’ military aircrafts and other vessels, and all the other vessels of the world that we can safely use. We can save the world from ever suffering again in less than seven days if we all cooperate together at the same time. We will have all of the volunteers that we will need; the Rainbow warriors. The violent rebels shall see that this is happening in their countries that are suffering from the invasions of the empires, as they’ll see that the same empires that were against them are now converted, and are actually living in Truth and bringing the Truth to them with white surrender flags.
Money is no object; we are all going to work today whether or not we get paid tomorrow.
For the Americans, do you remember 9/11? When the towers were hit what did mainstream media do? In less than two hours, the entire world was informed of what happened (except for the tribes who don’t have television, radio, internet, phones, etc.). All of the regularly schedule broadcasts were put on hold to bring the news immediately to the people. The news was translated to all the other languages in less than two hours! Goliath has given us that, that’s why we are going after all of the broadcasting stations of the world. In less then two hours, the world can be seeing purple, together! We’ll all be on the same page, together.
Where were you during 9/11? You were probably at work, or school, but still you got the news because people spread it like wildfire in a strong wind. We, together, are the wind!
Parents Follow
O.K. parents, do you remember the “Good old’ days?” Neither do I. We have become very anti-social. Our parents, who were brought up through the great depression; where most women didn’t work, but the men had to work 16 hours a day, and they came home and drank to forget how miserable they were. Well, mothers were home and they watched the neighborhoods, and talked with other mothers and took care of each others’ children more than today. Neighbors would come over to borrow a cup of sugar, and then they would come back with a plate of cookies for the whole family, and sit down and visit with each other more than today, and they would have each other over for dinner, and playing cards, etc. Instead of one person working 16 hours, now two parents are working eight.
We are in a silent depression, and it doesn’t look like it’s going to get any better, as prices for everything seem to just keep going up; causing our dreams to get farther away from our grasp. The world needs to make some big huge radical changes for us to ever get out from under this ebb and flow of the economy, and the political tug-of-wars that cause the workers to always have to resort to accepting compromise. I ask you to consider playing this game with us, now.
While your teenagers are dropping out of school throughout this time of truce to become peaceful warriors (that ought to get mainstream’s attention), we are asking you to go back to work, and spread this booklet to everyone that you work with, but remember we want the “Bosses” to be the last to know. The next day, you can talk it over with them, or they’ll call you that same night. Once you started the 420 party with your teens, you’ll go back to work with a white arm band on. We are asking you to wear a white surrender flag while you are at work. If the “Boss” tells you that you can’t wear the flag at work, tell him that it’s a new part of your religion, and that you are promoting the world wide union, but do not take it off! He can’t fire you for trying to start a union, but if he does fire you, say “OK,” and hand him this booklet, and come out to the party. You are now on strike.
But we need to have you back at work, really. Because, you don’t know if your job is indirectly related to raising food, and shipping food, the way we normally do, or you don’t know if your job is indirectly related to the health care industries. Now let me explain. If we are planning to feed the world, it would be easiest for those of us who are trying to organize it as fast as we can, if we can to be able to rely on the way that we have already been bringing food to the world. But if all of a sudden, people in a plastic plant; for example, stop working, then the plastic containers stop coming, and that would cause us to have to scrabble and shuffle other things around, which would slow us down. We can do this in seven days, and then we can go back to our selfish lifestyles as before, but the only difference, is that now we’ll be able to look ourselves in the mirror, and justify our own selfishness, because we know that there is nobody in the world that is starving for their basic human needs. We are going to have our cake, and eat it too.
Spread this throughout your workplaces while maintaining communication with your teenagers, and keeping an ear on the radio stations. And don’t worry; be happy.
Do you want a raise? Together, in one communication circle, we’ll all agree to this before we act: Should we stop paying money for food? Yes we shall, and you just got a raise. Should we all stop paying rent, or house payments for the houses that we are already living in? Yes we shall, and you just got another raise. Should we stop paying for health care, etc. Now, where are we? We don’t have to pay for our basic human needs, then we don’t have to go to work anymore, so most of us will be able to volunteer for just a few hours a month to cooperate together and help the farmers raise the food, the truckers transport the food, the tankers ship the food, etc. The food goes to food distribution places that are already set-up by the empires; groceries stores, so we’ll volunteer at the grocery stores. What about the gasoline that it takes to transport the food… free the same way; volunteers to pump it out of the ground clear through to our vehicles. Now if you think about it, it really doesn’t take that many people to bring our basic human needs right to our homes with today’s modern technology, does it? Tomorrow, things will be even better. Shelter will be the same way, water, electricity; all volunteers. Volunteers, all over the world in one communication circle, will easily align the tasks to be carried out by cooperating.
Goliath has also helped us by getting us used to working all the time; we’ll be so bored, that they’ll be ten times more volunteers than we’ll ever need, so people will be coming around and playing music while we volunteer, or painting artwork where we are cooperating, etc.; Heaven on Earth.
After the Shift, we will have one “Company.” So they’ll be no competition between any industries. If we decide that every family NEEDS an automobile, then we’ll gather the volunteers to produce the steel, and then we’ll build everyone a free automobile for every family. When it breaks, or gets wrecked, we have it towed away, and another one gets delivered to us in its place… no need for auto insurance, no need for health insurance, no need for insurance at all. We are the insurance.
Play this game, and no one will have to go to work, and all the work will get done. We are shifting in such a way, that whatever needs to be changed in the entire world, we’ll do it immediately. We will just keep shifting until we get the world happier and happier. That can only happen if we are all in one communication circle. It starts now. Shift your thinking; “Your” ego to “Our” ego.
Would you be ashamed to go to work with a white flag tied around your arm? Shame is causing the world to be blind, or at least; near-sighted. Think about it.
The gift to beggars: Shame
Think about this new world we have just created. Every circle of one hundred people (that’s twenty five families or twenty five houses in the United States) for example; will have their own restaurant; a food house on every other corner. Instead of every family cooking individually, volunteers will take turns at the restaurants. We won’t need servers; we’ll serve ourselves and the elders and children. We can pick-up our food, or eat it there. We’ll save a lot of energy and we will only have to wash a few big pots and pans, instead of every family organizing their own meals, and clean-up. Think about the restaurants that you have been to; aside from the servers, there isn’t very many people working there at any one time. 24 hours a day, the food house will be open, so anyone can come in and eat at anytime, because we are in community communication. We’ll share the chore to cook for each other, those who don’t want to cook, won’t ever have to, because there’s always other things that the group can do; like house maintenance, childcare, eldercare, tending our gardens, volunteering on a farm, transporting food, etc. The food house can also have the main communication system set in it, so those who are cooperating all night can stay connected to Jah Grapevine, and be ready for emergency situations with a big loud alarm bell that will shriek through the neighborhood if we need to put out a fire, or save someone’s life, etc. The food house can also be the party house for teenagers, after 10:00 PM!
Think about all the beggars in the streets these days. If everything that we need is free, they’ll have no reason to beg. It will be a shame to beg when they can just go to a food house and eat for free, and they’ll always have a home to live in, even if it is just a room, because now they won’t have to pay for shelter. What are we going to do with all those sky-scraper buildings that are now about to be emptied in the big cities, because we won’t need them for high finance anymore? We’ll make homes out of them, and maintain them forever, so we can teach our children the history of the Shift, and show them the big buildings that the empires built with our money. We’ll heal the homeless beggars, and I bet they’ll be motivated to come along, and volunteer for a few hours a month for our one big family.
For right now, these beggars are doing us a favor, and they shouldn’t have to feel the shame that society is putting on them, for the reasons that have been explained in this book, as some people just can’t keep up with the pressures that the empires have placed upon us. The workloads that the empires have put on us, has caused all of our families to suffer. Think about all the divorces, and the families that have split-up because of all the financial pressures imposed upon them. Fathers couldn’t get their lives back together, so they split. Even if they were good fathers, they had to work and try to find a place for their children to visit them, as most children of divorce stay with their mothers. Many fathers couldn’t handle working and trying to be a good father when their children live apart from them, and they had to pay out extra money for child support; which is usually never enough.
I’m a beggar, and a father. I have been hurt on the job, and witnessed the selfishness of the workman’s compensation insurance industry that has teamed up with the empires. I have also been waiting for Social Security to closely look at my situation for over a year now. If I’m in pain, why should I have to work, and try to be a good father, too? I’m speaking for a lot of men who are now living with a lot of shame, because they just couldn’t do it either, but I’d be happy to wash a
few more pots and pans for you while I’m in pain; or help an elder not feel so alone, or help paint a house once in a while, but I can’t; I absolutely can’t work anything near a forty hour week and try to raise a happy child, too. Not under these conditions, so please change the world for us all.
Beggars are God’s wildcards, and are about to be played. As long as there are beggars in the world, the world isn’t fit for any human to be 100% happy. Beggars are here to teach us that there is still something very wrong with the world that we live in. I’m the beggar that’s telling you how to fix it, but if my plan isn’t good enough, together, we’ll adjust it until we have one that does work. Thank you God for helping me see the Light!
Under the empire, children are still trying to live for “Today” and right now, but many are already used to looking forward for more; like, “I can’t wait until Christmas happens.” Teenagers are in the training transition, and are learning to forget about now; they are already waiting for freedom; waiting to really live; waiting for the freedom to drive a car at age 16; waiting for the freedom to be adults at 18; waiting for the freedom to buy alcohol and go to bars (Lonely heart’s clubs) at 21, and the freedom to go to work for money that “Buys” more freedom, as freedom is not free under the empire; it’s very expensive, and cost us the rest of our lives.
Waiting forever to really live is what we are being trained to do, instead of enjoying now. Looking forward to the future becomes a habit that we carry inside of us for the rest of our lives.
We shall remove every empire system from Earth. Everyday will be Christmas for everyone, there will be no more waiting forever for freedom. True freedom shall be the gift that we give each other forever; the gift that keeps on giving.
. A Truth-Based Drug Education
Notice the, “Truth-Based” in the title. Keep in mind that we are attempting to approach issues with a new way of finding the truth in everything, and all I’m doing is giving you a guide, or ideas of how to think for yourself, so you aren’t being deceived by me or anyone else.
In our recent history, the D.A.R.E program for teenage drug education was based on lies and scare tactics that back-fired. We were told that Marijuana was just as bad for you as Heroine by people who were of the empire system. In doing so, this caused a lot more Heroine addicts to arise, because it was now easier for some of the people who tried Marijuana to not be so afraid to try Heroine, since they were taught that the two drugs are the same. This also means that all of the other drugs in between Heroine and Marijuana were easier for them to not be afraid to try. The DARE program hasn’t ever worked, as the rise in Meth is causing too many young beautiful people to ruin their futures forever; just because of this big lie, but it was set-up in such a way, so as the people who didn’t “Just say ‘No!’” were to be the one’s to blame, and feel the shame, and suffer the consequences. We are set-up to believe that our drug problems, are our own faults; when we were taught almost at birth to reach for pacifiers instead of have what we really want or need.
The reason for the lies was to try to deceive the public into eliminating Marijuana as an option for medicating themselves. Coffee, alcohol, tobacco, and marijuana have been the medicine for the working classes for ages. Why is the empire so against the least harmful drug on the planet?
There are a number of reasons. First off, the alcohol industry is in competition with the Marijuana industry. When people use Marijuana more, they use alcohol less. What is the number one killer of all the drugs in the United States, as far as statistics go? Alcohol, when driving, is the number 1 killer, and it’s the only legal drug. Have there been any deaths related to Marijuana and driving an automobile? No; not one, that’s a big difference. Then why are they trying to say that Marijuana is so bad? Money, but not just with competition for money, it goes farther then that. There are pharmaceutical companies that are also in competition against Marijuana over money, but as I said, it goes farther than money.
Marijuana is a drug that doesn’t make you numb and stay the same “Tough” person, like alcohol does to people. People who drink alcohol for all of their lives, never really change. When a person works a hard and long day, and then drinks after work, he forgets how hard he had to work, and he ignores reality. When using Marijuana, you become more aware of how hard life is if you are working all of the time, and if you are being “Bossed” too much. You get tired of living a life for work. The empire doesn’t want “Their” people tired of working, so they continue to promote alcohol, so they’ll keep on working, and ignoring the lifestyle of working until you are too old to work.
Marijuana makes people relax and be lazy, and that can be a good thing, because we are living in some very depressed times now. The working class is tired of seeing the rich get richer, and the poor get poorer. The working class of the United States uses Marijuana a lot; it’s everywhere. Because of its use, it has caused many people to not become as violent and act up because we are so financially pressured all the time. Marijuana helps keep people from becoming violent. Alcohol, on the other hand, can cause people to become extremely violent, due to its numbing capabilities.
Alcohol is promoted in the military. They know that their soldiers are going to drink it, and they know that it helps them stay tough enough to not care about the feelings of the “Enemy” or their families, and tough enough to endure the training, so they let them drink. They want soldiers to have an attitude of toughness, but Marijuana helps people become more sensitive. They don’t want teenagers using Marijuana if it means that they’ll become more sensitive, and not join the military. That’s why all the lies about Marijuana have been promoted by our own government(s). And that’s why everyone can easily get their hands on alcohol. It’s in all of the stores, and I even had a football coach in high school tell the team to drink a beer after practice to help us relax and get the rest we need. He was an ex-military man.
I would rather see my teenage driver be happy enough to not ever feel the need to use anything to make him be happier, but with the statistics the way they are; with alcohol being the number 1 killer of teenage drivers, and with Marijuana being the least harmful of all of the drugs; if he was going to resort to trying, or using; I’d rather he stick with Marijuana.
Having told you some truth about the two drugs, let’s take a look at the others. Draw a horizontal line in the middle of a blank piece of paper. Above the line, make a list of all of the hard drugs that you are aware of that can kill you or cause severe brain damage immediately if you take too much, and overdose. Obviously Heroine should be up there; Cocaine, yeah it stops your heart, Meth, Crack, Crank, Acid (LSD) mixed with Nitrous oxide can really cause some brain damage, and Hard alcohol. There are many more, but you’ll know what they are, before you ever think of trying them (We hope).
Now under the line there is a long list of drugs that cannot kill you if you try them and try too much, but some may cause health problems if you continue to take them frequently over a long period of time. The idea that they can’t kill you if you overdose, is that fact that if you do too much of these drugs, you’ll just get sick and throw-up.
If you drink tea with caffeine in it, what happens? Put tea under the line, coffee, obviously, then there’s tobacco, Marijuana, beer, wine, opium, magic mushrooms, peyote, morning glory seeds, and the list goes on. These are all natural drugs, which means that if you just ate opium from the poppy, and you ate too much, you’d get sick before you would come close to dying, but don’t believe me, because everyone has a different tolerance than others, and you may be allergic to any one of these, which could kill you.
Heroine is made from opium. Heroine is highly concentrated from the opium poppy. The tree or bush that Cocaine comes from could be eaten and you would probably get a little safe high that was the equivalent of drinking a lot of coffee, but if you ate too much, you would get sick and throw-up before you died. But concentrate that drug down to pure chemical and we are not talking “Natural” anymore. So, opium is natural, heroine is not; The Cocaine bush is “Natural,” Cocaine isn’t. Notice that the hard drugs above the line aren’t natural; they are all refined with man’s selfish energy going into them. If you just stick with the “Natural” idea, then you are fairly safe, but what is really “Natural” is learning to not reach for pacifiers to make you happy. Try to find a better way, or a better life than you are living. Try to fix your life, before you look for more pacifiers that may cause you to go in the wrong direction.
We have many people in the United States that are self medicating now with prescription drugs for mental illness. “Mental illness” is being used as a general label of which many different symptoms are happening, but most of the problem that is the underlying force to cause people to lose control of their minds is stress.
There are many fear-based anxieties, depressions, manias, anger issues, obsessions, etc. Many of these problems are only being treated and not cured. People are having to go to work, and provide for their families while they are dealing with their mind’s problems, so instead of taking time-off from working to work on themselves because they are sick; they can’t afford it, so they just treat the symptoms with some kind of “Numbing” chemical, so they can continue to live with the stress that’s killing them; instead of trying to find a cure or heal.
Attention Deficit Disorder is now one of the up-rising mental illnesses amongst children, and as stated before, it’s caused primarily by the faced paced TV. Our minds are racing in different directions so much that it is simply not human to be able to stare at the TV for most of your life without some kind of mental problem. People with ADD almost always have to obsess on a project, or a task, in order to follow it through. Obsession then becomes a habit that causes people to ignore other people, or other projects to do what they want to get done, or else they lose interest in the project, and just drop it, and go onto something else. They are easily distracted, so now doctors are prescribing a light dose of legal Meth to children so they’ll focus and keep up in the classrooms as the highly demanding, “No child left behind” law of the empire system is in effect; instead of teaching the parents the dangers of TV or this fast paced lifestyle with electronic entertainment. The prescription Meth may be causing them to become more dependant on the drug, and may cause problems in the long run; especially if they get older, and start trying the more powerful Meth of the streets. Our biggest problems are working too much, and not being aware of what’s happening to our children.
Stimulants can cause a number of mental health problems that kick you into a higher gear. Meth can cause your mind to race so fast that your body can’t keep up. Meth can cause people who sit and think, to start grinding their teeth to the point that they lose their teeth, and distort their faces, but Meth as well as all the stimulants is very attractive, because we are all suffering from ADD from one degree or another, and the faster-paced our lifestyles become, the more people are going to start reaching for drugs to help them keep up. Some people who do Meth fool the rest of us, because for years they appear to be normal, but their friends try it and immediately start ruining their lives.
Meth can cause you to become very sick in many different ways, because we are putting various types of very toxic chemicals into our bodies, and we don’t know the ill effects of the long term use with the chemicals in our bodies. The threat of exposing myself to highly toxic chemicals that aren’t natural and can cause cancer in your body at a young age would be enough to scare me into not ever trying the stuff, but the biggest problem with these stimulants is addiction.
But there is a strong desire for Meth; why? The body can’t keep up with the mind that’s used to sitting and staring at the constantly changing fast passed electronic entertainment. They want to do things, they want to accomplish their dreams; they want to go here! Go there! Eat this! Eat that! Meet people! Party! Find a sex partner! Go here now! Go there now! Why? Does this sound like the fast-paced computer games that they have been staring at for the last ten years of their lives? How about the fast-paced, action packed movies where the screen just keeps flashing a different scene every minute? Our minds are racing, but our bodies are in the habit of sitting. We want to get up and do things; that’s why Meth is getting more and more desirable. It gets people actually doing things, even though it shortens their lives and fries their brains. Is this not true?
During the Disco era of the mid 1970’s, Cocaine was causing so many people to destroy their lives, and their families, that the Grateful Dead stopped singing “Casey Jones” at all their concerts, so as to not promote the use of it, and everyone knew why, and the followers of the Dead shows respected the teachings; we do take care of ourselves with the Truth.
The DARE program has taught us many positive things as well as the lies they told. Talking out your problems, and becoming aware of peer pressure, and shame were some of the positive parts of the DARE program’s education. But I would like to have a better drug awareness education that was based on the Truth that is made and organized by people who have actually been very experienced with the positives and the negatives of all of the drugs, and legalizing every natural drug that is grown on Earth, so I am calling for a drug awareness circle to form, because this is almost all that I have for you, and I don’t think that it’s enough; what do you think?
Hallucinogens
My body is trembling as I write this, because I know that this is a very touchy subject. I wouldn’t trust the man-made LSD, but that’s just me. Psychedelics expand your mind. It’s like eating from the tree of knowledge that God told Adam and Eve not to eat from, but I feel I must write these words, and that I must be very careful, because the last thing I want to do is lead you astray; especially when we’ve come this far in Truth.
Eating from the tree of knowledge wasn’t what Adam and Eve were supposed to do, but since they did it, and we all have been eating from it ever since, so I’m thinking that we’ll have to eat the entire tree to get to the root of all of our problems. I don’t mean that we all are to start doing drugs; I mean that we all have the knowledge, together, as to the truth of how we are supposed to live.
Many of the meditation circles believe that we are not supposed to think so much, that we are to try to stop all this self talk that goes on in our heads, so we can focus, well I do both; I meditate so I can overcome the ADD that invaded me when I was a child that was parked in front of the TV as my baby-sitter for ten years; so I can focus and try to bring this handbook to you, but I’m addicted to thinking, so my only option is to think it all through.
I know that the spiritual circles of the House for the Seeker are going to read this handbook, so I’m merely presenting them these things that I say about Hallucinogens as a question for them to study. At this point, I believe that I’m either the false prophet of the prophecies, or I’m the Word of God, but this is not for me to decide; it is for you to decide. One thing is for sure, you won’t know who I am until all of the beggars on Earth don’t need to beg anymore, so I won’t be taking advantage of you.
Hallucinogens cause you to become very sensitive and aware in a very short period of time if they are used frequently, so that causes you to change very quickly. The changes that you’ll make can be very hard on you and your family. If these drugs must be tried by you, I would suggest to not use them but once every three to four months. There is a down side to hallucinogens that you must be aware of, as they are very powerful psyche drugs, that can heal people quickly (according to some shaman’s circles) or they can hurt you quickly if they aren’t taken in the correct setting.
What if you decide to eat a bunch of magic mushrooms with a group of shame-based tough guys, while watching a violent movie? (Remember, I said that they make you more sensitive) You will probably have a very bad experience. Add to that the influence of the violent movie times ten! There are many people sitting in prison now who have used psychedelics. But if you are in a setting where everyone around you is very loving, then we could possibly use this drug to heal people with it; especially if we were using the conscious dance (Page ?) with it, as a therapy. We may be able to pull the selfishness, the ignorance, the violence, and the loneliness out of them to help people come home quickly; we may be able to reform prisoners quickly. A good way to be sure that you are in a correct setting is to go out into the forest where no one is around (Just don’t get lost). Take a designated baby-sitter.
I am a human that practices psychedelic shamanism. I prepare a “Sacred space” before I “Journey” and I usually have an intention that I’ll state before I settle into my trip. I bring this to you as an idea of how serious I consider the use of these very powerful drugs. I go to the spirit world to bring back healing for the tribe; that is what a shaman does, but now I don’t need to use the hallucinogens to get there, and I actually never did; I just have God.
Here’s how I set-up my sacred space: First, I’ll clear the space with a prayer to God and his angels for my protection, then I’ll come up with an intention for my journey and state that intention; like, “God, I want to bring the truth to the world for all of the people to learn to love each other and live happily together, now; please guide me, and help me find the right words for this handbook.”
I’m going to the “Spirit world” to bring back healing for the whole world. Next I’ll imagine that my body is lying down on the ground, and I’ll even put a pillow down to represent where my head is going to be laying. I’ll walk around my body in a circle, as I imagine it laying there and I’ll shake a rattle to help me get into a clearer state and ask God to protect my body, then after about four to seven circles, I’ll move in closer and step on my head to represent silencing my ego; silencing the part of “Me,” so I can hear the part of “We.” I’ll walk around my whole body to silence those parts of me that may interfere with our journey, as it is no longer “My” (self) journey; it is now “Our” journey, because I’m doing it for us all. I’ll step on my groin to silence any desires of that area; I’ll step on my throat to silence “My” self talk; I’ll step on my stomach to silence any hunger. Since I have made it this far, I know that a big Shift is needed for the world to change towards unselfishness, so after about four circles of walking on my imaginary body to silence it, I’ll step on my head while I pivot and then go in the other direction.
Now I’m circling “My” heart that is a channel to the center of all hearts, or a channel to God’s heart, as all of us are a spoke in a wheel and where we meet is the center of all humans; God’s heart. As I circle around my heart, I am going to imagine that it is a pool of Holy water, as I’m still silencing my body and mind. I’m going to jump in that pool of Holy water to swim closer to God, but first, I’m going to leave a horse in charge of my body before I go.
If you ever seen people train horses, they will teach them commands while they have the horse run around in a circle. When the horse is running in a circle, he has one ear on the trainer, and one ear on the outside, so he is always wary of his surroundings at all times. I get on the back of my white horse and tell him my intention, and ask him to stay with my body to protect it and to keep an ear on me, so I don’t go so far away that I can’t get back. I’ll lay down now and put my head on the pillow and cover my eyes, so it is dark and quiet. I’ll jump off the back of the white horse and into our heart; the pool of Holy water, and I have left the horse with a perfect landscape to make him happy; my body has become so silent that it’s now a field of fresh grass for the horse to graze on with the pool of Holy water being his watering hole.
As I’m in our heart, I immediately ask for healing of everyone in the world now; which means self included. Now I’m in our journey, as I remember my intention and whatever comes to me; I’ll try to bring it to words for WE; this handbook. I’m in the journey.
Here’s one experience. I see a bunch of dreadlock flower children admiring me and looking at me with all acceptance, as I realize that we are all connected. I’m overwhelmed at the love that they are pouring into me, as they exorcise me with the conscious dance. And I realize that deep down inside, all humans of Earth really love each other, and that truth has been taken from us throughout our years of the less-than-positive upbringing of our childhoods.
Here’s another: I ask God for guidance and here’s my intention; “God, I want to see what you see and know what you know, I want to do what you would want me to do, I want to walk unselfishly with you; please guide me. I’m a dirty old white rag hanging on your clothesline; take me off and use me to clean-up a mess; rinse me out with Holy water and use me again; what would you have me do?” As I state my intention, I became a big eyeball that was looking at God’s eyeball and I moved closer, so my eye was pressing against Gods eye; “I want to see what you see God, I want to blend our pupils together; our eyes are the same color!” Then I look down and I notice that God’s eye has a vein that goes down to his heart that is feeding his eye, and then I notice that there’s another vein that is coming from his heart and feeding my eye. We share the same heart. Then God’s eye became a mirror, and in the mirror, I saw my neighbor, and then I blinked and saw my other neighbor. My neighbors are God; that was my lesson. Then I was released off of his clothesline as a dirty white rag, and as I fell, I became a bright white eagle, and started flying.
This next part is from the Church of Marijuana and Elvis
Marijuana is a healing medicine for the mind, and was put here by God for that reason. God created the Earth, and everything in it. What does it heal society from? Anger and violence. Marijuana relaxes you and if you abuse it, it makes you very lazy to the point that many will ignore their children. We all know this is true, but how are we going to heal all the gang-bangers down in the concrete jungles of all the big cities? How are we going to heal all of the people who are cranked-up and tweeked from Meth and the other stimulants, and the faced-paced computer era? This is the drug from God’s pharmacy. It was put here for that reason, and we know it now.
We are going to come up with a drug education that we’ll all agree on, and at the same time Marijuana is going to be free for us all to grow everywhere. We’ll grow it in our gardens with our tomatoes; we’ll grow it on the side of the road; everywhere. Children under 12 are not to use it; everyone else can, but don’t if you don’t need it. Those who need it, want it; it’s that simple. We know that to come out of selfishness takes steps, so to use Marijuana to help you overcome other addictions that are bad for you; like alcohol, tweek, anger, or violence; this helps, therefore it shall be free, because we have too many violent people in the world that need to abuse Marijuana to make them calm down and be too lazy to be violent. Is this not the truth? We’d rather see people ignoring their children for a little while longer (As long as they are conscious of their actions) and abusing Marijuana, then see them abuse their children and their spouses with anger and violence, as these are steps to helping them come home. Is this not true? What do you care as long as no one is hurting you with it, and believe me when I say this; its fine if you don’t use it, because that leaves more for those who need it. If you don’t use it, then you are being less selfish for the world, and that is a good thing. But don’t ever replace it with alcohol, that’s going backwards. We are moving forward quickly.
The empire people who have bought into the brainwashing will not like this idea, but that’s only because they don’t know the truth. The empire has been trying to manipulate the minds of the masses for years, but we just keep up the fight, because we know the truth; it’s that simple. Mainstream media is now making a point to tell us through the news every time that someone gets arrested for an offense; things like, “this guy robbed a bank and he had Marijuana on him.” “These people got arrested for cooking Meth, and they also had Marijuana on them.” “This guy stole a car, and he had Marijuana on him.” They are continuing to try to make Marijuana look bad always. Of course they had Marijuana on them; it’s everywhere, and these people who are robbing banks, or committing other crimes are suffering people who use the drug to help them deal with life, but they are trying to get us to believe that Marijuana leads to violence when it’s the other way around, but there are some snags to what I just said that you need to be aware.
If you are abusing Marijuana daily, and you suddenly get cut off, you can get a little edgy for the next week; depending on your personality; like if you drank too much the night before, but aren’t really hung over, just irritable, so there is a down side. If you are a depressed person, and life just looks like it’s not going to get any better, you can find yourself getting more depressed if you abuse it, too. Watch your moods; don’t ignore yourself.
Remember that I said the most defiant teenagers are going to start this shift? Here’s what to do if you live in a city that has an area that is mostly all African Americans; the Hood. We are trying to bridge a big gap here between “Blacks and Whites” I don’t like labeling humans, but it’s easier than saying, “ those who are of the skin colors that were once known as ‘Blacks’ and ‘Whites.’” This is a touchy subject. We have a big gap to bridge, and it would be easier if both sides try to help from their side. Get together with your friends and pool some money together; 100 teens put $1.00 each into this and you can buy a quarter of weed and some gasoline for your trip to the Hood. Take copies of this handbook, and the bag of weed and when you see some teens, ask them if they smoke weed; say, “Can I buy your love?” Ha ha ha, or say whatever you want. Give them the copies, and give them the bag of weed. They’ll look at you as if you are crazy and with curiosity, and tell them what it’s all about, so hopefully they’ll read it, and take it from there. If you can burn a copy of some Bob Marley music, give them a CD or two. Uncle Bob helps pull the violence out of people; he was the best baby-sitter for my boys when they were going through their “Tough guy” days, because he speaks to people with the truth as he is a Truth Knower.
Whoever grows weed, consider donating some to the ghetto for the same reason. Keep it coming. We are asking these gang-bangers to join us and consider becoming Rainbow warriors, too. They are the most defiant of the empire system, and they are the bravest people on Earth. Think about it, if you had to grow up in their neighborhoods, you’d be too afraid to even go outside. They aren’t, because they want a life; even if that life is always at risk. Give weed especially to those who are wearing or flying a white flag!
What’s next? Eventually, we are going to give the prisoners of the world all the Marijuana that they need, so they’ll be reform-able. Yes, there is to be a “Women of Prisoners Circle” (grandmothers, mothers, wives, sisters, daughters, etc., and men are welcome, too) who are going to investigate and execute the ideal way to reform prisoners to where they’ll be release-able. We are going to release them on a new type of parole early; after we turn this world into a place were no one will need to commit any crime again, because everything will be free.
But until then, we are going to give them the Marijuana so they’ll chill-out and think less negatively.
Those who are the bravest will be volunteering to help with the rescue of all the suffering children in the world. Now think about this; on CNN or on PBS, once in a while, we’ll see a show that shows suffering people in Africa (In between the commercials) but the people that are helping Africans are “White.” Wouldn’t it make them feel better if some people from the rich countries that had the same color skin as them bring the supplies to them, and help them set-up their wells and farms, ect. It will take some brave people to do this. Who would feel braver to do this task than the African Americans from the ghettos? Maybe we’ll have ships full of food, equipment, medical supplies, and with enough Marijuana for the journey?
Let’s go a little closer to the Truth here; President Bush is a racist. How do I know that? I was always influenced to be a racist for too much of my life, and it takes one to know one. I know what it takes to change, and how hard it is to see the reason to change. His actions; and the fact that he lived in Texas, and we saw the cowboy hat as he cut down a tree with a chainsaw in the documentary, “Fahrenheit 911,” has got me believing.
Rich racists are still in power in our government, and they are just sitting back and enjoying the show as they see gang-bangers killing each other, or Africans dying of AIDS and starvation. We have a “Redneck” in the white house that was a descendant of the slave-owners of yesterday. Is this not true? We’re in 2006; how many years ago did Elvis sing the Ghetto song, and still nothing has changed; in fact, things have gotten worse! How come we haven’t moved forward?
Let’s get to the truth. President Bush is not a racist; he is a human, and has the capability to change, just as we are asking prisoners to change. He needs to repent, and lower his ego, and come home. He’s just a man.
Don’t let all this focus on George cause you to think that we need him, or any of the leaders of last night’s nightmare; we’ll do it with or without him, but it would be so much easier if he joins us and helps. Otherwise we’ll have to go through all the steps of defying the system, and taking control that way. We are ready to do both, so as George is thinking about it, we’ll start the long term plans until, or if, he comes home.
Professional sports players
Especially you who are of the people who were once known as the “Black race:”
Help us turn this LIGHT on; please, I’m begging you. Help us and together we’ll send the “White supremacists” under the cupboards like the cockroaches that they are! Help us stuff the beast back in his hole! You can help us in so many ways, get together and discuss this with the other players. Organize and plan to boycott the games by saying that you aren’t playing, because you are mentally ill; you are sick of seeing the people of Africa suffer so much, as well as all over the world, because the rich businessmen of the empires are ignoring them, and you are sick of working for an empire that is using you for their gain while others suffer. You can help us in so many ways that the list goes on forever. Boycott and mainstream can’t help but engage with us, all of us. You got money, and you can hire translators to send this thing all over the world. You can buy servers to put this thing all over the internet. Boycott until they lower the flags of all countries to put a white flag above them. You are free, you’ll be able to walk among us without having people bother you all the time for your autograph; you’ll be free to walk down any street without being bothered, and you’ll be looked up to forever, and not because you are so tall. Join us as we are the true brotherhood of LIGHT. We can do this thing now! Welcome home to the circle. Peace shall prevail on Earth!
Targets
All famous people are targets. A target is anyone who stands above the rest, and attracts people to his/her attention. Oprah is now a big target, and now she has to have protection from the people; Michael Jackson, same thing; George Bush; obviously.
The reason why they became targets is not because of them; it’s because of us. We follow them. We listen to them, and make them feel better than us, so they continue to try to attract to us in their way, as if to say: “Follow me, I know the way.” The problem is us. Why are we so interested in them, as they are simply blind and “Dumb Idols?”
When the shift takes full course, WE must not target anyone. For example: George Bush won’t feel safe to walk amongst us (in our neighborhoods, etc.) until he knows that WE have forgiven him and stopped targeting anyone anymore, WE don’t need any single leaders anymore, WE have each other.
When we see famous people walking down the street in our neighborhoods; like the professional sports players, treat them like anyone else. Do not stare, or act like they are better, or more significant than you. Do not bother them in any way, or treat them in any way different then you would treat your neighbor. No one is ever to stand above the rest to be listened to; unless it is within your own individual circles. Or they are giving to us; like ball players, musicians, and other artful entertainment; but when the music is done, give those thanks, and then leave them alone to be free and walk freely amongst us, so they never have to fear being a target. Everyone is welcome to speak their minds within their circles, as the quietest people on Earth must be heard, now. We shall correct each other on this subject for the benefit of all.
Some targets are a great danger to us, because they get people to follow the leader, but where they may be going, may be leading us astray in the long run; thus causing us to make hasty decisions with our lives.
Many people say that if Jesus came back right now, he probably wouldn’t even be recognized, and may even be crucified again, by his own followers; the “Christians,” who have been living lives of deception from the empire.
For the “Christians” of the American empire: The vision that I saw was that of a circle of all the humans on Earth (10B) and Jesus was the nucleus of the atom, and we were all the electrons that were all cooperating to move our positive energies in one direction. Jesus appeared in the middle of the circle; where the heart of our being resides; God. Then, Jesus stepped out of the middle, and joined the circle with us. Then, Buddha appeared in the middle, and then took his place in our circle; then other “Prophets” came and did the same. Nobody targeted them; they were simply considered our brethren, as they took their places in our neighborhoods. I’m not saying that this vision is the way that it’s going to play out; it’s just the lesson of targets.
Jesus became a target by a group of people fooled under the empire who say, “Jesus is one of them, not one of WE.” You are one of WE, but you still may call others, “Them.” Do you get it yet? Don’t fear your neighbor, as if they are “Them.” They are one of “WE” who just don’t know it yet. Let down that part of your ego that thinks that your neighbor is different then you; whoever your neighbor is right now.
Live in God’s protection, and know it; walk bravely then, until you realize that there was nothing that we had to be brave about with God as our guide.
Willie Lynch was a very evil (very deceived) man and a slave owner about three hundred years ago. He came up with a list of a protocol of how to keep slaves from ever uniting; how to keep slaves enslaved. He said if you put this list to use properly it will set a trend in motion that will keep them enslaved and divided for hundreds of years. It was a plan to cause divisions amongst the slaves. #1 Cause them to fear each other. #2 Cause them to distrust each other. #3 Cause them to envy each other. #4 Destroy the natural way the men and the women cooperate to raise their children by breaking the men.
Slaves came from the happy tribe; Truth Knowers. The men protected the women and children and brought the food to the mothers. Women naturally are with the children because of breast feeding. Women could depend on men to keep up the natural flow, as the entire tribe was one; united as one flesh; one body.
Just these four principals that Willie Lynch came up with is a very long list. If they break the man, the man becomes weak and the women have to become stronger, but worse then that, the women have to depend on the slave master; the dominant source and they stop depending on the men. Men then became un-dependable. It’s obvious to me that this protocol has invaded all throughout the working class of the United States. We live in fear of our neighbors; we don’t trust our neighbors; we envy our neighbors; and mothers are working, because many men can’t be depended on; because the empire system has caused many men to break. It’s that simple.
Women now have to be stronger, because they have the Holy Grail of love inside them. They’ll obey the dominant source and work harder so they can bring the food home if they have to, but this causes a lot of stress in the women’s life; a lot more than they should ever have to endure; therefore, it causes frustration and envy of the broken man who can’t keep up, and just leave their children with her. It also causes women to hurry their children along too much, thus raising unhappy children and children that are hard to manage, because they are starving to just be free and play.
It is obvious that this system is very hard on people, and here is the proof: Suicide. The Japanese empire has an “Honor” system that controls them. When a teenager can’t keep up in the schools and his grades fall behind, they are trained that this dishonors his father, and his father hammers him with shame. The shame along with whatever else is troubling the teenager causes him to just want to die at such a young age, so he kills himself. That’s why the Japanese people are so intelligent and rich, they are pushed heavily. Now think about all of the teens in the United States who can’t handle the pressure that is a degree lower than the “Honor” system of control. Think about all the people who don’t commit suicide, but can’t keep up. Isn’t it obvious that this system is wrong? Isn’t it obvious that we shouldn’t be treated like this? Isn’t it obvious that we, the people; the working class must unite as one body to be the dominant source again?
Those who commit suicide are dying proof that not all people are made to fit into the mold that our society has caused us all to be stuffed in. They are the proof that what I’m telling you is true. Teenage suicide is at a very high rate in Japan. Do the research yourself, and see the countries that need help; the countries where the people are controlled too much by their system. If only one teenager commits suicide anywhere in this world, then the teenage suicide rate of the world is too high, but look how many who have gone; this could be you or your children, and we are bullshitted into believing that they are mentally ill; that there was something wrong with them; they were broken beyond measure by the empire system. We welcome the teenagers of Japan to the circle. Welcome home.
Remember the “Great Depression” of the United States in the early 1900’s. Do you think that the rich slave owners taught our government how to break men, and that’s the reason for the depression in the first place? Many men were broken during the depression; that sent a trend that continues today, as many men just can’t be depended on with all this stress of paying high rent, high taxes, high food prices, and buying more pacifiers for the children, because they are addicted to them. I don’t know if it happened on purpose, or just by accident, but the effects of the Willie Lynch syndrome have made it through all of the people of the United States. Mothers should not ever have to work. Can you not see that the high divorce rate is proof that we are divided?
Now look at the African American Gang-Bangers of the United States. They are killing each other in the ghettos; compare them with the Africans in Africa. We know that Africa is full of Truth Knowers from the same happy tribe, but they aren’t killing each other because they aren’t broken or divided; they love each other even though they’ve been depressed for many years and are starving.
Dear President George Bush,
You are being bombarded with this petition from people all over the country, and we know it; you can’t ignore us now. We are not only inviting you to come home to the people, we are ordering you as commander-in-chief of the US military to prepare for a world wide truce. We ask you to lower your ego, yield to the truth, and we order you to lower the American flag that sits outside the White House (everyone is to save that one for you) and put a white flag above it; raise them both up, and salute them both to represent your surrendering of your ego, and to lead by example to teach all other emperors to surrender theirs now. When you do, we’ll all be crying happy tears, as our broadcasting system will send that picture all over the world in a matter of minutes. The longer you wait, the more shame you shall feel, and you won’t be able to look in the mirror without feeling shame anymore until you do, but if you don’t we’ll take control of the world without you. You are either with us, or you are against us.
This is a “Win-Win” situation for all those who ever died for their flags of their countries while living in last night’s nightmare. Their deaths shall not ever be in vain. We honor them and our past, as we move to the light of the new days ahead. Wake up, brother; you are forgiven for the mistakes that you made, as any one of us would have done the same things as you have done if we were raised in your diapers, and walked in your moccasins. Wake up, and rise and shine like the star that you are (bring your gifts to the circle).
Welcome Home; we love you!
P.S. I’m your new best friend, and I love all the people on Earth equally; I love you, brother. Sincerely, “X”
Protesting 101
Every human being has the basic human right to break the laws of the land.
Every human being has the freedom to break the law, and suffer the consequences. Teenager, there’s no consequences if you are all together; who’s stopping you? Why?
Theories and Techniques of Civil Disobedience
In seeking an active form of civil disobedience, one may choose to deliberately break certain laws, such as by forming a peaceful blockade or occupying a facility. Protesters practice this non-violent form of civil disorder with the expectation that they will be arrested, or even attacked or beaten by the authorities. Protesters often undergo training in advance on how to react to arrest or to attack, so that they will do so in a manner that quietly or limply resists without threatening the authorities.
For example, Mahatma Gandhi outlined the following rules:
1. A civil resister (or Satyagrahi) will harbor no anger.
2. He will suffer the anger of his opponent.
3. In so doing he will put up with assaults from the opponent, never retaliate; but he will not submit, out of fear of punishment or the like, to any order given in anger.
4. When any person in authority seeks to arrest a civil resister, he will voluntarily submit to the arrest, and he will not resist the attachment or removal of his own property, if any, when it is sought to be confiscated by the authorities.
5. If a civil resister has any property (or a secret) in his possession as a trustee he will refuse to surrender it, even though in defending it he may lose his life. He will, however, never retaliate.
6. Retaliation includes swearing and cursing.
7. Therefore a civil resister will never insult his opponent, and therefore also not take part in many of the newly coined cries which are contrary to the spirit of Ahimsa (non-violence and a respect for all life).
8. A civil resister will not salute a flag, or pledge allegiance to an entity that is contrary to our oneness, nor will he insult it or those who do.
9. In the course of the struggle if anyone insults an official or commits an assault upon him, a civil resister will protect such official or officials from the insult or attack even at the risk of his life.
You are a civil resister if you are under the age of 18 (in the US) and you are protesting. The laws say you can’t protest unless your parents give you permission, but how is a 12 year old adult ever going to have the freedom that they need if they don’t protest. You are a civil resister if you don’t do what your parents tell you to do. You are a civil resister if you think for yourself.
Responses to Gandhi’s rules for the teens of the Empire.
1. Anger is a choice and an opposite of happiness. You are celebrating the Shift while you protest; you are happy, and happiness attracts others to our circle.
2. Don’t take the enemy seriously, and don’t provoke him. You must absorb their anger because they are grown-up children who don’t know better. Give them no reason to hate you. Invite them to see the light; say, “We Love you… Welcome home.”
3. If an official tells you to do something, don’t do it; don’t move; don’t let them control you, unless they say, “You are under arrest,” then go peacefully, so we can fill up their jails to the point that they can’t arrest anyone anymore.
4. Let them waste time on you by taking your things, and arresting you; there’s too many of us and they can’t arrest all of us; they are just trying to make an example out of you, so everyone who sees will be afraid to do what you did; that’s the only way they control us; fear of punishment, etc.
5. Don’t tell on your neighbors, and don’t give the authorities any information of your contacts; just give them a copy of this book. But if you are about to be beaten or tortured, do not give anything up until the first physical pain (sticks and stones can break your bones, but words can’t ever hurt you) then give it all up; you are calling their bluff.
6. Retaliation comes from ego, we call it justice, but revenge is not justice. Justice is equality (financial equality), world peace, and world wide security of everyone’s basic human needs. You don’t need to retaliate individually. This movement is the retaliation; it is the peaceful happy retaliation of all for all. You are just a part of the whole body, and the whole body is happily celebrating with you now. Stay calm when your parents are being too serious, and don’t act in any provoking way or insult them when you do; it’s like pleading with someone who is still in control, you are in control of you; you don’t have to beg or plead; not to your parents or the authorities, but they must be honored as your parents, and respected as fellow human beings. You are standing happily for what you believe in, so don’t let anyone’s controlling antics distract you from the vision.
7. Don’t give them any attention; don’t give them any of your energy; ignore them, but honor them for what they believed in. Their faults were the reason that we came to this point. Their faults of the past better the past, so we can use the mistakes as lessons to use for our future. The kinder that you are to them, the sooner they’ll accept the movement.
8. When someone of our group insults or assaults our opponent, he is not representing us. He is representing himself, but that gives the authorities a reason to act against all of us, and a justification to say, for example; “They threw a beer bottle at us; therefore we shot the whole crowd with rubber bullets.” The empires want us to resort to violence so they can justify violent riot control and try to make us look bad to those fools that are seeing half-truths through the mainstream media TV. It is our job to police ourselves. Do not let anyone in our group act out against authorities, as these authorities of today will be in our circle tomorrow, and are always invited to join the human tribe. Welcome them home.
Protesting is what we are doing with our actions of building the circle. Protesting of the past meant begging to those in control. WE don’t need to beg and plead anymore, but we still may have to organize marches, etc.
Policing the police
Under no circumstance are we ever to need to form a mob. We are simply walking around freely and advertising.
During the World Trade Organization protests in Seattle, Washington, USA; a few years ago, the police were threatened enough to come out in riot gear and form a line to try to move protesters away from the area that we wanted to protest. They are to know that we are their family, and that we want them on our side. If the empire decides to make them come out in riot gear, they must have their last name and badge number printed on the outside of their riot gear, so we can hold each one of them accountable for their actions.
During the protests, mainstream media slipped and broadcasted a young man; who was mouthing at the police while in their line. A cop chased the young man down, and beat him with his baton. The young man was violated, and so were we. We would still like to know who that cop was, but since he had on riot gear; his identity was hidden from us.
The best way to win is by giving up. Yielding and ignoring, but if they won’t be ignored, they’ll try to boss us around. We won’t move, and we’ll win with our flags of surrender. Everyone in the world is to know what a surrender flag is for. It’s for surrendering so your lives may be spared. Everyone of our circle needs to have a surrender flag on them when they go out in public (white handkerchief). If you need to respond to a problem with your authorities, you will wave a white flag of surrender with the thought, “I surrender and WE win.” There’s no other way to beat an aggressor; like your parents; they are too powerful to ever have a confrontation with, so we give up. What are they going to do about it? We are crazy! “Governments don’t know what to do when ‘Their’ people go crazy.” _ Robin Williams.
We yield with surrender flags, and what can they do? Shooting people for walking around the town while waving white surrender flags? Do you think that your own police force or military will shoot you because you won’t go home in a martial law situation while you are waving a white surrender flag? They might, but that would mean that they are shooting themselves.
When they want to arrest you, then stand up and let them. Don’t make them work and drag you away; be kind, we want them to come home to us. But if you aren’t “Under arrest,” then they have no authority to tell you what to do, but they’ll threaten you by saying “If you don’t move, then you’ll be arrested.” That’s when you say, “I’m not going to move until you arrest me.” Don’t let them make you move, unless they arrest you; you are free to walk where you want to walk and do what you want to do.
If they have been given the power to arrest you by their, “Boss;” let their boss figure out how he’s going to find jail space for all of us, and happily play their game, and be ready to go to jail for a short while; until you are released to walk freely again. If they threaten to give you a ticket, laugh, and say, “Am I under arrest? No? Then I’m not sticking around while you fill out the paperwork unless I’m under arrest.” Make them waist time. The more time they waist on you, then the more time the rest of us have to walk freely, as there are many more of us then them.
Do not vandalize; it’s a form of violence, and we’ll have to fix the damage; yeah, we are the ones that are running the world; therefore, we’ll have to do all the clean-up after every child in the world has their basic human needs secured. Any act of vandalism is an act of pleading, or begging, or having a tantrum; we are above that now. If we see someone vandalizing, we have to police them ourselves with tough love; they are giving us a bad reputation, and will add to the justification that authority will use to act against us. Graffiti is art, so don’t look at graffiti as vandalism, as we need more art in our lives.
Do not stop traffic on the streets or the sidewalks. There are stressed-out parents out there who have to run around to provide for their families; we want them on our side, be polite. Don’t antagonize to get attention, just be free to attract attention any silly way that you can imagine.
We are advertising to build the circle; all you have to do is be happy knowing that the Shift is happening now, and walk around in public (in groups for your protection, but no crowding the streets, so people may freely walk by) while waving white flags of surrender. These are the flags of freedom that Neil Young sings about on his new CD, “Living with War.”
You wave white flags in the streets, and people are going to come up to you and ask questions; especially if you are approachable (see Conscious Dance page?). You have all the answers with this book, so you give them a copy or send them to your website, as you excitingly say to their questions, “It’s the Shift… where the people take control of the world for a world wide social security for all humans on Earth;” while you are glowing with joy, and they’ll read the book; especially if you give them your contact info so they can join your circle after they read it!
Teenager, your parents have laws that you’ll have to break, because you are “Walking in protest.” You protest by your body language, but you must remember that they are scared to death now, so if you love them, you must be patient with them; and at least give them the best explanation that you can; give them a copy of this book, and include them in your circle parties. Do not cause a division between you and them, instead, try to build a bridge with them by saying this, “How can we have a ‘Win-Win’ situation for everyone here?” Try to let them know that you’ll be safe, and they’ll be safe. Explain to them that you know about sexual predators, and that’s why you are always going out in public in organized groups of no less then six or seven, unless, of course, you are already a “Tough guy.” Tell them that sexual predators usually are shame-based loners, and that they can’t stand up to a group of seven (or more) screaming teenage girls in public, even if the girls are as young as twelve years old. Yeah, sexual predators are everywhere, but they usually work alone in their hidden shameful lives.
Reverse the upbringing of not talking to strangers, as you are not to think of anyone as a stranger when you are an adult. Let your guards down and welcome everyone you meet into your lives; carefully. Many men are starving for sex, so stay in your groups, and always watch out for each other. Always have contact with your group, and you’ll not need to worry about being scared or brave. Have this discussion with your group before you act, as everyone’s safety is the number 1 job within our basic human needs circle, throughout the Shift, and forever!
Go to your neighbors to explain why you are about to start acting silly around the neighborhood, and give them a copy of the book; maybe they’ll start acting silly, too.
Wherever you go, consider wearing a white arm band that is a white flag tied around your arm. No one is your “Boss” now, so we are asking for your organized cooperation on this; overcome the shame-base that keeps you hesitating to act until others give you their approval. You don’t need approval of anyone, you are just a silly kid to them, and you have OUR circle’s approval and support. You are in the human family, you don’t have to prove yourself to anyone ever again! You are already accepted for just being human.
The Conscious Dance - A Social Therapy
Remember the happy tribe, the ones who help the weakest be as strong as the rest of them? Imagine that you were brought up in that tribe, you could walk with your head up high, with a smile on your face as you share the daily chores with the others. You can walk down the road as someone that you never met before is walking towards you, and not feel any anxiety.
As my spiritual awakening matures; I see the “New Day” that is soon to be here for all to see, and it will reach the eyes of the poor first, as we have been the ones looking for it to come. Looking for God? Just look into your neighbor’s eyes; love your neighbor in the right way… until they know it!
I can envision a world, where everyone is looking at each other as if they were a newborn child and their mother was looking at them with admiration for the first time… OK, maybe I’m getting a little carried away with it… but does it hurt anyone to spread this dream?
The “Lowest of low” is to get this message: One way those who need the most healing (prisoners, slaves, addicts, oppressed poor, citizen’s of the US, etc.) are going to get healed is to learn to heal each other (until we find a better way to help them) because for the most part, the only ones that have been getting this kind of attention, are the ones who can afford to pay a lot of money for it.
A therapy, or “Exercise,” has come to me to pass along to WE. I’m calling it, “The Conscious Dance,” until WE come up with a better name for it.
The Conscious Dance
For starters, it can be a group thing, or and individual thing, and it benefits everyone. To help you get started, try not to be too serious; think of it as playing a game:
* We aren’t necessarily dancing, and music isn’t really necessary. WE are simply making more eye contact while we party.
* You need to look people in the eyes with admiration, as if you are only looking for the good in people. And if they are the only person on Earth that matters now.
* By looking for the good in everyone that you see, you make yourself more “Approachable.”
* Exaggerate your attitude by saying this to yourself when around “Strangers,” as this exercise is designed to help the world eliminate the idea of “Strangers.” AS we have taught our children to not talk to strangers, but WE are adults now: “I want to talk to people as if I’ve known them all my life.”
* At anytime that you feel the least bit uncomfortable, then say, “I’m uncomfortable with that… (whatever it is) ” Because once you realize that we are all equal, then you realize that some people are going to be uncomfortable “Giving” yet, because they are where you were, so you totally understand. So, when people come to the party, let them slowly warm up to the new ideas that are brought forth.
* “We are brothers and sisters” (that’s our attitude while we dance) look into the eyes of someone; anyone. (after a little while, you are going to “Change partners,” especially if your partner is you while you practice this in the mirror, and it’s best to start of with people that already know you) The people who don’t already know you, won’t know that you are practicing this therapy while you are talking to them; they’ll just think that this strong person is the real you.
* Imagine that you are saying this: “I’m looking deep into your eyes to look for the good in you. I’m looking into your eyes more than comfortable, because I’m trying to overcome the ‘Demon’ that is known as, ‘Shame,’ which caused me to feel uncomfortable while looking people in the eyes, or to look, ‘Strangers,’ in the eyes for too much of my life. I’m smiling, because I want to look more approachable.”
* WE must overcome the “Shyness” that may have invaded us through the years, as we have nothing to be ashamed of, because we are simply “Victims” of the empire system who had to do whatever we did to survive and find any happiness, or just any “Relief” from the life we may have been forced to live. And no matter how bad someone appears to be, they are really innocent, because they were born innocent… Then the world “Happened” to them.
* If you don’t have confidence problems, as far as looking people in the eyes, then you are teaching people (by example) that it is all good to look into the eyes of others with admiration, and without feeling uncomfortable; you are healing others. That’s what we are doing; it’s a healing therapy, or an exercise to strengthen our bond. What’s so good about it; is that we are doing it while we party, we are showing the others that we are strong and tight within our group, and it will help make our movement more attractive.
* “I’m looking deep into your eyes to look for the good in you. I’m looking deep into your eyes to see the God in you. I’m looking deep into your eyes, because you and God are healing me, at this time. I’m looking deep into your eyes like a sunflower would look at the sun. I’m admiring you as if you are God.”
* We are attempting to consciously become aware of the one thing that has kept us all from being happy: “Shame,” or “Unhealthy Shame.” We are seeing God work through us to do miracles. (Win-Win situations may be when God is working)
* The world has caused us to be afraid of “Strangers,” well if we eliminate the idea that people (equal humans) are strangers, just because we don’t know them, then we’ve eliminated a whole lot of unnecessary fear that keeps us from loving each other. We teach our children to be afraid of “Strangers,” but WE aren’t children now; WE are adults, who aren’t going to act like children anymore!
* More: You can practice “Dancing” anytime; when you are looking at yourself in the mirror, or at school, home, work, play, etc.: You simply look for the good in people always; all ways. And when you are out in public, and you run into anyone else that’s in our circle, you make the eye contact, hug, and don’t be afraid to show your happy reunion and give each other friendly affection in front of others, as happiness will attract more to our cause. Remember; you have to be real, because many of us have been walking, “Phonies,” for too long now; all in the name of “Shame.”
* Once you understand the concept of “The Dance,” you’ll see why students are going to be teaching the teachers, and the “Bad” people, will be teaching the “Good” people; why “Cowboys and Indians,” “Dogs and Cats,” “Blacks and Whites,” “Crips and Bloods,” “Cops and Criminals,” slaves and slave masters, men and women, “Catholics, Buddhists, Hindus, Muslims, Rastafarians,” etc., are all going to be loving each other. And why the “Poor” are going to be rich with happiness and the rich are just going to come out of their miserable shame-based turtle shells, take off their invisible masks, and finally get “Happy,” and bring so much help to the circle now.
* You are going to witness and be a part of an evolution where everyone comes out happier; like, everyone “Wins,” or experiences “Win-Win” situations. We all win in this game. And you may experience a natural “High” that you have never experienced before; like, crying happy tears for weeks, or months, maybe.
* You don’t need to “Push” the idea on anyone; all we are doing is making a happy community. We are just inviting each other into our lives a little more for now.
Examples:
Think about it. You are a kid whose parents take you to play on a ball team, and you don’t really know any of the kids on your new team, and you don’t know how to play this kind of ball. What do you want the group to do when you show up on their team? You want them to welcome you the real way. You want them all to look at you with acceptance and admiration; thus, making you feel real welcome and confident. And you want them to know that you can be a good player if they are patient while they teach you how to play. You want them to know how to help you be as good as them, and take the time to teach you; while they accept you. You want them to like you for just being you, and act like it by introducing themselves, and asking you to come to their homes to be friends.
Shame was everywhere, really:
You are a young American woman of 16 years old, and you are a beauty. Do you worry about what you are going to look like when you go to school that day, or do you just throw anything on, and no make-up? Well, chances are that you feel as if you have to do your hair; paint your face with make-up; clothes have to match; perfume, etc. and you have to look in the mirror a lot before you walk out of the house to school. Why? Won’t you be loved and accepted for just who you are, and what if you aren’t a “Beauty?” Would you have to worry even more about being accepted? Aren’t we tired of living with these fears? Why is it that just about every American female feels uncomfortable going out in public without getting made-up? This may be why: That example reminds me of a certain wealthy high school; where girls are always scrutinizing their peers; like, “OH God… would you look at that girl’s nails! They don’t match her outfit at all!” “Oh God… what did she do to her hair… It looks awful!” That’s shame at the high school girl’s level. What’s even funnier about our situation is that these girls don’t really care much about what the young men think, as men usually accept women any way they can (ha ha ha). Women just seem to worry about what the other girls (their peers) are thinking about them. And when you dish out the shame it comes back to you, so those same girls that are shaming others; have to now worry about the “Others” thinking the same things about them; they get “Locked-in” their own mental web.
Let’s say I made fun of bald men when I was young. Now I’d have to worry about all the shame that I dished out years ago, because I’m bald now. That shame is obviously out there still, because people aren’t happy being their selves, as many bald guys have resorted to wearing a hat to hide their heads, or worse: They get a hair transplant or comb the hair, that’s left, over the top of their head; all in the name of shame.
Our society proves that we are “Shame-based,” and here’s an example that just happens to be in an article in today’s (11-23-05) Oregonian newspaper of Portland, Oregon, USA: “Scientists Make Headway In Getting Your Hair Back” (Title) “Researchers’ progress on the mystery of baldness includes work on cloning hair and tracking down genes that cause bare scalps.” Just these two headlines show that a lot of money is being spent trying to find a way for bald men to get their hair back, because they plan on making a lot of money if they are actually able to finally do it. But the primary drive is because many bald men are ashamed of it, as if there’s a problem with being bald, or just being yourself, because we are allowing the immature to affect our happiness.
I’ve known the nicest man in the world for my entire life. When he leaves his home, he puts on a hat to hide his bald head, when he goes to work (he’s a meat cutter) he puts on a butcher’s hat; whenever he’s out in public, the hat is on. He has even said it to his family, “I put on my hat to hide my bald head.” This handbook is trying to encourage WE to feel like family, and to love each other, so people like he can feel like he’s “Home” when he’s out in public; just being himself. And so newspapers don’t have to perpetuate the shame by broadcasting shame-based articles to the masses; which reinforces the wrong message to the world.
Many beautiful “African American” woman (all women are beautiful to me) that I’ve seen in the USA appears to feel the shame about their hair in the natural afro, and has felt as if they’ve had to straighten their hair, because of this shame to look their best. And that angers a small group of them who don’t want to “Buy in” to the shame of the empire’s female fashion model complex, because they are all seeing the shame invade and cause the unnecessary stress on their lives to have to pay money, and waste time, energy, etc.; just fit in, or get a job in this shame-based (slave-based) country.
Here’s something that I noticed when visiting Portland, Oregon, USA: The “MAX” is a public transportation train that moves people around the city in conjunction with the bus system. While riding the MAX at just about any morning, you can almost hear a pin drop, even when the train is full of people at “Rush hour.” Nobody is talking to anyone. Think about it… we are anti-social; why? If we were a happy and confident country, that train would be as loud as a cafeteria full of young children; with people talking and laughing. But we are so guarded from strangers, and so full of shame, that we are afraid of “Strangers,” or that someone listening to our conversation is going to scrutinize what we are saying, so much so, that we don’t speak. I mean people would whisper when talking to each other as if they were in a church or something like that, on the train! I’m not kidding; check it out for yourself if you don’t believe me, it’s not just in Portland, or the US either; it’s in almost every empire country.
The entire time that I rode on the MAX train and on the buses, I kept looking around. I didn’t say anything, but I just kept trying to make eye contact with a friendly (approachable) look on my face. Now if I was a beautiful young woman, that kind of activity would attract lonely men to maintain eye contact for the wrong reasons, but I just wanted to see if people made eye contact, and my experiment was significant: No one made (held) eye contact with me (or anyone else) unless they “Knew” each other. It makes you feel very strong when others aren’t holding the eye contact, but you aren’t that strong; it’s that they are weak.
I went into a grocery store in Gresham, Oregon, USA (a city that has lots of “Christian” churches). While walking around shopping, I kept a happy “Pea” face, and I kept walking around confidently, while I kept trying to make eye contact with people. NO one made the eye contact there either; no smiles… nothing. Nobody was really talking to each other, either!
Is the rest of the world like this? I don’t know, but this example shows me that we Americans are very sick, socially. We are not FRIENDLY, and it’s only because of shame, or fear, but it may appear to others that we are just selfish Americans, when that’s not the case at all. We are simply just over-guarded; while having habits of being too busy to talk with people for any length of time.
When you are in a crowd of shame-based “Strangers” and you want to break the ice; first off: Remember that you are an equal human, and if anything gets uncomfortable to you, you can just say, “I’m uncomfortable with that…” and everyone would understand (Because everyone is human). You can make constant admiring eye contact and you say something like this… “Hello… Are you friendly? Do you want to visit and talk? Or would you rather be left alone?” And your conversation either starts, or not. You can then go to someone else. The main problem is that we are afraid of what people are thinking about us. The training started in our public (government) schools as early as five years old where everyone was allowed to be mean and “Make fun” of everyone else, because there simply wasn’t enough mature adults around (to the little kids; a mature adult could be twelve years old) and we aren’t conscious of the heavy shame that was happening to all of us, because the teachers were also brought up that way; like the blind is leading the blind.
I listen to kids talk to each other and many of them are as mean as ever. I can’t take listening to it. Does this sound familiar to anyone: “Duh!” (It’s the standard way for one kid to tell another that “Everyone knows that, stupid!”) I pray that WE learn a better way now.
Understanding
Understanding and forgiveness is a vital piece of the puzzle that we are about to finish.
Example: There’s a young man who was brought up in a ghetto, or “Indian” reservation, poverty, etc. All he was ever exposed to was a very sick and oppressed neighborhood, gang related violence, and parental neglect, etc., along with all the other products of living in an extremely oppressed neighborhood. He’s been in and out of detention, and he somehow survived the “Drive-bys” era, but he is angry (since anger is an opposite of happiness) and careless, and he decides to rob a store for some kind of dope money. (He has never had a reason to be hopeful about his future, so like many, he is basically on a living suicide mission, thus causing him not to care about what he does to his body, or perhaps anyone else’s body). As time goes by, he finally gets killed (or dies of old age in prison).
Could you understand enough to forgive him? Could you see that for his entire life he was really just an innocent child who never had a chance to grow up? He lived in hell all of his life, then he got put in jail (more hell) for the rest of his life.
Let’s take it further… What happened to this innocent child that was a day old; OK, at 1 year old; was he still an innocent child; exposed to the world (His world)
OK at two; was he still innocent? OK, how about three? At what time was he not innocent? What I’m getting at is that he never had a chance to be positive, and happy, and he never had a chance to spread happy to others, did he? You know the answer. He never had a chance to know “Right.” He never had a chance to really “Grow up.” He was an innocent child for his entire life, and he was just a walking wounded person who was simply trying to find an easy way to find happiness or relief. Happiness is what we’re starving for; he was an innocent child that may have known better, but couldn’t do better. His world turned him into the monster that he became. He is still innocent, and is forgiven as far as I’m concerned, but what do you think?
How about the president of the US? Some say he is evil (acting with his deception… And it doesn’t really matter what president is in there, as some say all of them are evil) OK, let’s look at that:
Let’s say all that you’ve known for your entire life was to be sheltered from the real people. And all you know about them and about politics, religion, and business is what your rich and deceived “Teachers” have taught you. And what if you were taught to not think with your own mind; just the empire mind, and to be afraid to go in public, unless you look your best; you know, perfect. So you were brought up with all the fears that those shame-based “Civilized” people are brought up with. Then you are taught that people are basically sheep and cattle, and need to be controlled, or else panic will set in, and then we’re all at risk of losing our lives; and you were taught that it’s OK for a few “Heroes” to die for the sake of the rest of us (As long as they are from the working class and not from your own family). Then you go to a college for rich, spoiled, and sheltered kids, and you fit right in, because you are worshipped, because you were born rich, and not because you are just a basic human. So you see that money is everything for you… everything. So you then learn to be a great business man and negotiator, and all your friends are heads of corporations. And since all of your, so called, “Friends,” are taught to look out for each other (like good friends do) well that’s exactly what you do, only it’s not about survival; it’s about money. So, you are presented with the idea of becoming president, and you are given advice by “Your” experts; things that you believe, and you take their advice, because that’s all you know to do. And you ACT on the advice that others have given you, along with your upbringing. Are you innocent? I say he knows right from wrong, but his job is so confusing, and that he has to listen to (and do) what his “Experts” say he should do, even if it is wrong. Can you forgive him for lowering the economy so jobs are harder to get, so he could get more recruits for his military; for cutting funding for the welfare and Social Security that has caused you to beg in the streets? Yes, you can, but he needs to be stopped.
The more the people know that they are forgiven for their “Mistakes,” and accepted for just being born innocent, and understand that we are simply trying to be happy anyway we can, then the more people from the “Upper classes” of the world will come and join our circle, because they see that we are learning to heal each other and be happy. Trust me, even though it looks like they are happy: They aren’t. The rich live in the most shame-based fear of all the people. They are even afraid of “Bugs!” and “Dirt!”
Can you believe it?
So the “Light” is now turned on, and the rich, the poor, the colors, the “Good” and the “Evil” have all scattered under the cupboards, like the cockroaches, but once they see that we are happy being simply humans, and they learn that the LIGHT of truth is nothing to be afraid of because it is fully here now for the humans, then they’ll start to look at themselves in their own mirrors, and realize that they are really just humans, too.
They’ll come out from whatever veil that they’ve been hiding behind; especially if the rest of us humans are already standing happily in that Light while we cooperate and live, but they’ll only come “Home” to us if they feel safe enough to do so; therefore, we must be ready to welcome them. All shame must go now. When a cockroach comes out from under the cupboard, and the Light is shining on him/her for the first time, they’ll be scared, and very ashamed, so the only way they’ll do it, is if they know that we will welcome them home no matter what their pasts were, what they look like, what they wear (or don’t wear) etc.… Welcome home to the humans. We the people understand that you were just a deceived human. You don’t even have to tell us about all the bad things that you did unless you want to. We understand and you are already forgiven. Welcome home!
Many will be crying happy tears when they wake up and come out, then they might go back, as the new life they have may be too weird all at once; just keep welcoming them back every time. I hope you can see what I see that’s in our near future, as I’m trying to paint a clear picture for WE of this vision that I see.
Babylon: To you the story of Babylon maybe true, or not. Without challenging anyone’s beliefs, I’d like to just use the story to show you something.
You’ll need to know the story (Bible) (story told here)
It has became apparent to me that when God scattered the people and turned their language into babble, so they could no longer communicate because the people were building a tower to God and going in the wrong direction. The direction to find God was already there, as God is in the eyes of our neighbors, they just didn’t know it yet. Ever since that day, we should have been trying to learn to communicate as one, again.
We have the World Wide Web, we have satellites, and we put a man on the moon (over 40 years ago) but no world peace, yet. It won’t be much longer now, because we also can communicate with each other via our translator’s circle who can take any message from our language, and bring the message, to another’s ears of any different language; therefore, WE all can communicate with each other now!
I have written this using simple language, so it can simply be translated and brought to the EYES of those humans who are in the far (and perhaps “Darkest”) corners of the Earth.
In summary, you are “IN” if you know that you are just a human.
* I am only a human; not a race; not a color; not a religion; not a political party; not a financial party, or “Class;” not a sexual preference; not anything different than anyone else.
* I need the same needs from birth to death as everyone else. In that sense; everyone is equal.
* To be as happy as anyone can possibly be is a desire (perhaps a need?) of everyone.
* No one on this planet can be as happy as they can be, until everyone on this planet is as happy as they can be.
* I need (want?) to be loved and accepted by everyone; therefore I need to love and accept everyone. Do unto others, as you would have them do unto you.
Can you forgive Hitler? Just because he appears to be one of the most evil men in recent history, wasn’t he born an innocent baby? If you were born from the same womb, and were brought up as he was; from his diapers to his combat boots, wouldn’t you have done the same as him? We can’t answer that, but he is forgiven, and you would be, too. What do you think?
.
.
.
.
.
.
The House for the Seeker (rough draft)
This is the main spiritual circle. It is a sub-circle of the main circle of humans. It’s a simple concept: We’ll have together in one circle, leading representatives of every religion in the world, along with their support circles. For example: If a Catholic priest or the Pope was in a seat of the center circle, he may have over 100 other leading priests to support their position. If the Dalai Lama was there, then he may have a support circle of 100 other Buddhist monks; the Jews would have 100 Rabbis; Hindus, the same; Muslims, Christians, Wiccans, Astrologers, etc.; like I said, all the big ones and the little ones. All the religions will be there at the start, especially those of the indigenous tribes, as WE really want to know why they are “Hanging on” to their old beliefs and heritage throughout the ages, as well as why all people hang on to their beliefs for so long. If every religion (or way of life) has something good to offer the humans, then we’ll use the goods of every religion.
Their main job: First, to see what they all have in common; to first strengthen our Oneness, then to learn about each other’s religions, so that they all can get to the main points, and eliminate (for the seekers) all those negative rumors about each other’s religions.
As a long time seeker, I spent too much time running into spiritual “Dead ends” mostly due to rumors and misunderstandings about other religions that I didn’t know about. To this day, I can only say that I am a Human.
I’ve had people tell me that I’m a healer, well if that’s true, is it of a religion? Is it from a foundation? Who do I talk to get more understanding of how to strengthen or improve these healing qualities that I’m said to have? What is Meditation? Some say its thinking; some say it’s non-thinking. I’m tired of wasting my time… I just want the truth now! Every religion has different beliefs. I want to know the truth about them and not be played with anymore, because this is serious business. And I think that I’m speaking for a lot of other “Lost souls” out there; especially within the U.S.
When we have our conferences; sitting in the center circle of the House for the Seeker will be, for example; 100 people. They’ll actually be sitting in a circle and if everyone agrees, no one will ever be aloud to stand in the middle and speak with a chance to dominate; that position is reserved for God; for example. A stick will be passed to each other as a baton around the circle. If we are all in agreement on this rule, whoever has the stick gets to speak. Everyone else must be quiet and listen. The stick will move around the circle and everyone will get a chance to speak; that’s called “The First Round.”
After the first round they’ll take a break to gather their thoughts, questions, and arguments, as many will arise after everyone speaks. Then, after a day/week or so, they’ll come back to the circle and pass the stick around again. This will go on forever, as they will always be seeking a better way of life for humans to live together on Earth. Their “Findings” at any time in history will be broadcasted through the Circle to all the people on Earth by OUR new public broadcasting station that will have as many different channels as there are different languages in the world.
I know you are wondering how this can happen when almost everyone in the center circle speaks a different language. While one person is speaking with the stick, he’ll have television cameras on him/her and they’ll be a circle of translators for every language to every language. The cameras will be on the circle of translators as well, and we’ll have one translator for each language that goes on camera and translates the messages, while the other translators watch to make sure he is translating the speaker’s words correctly, and will interrupt the translator if he is in error, or if he must clarify the words or sentences better for others to understand, as there are languages that have words that are very hard to translate to other languages. Each of the other people sitting in the circle will have a television on, so they can get the translation right after the speaker is finished speaking, so they’ll be a pause as everyone watches their monitors that are sitting right in front of them before the next person gets the stick. The translated broadcast that each person in the circle gets will be the same broadcast that every one in the world will be getting at the same time, so we can all follow along, and check to make sure the translators aren’t deceiving us. The public broadcasting station will actually have many channels that broadcast to every country/language throughout the world to accommodate for the different languages. In other words, you’ll be able to change the channels on your television; depending on what language you understand.
Let’s try an example. A Spanish speaker speaks to the circle while at his seat, you speak Swahili, so you are watching the Swahili channel of the Public Broadcasting Station; while at the same time, your friend is in the next room that speaks Spanish, and is watching it in Spanish; directly from the speaker’s mouth. Next door to you is an English speaking family. As the next few days go by, they’ll be enough people in our neighborhoods talking about the last meeting, so to make sure no foul play was happening by any empires within the Broadcast; therefore, no one will be deceived by the translators, because we are all witnessing.
In the first chapter for teenagers of the empires, you got an idea of how the empire of the United States allows children to shame each other as a way of raising them, because children aren’t properly supervised enough (having three teachers; standing with a whistle in their mouths, and watching two to four hundred children play together at recess time in the public schools is not good supervision) and then you saw a completely different way that many tribes raise their children, as their children are always around adults that share their children’s education as a way of life. If we are all living together, we are going to attempt to come up with a way to raise children that we’ll all agree on, and this will be very important, as it takes a whole village to raise a child. That means that the whole village (World) must agree as to the way we are going to go about raising our children, together. So this is going to be an ongoing, and perhaps; trial and error situation throughout the years, but we’ll get a good start as the House for the Seeker comes up with findings or suggestions for the rest of us to consider.
How the House for the Seeker operates is exactly how the center circle of our new government will operate. The spiritual leaders will just leave their seats, and we will sit in the same spots with the same translators and cameras. The center circle, as I stated before is not the leaders of the new government, they are merely channels to help move information to the world from all of the people in the world. They are not anymore significant than anyone else. There is to be no one that ever dominates any meeting or group of people ever again.
I pray that we are stars, and that we shine on each other to make this whole world brighter…
Now I’m a human, but I need the circle of the highest of spiritual leaders to help me convince the American Christians that they may not be “Practicing” their religion(s) correctly if they are going so far as to try to control people and “Make them do right” by the use of the manipulating tactics of “Shaming” people, and ignoring the harsh realities of those who suffer; while they live a very comfortable lifestyle, as I don’t think Jesus would make anyone do the “Right thing.” We’ll get to the bottom of all the rumors; here’s another example: Catholics and guilt. Is guilt supposed to be a manipulating tactic of the Catholic religion? Then why are all these fifty year old “Catholics” so motivated and controlled by guilt? Do you see? I want to come back to my dad’s Catholic, “Spiritual home, or Roots,” but if guilt and shame are truly supposed to be a part of the religion and feeding an empire system that makes people feel shame for not giving the empire money, then that religion is not for me… and I can’t believe just what any one Catholic can say, because everyone is so scattered in this country; so much so, that one “Christian” will believe one thing, and another will believe it’s opposite. The empire system has got us all following the people within the American “Christian” churches who have the most controlling personalities. The Religions are letting controlling people control others in the name of “Christianity;” which is causing many to turn a deaf ear to the true messages that Jesus was speaking to all of the people of the world.
Here’s an example: A preacher convinces “His” church to stand in front of an abortion clinic and shame young women into not having their abortion there; while shaking their Bibles at the women and pointing their fingers, and calling her a “Murderer.” This kind of action by these, so called, “Christians” is what causes people to not want anything to do with Jesus.
On the larger scale, if we voted for a president; like both of the Bush Klan, who are politicians that attempt to get more votes by deceiving the American people and calling themselves, “Christian;” and then we allow him to terrorize the world with his, so called, “War on Terror” campaign. Then the people of the world think the entire country of the United States, is trying to force “Christianity” on them. The entire world is turning a deaf ear to Jesus’ true teachings; because it would appear to them that we are dominating the world in the name of “Christianity.” Where in your “Christian” Bible does it say to do this? The Bush Klan is making many people of other countries hate Americans. We must show the world that we are lost at sea (Deception) too.
I want the truth, and so does the rest of the world, so I call to the leaders of all religions big and small to circle. Build your bridges between you now. The House for the Seeker will report their “Findings” to all of the people of the world through Jah Grapevine; The Circle of Communication; the circle of humans for humans.
Empires Strike back
Everyone must remember; that some of the emperors have their fingers on a very big panic button; Nuclear warfare. We simply can’t pressure them in the least to where they may feel as if their lives are at stake. Feeling their own shame will be enough to steer them home.
The only way the empires win is if they keep us divided, so you see; they have been winning by keeping us from talking to each other.
It would not surprise me to discover that every mainstream newspaper and broadcasting news station has a secret FBI, or CIA agent as the editors. The editors are the people who control what the mass minds of the people receive. Keep this in mind as we make our move. Keeping the truth from the people divides the people from the truth; therefore, dividing the people.
History: back about 15 to 20 years ago now, Ethiopia was a very lush country; full of food and happy, healthy, Truth Knowers, but they didn’t have a military to protect them from selfish empires. They were easy prey, and it didn’t cost much for another empire to surround their country, and seal up all communication from Ethiopia to the outside world; that is what happened to them by an empire’s military that was in disguise.
An army came into Ethiopia and surrounded the country and all of the people, and held them at gun point while they brought in their harvesting equipment and stole all of the people’s food, and left the people to live without food. We, the people of the United States’ empire never heard that truth about Ethiopia over mainstream media, and the next year Ethiopia suffered a draught as well, once the empire that forced them to live without food left, then the word of the genocide of their country finally leaked out and couldn’t be kept silent by our mainstream media.
TWO YEARS LATER, we finally got the news through mainstream after many innocent children die of starvation while their innocent mothers were trying to comfort them while dying as well. But what we didn’t hear was the TRUTH about how they got in their situation in the first place! All we were told is that these people were all dying of starvation, because of the draught. OUR OWN GOVERNMENT NOT ONLY KNEW ABOUT IT, BUT KEPT THE TRUTH FROM US, because they don’t want us to care. If we start caring, then it will cost us more money that our government already had “Their” plans for spending in mind!
It’s a rumor that the French empire was the ones that robbed the Ethiopian’s food supply, but it may have just as well been the United States!
That is a true story told by a man who fled Ethiopia at that time in the middle of the night; while knowing that lions could get him. He made it to the United States, but you never heard the truth through mainstream media did you?
We could have spent a fraction of the money that was spent on the space shuttle, “Columbia,” (The one that blew up and everyone in the United States knew about, because of mainstream media; therefore, we were supposed to care about.)
While the Ethiopian people were dying of starvation, our empire was spending billions of dollars of the people’s money on the space shuttle project, and we were kept from ever knowing the whole truth about Ethiopia, because our empire doesn’t care if it means costing any money, and our empire is still infiltrated with powerful “White Supremacists.” They don’t want any of us to care, so they tried to put a lid on it!
Did you know that the Jamaican people are of the same tribe as the Ethiopians? Did you know that many of those freedom songs that Bob Marley was singing, was about the situation in Ethiopia; because of the lies that was going on about Ethiopia? “WE GOT TO CHASE THOSE CRAZY BALDHEADS OUT OF TOWN!” The army with shaved heads of an empire! “Crazy,” because they were taught to believe that WE are different, so different that it’s OK to kill others who are weaker. Crazy are WE if we think that we are different then any other human on Earth.
Welcome Home, the truth of last night’s nightmare is very negative, but keeping the truth from the people is worse!
Today, the “War Against Terror” is terrorizing the world. Many innocent countries are being kept from talking to each other, and Ethiopia is one of them again, and their country has been surrounded by another empire, today as I write this 11-05-06, no information is allowed to leave their country; it’s sealed up again and they are now sitting ducks, again, with no chance to cry out to the outside world. WE are being kept from talking to each other; therefore, we are purposely being divided and conquered by “White Supremacists” in powerful places. This has been the case of Iraq as well. The United States has the country surrounded; along with many other anti-empire countries.
We are non-violent and peaceful rebels against all empires. The violent rebels are violent, because they have been backed into a corner with economic sanctions. They are angry at the American empire’s network with Saudi Arabia. “Terrorist” is the deceiving word that doesn’t really tell us why we are being threatened. Are we supposed to believe that there are just a bunch of rich people out there with bombs that enjoy killing people?
That isn’t the case, the truth is that there are a lot of people who hate the controlling actions of the American empire, and are seeking revenge against the Americans because they can’t beat the US. For all of the years though the Clinton administration, and after the first bombing of Iraq, and ever since the first Bush Klansman was in office, and all through the Clinton administration, there were economic sanctions against Iraq. Their innocent women and children were not getting the food, and/or medical supplies they needed unless Iraq gave us oil in exchange, and at the price dictated by the United States’ network with the other oilmen, and their country was surrounded and communication of the people was limited, and/or censored. The outside world was kept from the truth about Iraq, so it makes sense to me, that we got hit on 9/11 by them, if that is truly who hit us on 9/11. The embargoes against all of the people; the innocent people suffer with the violent ones.
We, the people of Earth would like to have a sit-down talk with the violent rebels to see what their side of the story really is, because all we are getting through mainstream media, is what the United States’ empire’s FBI releases to the media to say. All we get is one side of the story that we are expected to just believe all the time. Never have we been allowed to hear what Sodom Hussein had to say, all we see is pictures of him in custody, and no words. We want to hear his side of the story, and we want to hear all the others’ as well to make sure no foul play against the innocent is happening.
The government of the United States refuses to give peace the first chance. They refused to let the non-violently rebellious peace people ever talk to the violent rebels first, or at any time, because they don’t want us to know the truth, because we are against all empires that control the minds of their own people by keeping the truth from them anyway.
Now here’s the news: “The FBI released to the media today that Iraq…” The FBI is in control of all of the news about Iraq. There is no freedom of the press there.
After reading all of this handbook, don’t you think that we, the non-violent rebels can persuade the violent rebels of yesterday to, at least, stop the violence for a while, while we sort through the bullshit and find the truth, or even forget about the past together and all just move forward as one to common ground? You have to believe that they can be reasoned with; especially if they see the whole world sharing everyone’s basic human needs, or at least talking about it, together as ONE.
It’s come down to this: After everything that you have read in this book, would you agree to start a new government with all of the people in the world, if all of the people agreed on it, together, now. We can make this happen in one week; while we find and feed all of the suffering people, and probably take the last day off, as well. Assuming that we could all communicate together as one, and all get asked this same question at the same time; “Would you agree to defy the old system completely with the rest of the people of the world and start all over? OK, these are questions that you can start thinking about. “If all of the people agreed to volunteer and cooperate with everyone else in the world for our basic human needs to be free to everyone, would you agree to that; it would mean that you wouldn’t ever have to work again; except for volunteering (if you are capable, and you aren’t already caring for others; like mothering; if you are a mother, then you are already volunteering for us more then you have to) about 4-7 hours a month/week near your home?” You see; with a one world communication system, questions like these will be asked, and we’ll know exactly how many people are in the circle, and their answers. We broadcast a question, and in less than a week the question gets answered by the whole world. If we, the workers want to change the name of the sky to “Green” and the grass to “Blue;” “SHIFT!” We do it. Do you agree to stop paying rent, and/or housing payment? Do you agree to stop paying taxes? We’ll all agree, and we win. We will be able to shift quickly all the problems of the world into focus, and fix them immediately. Would you agree to spread this like wildfire to your friends, neighbors and relatives? The faster we cooperate together, the quicker we Shift.
There are many people; like me, who would be brave enough to walk down the street in any hostile country, wearing nothing but my underwear and a peace sign or tribal tattoo on my heart, and waving a white surrender flag with a translated copy of this handbook to give to those “Violent ones” whom we have been fooled into thinking would torture us for doing so, and I have a peace pipe in my pocket with the right kind of medicine for us to smoke to help them see that I’m a rebel, too. I’m just a human, not a machine.
We, the empire people of the US are Saudi Arabia’s military, we protect them for quite a fee, we are in partnership with them, and they are sitting on the people’s oil. We have been told many things by our government through the years by mainstream media. We were told over thirty years ago that Iraq was drilling sideways and tapping into Saudi Arabia’s oil. The same people told us that Marijuana caused sterility in men to trick us into not using Marijuana. They lied to us about the Marijuana and we know that was a lie, now. Did they lie to us back then about the Iraqis’ drilling sideways, too? Does the network between the US and Saudi want to rid the world of Iraq’s control over some oil, so the US can have the world’s oil monopolized? Has that been the plan for the last 30 years, and has the word “Terrorism” been used all this time, and at OUR expense as a tool to deceive the innocent into believing we should support our empire, and the constant attack against the country of Iraq? And all the other countries that are against the empire system?
We’ll get the truth to our soldiers in the military and Saudi’s oil shall be ours. The truth shall set us all free. WE are stealing Iraq’s oil that why they are still fighting us.
There are a number of things that the empires can do to try to stop the people from uniting; it’s infinite. They can come out on mainstream and say that they’ve tried to help us, but then come up with reasons why it won’t work. The biggest thing that we have is our circle; our broadcasting system. If we are instantly thrown into a depression, the first thing we must do is align our network.
If mainstream continues to advertise commercials and talk about news that has nothing to do with our circle, or finding, and saving suffering children in the world, then we know that they are not on the people’s side. That’s the bottom line.
To the American “Christians;” You’re going to hate it; then, you’re going to Love it.
Mark 16:15 “Go into all the world and preach the gospel.” Matthew 28:20 “teaching them to observe all things that I have commanded you; and I am with you always, even to the end of age.” Do you know what the gospel is exactly? You need to be sure about this, so I’ll remind you: Observe ALL things that Jesus has commanded. This is the opposite of sheltering yourself and your children from the world. “Christians” of little faith are teaching others to have little faith by this; “Hear no evil, see no evil, speak no evil.” Only see, hear, and speak positively is not what Jesus said. How are you going to go out into the world without seeing evil, and hearing evil, and to get help to others you are going to have to repeat the evil that you have witnessed to others, aren’t you? Jesus is with you, so what are you so afraid of? To shelter yourself from evil is causing you to ignore the world. The world is suffering, and you are ignoring the Truth.
Psalm 23:4 “though I walk through the valley of the shadow of death, I will fear no evil.” If the gospel was just that Jesus died for our sins; therefore we are all forgiven, and all you have to do is believe in Jesus, and jump in the water; then the Bible wouldn’t need to be such a big book. But many of you are brainwashed to stop right there and blindly believe that you have been baptized with the Holy Spirit of truth. How do you know that you have been baptized in the Holy Spirit? Mark 16:16-18 “He who believes and is baptized will be saved; but he who doesn’t believe will be condemned. And these signs will follow those who believe: In my name they will cast out demons; they will speak with new tongues; they will take up serpents; and if they drink anything deadly, it will by no means hurt them; they will lay hands on the sick, and they will recover.”
Taking up serpents means that you have to see them and hear them. You will have to recognize deception, and not be afraid to find it, because you are protected by God.
I condemn you for not being baptized with the Holy Spirit; especially when you believe that you are, and here’s why: Look at all the people who believe that they are baptized with the Holy Spirit. Now look at all the people in the world who are sick. If you truly were baptized with the Holy Spirit and you were observing ALL that Jesus commanded you to do, then you would be going out into ALL of the world and laying hands on them, and they would be healed. If all the people of their so called, “Christian” religions were truly filled with the Holy Spirit and doing what Jesus said to do, then there would not be any sick people in the world! You “Christian,” are the deceived. You are evil, and you are deceiving others. What I’m saying is the Truth by God. You are forgiven, but you are not in the kingdom of God. Your name is not written in the Book of Life. Don’t worry; I’m here to help you see the Light. Forgiven is one thing, but being baptized with the Holy Spirit is another.
I have seen many “Christians” going to church with their new cars and their new clothes, and their squeaky clean bodies, and perfectly groomed hair; while believing that they are blessed by God for having the material things that they have to make life comfortable for them. Many “Christians” of America have been deceived by the evil empire systems of control, and walk in fear that someone of their own church will point their finger, and single them out, just because they aren’t “Blessed” (As they call it) with the wealth to come to church looking like the rest of the school, and giving the church a percentage of their income.
Many put on false smiles (masks) as they socialize amongst themselves, but when they get back to their neighborhoods, they ignore their neighbors, as everyone else does. In neighborhoods; a Christian family on one end of the street will walk back and forth to another Christian family on the other end of the street. And you can see that they are loving each other. But all the other families in between, on the same street, get ignored by them; under the guise of “Too busy.” If they love all of their neighbors, equally; they would, at least, stop and talk to everyone equally, but they don’t, because they are fear-based and live in shame of calling themselves Christian. Because many Christians of today do not go by the true teachings of their own Bible; they vote. Therefore they concern themselves with worldly issues; which goes against what their Bible has said. They vote for those that have deceived them. They vote for those who promote segregation. They vote for laws that control people from being free. They vote for the Empire, but they are forgiven as the rest of us.
Investigating Christianity in the United States; I have only found one thing that they all have in common; the Bible, but do they all interpret it the same? No. They all believe different, except that they all know that Jesus is our savior. One church will have all the children come to the front, so the pastor can scare the hell into them by saying this, “If you don’t turn your life over to Jesus; when the apocalypse comes, the locusts will eat you.” They used fear as the motivator to brainwash children into continuing to go to church. If the children go, then the parents go, and then the money gets given to the preacher. As the empire system has everyone looking to the preacher for all their answers to their confusing questions; therefore, the people believe that they need a leader to help them understand the mysteries of the Bible, and many think the priests, or preachers are closer to God then they are.
Other Christian churches range from a large degree of fear, to a smaller degree of fear, but still fear is their main motivator, as nobody knows the whole truth; everybody just believes things differently. One thing these churches all appear to have in common is the fact that they all sit, and listen to a dominant source control their minds; just like the empire’s classrooms do in public school; therefore, everyone plays follow the leader and the group.
The worst thing that just happened was that president Bush claims to be a Christian; therefore, all the Christian preachers tell their congregation to vote for Bush. That’s the empire in action. That’s why he got voted in for the first and second time. The reasons why for individuals vary; some voted for Bush just so he’ll stop Howard Stern from saying “Naughty words” over the airwaves from his broadcasting station. But others voted for him, because “He is the lesser of the two evils” (In their mind). If he has any evil in him, and you voted for him, then you were deceived enough to vote for an evil man; a deceived man. But others actually believe that George Bush is a prophet. Well, he sure has a lot of power if he is convincing people to kill other human beings in the name of God. He may be the false prophet that your Bible talks about in the Revelation.
The broadcasting stations have said much worse things that are not true. The Christians have also bought into this Conservative/Liberal political tug-of-war; where everyone loses. I’ve hung out with both. The Christian conservative is tired of paying too many taxes and are envious of the fact that they are working hard and others aren’t; like everyone else, but they believe they’ll be better off, so they’ll take the president’s side, so he’ll cut taxes, but they are acting selfishly, as that means that people like me (a disabled beggar) get cut off from my basic human needs. You can’t blame the conservative for that, because I’m not begging them; they don’t see what’s really happening to the poor people; because they don’t want to know; they want to ignore the reality of the causes of their votes, and just care about what is in front of them for their self.
Another reason they vote conservatively is because this system is set up where the taxes are all on the working classes backs; never do the rich pay enough taxes; never. But getting to know the more conscious “Liberal,” I have found that they want to tax the rich and the rich only! They don’t want to see the working class burdened any more; they want to see the working class living happily, but as I said, the empire is really in control, and it doesn’t matter who you vote for; the workers pay either way, so that’s why many go the conservative route; which indirectly fights against helping people who are in need. Indirectly, the Christian conservative actually hates their neighbors, by this, but is too blind to see it.
The conservatives then just have to say, “Vote for us, and you’ll pay fewer taxes.” Then they have their Empire’s broadcasting station’s financial experts host talk shows to cause people to hate “Liberals,” when it’s these liberals that are the ones that truly care enough to want to help the poor. The liberals that the Christians hate are the ones that truly love their neighbors; while the Christians prove that they hate their poor neighbors by the way they vote.
The bridge that I have for the gap between conservatives and liberals is the fact that it’s the Empire system of political tug-of war that has turned us against each other, and we aren’t the labels that they say we are; we are humans, together on Earth. And the one thing that all liberals, and conservatives share alike is the fact that the rich are the ones the need to be taxed, so none of the workers are; the rich have OUR money. They made their fortunes off of our backs. Our blood, sweat, and tears are the reason why they are rich enough to pass laws against all of us humans, and cause us to squabble over their scraps. They are feeding us horse shit; while they feed off all of us, and play with our money. The money (All of it) belongs to the people of the world. The lands (All of them) belong to the people of the world. The oil (all of it) belongs to the people of the world. Everything else belongs to all of us to share equally amongst all of the humans on Earth.
They squawk and hire experts to call our movement bad names; like, “Communism” while true Communism without a leader, may not be bad, as they call our government, “Democratic” but this is not true Democracy, as we have witnessed. What WE are really doing with this movement is true “Humanism.” Don’t try to define that label until you are a human, and a human only, and know that humans can only exist if we depend on each other!
More things for the Christians to fear is the idea that when the teens free-up, they’ll get carried away with it and start doing pre-marital sex, along with all the drugs they can get their hands on. We’ve been starving for freedom for two thousand years, and we need to have the freedom (God granted free will) to satiate that starvation to the point where we’ll find that all the sex you want, and all the other things that adults do, doesn’t make you happy; it just gives us a little relief while we live in mental slavery under this system. The people need to have the freedom to discover these things on their own, at any time they want instead of building a stronger desire for them by keeping it from them.
Christian; this is what’s going to happen. Teens are going to become free, and they are going to over-indulge on those things that give adults relief; while they party and build the circle, but the outcome is going to be a shortage of drugs and alcohol; therefore, once these supply’s are depleted, the entire world will become sober for a short time; at once, because the supplies will be drained. When that happens is where everyone will experience a natural high that warms their entire being, as we all enjoy our oneness, together.
You can’t be intoxicated to reach the Kingdom of God; that’s true, but others have found that Kingdom through meditation, and some have used hallucinogens to take a “Trip” and get a good look at it; even though they don’t feel it when they become sober again. As time goes by, many have dropped the drugs and selfishness, and found God their way. The point I have for you, is the idea that anyone can reach the Kingdom of God when they are ready, and that’s true. So when a poor homeless alcoholic beggar comes to your church, and repents (Surrenders “His” ego), then he’s accepted and all the sins of his past are removed and forgiven, as far as you are concerned; that’s also true, but they were forgiven any way, so why not let everyone in the world overindulge until they find that their overindulgences of selfishness are keeping them from the Kingdom on their own; then they’ll come “Home” to God sooner. Christian, you’ve been passing laws to make people do the right thing in your mind, but it’s not working! You have to give people the freedom to make their own discoveries, and the time to look in their own mirrors without any influence in the form of control; be it laws, shame, guilt, and especially starvation of their basic human needs. If we don’t, then people will just continue to use pacifiers that lead them nowhere.
Judgment day is today, as we know that we are already forgiven; therefore, God doesn’t even judge us, he is our witness, as we look in the mirror and judge ourselves with his watch. Judgment day is today for you if you’ll look in the mirror and judge yourself with God’s help. Start looking real hard, now.
Christian it’s up to you to start thinking, but soon it will be a shame to not Love your neighbor to the point that they know it; every neighbor. Oh, you say you love your neighbor, and that you are looking out for them by voting your way; that’s not loving your neighbor, as history is our proof. Do you even know all of your neighbor’s names; their children’s names; names of their scarcely visiting grandparents; their pet’s names; do you feed their animals, and water their gardens when they go traveling? Would your neighbors run to your house, first, if their house is on fire? Do you share meals with your neighbors? Does your relationship with them grow; the love and trust, or is it at a stalemate? Christian: We know that most of these answers are “No!” The main point of your leader is, “Love Thy Neighbor as yourself;” not fear thy neighbor. Love thy neighbor even if they hate you and you don’t trust them; then you’ll build trust with them, together, as things can only get better. If you are trying, then you have nothing to be ashamed of, but if you continue to be ignorant, then you are walking in blasphemy, and you will feel shame until you wake up. Don’t ignore your mirror; today is Judgment Day.
As stated before, the empire system causes us to control each other with laws. People with controlling personalities like laws and learn them quickly, so they can use laws to control others; it’s a sickness. Many controlling people are attracted to Christianity because they can find even more laws within their organized religions to use to feed their controlling desires; especially when they don’t follow the true teachings of Jesus; they just follow the deceived preacher at the podium with the deformed hand.
“Christianity” as a separate group of people was not ever a desire of Jesus. Nowhere in the bible did he say to form an organized religion that promotes segregation of the people, as Jesus spoke to all of the people of the world equally; all the churches. The reason why you are sheltering your children and keeping them from mingling with “Others” is because you know that you aren’t raising your children; the empire is; the world is. You know that your children aren’t around you all the time, because we are all separated and working all the time; therefore, you know that they can be easily influenced to go in the wrong direction. Why else would we shelter our children too much? Think about it! If you are their parents, the people who love them the most, then why do you fear that they won’t listen to you? Why do you fear that they’ll be easily led astray from you? It’s because we didn’t know what we were doing by letting the rich enslave us, and feed us with their broadcasting systems the food that they want us to eat; deception. Join us, so we can all stop working all the time, and raise our children in a heavenly way.
We have to be very careful with this movement. Other people of other countries and religions are also very segregated when it comes to gender. Men force their women to cover their bodies; almost completely, why? Sexual temptation provokes men’s weaknesses of their religious beliefs. If we plan to help other countries and we come over there and our women are wearing clothes that hug their bodies and show any cleavage that provoke men’s sexual desires; which cause women to obtain power from the weaknesses of men’s sexual desires, then we won’t be accepted. Most women in America have been so deceived by the Harlot spirit through corporate broadcasting throughout the years that we don’t know any better. It appears to me that most women try to make themselves very desirable so men will do back-flips over them, so men would die for them, or give them everything that they want. This is a very selfish move for the women’s empowering movement, and is sending women the wrong message, and in the wrong direction. If we help other countries with that attitude, they might even say that we are devil worshippers, because they aren’t ready for sexy women to invade them. We must try to be neutral with other countries on this, so we can attempt to build the bridges to them from where we are from.
Speaking of the devil, and since I’m talking to American Christians; what is the “Anti-Christ?” Most Americans don’t even know, because we are that deceived. The Anti-Christ is deception. Just go to the story in your bible, at Genesis, and you’ll see. God gave Adam and Eve everything that they could ever need, and want. They were completely innocent and Truthful; there wasn’t one drop of deception in them. They were so innocent, that they didn’t even know to be prepared for deception. Then God gave them the freedom of choice; the freedom to choose between right and wrong by saying to them to not eat from the tree of knowledge. They were happy with what they had, and didn’t want any more, as being happy with what you have is one of the lessons of that Bible for us to learn. But then the deceiver showed up, and they weren’t prepared for deception. If I am able to bring this whole world the Truth, but I have one little drop of deception in me still, then I could lead this whole world astray with that one drop of deception in me; even if you thought I was a prophet. The Anti-Christ is the spirit of deception. What should have Eve done? She should have told Adam exactly what the deceiver said, so they could discuss it, but she was so innocent that she had no reason to not believe the snake. When she acted on “Her” new beliefs that were now separate from Adams beliefs, she was also innocent, but she acted separately from Adam. She acted independently from Adam; She acted with self; she acted from “Her” ego. The deceiver divides us. She should have brought the new information to her partner so they could process it together. That’s the other lesson in that story. Bring what you witness to your circle, because we are now depending on each other. Process it to discover if it is Truth, or deception, before you act.
We have all been filled with deception, because we were all innocent, and didn’t know how to protect ourselves from it. We are innocent now, because we were deceived; therefore, we didn’t know any better. We simply must be forgiven by God, as everyone on Earth must be forgiven.
If our “Leader,” (A word we are used to, because of the empire system has taught us to accept following a leader) has one drop of deception in him, and we all follow him, then he’ll eventually lead us astray again; even if we thought he was a prophet. How many drops of deception is in your leader? Leaders lead us all with “Their” beliefs in mind; with their own ego. We can lead ourselves now. If a person has one drop of deception in him, then how can he lead? We don’t know how to protect ourselves from deception, but we are learning quickly now. Who can lead, if every “leader” is deceived? No one human can, but all of us can help each other live life to it’s fullest, as long as all of us are asking questions, and not any one of us is giving answers. We’ll bring heaven on Earth as we’ll continue to live dependently with each other as we process our new discoveries of Truth, and follow the TRUTH.
What is the Anti-Christ, Christian? Let’s go to your own Bible again: John 16:5 has a title above it in my Bible that reads, “The Work of the Holy Spirit.” Read down through John 16:13, “However, when he, the Spirit of truth, has come, He will guide you into all truth; for He will not speak on His (self, or ego) own authority, but whatever He hears He will speak; and He will tell you of things to come.”
If the Holy Spirit is the Spirit of truth, and so is Jesus, then the Anti-Christ is the spirit against the truth (Deception). Doesn’t that make sense to you? Then to me, there is no one man that is the Anti-Christ. A false prophet may lead people for a while, but they’ll wake-up, and see the truth, as they open up their eyes for it. Could George Bush be that false prophet? Didn’t he state over mainstream media that he thinks that God is talking to him? Isn’t he leading a bunch of people that believe in him? Is it that simple to figure out? In finding the truth, do we ask a bunch of questions, or do we state our opinions? Once an opinion is stated, then the mind is closed. There, I just stated an opinion; is it true? There, I just asked a question, to open your mind back up. Question every opinion that I state in this handbook to keep your mind open, but be careful of “Your” conclusions.
If our leaders have one drop of deception in them, then they should just keep their mouths shut, unless they are asking questions. Otherwise, the deceived will continue to lead the rest of us astray, as we have all been trained to follow blindly, ignorantly, and innocently through the empire system of training our minds to obey, and that started at age five. Keep questioning “My” statements, because the truth is near them, as I am attempting to be out of “My” mind and into “OUR” mind.
Almost everywhere in your Christian Bible, you can replace the words “Holy Spirit” with the word, “Truth,” and you’ll see some Light on this subject. The definition of “Truth” is also distorted by many “Christians” due to the brainwashing that is very prevalent. To say that that truth is Jesus, as “Jesus is the Way, the Truth and the Life,” and that Jesus died for our sins is a truth, but many are replacing the word “Truth” every time they read that word in the bible with “Jesus.” Your unselfish walk with Jesus’ true teachings is attempting to walk unselfishly; the WAY that God would want you to walk.
Of course, Jesus is walking in God’s way; that’s already a given. You can’t find the truth if you keep replacing “Truth” with the “Jesus” every time you come across the word, and expect to go any farther in Truth, because it causes you to stop looking for any more truth. Obviously, if we had all the truth, then this world would be healed already, and we wouldn’t be so confused. But you can replace the words, “Holy Spirit” with the word, as the Holy Spirit is the Spirit of Truth. 1 John 5:6, “And it is the Spirit who bears witness, because the Spirit is truth.” Ephesians 6:11: “Put on the whole armor of God that you may be able to stand against the wiles of the devil” (deception). The truth cuts in like a double-edged sword. The sword is the Spirit of truth that is the word of God; look here: Ephesians 6:17, “And take the helmet of salvation, and the sword of the Spirit, which is the word of God.” If it’s the word of God, then it is always the truth. Now look here: Mark 13:11, “But when they arrest you and deliver you up, do not worry beforehand, or premeditate what you will speak. But whatever is given you in that hour, speak that; for it is not you who speak, but the Holy Spirit.” If you are doing God’s work and at least trying to walk as unselfishly as you can, all you have to do is speak the truth; therefore, don’t worry about it, don’t think about it; just speak the truth; yes, it’s that simple!
My job is to Guide you toward the Truth, as we find it together. Here’s another question: “Could those who are the most deceived, believe they are the least deceived?” This is definitely a question for the American “Christians.”
Controlling Corporate Christian Coalition! You have been causing people to go away from the Bible, you have been pushing people away, but what have I done. I’m trying to bring the truth to the world, and now I have some of the most defiant kids on Earth today reading the Bible. Are you still going to say that this is a, “Satanic plot to overthrow the government,” or are you going to wake-up and yield to the Truth?
Let’s go to the Revelation. First off, do you believe that Jesus is going to actually appear in the flesh and walk among us as he did before, or do you believe that the Spirit of Jesus is going to bring the peace on Earth. If we try to figure it out as a mathematical equation, and plug this variable into the puzzle and say that all humans in one circle are the Spirit of the Christ, then it is very easy to see that the prophecy of the Bible is being fulfilled now, and the Hopi prophecy is also being fulfilled at the same time, and perhaps many others as well. Remember; Jesus speaks to all humans equally. The reason why I say this is because there is a picture of Jesus calling in the sheep with his arms spread out. I believe that he was starting the circle, as the Alpha. He had a hand for his neighbor on his left and another one for his neighbor on his right; now we’ll take our neighbors’ hands and complete the circle that he started, and call it the Omega; all of us being in the Spirit of the Christ, or the Oneness, perhaps. You can kind of get the idea that I’m trying to bring to you to fit this in our equation. Rev 18:17 “For God has put it into their hearts to fulfill His purpose, to be of one mind, and to give their kingdom to the beast, until the words of God are fulfilled.”
Many pages of the Revelation in your Bible are going to all happen at once with this Shift. Let’s clear something up right now for those who actually think that Jesus is going to kill people when He returns; not “My” Jesus. How can you possibly believe that the prince of peace is actually going to kill people, after all that he has spoken; that would mean going against God and life and the Bible. Those who believe that are the deceived, and that should just about clear up the confusion on this subject.
What is going to happen is the deaths of our egos, we are all going to look in our own mirrors and judge ourselves with the Spirit of the absolute 100% TRUTH witnessing, and we are going to ask ourselves questions; “How selfish have I been? How deceived have I been? Do I really know what Love is? Do we kill people in the name of peace, or do we not ever kill people in the name of peace? Am I Spirit filled, or am I condemned? Etcetera! We are going to stop ignoring the truth on Earth, and start seeking it on Earth as if it was the Holy Spirit we were seeking, as they are one in the same. The Truth shall set you free. We are going to start dropping our egos and doing a lot of apologizing for our selfish pasts; that’s the deaths of the book of Revelation; killing our own egos; killing the “Self” part that divides us from loving others as ourselves.
The fall of Babylon and the death of the Harlot spirit. The Harlot spirit and the empire system and commercialism are all of what makes up Babylon. All are going to fall, as we realize that we’ve been allowing temptation to lead us astray. The temptation for more is what the deceiver put in Eve’s mind. The temptation for more is always prevalent in commercialism. Psalm 23:1 “The lord is my shepherd; I shall not want.” Commercials are deceiving, and having sexy women sell milk causes us to want more then just the milk. We are going to put an end to broadcasted deception. We are going to seek always the places where deception is working for all to see clearly and put an end to it.
To get us to always want more, and to not be happy with what we have is the desire of Babylon, so we’ll continue to keep feeding the machine with cash flow, but is not the desire of God.
John 16:7 “Nevertheless I tell you the truth. It is to your advantage that I go away; for if I do not go away, the Helper will not come to you; but I if depart, I will send him to you.” I’m the Helper. I pray everyday that I am one with God; that I align myself with what God would have me do, as I have said this after visiting many, so called, “Christian” churches, “If Jesus is my Lord and savior, then I believe that he is.” I’m just a human who is attempting to speak for God, and I have to filter these messages that I get through a very poisoned ego to try to bring truth to the world. I’m not the King of Kings, or the Lord of Lords, or am I? That is for you to decide, not me. I believe that together in the Spirit of Oneness that we are all the King of Kings and the Lord of Lords. I do not speak on my own accord, and I do not want to lead you astray, so I can never be known by you, or else I may be tempted to take advantage. I am a Holy man, I am seeking the kingdom of God, as I keep seeking it, and I don’t need anything else. I don’t need to stand on a stage and have fooled temptresses look at me with hungry eyes as if I was a rock star to be worshipped and treated like I was better than anyone else. I am shedding all selfishness for you, and I want to go out in the wilderness someday and try to fast for 40 days and nights. How could I do that with all the fooled Harlots desiring me? Heck, I’m a selfish American, I would be too tempted to go astray from God’s desires; do you get it yet? As soon as you think that you know who I am; you don’t, understand?
Let’s proceed with the Revelation as I am to tell you of the things to come. First off the vision in the introduction of this handbook is just an idea, how it really plays out may be different. The same goes for my translation of the vision in the book of Revelation. Oprah has been stung by the great Harlot Spirit and will soon realize it when we shame her for partying with the “Sex in the City” girls and spending broadcasting time influencing other women to wear sexy underwear, instead of spending all her time influencing the world to feed the suffering children of the world that she is aware of, but ignoring because she’s “Too busy.” This is an attempt to bring many to awareness as we pressure her to come home to the people and give up all “Her” money if she has to. She’ll only do that if she knows that we will continue to treat her like a queen, and that she is safe. She will come home if the empire doesn’t kill her first; protect her.
Rev 19:11 I pray with all faith that I am the Helper; that WE are the Helper; that I am one with the Christ; therefore, I am the Christ; that we are one with the Christ; therefore, WE are the Christ. “Now I saw heaven opened, and behold, a white horse, and he who sat on him was called Faithful and True, and in righteousness He judges and makes war.” The war that is happening is the war of your own mind. You are at war with yourself (ego) and many who have the same mind-set as you, are at war together with you. Conspiracy theories are a way to plug in variables to find the truth; even if they aren’t true. You plug it in to find the deception, and then the truth. If one doesn’t work, you use another one, but that get’s lengthy unless you are going after the big picture.
You are your own judges with the Spirit of God. What keeps you from loving your neighbor as yourself, and why does this sound so foolish to you? Ask your mirror.
Rev 19:12 “… He had a name written that know one knew except Himself.” This tells you that it’s not Jesus. If it’s not Jesus, then who is it? The Helper?
Rev 19:15 “Now out of His mouth goes a sharp sword, that with it He should strike the nations. And He himself will rule them with a rod of iron. He himself treads the winepress of the fierceness and the wrath of the Almighty.” Notice that it says, “Out of his mouth comes a sharp sword…” the sword is the sword of Truth that comes out of my mouth, but don’t let me deceive you, make sure that everything that I said in this handbook is the truth; you are being tested. How do you strike nations and cause violence, if you are not holding a sword in your hand? Christ isn’t killing anyone with the sword, the deceived egos of men are dying by the sword of Truth. This guy sounds like me; what do you think? I’m adding stuff to the Bible; like a thief in the night; aren’t I treading the wrath of the Almighty? And I’m an American; which naturally means that I tread the winepress of the fierceness? Spreading the truth to conquer deception is the rod of iron; even though I have a sharp sword here, my job is to teach you how to find the truth and conquer deception, so when the world is in the circle, then we have a hold of our swords together, as they become the rod of iron; being the truth in all nations; the truth of the empire system, and the truth that we can take control of the world and rid ourselves from suffering, and working so hard, as long as we cooperate together; that is the Truth. It may not be a He, but a We; remember this is a vision.
Rev 19:17 -18 “… ‘Come and gather together for the supper of the great God, that you may eat the flesh of kings, the flesh of captains, the flesh of mighty men, the flesh of horses and of those who sit on them, free and slave, both small and great.’”
The supper of the great God can only be when we feed all of the suffering people of the world, as we cooperate together to accomplish this task. When killing your ego what is left? Your body; your flesh with a big heart in it. The heart is not of you (self) it is for others; therefore, they are eating our flesh, but not literally; they are eating what we would have consumed if we continued to ignore them, because we were so selfish. We are giving to them our one body; the body of Christ to eat; as rich and poor, soldiers, slaves of the empire system, and free people (tribes) are all cooperating together to bring the relief to the world. The flesh of the horses is all of the military equipment and other vessels that we’ll use to feed the world forever, and bring us all to equality and a world wide social security. We are feeding the world; saving the world with real food; and the flesh of the body of the Christ, as everyone is killing their egos to come home to humanity by actually moving our bodies; our flesh, to help others.
Rev 19:20 “Then the beast was captured, and with him the false prophet who worked signs in his presence, by which he deceived those who received the mark of the beast and those who worshipped his image, these two were cast alive into the lake of fire burning with brimstone.”
What is the beast? The spirit of selfishness with deception. Are we not conquering selfishness and deception with this movement? We have all the rich fools surrounded don’t we? There egos are captured. When you are losing everything that you worked hard for, doesn’t that cause you immense frustration, anger, and agony; gnashing of teeth? This is the lake of fire. If George Bush is the false prophet; notice that he’s being thrown into the lake of fire alive; he is not to be killed; just his ego, and you can imagine how much his ego is going to burn as he reads this and sees thousands of teenagers waving white flags on the white house lawn. The sooner he gives up (Repents, and kills his ego) the sooner the burning stops, and the sooner he’ll be relieved; otherwise his ego will burn forever with shame, and everything else; remember, we want him on our side; he is to convert; we want his flesh to go to work for us. What is the mark of the beast? Is it our Social (in)Security numbers? Is it the habits of doing what everyone else is doing even if everyone else is being deceived, selfish, and ignoring the NEEDS of other suffering humans; the habits of Babylon?
Rev 19:21 The rest of the deceived egos were killed with the sword of Truth; the rich all come home to the circle and bring their gifts, and all of the children of Earth eat comfortably and sleep comfortably forever.
To the Hopi who are reading this: I am not a thief in the night; WE are thieves in the Light. Like a thief in the night, we can steal any part of any prophecy that states, or causes us to believe that disaster may happen because of this Shift with the Truth. We can cause only “Win-Win” situations to happen with the truth, and the sooner we get organized the sooner the win-win situations happen. Organize the communication of all of the tribes, circles for freedom, the environment, human rights, labor, etc. now!
Rev 20:1-20:15 Think of Satan as man’s selfish or deceived thoughts, and Sin as man’s selfish and deceived actions; all of which come from the self; the ego; the part of our mind that separates us from others. Once the world rids ourselves from these things, we make it to the Age of innocence again. It’s like we’ll come a full circle from where Adam and Eve came; first, eating from the tree of knowledge and wanting more for our own individual selves; back to the other direction again; only the next time we are hit with deception, we’ll know what to do before we let it ruin our lives again. The 1000 years of Christ is coming through the Shift and beyond. The part of which Satan comes back to deceive us again in 1000 years is a warning to us to always be on our toes and focus and discuss matters to make sure that we aren’t being deceived again by our “Own” egos; either as individuals or as a group.
I stated that judgment day for you is the day that you look yourself in your own mirror, so keep that in mind as you read Rev 20:12, because I don’t want to add anything to this part of the Bible. Christians of America, can you see that you are very rich, and you know the story about the eye of the needle and the camel. You are not in the book of Life; you are not going to enter into the kingdom of God, as God is my witness, I swear to you that you have been deceived by these false teachings, just because everyone else in your church believes they are Spirit filled. They are deceiving you; especially if you aren’t laying your hands on people and actually seeing the healing happen with your own eyes.
Rev 20:10 “… And they will be tormented day and night forever.” Whenever you are thinking about, and for yourself only and always wanting something more, and something new, etc., you are being tormented by your own mind; you are being selfish. Learning to be happy and content with what we have (as long as we aren’t starving) and helping others live by cooperating with them is part of God’s way, but anytime you think for yourself and wanting more for yourself, then you are already tormenting yourself, as many have tormented themselves throughout their entire lives. Basically, you are already dead, and dying at the same time; therefore, the spirit of the beast and the false prophet are tormented tormenters, and if they never stop thinking for themselves, they’ll be tormented forever, as their spirit attempts to spread to those who are still alive, as deception itself is always tempting us to give our energy to it.
Rev 21 to the end of the Bible is really just the beginning of Life on Earth. A life that all of us can be living; a truly happy life with almost no work and a whole lot of play; we’ll be making play out of work always. After we have our world wide social security of our basic human needs done, and the communication circles in place; we’ll be weaning ourselves from working so much and evolving quickly into relaxing while we work and cooperate. There won’t be a need for nearly as many people actually working, so many will be idle. As soon as our children turn 12 they’ll be free to do whatever they want and they’ll want to have meaning in their lives, because they’ll be cut-off from pacifiers that cause them to want to just sit around all day and do nothing; they’ll want to really live a free life. Some will volunteer to live on a farm; for example, and you can imagine a big farm where one or two farmers used to work, now they’ll be 10 to 20 teenagers living in their own little community while running the farm, and the old farmer is now retired after he has trained them and they are guided by the farmers circle of communication.
Teenagers will be producing our food with our support, help, and guidance for many years until they can do it all on their own. I’ll tell you why, later.
People will be automatically teaching their children how to read, and write and count, etc. without cramming the training into them; like the public schools of competition did in last night’s nightmare. We’ll evolve to where elders are done ever having to work by age 40, so if they want to, they’ll go to college then to learn how to help the tribe. They’ll take a placement exam and wherever the exam says for them to start, they will; that means they don’t have to know anything until they are forty, so we can just have a happy life without schools for most of our life. Now think about it, if you live forty years on this Earth and you are volunteering here and there throughout your life, you are already going to know quite a bit before you decide to go to college, but many teenagers will decide to go to college immediately, so they can become doctors, etc., and we’ll support their decisions, too.
Let’s skip ahead as we’ll fill in the blanks later with what we really do, as these are just suggestion for the circle, but it’s the circle where all of the people will decide on our next move. Remember: we’ll always be seeking the truth of how humans are supposed to live as happy as we possibly can live.
We’re going to bring modern technology, wells, and irrigation for agriculture to all the directions of Earth and train the people there how to grow food in the most efficient ways. The majority of the population of the world may even migrate to the tropical zones of Earth after we eliminate the dis-eases that have been keeping us from living together there.
We will not have competition of and for work anymore, so that means just one source for everything; that one “Company” is the people’s, and we’ll continue to streamline our old workplaces to cause us to have to do less and less work throughout the rest of our existence on Earth. Many buildings will be emptied from book keeping and accounting, insurance, etc., because we won’t be needing to watch everything so closely, like we were in the “Maximize profits/minimize loss” nightmare of yesterday. We won’t be splitting up our family and going in different directions; everywhere we go, our family will always be welcome, and nothing will be too dangerous for them not to go with us, unless it’s an emergency situation of saving lives, etc.
We’re going to eventually have a Disneyland amusement park for every child of the world to visit for free at least once a year, and as we evolve we’ll be able to visit them twice a year, and then three times, and so on. We are going to have the safest and most comfortable forms of traveling for our families. Not having to be stuck to any one job means that we’ll be free to travel the planet whenever we want, but we’ll probably have to plan it ahead of time; like we normally do. The buildings that are emptied will be used to grow some food indoors until we are sure that we can grow all of the food for the world outside, but many of the emptied buildings will be used for temporary housing as we travel; like hotels.
Instead of having just one jetliner, take-off and fly solo; they’ll always travel in pairs, so if one does go down, they’ll be found as soon as possible; the same goes for sea travel. Sea travel will be very comfortable and they’ll be as much enjoyment in the journey as in the destination as no one will be working for the ships; we’ll all be cooperating and traveling for free, and we’ll have many ships that are only driven by wind and solar power, as we’ll never be in a hurry, or on a time schedule.
The Aircrafts are going to have life-capsules; like life-boats, and if the airline must go down, the capsules will eject and each one will be able to be operated easily to ensure a safe landing.
When moving to a new neighborhood, you can forget about worrying what the house will be like, because what the neighbors are like will be all that matters. Your future neighbors will be doing everything for you, so you won’t have to do anything but take care of the little personal things. And the neighbors from your last neighborhood will do most of the packing and hauling for you, as you would do for them when they move. We won’t be too busy for each other anymore.
Every child will have access to a handful of candy at least once a week weather they have been good or not-so-good, or weather they were rich or not-so-rich before; every child in the world; equally.
If we do decide to continue schooling, then 12 year olds that volunteer to teach can teach the 5-8 years olds , and the teachers that know more, can teach those who want to learn more, etc. As a 12 year old teaches 5 year olds, they’ll learn more and sharpen their minds, and will be able to move up and up, as they’ll be learning as they are teaching too, and nobody will be cramming education down anyone’s throat; it’ll always be fun or we won’t do it.
American Christian; I’m still talking to you. Look at the big picture; look at all of the satellites and other toys that we have in outer-space. What were we doing that for when the world needed so much healing? We were like the big bully on the block that brings his toy car out to play with while all the other kids just watch in envy as he doesn’t let any of them play with his toys. Combine all of the militaries of the world with all of their equipment, along with the satellites and the money from the rich, and we can easily feed and heal the world.
There are suffering children and their parents trying to stay alive while you are sitting on your fat ass and ignoring them. You shall not sleep comfortable, or eat comfortably until they are fed. Do you understand “Christian?” This is fasting time for you! You are not to sleep until they are fed forever; until they can eat and sleep as comfortably as you! We can do it in less then seven days. Get off your ass! I want to sleep, too, and I’m with you; we are in this bed together!
Africa is all set-up now to distribute all of the food and medical supplies it needs to put an end to the spread of AIDS, and they are very ready for more education about not changing sex partners, but at this time in history many men are still tempted by prostitution, because these women are working to bring food to their family’s table. We’ll bring the food to their tables and they won’t have to go to work and spread the disease. It’s that simple. They are ready for this, and we shall heal them quickly!
I’ve watched your “Christian” channel on the TV. If Billy Graham was truly Spirit filled and his name was written in the Book of Life, he would be able to walk all over Africa and heal everyone. He is a deceived deceiver and he is leading you astray, and here’s the proof: Matt 19:24. These are the words of Jesus, “it is easier for a Camel to go through an eye of a needle then for a rich man to enter the kingdom of God.”
Now Tom Cruz is calling himself a Christian. Didn’t he just spend millions of dollars on a religious ceremony; his wedding? His rich friends were all able to be there, and eat like kings and queens. If they would have gone over to Africa; all those young strong healthy people with all that money; they would have saved some lives with it. No ceremony for any religious reason can ever be sealed by God as long as any of God’s children (any of us) are suffering while you waist time organizing the ceremony, and feasting in God’s name. That means every Sunday for the Christians, or any time. There is to be no ceremony on Earth until all are fed equally! You are wasting time and energy that causes others to suffer longer. Think about every ceremony in every church building on Sundays. Think about all the combined energy that is wasted for the ceremony, now put that energy to the right use. What would God want you to do if you could all combine all that energy?
On your Christian channel I saw a movie where a husband say’s to his wife, “I don’t know why God sent this man to me?” And she says, “Maybe God didn’t send him to you; maybe God sent you to him?” Maybe? If you are truly Spirit filled; there’s no “Maybe?” The Lord works in mysterious ways, but if you are filled with the Spirit of truth, there is no mystery. The woman in this movie was also wearing a top that showed her cleavage… You have been very deceived.
Catholics: My heart is very close the Catholics of the world. They pray for world peace with their rosaries, and most of them are very humble and nice people. Nevertheless I have these things against their empire. They are too nice, as the proof is the fact that most of the countries that are dominated by the Catholic empire are poor. The Catholic empire is just that; an empire, as the priests stand high above the people with bright robes on and extravagance with something like a crown on their heads to cause others to believe that they are closer to God than the people sitting in the pews down below them. They look upon the Pope as if the Pope was better, or closer to God than they are.
This is not right, as many Popes and priests of the past have proven to be ungodly. The way Catholic churches operate in the United States shows me that their empire has always been a den of thieves. Many people are brought up through the church, and then they start raising a family, but when money becomes a problem they stop giving money to the church, and this causes them to feel shame, so they stop going to church. When they stop going to church for a while and then die, they aren’t allowed to have a Catholic funeral. This is a way to keep people going to their church, and to keep them continuing to give money.
Think about the priests of the United States that just got caught for having sex with little boys. Catholic priests don’t have the freedom to marry and must ignore all of the sexual temptation that is everywhere in the US. Many can’t ignore their sexual desires and are in the priesthood for years when they shouldn’t be there at all. They don’t work either, so that means that the people feed, house, and clothe them. Now you have been working all of your life and giving a percentage of your income to the Catholic church that has been supporting the dirty priest for forty years. So for forty years you have been paying your priest to have sex with young boys.
The confession is where things must change immediately. No child shall ever get alone with a priest in the confessional ever again, because of this. There is to be a circle of four priests present; or more but not less. These priests will protect the child from the possibility of the secret dirty one, and in doing so they protect themselves from false accusations. A child, or adult, is not to confess his dirtiest and darkest secrets to a solo priest alone again. It causes too much temptation for a priest with a dirty mind to take advantage of the individual.
If the Pope was truly baptized with the Holy Spirit then he would be walking around Africa healing people as he lays his hands on them. No Pope in the history of the Catholic Church has ever been baptized with the Holy Spirit. All have been deceived, as they are no better than those who suffer. I’m telling you the truth.
Mother Teresa is one of the few who’s name is written in the Book of Life, because of her actions; she gave until it hurt, and then she gave some more, as she healed people with her hands as she tried to heal more and more with her hands. Follow her example with your body language. Catholic; get your hands out of your pockets; the church doesn’t deserve the money.
The Catholic Church was once called the Roman Catholic Church. Do you see the connection? The Church is set-up like the Roman Empire. Look what it does to “Their” people. It causes them to be segregated from the rest of us. If people stop going to church, they are shunned. The Roman Catholic empire is divided as the people below the priest, popes and bishops are not considered equal, as they feed off of “Their” own people; their own people are mentally enslaved by the empire system, and there is just too much shame and guilt that motivates “Their” people; controls them.
Have you ever heard this statement, “The devil wears a crucifix?” The empire system is the system of deception; therefore, as Godly as the Pope tries to be, he has a drop of deception in him by this. If he has a drop of deception in him, then he is the deceived leading the deceived into continued mental slavery; the blind leading the blind.
If you say that this is not true, then one of us is in blasphemy against the Holy Spirit, as the Spirit of truth is my guide; Matt 12:31. I told you before; I tread the wrath of the Almighty. You must consider that this is the Word of God. Many speak the words of God, and they’ll join the circle, and all the words of God will then be spoken.
The Catholic Church has many Mexicans who are being deported back to Mexico by the secret American racist force, and the American Catholics are not standing up for them. If your religion is that good, where is your unity among you? Join us, “Catholic,” and we’ll fix all of our religions together. You are humans, not a religion; not a puppet.
Remember the “Conscious Dance?” If you are a strong person then you could look people in the eyes and be friendly and say “Hello.” And talk to them as if they are the only person on Earth that matters right now. If you are a broken person, you can’t be friendly. Push the strong person inside you to come out. If you are being friendly, and saying hello to someone, and you know that they are a human, because that’s all you know, then you are teaching them by example. You are teaching them the correct way to be with people. If they aren’t friendly, then they’ll think about it; especially, if more and more people are coming out of their shame-based shell and pushing themselves to be friendly, together. If you go a step further with this plan, and you meet a “Stranger” and use you body language to attempt to ask for a hug while you are approaching them to give them a hug, then you are shining more Light on them. And if they don’t accept the hug, don’t feel rejected and shameful; it’s their lose. And as more people do this, they’ll start to think about it, and after a while they’ll not only accept the hugs, they start giving them out. It’s best if you are a man to ask a sister if you can have a hug, because some sisters are more open if they are ready; especially if they are in a group that protects them.
“Christian;” we are calling you home to the truth. Go out into all the world and spread the gospel, but use your body language and shut your mouth until you know what the whole gospel really is. Lay your hands on the sick and watch them heal right before your eyes! Get off your ass now and start a circle, or join the circle. Go out into the entire world, and lay your hands on the sick, together! You shall choke on your own food until you do, because others are literally starving to death because you are ignoring them! You shall not be able to look in the mirror until you do! Drop “Your” ego; what are you waiting for? Are these not the words of God? Does God not want all the suffering on Earth now to end? We shall do it now! Join the circle.
Welcome home, Christian, all are welcome to the human tribe; especially you. Come on home; we love you; the true you, not the deceived one. Welcome home.
I heard a rumor that there is a city named, “Babylon” in the country of Iraq. This is not exactly the city of Babylon that is in the prophecy of the Revelation that is to fall in your Bible. “Babylon” is the entire Babylon system of commercialism and competition through the empires that has been spreading all over the world, and is most prevalent in the United States. Do not protest in anyone else’s city of Babylon until you protest in your own city. Let the people of Babylon attack their own city(s) with this peaceful movement.
Brother George,
You are a human, but what you practice is that of the false prophet. We can easily steal the part of the Bible that says that you’ll be tormented forever, and here’s how. Kill the false part of you; kill the deceived part of your ego; repent and come home to the people. Kill the “Self” part of you and you can then walk in truth with Christ. You can seek to have your name in the Book of Life with the rest of us. You are either with us, or you are against us, and we’ll know either one at all times. Oh, come on home! We all know what you’ve been up to by your deeds; we can see the burning ego pour out of you as you sometimes talk to the people with anger on your face. Hey it’s alright; you were deceived, so were we. We understand what you were all about; we understand. You are forgiven. Welcome home, we love you, brother. We are making history that will stand the test of time forever. You’ll be known as the biggest man in the world, because you let down a very big ego; a very heavy mask, and stood up for what is right; the people. George, I can see you because my mask is off; that’s how we know.
Money in the United States
I met a man who was adopted by a farmer in the early 1900s; during the first great depression of the United States. He was 8 yrs. old when his father had him plowing fields with a tractor. He went over the railroad tracks and got too nervous and the tractor died right on the tracks. His father was a long way away, so the boy decided to try to start the tractor. It was one of the hand crank kind, and he was too small to turn it over like a man can, and he was worried that a train might come by, so he thought that he could position the crank just right, and he stood on the tractor and jump off and onto the crank; it started right up.
As this man went through life, he just went along with the “Christian” program and got his college degree, and he fought in a war. In his thirties, he had acquired his father-in-law’s 10 million dollar empire by working hard and proving himself.
He voted republican; like almost all business men do. After thirty years his empire grew to 20 million dollars as he worked the thirty years, and while he treated his employees as fairly as he could. At the same time the cost of a head of lettuce went from 10 cents or less to a dollar of more. And the Ford trucks that he used in his business went from $2000.00 to $20,000.00 or more.
All the time that he was working and voting, he thought that he was making money, but the empire was slowly pulling the financial carpet out from underneath him. His money doubled as he was a conservative investor, but the costs of everything went up over ten times, so he was really losing money for thirty years, all-the-while he was deceived by, perhaps, by the same people that he was voting for, as they just continued to slowly print more money throughout the years; which makes the value of the dollar weaker.
He is one of the nicest men I’ve ever met, and he is still alive today, and is probably still living in ignorance of the truth, because he’s still comfortable living off the scraps from the Emperor’s table. He is living in mental slavery… its called “Fooled by deception.” What are WE living off of; his scraps? He gives us a job so we can work for all of our lives, but we work harder than him. He is simply the blind; leading the blind.
You think you are rich with 10, 20, or fifty million? You are, and getting poorer every day.
During the depression the unemployment rate was at 30%, but later, when Reagon was president he had the way we rate unemployment changed. During the first depression, the 70% of the people that had jobs of the US were still buying all kinds of goods and services, just like today. But now it appears as if we are in a hidden depression, and I’ll bet that if WE used the same way to rate unemployment, it would match that of the last depression, since there are millions of sick and homeless people, now in living in the US. And the empire found a way to stop the stock market from crashing and panicking the people with the use of computers, but we can still see that we have been slowly spiraling down into a depression. What this means is that not everyone can have their American dream at the same time. Many can’t even try as they are too busy struggling to stand on their own two feet as a result of all this confusing money business, and bureaucracy.
During these depressed times, everyone is in slavery and they don’t know it. Almost all the men have a short, post-military haircut, so their bosses won’t fire them, or so they can get a job. The government capitalizes by showing the world pictures of us, as the whole world is deceived by the broadcasting. The whole world thinks we are one big military, and that we are united and that we all support the emperor’s plan to gain control of Iraq. The whole world hates us, because of our emperor. WE are not united, most of the people do not support the president, but they have it set-up so we are supposed to support him. Many who do support him are just fooled republican businessmen, or the fooled controlling corporate “Christian” who thinks the president is close to God. How can he be a man of God if he tells everyone that we are going over to another country to kill “Violent Rebels” on their own ground? He actually used the word, “Kill” in his speech to the world. What WE have is a John Wayne and Clint Eastwood loving redneck in the Whitehouse! As Hollywood is that part of the empire that trains people to be used to the idea of killing without a conscience… to teach our youth to kill without conscience.
Our empire is a “War machine.” To gain more people in the military, they turn down the economy, because WE stopped the draft back in the sixty’s. More people out of work, means more teenagers wandering around with ADD and no money and no social skills due to the lack of the governments education system; therefore, many young men don’t know what to do with their lives out of high school, and they feel as if they need someone to “Push” them through life, so the military offers them a job with newly printed money. It’s that simple. All that means is that everyone suffers more… everyone.
What can the Empire do to counter this attack of freedom? They can start by bombing the states of the coastlines of America where the most politically conscious people live; the “Green” states, but by then our teenagers have spread this to the entire country to make all the people of the U.S. conscious of it.
They could bomb the entire country and kill us all, but by then, the entire world will be conscious, because the teens were not just spreading this to English speaking countries; they took it straight to people who spoke other languages within their schools, as the United States had people in it from all over the world, as well as every language. Those who are bilingual took it to their circles and they translated it perfectly into all the languages of the world, and sent it off to the countries where those languages originated, and from there the “Word” spread like wildfire.
Those tribes who didn’t have electricity or any connection to the outside world where hand delivered the word to them by the Rainbow family, as Rainbows were already in every tribe of the world and speak every language of the world, and have always been ready to work for the entire human family.
The Empire has a name, “Goliath.” I am WE; WE are “David” and so are you. I’ve cut a hole in his Achilles tendon with my double edged sword of Truth, and it’s big enough for the rest of us to crawl inside and take control of his body.
The Filthy Rich
The filthy rich are not on the Fortune five hundred’s list of the richest people in the world. These men are so rich that their identity is kept very secret; they don’t want anyone to know how rich they are, because they know that we are loaded with envy. They are hiding; especially now that we are uniting. They are known as “The Illuminati.”
Neal Young state’s in one of his song on his “Living with War” CD, that “They high-jacked our religion!” He’s talking about the Republican Party deceiving the Christians into voting for Bush and all the other republican conservatives. But what really happened is that the rich high-jacked the Republican Party, but wait… The rich high-jacked our entire government! We have a divided house, and that is the desire of the rich. To keep us divided and playing tug-of-war while we continue to feed their machine as our lives go by. The filthy rich hire people like George Bush to be their little puppet. They use George as a slave to enslave us all with money. Can you not see that we are all enslaved by money, and the desire to want more? Can you not see that the famous people on the TV are just hired actors that are enslaved by money to advertise commercials that cause us not to unite? Can you not see that they are hired to distract us from caring about the poor and the suffering? Can you not see how we ignore those who need? The filthy rich will be coming home, too. Welcome home.
Our own individual desires to want more when we have more then those who suffer is proof that our lives have no meaning. What is the meaning to life? Give until it hurts. Buying material possessions is proof that we are constantly reaching for more things to make us happy, because we are literally starving for happiness. Our lives have no meaning if all we are is alone in our minds. Mother Teresa’s life had meaning, because she helped people be happier. If you are suffering, and someone helps you; doesn’t that make you feel good? Out of the kindness of their heart, they gave to you when they didn’t have to; that gives their life meaning. The reflexion that someone gives back to you when you give to them is your happy face in the mirror; it is God smiling at you for using his heart. That is the meaning to life, and the road to everlasting life is the journey. The everlasting life is now when you are giving now.
Looking back at the Willie Lynch syndrome, and we can see that he took just about everything that Jesus told us to do, and he reversed them. Causing the slaves to do the opposite of what Jesus said. It almost looks to me, as if he used the Bible. Jesus was teaching us to unite. Is this not true?
One more thing for the Christians: Matt 22:32 “… God is not the God of the dead, but of the Living.” When you are dead, God won’t be around for you, so what are you doing with your Life with God now? Are you ignoring the world, because the world is too negative? Are you ignoring what God would have you do? I know you want to ignore this whole thing and hide, but it’s in your face now; your mirror, and so is the Truth
To the Illuminati; Obviously, Willie Lynch was one of you and now he’s dead and long gone. What meaning did his life have? We know that before there were rich oil men, there were rich slave owners. You are from a very deceived place, and a place of lesser power than God. To think that you are, somehow, the “Chosen” people by God to receive the riches of the Earth that God has given you is a lie. After reading everything that you have read here, who do you think you are going to get your food from when we take control? Join us, because it is possible that you were chosen by God to hold our money for us. Thank you, and now we’ll have it back; now. The more you cooperate with us, the sooner we turn this planet into a heavenly one; after everything that you have read, you can see that we can do it now; with or without you, and soon your money is going to be worthless, anyway. Join us, you are forgiven for being so deceived; you are innocent. Welcome home.
To the “African American” “Gang-bangers:” How do you feel knowing that the rich slave-owners of yesterday, have just migrated into the powerful places and are still in control? The proof is their ignorance to help Africa and the poor people of America; they are still in control; only now they are controlling all of the people. The abolishment of slavery happened because “White” people helped your descendants out of physical slavery, but now all of us are living in mental slavery. How does it feel to know that “White Supremacists” are still in power, and they are enjoying that fact that you guys are killing each other; like they are enjoying seeing Africans suffer from the ill effects of starvation and AIDS? Does this reality push your ego enough to call another “Truce” between you? Please stop killing yourselves, and join the circle; the Shift is here, and it’ll be worth staying alive to see. Join us, and we’ll all be freer. Bring out the white flags. You are going to lead us, because you got nothing to lose. WE are going to turn this vision in a reality.
Please build the bridge between the gap that divides us; please over-come the attitude of the “White-man” owing you your life, because it is only a few that hate you; the rest of us are just scared of you, because we are still acting very different. You are talking the “Jive-talk” still, because English has been the language of your oppressor, and you have rejected it for a very good reason, but now English is the language of our oppressor. When you talk to people with that disrespectful talk, you are making yourselves different, so different that many “White” folk and still scared, as it appears as if you are trying to make us work to understand you; that’s defiance against the oppressor, and again we understand. Many of us “White” folk have been trying to find a way to bridge that gap, but we need you to do the work from your side, or else it just won’t happen. Please don’t make us pay for the sins of our fathers, because many of us took your side and died for your freedom out of physical slavery.
If someone shames you by saying, “You are just trying to be ‘White.’” Please consider telling them, “No, that is not true, I’m just trying to be a human to help bridge the gap between humans.” Please find the truth in these words and be strong; please speak to everyone respectfully. I love you; I really do, but too many times, I have tried to be friends with African Americans and I have been burnt every time. Nobody squeezes money out of me; I give it, and let it go as a gift of healing, as I believe that every gift heals; even if the brother takes the money and buys alcohol with it. I know it heals.
I have given lots of money away; not out of weakness, but out of love, and as soon as the money stops coming, so has the friendship. And I know that I’m treating you unfairly, because they aren’t you, but I said this because a lot of people feel this way. Just like the bad cop gives all the good cops a bad reputation, I have ran into too many people who have given “Black” people a bad reputation. The gypsy on the street is not what all “Black” people are like, but these guys are representing you as they do their deeds from where to many “White” people see it.
Just these little differences cause too many people to feel nervous and uncomfortable around each other; especially, when mainstream news has us all afraid of every “Stranger.”
I’m on the “outside” looking in, and that means that you are on the outside looking in at us. We are not the “White” people that you see on TV. We are fucking stressed, and because we are so busy in this fast-food culture, we’ll find a way to be too busy to even talk to you, or even look you in the eyes, because we don’t know how to deal with our little differences that become big, because we don’t have the time to care, but it’s not a “Black” thing. But if your mind wants to believe that it’s prejudice, you’ll always see it; even if it’s not there. Please stop looking for it.
I’m telling you that after Michael Jackson gained so much acceptance when he was coming up, and Michael Jordan. “White” people have gained a lot acceptance to the forced on prejudice of the empire people who were trained to hate by the slave-owners of yesterday. Add to that list Jimi Hendrix, and Bob Marley, and all the brothers and sisters of the “Soul Train” era with all those happy songs of the 70’s, and there was “White” kids with posters of “Black” people all over there rooms, and in many households. And today there’s white kids all over the country; listening to Rap music, and dressing like gang bangers; is that not true?
I’m telling you that we are ready to bridge the biggest gap between people in the United States to conquer this empire system, together. So if you guys could please not only stop killing each other, but start being friendly to each other, and loving each other, then you’ll lead this train home; then you’ll start being friendlier and friendlier to “White” people, and you be teaching them by example. Many aren’t going to trust you for a while, because that is what we inherited from Willie Lynch and the empire system; along with the fear and the envy. I know this sounds crazy, as I’m out of “My” mind, but is it not true?
By doing these things you can lead us home. Just get together and talk about it, please. If we bridge this gap we have already done it.
We especially aren’t the people you would see on the women’s Lifetime channel; that channel is designed to poison women’s minds and cause them to envy what the women on the show have. The show has the perfect setting with the perfect woman and her perfect clothes, hair, nails; the perfect house, furniture, and decorations; the perfect husband, and children; the perfect person to clean their perfect pool; the perfect cars, and the perfect yard and landscape; the perfect conflict in the perfect script, all on the perfect sunny day; that’s all an illusion. We aren’t anything like that.
Note that the truly “Black” people of the world are the ones who are sitting on top of the money pyramids; they are the most deceived; the most selfish. They truly Light people, are the least deceived; the least selfish, and they are of every skin color.
Please try to build that bridge and know that we are just humans, and there is nothing to feel weird about. But if this is too much of a stretch for you, at least consider joining Farrakhan’s “Million’s More” campaign; we are twin brothers of different mothers, and he is one of my greatest teachers. I’m begging you, I’ve been saying “Please, please, please,” because that’s all I got. I’m on the outside looking in, but one of my feet is planted in the heart of the human family, all I can do is beg, so I’m fucking begging you, please come home! Welcome home.
The People’s Court
The people’s Court is another sub-circle for and of the circle of humans. Everyone who is brought before the court will always be considered innocent until proven guilty, and they won’t need any lawyers, because the volunteers for the people’s court are on their side, and ours. Since the people’s court is a sub-circle of the main Circle, they are automatically connected to the Women of Prisoner’s Circle. Notice that I early mentioned the label “Gypsy.”
Gypsies are face readers and they are of every country of the world, and in some places there is one in every family. When you question a small child to see if they are lying to you or not; what happens? If they are telling the truth, they look straight at you with innocent eyes and tell you the truth, but what do they do if they lie? Their eyes will shift to the side and they usually look away, because there is something in their little innocent minds, shame, that automatically causes them to feel it, and therefore, they just can’t lie and maintain eye contact. But as we get older, and we learn to be skilled lyres, it takes more skill to determine if we are lying.
Many parents and teenagers are not aware of the face reading/eye contact way to determine about lying, but many teens get away with lying, because they get into a habit of never maintaining eye contact with their parents, because the parents don’t know the importance of teaching their children to maintain eye contact with people as a form of respect, or to show people their heart through their eyes.
We are into the Age of Aquarius; the age of truth. In the United States you’ll hear young women talking about a man that one of them had a discussion with as a potential suitor, or boyfriend, etc. You’ll hear them say things like, “and when you said that, what did he say?” “… and do you think he was telling you the truth?”
Men have become very crafty at fooling women into loving them, so the young women have to pick away at the men to see if he is speaking truly from his heart, or from his balls. Many young women are very savvy about the craftiness of young men who are starving for sex, so they’ll discuss things to “See” where his mind is coming from, and sometimes they’ll set him up with questions or situations to see how he is going to handle them. This is not just face reading, but mind reading as well.
In general, we have been secretly and subconsciously picking away at deception without realizing it for many years, and now we are going to become conscious of it, and rapidly learn to eliminate it from our lives.
Let’s look some more. In the family dynamics, usually the oldest child is the most serious, and the most controlling. If parents don’t know what they are doing, they’ll put this child in charge of the other children when they go out. The problem with that is the oldest child usually has a sub-conscious jealousy or resentment of the younger children, because before the other children were born, this one got all of the parent’s attention, but as soon as the next sibling was born, the baby got most of the attention. Adding to that is the fact that the oldest sibling doesn’t care to love the other children as the mother would.
Let’s use the older sister for example. She’s a deceiver, and a face reader at 14 years old. She set-up her younger brother to never tell on her if she does something that her parents don’t want her to do; she’s already beat him for telling on her once. Then she talks the little brother into lying to their parents. As he lies to them, she reads what his face does; now she can tell every time he lies; she’s got him completely controlled, as she has become an over-controlling person, as well. As her life goes by, she sharpens that skill, and it doesn’t take her long to read all of her friend’s faces, and her husband’s face as well, as he will no doubt be someone that she can easily read, and control with manipulation and slight, subtle gestures.
She developed her skill all by herself, but what if she was a child of a gypsy. Same scenario, except the mother and grandmother are training her to not only read faces, but read minds as well. Over the years they form her into a monster that sets people up for the perfect con. Do you know what the perfect con is? The perfect con is where you never even think that you’ve been conned. Think about it; instead of two young women talking about the suitor, its three gypsy women scheming, and teaching each other how to read people. “What did his face do when you told him that?” “That usually means this…” “You see?” “When he comes up with an excuse; instead of just saying, ‘No.’ sternly; that usually means that he is feeling guilty; especially if his face does that… squeeze him a little more by asking him for something less to see if he’ll budge any.”
If a gypsy asks you for something, and you are feeling guilty by saying, “No” with an excuse that is a lie; they know right away, and they have got you where they want you. You are the house, they are the thief; they have nothing to lose, so they’ll push and squeeze you with words to see if you’ll give in; they’ll even insinuate that you are lying to “Work” on you, and if you don’t know what they are doing, you’ll find yourself giving in to get rid of them.
The police interrogators and principals of schools are also going to team-up with gypsies of yesterday to make sure that no one will ever be able to deceive, not only that, we’ll use the people’s court to help us eliminate deception from broadcasting completely. These are the kinds of people that are joining the circle and the people’s court. They’ll know when you are lying, and they’ll pick away at you until you fold. They are going to have a lot to offer. Welcome home the gypsies.
Watch this scenario: We have a guy that we caught stealing and there are many witnesses; remember that all of us are equal now, and everyone shares everything, so all this guy had to do was ask for things, but he didn’t. We surrounded him and held court for him right there; then we say, “Hey, brother, we all saw you stealing; don’t try to deny it, we know that you are all screwed up and so were we, just confess, and apologise!” and he’ll start crying, and drop “His” mask and come home to us, and we’ll understand and forgive him. Murderers, robbers, and other violent people are a different story, because we can’t just let them walk without reform, because we have to protect ourselves from them, so that’s a project for the Mother’s of Prisoners Circle, as it is something that we’ll have to investigate as a trial and error, perhaps.
Guess who will be the first to face the people’s court? Michael Jackson; why?
He may be innocent. And he will be able to step forward to tell us his story. Michael is the victim of the perfect con.
Earlier I talked about fear, envy, and distrust. The powerful “White supremacists” of the world not only envy, and distrust Michael, they hate him. We have to talk about all of the good things that Michael did for the world before he was first accused of any wrong doing with children; the list is a long one. Michael has a heart of gold. His greatest achievements probably went unnoticed, but he organized the “Live aid” concerts with Bob Geldof for the suffering children of Africa, and he started the Heal the World organization.
He spent a lot of money on the Heal the World foundation, and he had many rich friends that were donating and generating money with him to feed thousands of orphans of war-torn countries.
Michael’s downfall is that he is very naive. Having lived a very sheltered life from the outside world do to his childhood success has caused him to not ever know the outside world. He became a target as all the people that were donating money were causing the government to receive less tax revenue, due to the tax write-offs they were receiving. But that’s not what got him targeted. The main thing that turned the tables on Michael was the Half-time show of the 1993 (1992?) Super bowl.
Every typical empire person of America watches the Super bowl; especially the flag-flying “White” supremacists in powerful places. During Michael’s performance he had a black hand shaking a white hand in the middle of the stadium as a symbol to influence the uniting of people of the two different groups. That angered the powerful white supremacists, and they had enough of Michael. Michael was an angel for the people. But I predicted that he would get set-up by the evil force, and that they would get him exactly as they did.
All you have to do is be accused for pedophilia when you are famous, and you are then rejected by everyone, just in case the accusations are true. After the tabloids tore Michael a new asshole with their lies and deception, Michael was through gaining popularity and his empire was weakening quickly, as the tabloids continued to hammer him. Almost everyone in the United States now BELIEVES that Michael is guilty. Notice the word “Believe,” but we are so full of envy that we couldn’t help but to believe; especially when he touches himself on stage in his dance routine.
Touching himself was his idea of being a “Cool” pop star; like when Madonna performed a masturbation routine, and Britney Spears is wiggling her flesh all over the stage. But Michael was “Black” and many of the tabloids that tore him apart are owned by “white” people of envy and distrust. Add everything together and it’s easy to think of him as a monster, but everyone has conveniently forgotten the huge heart he had before the accusations. He wasn’t found guilty, but when the “Hard Copy” tabloid hired two actors to lie and tell the world that they were his body guards and that they saw Michael abusing children; that was the big sell to the American public, as they were very convincing, but when it was time for the trial, the two actors weren’t ever there to testify, because they weren’t ever his body guards. What caught my attention was that these two “Body guards” looked like skinheads.
The second time Michael was accused, he suffered more torment by the tabloids as “Guilty,” but after time passed the boy confessed that he was just trying to get money out of Michael, but we didn’t hear about that did we? Mainstream media wasn’t on Michael’s side.
If I’m wrong, then there’s no harm done, but if I’m right then the entire world owes Michael a very big apology. Currently Michael is walking in shame; only because he has been so rejected by everyone, and not because he is guilty. We owe him a chance to come clean and tell us his true story, and that will happen in the people’s court in front of our mind readers. If Michael is innocent as I BELIEVE he is, then he’ll come running to get the truth to the world, if I’m wrong he’ll hide. Currently Michael is innocent as to the laws of the land, but to most of the people, he is guilty because we are motivated by fear, distrust, envy, and hate; like perfectly divided people under the empire. We may have been stung by the perfect con, because Michael was one of God’s little lambs.
Michael, I know you are going to get a copy of this; whether you are guilty or innocent, the truth shall set you free, think about it. You can’t go on like this, and mainstream won’t let you tell your story to the world now, because they are all Republicans in a network. Just over the TV, I can tell you are on heavy medication to help you deal with it, but get off of the drugs, so you can deal with the problem; instead of just treat the symptoms and sweep it under the rug. Wake up Michael.
Taking Michael’s side is taboo, because I could cause others to turn away from this circle, but I’m not in control of the circle; you are. If I have said anything that may offend anyone, or if I said anything to cause you to reject an idea then blame me, but don’t blame the circle, or the other Rainbow warriors out there who may not agree with everything that I have said either. Stay with the circle; I’m just one drop of water, but together we are the ocean, and we’ll know all the truth. We are melting the solid walls of deception from both sides now.
We have a lot of adjustments, much thought, and perhaps, trial and error, but it will be worth it. Let’s play this game, shall we? My money is always on the underdog; therefore, I have always been a loser, but once the underdog wins; we all win. I’ll rack; you break.
We can’t expect “White” supremacist to start loving everyone, but we can expect them to come home to the circle to rid ourselves of the empire system; we won’t know who they are as they can just “Hook-up” with their neighbors, and stay right at home.
Pahana
I am Channeling and trying to keep my ego asleep, so I can bring a perfect translation to you, but I must filter this translation through a very poisoned ego to bring these words to the American empire first, so I must use idle words to speak to them in “Their” language, so don’t fault the intention for the mistakes that I may make when translating.
“{Allow ME to introduce myself: I am the Word of God. ME: “M” is an upside down “W” for WE in the English language. “Me” of the selfish ego, and “We” of the heart of God are complete opposites where a bridge between the two is being built. I am “We.” I am out of “MY” mind, and into “Our” mind; the heart of God that doesn’t speak with words. The bridge between the two shall be complete while obtaining a “Win-Win” situation for everyone on Earth. I am the King of Kings and the Lord of Lords of OUR beautiful planet Earth. I’m hear to tell you of the wedding of all women to all men and has conceived a child to tell you of the marriage; It is the opposite of “ME” (the self). It is the child called “WE;” the unself (unselfish). I am the King of beggars. I’m the King of hypocrisy. I am the King of Ego, and I am the King of all the translators of the world of communication, and I’m here to tell you that we can all speak one language now, because of the forced English language that originated from the evil British Empire; it’s the language of “intention.”
Is every language of this planet translated to a neighboring language? Is every language translated to and from English? “Yes,” to both questions; BINGO! We have come all the way back to the days of Babylon; just before we started going in the wrong direction to find God by building the tower. Before the days when we were happy with the now, and what we already had, and didn’t need more. The story of Adam and Eve of the Bible teaches us a lot; “Be happy with what you have.” “Report to each other exactly what you witnessed to your circle, so we can examine it to make sure it is the truth and that you aren’t being led astray by deception, and so you aren’t leading others astray with your new false ‘Beliefs.’” We are now going to go in the correct direction. Look for God in the eyes of your neighbor, and that’s as far as you need to go. The loving (Selfless) friendships and trust that grows between two neighbors is the true tower to God. Neighbors are your only true social security. Make little baby-steps if that’s all you can do towards each other. Build the bridge half way if that what it takes, and use God as the center support. Plant your best foot into the middle of the human circle; the circle of all the humans on Earth and know that you are one with all.
I am the King of translators, so I say to all translators of Earth. Build a strong bridge of trusting friendship with your neighbors; especially with the people of the other languages. There I said it, so shall it be done. Hey, it’s already happening! That was said not out of arrogance, but out of Love for you; why else would I be here if not for you, but Kings on Earth aren’t perfect; Humans bonded together by selflessness are. I have adopted you. I am married to the father; therefore I am married to you. Women of Earth have been married to the father for quite a while now, but many didn’t know it. If I’m married to the father and so are you, brother or sister, then WE are married to the father together; We are married to each other by God. We are the child that is maturing as selflessness is the way of God. Welcome home to the Kingdom of God (more on that later, I’ll get you here if you aren’t already… it’s my job).
Unfortunately, you who can read this in English come last, as all of our children who are suffering more than you come first; said as a good father would respond to those children who need the most, and to this large degree of suffering brought forth by the progressive English speaking empires.
I am WE; like the Kings named, “The Beatles” sang a song that was so wonderfully translated, but not quite perfect: “Come Together, right now… over WE,” would have made it a little better of a translation. The Beatles were translating energy from Kachina, and so were the flower children of the 60s. Do you remember hearing about or seeing people go naked in front of the general public (uninitiated children)? That was Kachina taking off the mask of shame that has befalled upon us since Adam and Eve’s days of first puberty (perhaps?). Do you remember Elvis over-coming shame to dance on stage and wiggle his hips, when it was illegal (by the unwritten laws of shame) to do that in front of the general public? He was affected by the star of Kachina, too, as he overcame the fear, and thought for himself (he was actually doing his job for us) and took off the mask of ego that kept us all from being free (freer). That shame is part of the gourds of ashes that will fall on the West. It is the end of man’s egos against each other; the beginning of true freedom on earth.
The gourds of ashes are that of the burning onion peels of ego around our hearts. We’ll all say, “We are sorry for all the selfish things that we ever did in the past;” together. And then we’ll forgive each other for we really had no clue of what we were doing.
The ego is here to protect the injured part of the individual’s heart. It is the lonely heart that drives the ego; the sore part or the heart that protects itself from more pain. Along with the mental habits of self, the scars of the heart are also some of the onion peels of ego. The onion peels of ego are the layers of shields to protect the heart; which, together, caused extreme selfishness within the empires.
King of Ego
I, a boy of 4 years, you a girl of three
A bow and arrow is gifted to each of WE
The bow is the heart of WE
The Arrow is the ego of “Me”
I know why arrow is used
But you don’t
You know why bow is used
But I don’t
I break arrow and hand it to you
That is what I teach you
You break arrow and hand it to me
That is what I taught you
You then play music with our bow
And that is what you teach WE
The Empires were driven by the Holy Grail; Women.
Women of the empires had to be kept fed in order to produce healthy soldiers. Empires had to farm in order to continue to grow in strength. They got over-strong, by knowing that there may be some empire with an army that’s bigger than theirs. The women had to milk the cows while breast feeding the children, because the men who drank the milk were too busy being soldiers. None-the-less the children had to have their basic human needs met; which was always the driving factor, as the need for care of the children were spoken through the mouths of women. The happier the women, the healthier the children and the stronger the warriors. Mothers of the world, together, you are the Holy Grail! Mary represented all women, she was the spirit of the body, the Holy Grail. All of you in the flesh are equal to her, together, and as individuals. You all carry the extra “X” chromosome that marks the spot of the arrow meeting the heart. You are born Lovers, Love is action, you give to make others happy, or not suffer as much. You relieve with Love. Men need that part of you that they don’t have, the arrow hasn’t met their heart yet; men only have a “Y” on their back foot. That means that they have less gravity to help you get your needs met, and they have other positive things to add to our union that you don’t have. Together, WE have it all.}”
King of Beggars
Date Maker: Men Seeking Women
I’m looking for a soft woman
You must have a soft voice, a soft body, a soft smile, soft skin, soft hair, soft head, and a soft heart; soft.
I’ve had women who were cat lovers, but not dog lovers. I’ve had women who were dog lovers, but not cat lovers. I want a woman who loves all animals, mother Earth, and Father sky.
I want a woman who cares enough about the suffering people in the world that she’s actively doing something for them.
I want a woman who wants to give affection, because I’m starving for it. All women are the Holy Grail to me; just a drop of pure love from your heart is all that I’ll need to fertilize me and illuminate this black hole star into the brightest star in your sky.
I want you to be the mommy that I never had; to admire me for just being born. I’m full of shame and am a manic radical rebel, and I have so much gravity that I can’t even shine, but one drop of your love will be all that it takes to help me shine like the star that I was sent here to be.
You have the XX chromosomes, I only have XY. You have four legs, and I only have three, so I tip easily. Together we’ll have seven legs, and we’ll be “Beauty and the Beast,” and with your love WE won’t know who the “Beauty” was from the “Beast.” I’m the lost dirty old abandoned three-legged dog that is scared and alone, and I don’t need a bitch in heat. I’m mean because I was never loved, but that’ll change with the help of your four legs.
I want a virgin who shall stay a virgin. I want to be next to that pure power; a woman who is married to God, but right now I’m a hypocrite.
You shine on me for a little while, and I’ll learn to shine as bright as you in return. You’ll be the polished Holy Grail that God intended for you to be. Together we’ll illuminate the whole world; together.
As a “Thank you” goes a long way for those who give, the tears you shed for me goes a long way, too, because I know that you really care; that you have a heart of solid gold.
Six stars shine on Earth, I’m the seventh star, and it’ll take the power of all the other six to illuminate me, and bring me all the way “Home” to true Love. Your world will always be in daylight.
I’m crying out to you, “Welcome Home to Love… Please bring me with you… I’m begging you!”
Here’s how to find me: I could be hiding from the world in your prisons, or out on the streets; begging for mercy. Please come and get me soon… I’m trying to stay alive for you, but it’s getting harder and harder with each passing day, and winter is coming, and I had a real bad dream last night… Oh mommy; where are you? I need you now! I need you to hold me, and tell me that, “Every little thing is gonna to be alright.”
Women of prisoners (wives, mothers, daughters, grandmothers, friends, etc.) are to form one communication circle over the entire world to help reform those lost souls correctly. You will have one big loud voice for them. It shall be called, “The Women of Prisoners Circle.” You’ll probably get a lot of help from Amnesty International on this project; merge with them.
The Hypocrite Hokey Pokey
by The Hypocrisy King
I step forward to the Light with my front foot
In the black mud of selfish habits is my rear foot
I seek and brace my front foot on a color of beliefs
I rest in my old habits
I talk and talk and talk towards my next step forward
But when stressed, my rear foot pulls me backward
To the mud I fall back, but I’m still standing
I rest in my old habits
Two steps forward and one step back
I stagger to reach the Light of self-less-ness
I must think and talk before I walk
I rest in my old habits
I reach my front foot to the middle of the Truth
My front foot is planted in the Light of Oneness
And my rear foot is covered in mud
I rest in my old habits
I’m “Home” as long as I lean on my front foot
My best foot is forward
But, often if I lean back.
I’m a hypocrite to others
But what am I to you?
They are children having a tantrum
While I’m trying to grow up
I’m looking in the mirror of self judgment
It’s judgment day for me
They are looking at me with judgment
They aren’t ready to judge themselves
I’m at least thinking about walking the talk
I don’t judge them, they are where I was
They judge me, because they don’t know where I’m going
I’m going forward in self-less-ness, but where?
They see the talk, but not the walk
I’m forgiven by God, but not by them
They are not supposed to judge me
I know that and forgive them
For not forgiving me
For not understanding about the black mud
The black mud is of the compounded years of deception
That is caused by those who temp our weakness for their gain
To make it to the heart of all the people in Oneness is the trail
But that causes us to feel our selfish ego pain
You plan to pull the rear foot out of the mud
You brace yourself on a color of beliefs
And try to shake the mud off
You need not worry
The front foot is planted on the facts on Earth
Sharing is the opposite of the black mud
Planning your walk is no bad thing
“Talk, Talk, Talk your heads off”
says the happy Hypocrisy King.
You may only be one step away
But you must know what Love is
Before you can walk the talk
Love is walking the walk
Love is action
You are Loving if you are stuck in the mud
But trying to pull any foot out of it
You are loving if you are looking in the mirror
You are no hypocrite
You are a human
On Earth with the rest of us
Hypocrites are at least trying
You are forgiven for stepping up so quickly
That you had to take a step back
Hypocrite; I Love you.
Keep up the good work
You reach the Truth as you plant your foot in the center of OUR circle
The Truth and the facts that WE are one tribe; human, with the same needs
“Misfit” they call you, but you fit in here; even if it is one foot at a time
Together, WE’ll be dancing with both feet in the Light soon.
Look in the mirror you see yourself
Then you see God, and you ask
“What do we mean to each other?”
Then God shape-shifts into your neighbor
“What do we mean to each other?”
Is it “Me” and “You”
Or is it WE?
How many peels of ego will have to fall
For your mask to be gone
See God in the eyes of your neighbor
Some must look really hard
Admire them as if they were God
Peel, peel, peel
I can see you, but can you see me?
Peel your mask off, and you’ll see
That “They” are really WE
I rest in my new habits
Do the Hypocrite
Hokey Pokey
And turn your life around
That’s what it’s all about!
What if the Hokey Pokey
Is what it’s all about?
Welcome Home
Sincerely,
Hopi Paleface
The Rainbow Road
My bridge: Put your best foot forward and lean on it and then plant it as far as you can towards the middle; imagine that the middle is the heart of God (total unselfishness with the ability to respond to the needs of others). If God isn’t the correct word for you, then think of it as “The Heart of All Humans”, or “The Human Circle” (whatever?) and that you are actually seeing Light. That means that since you are leaning on your best foot forward, your body is your back foot and you are actually moving your body to help others today, now… a baby step at a time, now imagine you having an attitude that everything that you do is for others, that you are just a channel for God, a walking puppet; what would God have you do right now, here on Earth with your body (your back foot)? Because your mind is thinking about doing good for others and being a better person, but if you don’t connect with the heart of God; therefore, the heart of all of the people of the planet Earth, and you don’t move your body as God would have you do with your body right now, then you can’t connect to the feeling of “Not being alone inside anymore” feeling; the “I know I’m ‘In’” feeling. It’s like the feeling when you first fall in Love; Euphoria, or are begging for change and someone hands you a hundred dollars, and he looks at you like he loves you with all his heart (of God?) but this is all he can comfortably do for you. The feeling that fills you up inside is greater then the feeling that he felt when he saw how happy I was… he felt it… as I did… He felt good for giving… He felt the warm glow that over whelms you like the sun shining on you from the inside of your heart out… he felt that, as I knew, that he knew that I understood, and he is my brother… I saw his heart through my eyes, and he saw mine… it’s like we “Fueled” each other with God’s love. We energized each other… he’s the one who gave, and I’m the one who took, but he felt the same glow as I did because it was truly an unconditional gift… the “Welcome to the kingdom of God,” feeling.
“Holy Shift” is more like it. I’m in and I know it with at least one foot; always now, as my mind and my heart are one with God’s and yours. Welcome home, I’m at your service; what do you need? I am one with WE; that’s you and me. I’m married to all of the humans on Earth. God was just my bridge, but not necessarily yours; that’s for you to decide.
Anyway, I’ve got some adopted children who are suffering all over this flocking planet, and I want them relieved now. Could you all just get together with me and relieve them now, so I can get on with my life… or does it always have to be this way when you are in the kingdom… could those of you who are already here tell me how you can live with this pain in your heart for them? How do you get that tough when you are in here? It’s impossible… Oh the mud… I forgot… this is just my front foot talking… here’s my body: Your neighbor. Welcome Home.
Here is my tunnel to Home.
Having been raised in the US, usually means that at least one foot is standing in the black mud of deception and self. From the outside looking in; you can see that there are different colors of beliefs, but no matter what the belief is, if you take one foot out of the black and place it on a color, you are heading in the correct direction. The color is the trail away from selfishness and deception. At the end of the tunnel is the Light.
In the United States most of us have been raised by the empire, not our parents. Our parents were just providers doing what the empire expects of them. In our schools at the young ages is where most of the damage is done, so here’s a look at a way to tare down some walls. We have to see how they were built.
If you speak, or think negatively about another person, then you just put up a little veil in your mind between you and them. If they approach you to just visit with you, you are holding onto that veil; the wall, so you may not let them in, even though they don’t know what’s going on, because you become an actor. To their face, you may be nice, but inside of you, you are guarded from them and don’t accept them just because of the wall that you built.
That was just a small example of one veil, but most of us have a very thick wall inside of us, and we are very ignorant of it, because we have been living with these kinds of habits for all of our lives. The news tells us about murders, rapes, kidnappings, etc. while our parents are taught to teach us to not talk to strangers. Look at the big wall that we are set-up with already, before we leave the house. Commercialism dictates how we are supposed to dress and wear our hair, so if you were trained that way and you see someone who does the exact opposite; your wall comes up.
In the United States and through mainstream entertainment, the “Bad guy” in the movies looks like a bad guy. He’ll be dirty, and have long hair or dreadlocks and a beard. He’ll speak with no manners and foul language and an angry look on his face. Then you’ll go out in public and see people who have long hair, or dreadlocks, and automatically avoid them, because of what mainstream has done to you. Mainstream puts walls up in us that keep us from accepting tribes. The tribes live in dirt, we don’t. We are used to bathing and looking and smelling squeaky clean all the time and our men wear a post-military haircut; they are used to surviving in dirt, and they are used to each others body odors, but does that mean that they are the “Bad guys?” Of course not, but look at the walls that we have in our subconscious minds when we are standing in line at the grocery stores next to them.
Rastafarians wear dreadlocks, and are some of the most unselfish (Loving and caring) people of Earth, and most of the songs that they sing are about God; “Jah” is their name for God. They are very religious people, but when you are raised under the empire that continues to show what the average “Good guy” is supposed to look like, and what the “Bad guy” is supposed to look like, then we see that our minds a being trained to fear those who look different then the good guy. We are trained to not accept them. That’s why you see politicians wear their hair, and clothes; in perfect alignment with what we are trained to believe is the good guy.
Do rumors around your school cause you to put up walls against your fellow classmates? You heard something about someone that wasn’t true, so you don’t give them a chance to talk to you about it, you just avoid them; even though you only heard a rumor from one side of the story that went from mouth to mouth to mouth to your ears, and may be the complete opposite of the truth.
A new girl comes to my school, and she has a nice new car. In one year she goes through 10 boyfriends, and the rumor brought from the others girls out of envy, is that she is a whore. I think that she is easy, so I start dating her because I’m starving for sex. She falls in love with me, because I’m not the same as all the other guys; I love affection and I’ll kiss her often; anywhere and anytime and in front of anybody, and she loves it. I get to know all about her, I know when she’s on her moon (Period) and a whole lot of other personal stuff about her, and her family likes me. She wants to marry me and we finally have sex after many months, and I come to find out that she was really a virgin after all! This is a true story.
In summary, it is our own minds (ego) that continue to work against us to cause us to feel so alone inside; especially when we know that everyone is judging everyone else under this empire system. Everyone is ready to shame everyone else if they are different, so we feel alone inside.
I went to a Rainbow gathering about fifteen years ago, when I was very alone inside, but I dressed the part; I had tye dye shirts and Birkenstock sandals, long hair, and a nose ring, so I wouldn’t feel shame for not looking like I was “In.” But I wasn’t in; I was just trying to fit in anywhere that I could. I walked around and talked to people, but I felt alone still. After fifteen years I thought to myself: “How would a guy that has a post-military haircut, and a tattoo of “USMC” on his shoulder feel like he fits in at a Rainbow gathering? I thought about it, and thought about it, and I finally realize that he must go all the way back in his mind to what all humans have in common, and then I thought about it some more, and finally it hit me; “Wait a minute! Is it that easy? Is it that simple? I’m a human, they are humans; we are humans! Wait a minute… I’m already in!? I just need to drop all the veils of ego, and the walls that I have put up against people who appear to be so very different. Holy Shit! I’m in!” Now I can look every human in the eyes and show them my true heart, as if they really are my brothers and sisters; I can let them in, and just simply know that I am one with them, as I am one with all. And come to find out, one of the leading focalizers of the Rainbow family of living Light was a Marine.
Rainbow Warriors
A Rainbow warrior has the same color of skin as every human on Earth. We are recognized first and foremost as human only. A Rainbow warrior may be you, but you may not know it yet. A fully initiated Rainbow warrior knows it, and recognizes him/her self as a spiritual father or mother of all the people on Earth and can be as young as 12 years old (or puberty). WE are one with all. A Rainbow warrior recognizes themselves as a member of WE. Non initiates call “their” group “We” while calling others, “Them.” A Rainbow warrior always calls other groups of “We/them;” “WE,” and “Welcome home to WE; the human group.” Those who don’t yet recognize themselves as Rainbow warriors, aren’t conscious of their place in the human tribe, but are going through the initiation as they walk through life, because they are already in the human tribe; they just don’t know it.
Categorizing the Rainbow Family of Living Light as a group of “Them” is impossible, without calling all the people in the world, “Them.” Non-initiates call us “Them” even though WE call them, “WE.” “They” are the ones that have to change; WE are already home. “They” are the ones that have all the walls and guards up. WE are already here now; home, and with our guards down; ready to truly welcome you home to the one tribe; humans; WE.
We are not the “Rainbow Family of Living Light;” WE are only humans. The only category that WE can ever be put in is Homo sapiens; HUMAN BEINGS.
The Rainbow Family of Living Light is the Light for the future Rainbow warriors who are flying around like moths in the night when they are lost. WE appear to attract many “Misfits,” as many of WE have been picked on since the day they were born, and/or have no family and no one to lean on when they need to, as independence is not a need of the people; socialization by cooperation is; therefore, it turns out the Rainbow family is their only family; the humans. Where else can they go but home, when this world continues to cut help for those who need it the most? Therefore, you can look positively at the Rainbow Family of Living Light as a circle of “Misfits” that are walking wounded healing; a healing circle of poor people who find richness in their neighbor as WE learn to share our lives with our neighbors more and more with each passing day.
Many people have lived a hard life of dysfunction, and they bring to gatherings their less-then-positive habits. These are understood, forgiven, and not welcome, but they are. The humans with the less-then-selfless habits are simply still coming home; they are on the way, but have extra burdens to carry; they are welcome, as you are. Drop your guards; your shields; your beliefs; your masks, and come home to the human tribe, where you don’t have to try to fit; you are already “IN.” Come home in your mind and be WE.
I pray for world happiness forever; amen; so be it! Anonymously yours, “X.”
King of the Beasts
Have you been hearing the animals “Talking” to us? Chinese medicine has been practicing for thousands of years. While people of the west were still dying at very young ages, many Chinese were living until 100 years old. Their medicinal approach was to use an ounce of prevention, because there wasn’t a pound of cure; to treat the body as a temple and continue to maintain a strong immune system was the way.
But as commercialism invaded their egos and the people became more and more divided by money, the poor came up with “Rare” medicines to trick the rich to spend top dollar. The proof is this: Tiger whiskers. Tigers in India are currently being killed off to extinction for their “Powerful” medicinal purposes. Poachers are being hired by the Chinese to bring the animal’s parts to China to be sold. The rich Chinese are fools; just as all rich people are in the world. How can tiger whiskers be so powerful if the tigers are dying off? Surely rat whiskers are better medicine.
Animals all over the world are talking to us by dying off; what are they trying to tell us? “Wake up and see the Light!” Wake up and walk in truth!
The social animals have more to tell us. Do you ever take the time to notice your pet dog, they teach by example? When you leave for the day, and then come back home to them at night; what do they do? They run up to you; happy to see you. They look into your eyes and if they could speak what would their intention be? “Hi… I missed you… I’ve been here all day alone, and I’ve been scared… and I’m sure glad that you are here with me now.” Some of us are so busy in our minds that when our dog does this we ignore them and walk right by them to start getting our chores done, but everyday they practice the conscious dance on us to teach us by example of how we are supposed to be social.
Many people of the world have been hunting animals to extinction simply because there isn’t enough food in their area to go around. We are going to grow food everywhere, and it is going into the world’s food bank. All of the food on Earth belongs to all of the people on Earth to share equally, along with all the means to transport it, and transport all of the medical supplies. Japan can’t raise enough food to feed all of the people in “Their” country, but they have the money to pay for it. Africa has enough land to feed all of the people in “Their” country, but they aren’t on the money system; therefore, they must raise enough food to feed themselves without money. All we have to do is get them on the same page as us, as far as modern farming and agriculture, and they’ll raise enough food to feed themselves and other countries, too. It doesn’t take a brain surgeon to run a tractor, and operate a well! You don’t have to go to school for any of your life to do it, but even though they are starving, the children are sent off to school everyday to learn to submit to the dominant source; the language of their oppressor; English.
Africa was once a very lush country, but as the happy tribes flourished the animals stated disappearing, because they weren’t up to date with the farming. Today, we can watch the starving people on our TV, and see that their isn’t any animals in the back ground; no dogs, no cats, no chickens running around, no birds anywhere, not even any rats to get whiskers from.
King of the Police
I used to be a reserve police officer in San Jose, California, USA. I was talking with a very good friend of mine who was a retired cop, and he said, “At some point the police are going to have to stop worshipping the kings that sit on top of the empires who are always having laws passed against the working class people, and take the side of the people.” That time is now; welcome home!
Georgi,
I can only imagine the mental torment that you have had to endure throughout your days as president. I can’t imagine you sleeping very well these days. I’m your newest best friend, and I’m here to help you.
First, I’d like to offer this world a new branch of the military of the people. WE are the peaceful, “Rainbow Warriors.” We are first in battle, because there won’t be a battle if we show up first. WE are the bravest of brave, and we’ll even bring our children with us as we set up our camps to surround hostile countries in order to Love all of them back home to the one body, and teach them, by example, how to get home. One-by-one, or hundreds-by-hundreds; everyone is coming home.
When I say everyone, I mean you, too. You are coming home, even if I have to drag you… kicking and screaming. You are my brother, and I’m not going to stop harassing you until you do, or until they pry my cold dead fingers from this mouse and from my magic wand; the pencil.
The Rainbow Warriors are simply volunteers; you won’t have to pay us, but you can help us travel the world to bring health and happiness to the world, and all we need is our basic human needs, and since we are volunteering, we should be given the security of knowing that we’ll have our basic human needs met in the healthiest of ways as we cooperate with you for the benefit of all the people, plants, and animals of the world.
Here’s my advice after you repent and all that jazz. You say this to the World: “Welcome Home. I’m the president of the United States of America. I Love You. I mean all the people of the world. How can I help and cooperate with you to make sure that every human on this planet has the security of knowing that they will have all of their basic humans needs met for free. How can I help bring true freedom to the entire world at once?
“I have sinned great sins, and I ask for your understanding and forgiveness, but this is not about me, it’s about WE. I’ll tell you my story someday, but now WE are moving forward quickly to save everyone from the selfishness that the empire systems of the world have influenced. I will give you every last penny that I once called mine, if I have too, but I need to stay safe now, because I have made a target out of myself, and I fear revenge from those of whom I have trespassed against at this time; therefore, I will not be walking freely amongst you now. It will take me a while before I feel safe enough, but the sooner that I see everyone else understanding, forgiving, and Loving each other, as I’ll have to actually witness with my own two eyes, then the sooner I’ll feel safe to be brave enough to come all the way home with both feet, and walk freely amongst all of you. I’m ready to clean-up any messes that I may have made in my selfish days. I’m ready to answer questions, but I will not do this until everyone is actually forgiving everyone, and I feel it is safe for all those involved, as I do not intend to squeal on anyone of the past, as I realize that WE have all been victims of the empire system; especially, myself.
“But as I said, this is about WE, and I’m a man with great power, and since great response-ability comes with great power, I’m now able to respond in a big way to help those who suffer now. I pledge my adoption with you of all the people of the world; You are my brothers, and sisters, and children, and elders. I pledge my allegiance to you; my tribe; my family. I love you, and I’m at your service. What shall WE do now?”
I’m calling you home, Georgi; “Welcome home now, everyone!”
George, WE know that you are just a pickle in the middle of a lot of meat. But the oil friends that you have won’t be very good friends to you anymore, because they won’t have anything to give you. The oil of this Earth, as well as everything else belongs to all the people of the Earth, and shall be used by all the people of the Earth for comfortably obtaining our basic human needs. No one or separate group of people; like a corporation, owns the oil; WE, the people, do.
All the money that is said to belong to the rich; doesn’t, because it came from years of excessive suffering of the compounded millenniums of deception of working classes and shall be used now to relieve all of those who now are suffer. WE shall share it all equally, now. All that financial wealth belongs to the people, and not to the rich. We’ll use it correctly. No one will be oppressed again; therefore, everyone shall be free now.
The “VIH VIH” virus (focus on the intention of this message)
The mythical Vih Vih virus is the airborne strain of the HIV virus. The thought that the HIV virus can mutate and become airborne because of all the people who have HIV all over the world, along with the clouds of radiation that are continuing to grow as we continue to produce the highly toxic nuclear power with all the other forms of pollution that are in the air that we all share should be enough motivation for us to change the way we operate.
What happens when someone is born with HIV? They live a healthy life until they are about 18 years old, and then their health starts to decline. But that is only if they live in a country where food and health care is easy to get. Nevertheless we have got to be prepared for the airborne strain to hit the world, and this will give our teenagers the motivation to drop-out of school and live a happy life while preparing to take control of providing everyone with our needs. If we are all going to die young, then let’s get them ready to live comfortably, and be able to operate smoothly.
We all share the air, and with this campaign we are going to eliminate most of the pollution output from the empires. Nuclear power is only about 14% of the energy that we are currently using. We can get rid of that quickly.
Watch this: A cloud of radiation fell on Australia about 6(?) years ago, and people were having an outbreak of skin cancer. But we were all told that it was from over-exposure of the sun. We are from the sun! We were never told that it could have anything to do with the idea that radiation gathers to itself and forms invisible clouds that could settle in any area and cause serious heath problems.
After hearing the news about the skin cancer outbreak on mainstream radio about the damages that the sun is causing people, I heard about five minutes of music, and then Coppertone came on with a sun-block commercial; that’s the empire in action. Mainstream caters to the empires. We are fed bullshit, so they can get richer. If they were getting over radiated by the sun and the radiation from nuclear power, then they were also breathing too much radiation. Our bodies aren’t ever going to be ready for the snowball effect of radiation to ever survive it; therefore, the youngest will be the survivors. We must stop it before it snowballs. Put an end to nuclear power now; we all share the air!
Long term plans. The 420 party lives on…
There are a few gaps in the plan that I can fill in with more steps to help you see how easy we can unite, but I can’t possibly fill them all in without your help, because I don’t live in your country, and I don’t work where you work, but basically the people that are on the bottom of the classes, or the lowest; the underdogs are uniting in a circle to take care of each other; that’s the main intention, but at the same time, we are actually trying to convince all of the people of the world to unite; therefore, all of the world will take care of all of the people as one family. And to help us stay on track, all we need to focus on first, is all of the things that humans share; the basic human needs, along with the air we breath, and the water we drink, the noises, the smells, oceans and the forests, the wild animals, the beautiful things of Earth, and our attitudes towards each other, etc.
Let us continue with the 420 party and fill in some steps. Just by talking many of the steps through, we won’t have to do them, but remember that our governments of the world are going down, and we’ll have to do some things to let them know that they can work together with us, but we aren’t ever following them again or compromising for them; we are leading them to true freedom as the people of the world are governing ourselves now. We are taking the power that we have never had before in the history of Earth; therefore it’s not something that we are used to, but we are going to get used to it very quickly, because we are learning how to do it, as we are doing it. The best thing to do then is to simply organize one communication circle to talk and plan our actions.
Assuming that we don’t get mainstream to engage with us immediately, even though many of our teenagers have dropped out of school; and assuming that the professional sports players haven’t engaged because they are too enslaved by money in the form of a contract; (amazing how they have us in such mental slavery that we are actually bound by our own signature; a mark that we put on paper?) we’ll continue to grow slower than we thought; that’s all. We are still growing, but not as fast as we thought.
Take a group of you and pick any neighborhood that you want to go to. Take many copies of this handbook and your white surrender flags. Go door to door. Walk up to their door whether they have a “No Soliciting” sign on it or not. Knock and when they answer tell them about the world wide truce campaign and have they heard of it yet? Hand them a copy and give them a day to read it. Tell them that every household that is in the circle is to have a white flag flying, and those who already have an American flag (or whatever the people fly in your country) are to add a white flag to it, as every country is being called to a truce. The book is going to explain everything and you already know what they are going to know. Give them your contact information.
Everyone in the circle is to place a white flag on their homes and on their vehicles once we decide to start the party; once you decide to go public. The more people in your country that are flying white flags, the more the presidents will realize that we are moving in on them; peacefully… I said “Peacefully” moving in. Peace is the opposite of violence for those of you who are still confused; like many Americans are.
Make sure that you have an address book with you to put people’s contact information, as this is a party, and you are meeting new people. Whoever you see out their that is flying a white flag, and you haven’t met them yet, go and meet them and exchange information, because you may find out that they are not of your circles, they may be of another circle that spread from the other side of the country, or world, and therefore, you may have made the merging connection that connects you to the center circle! They may know more information than you, and they may have some good news to tell you. Stop, talk, and compare what you know; “How many people are in your circle know?” “What school do you go to?” “What countries are now connected to your circle?” Etcetera, Etcetera, Etcetera! The number of people in our circle is telling us how big we are getting, because mainstream refuses to spread the news for us. We are the broadcasting system for this world wide revolution. We are revolting; “Viva la resistance.”
When you go door to door, remember we are making a party out of it; be happy as if it is Halloween; be excited, this is a world wide party, and let them see your excitement. Tell them to just read the introduction and that should get their attention, but as I have said before; many people are just too busy to stop and read anything, or to actually believe that we are doing it now. They just can’t believe it; can you?
Make a note of the addresses that you have actually handed this handbook to, so later you can go back to the houses to ask them why they haven’t started flying a white flag, and see if it was just because they were too busy or not, if they want to join the circle exchange your contact information. You just added more people to our circle, thank you! We are becoming “Fisher’s of men.”
Continue to count and tally all of the people who come in to your circle by organizing yourselves to exchange the roles of the circle organizers. Pick a house to be the house that has a map on the wall of your city and start placing purple dots on it for every home that is in the circle.
As time goes by, we’ll be seeing people with white flags all over the cities. Get together and start parades, or one big “Conga” line, as you are starting to get very silly while you try to attract more attention, and people who are driving by with cars that are in the circle will start honking their horns if they see your parade. This is where we really start having fun, because then all the old hippies who have seen this vision years ago will be coming out and carrying on like they were never gone; the Shift will hit the fan as the energy bursts into another level! Some will be dancing naked in the streets; join them if you dare. They are in a trance; think of them as the innocent baby and the wise grandmother in one, and they are literally higher then a kite. Think of them as being guided by the star of Pahana. We are innocent children at this point, so take care of each other, and expect the unexpected, as we are trying to make the news! Mainstream media is going to be ours. We, the people, shall be in control of our own mass-minds.
Our broadcasting stations are to only broadcast our efforts to seek, find and feed all the suffering people of the world until there aren’t anymore; ever. If they broadcast anything else, ask yourself and ask them, “What does this (commercial, for example) have anything to do with the suffering people in the world?” “You want me to care about buying a new pair of shoes, when there are all these starving people in the world?” Focus on saving the world until the world is saved. I keep saying that we can do it in seven days, but it may take longer; just keep pushing forward, so it takes 10 days; 20 days; five more years; “Don’t give up the fight!”
Preparing for the greatest con: the silent depression that won’t be so silent anymore.
We are in a depression, but it is silent because we have slowly been compromising since the 70’s when President Reagan started the destruction of the labor unions of the United States. Look around; we hardly see anyone being happy anymore; what is happening to us?
After the 60’s and into the 70’s people were playing music and dancing in their cars while driving down the road, but now you can hardly see a head bob. People used to smile at each other all the time; is it a shame to be happy now; is it a shame to laugh now? Are we too “Cool” to be happy?
Let’s look at what we need to do in case they decide to try to fight this by cutting the economy more and causing us to starve more. Think about your neighborhood. Think about all of the purple dots on the map on your wall. If all of the teenagers in the country have a map that is merged with all of the other maps that means that we are able to know where all of the food in the country is being grown, we will take control of our food supply. Every farmer has teenagers in or around the farm. Many corporate “Chemical farms” are operated by the manager. The manager is to be ready to defy the “Boss” with our support and the police are also to be ready to defy their bosses, too. We’ll know where all the food is supposed to go. Those farms that don’t engage with us will be intimidated as we protest at their gates with our white flags. They’ll come home eventually, now look at all the truck drivers that are to transport the food; they have teenagers that need to eat, too. We are already running the world, we just don’t know it yet.
Your neighborhood is to tally all of the food in their houses, and to get ready to share it all if the grocery stores run out of food; those neighbors who get scared and go to the stores to stock up on food are doing us all a favor. You are to make sure that the people who work in your grocery stores get a copy of this; especially the managers. The managers know how much food is being moved through the store and if supplies to their store start to decline, he’ll be in contact with our circle to keep us up to date.
Think about your circle of teenagers. If one family has less than seven days of food and no way to get more without help, that is warning sign, and that information then needs to be broadcasted to your circle of one-hundred teens. Every household in the United States has an average of more than 7 days of food by our standards. If we were going by the standards of the people of Africa, or of the poor people of the world, we probably have 1 months worth of food.
How much food is in your house? This is the news and this is how our circle will work: Your circle has one hundred people, and it is connected to one hundred other circles; that’s ten thousand people. You are to broadcast to your circle that you have less than seven day’s worth of food. The first family that has less then seven days worth of food causes all of the families in your circle to tally their food supplies. Let’s just say that everyone has decided that they only have about seven days worth of food too, and that there is no way for them to get any more. That news of your neighborhood then get’s broadcasted out to the fourth generation circle that they are connected to; that news is now in the hands of 10,000 people. Let’s just say that all of them are now in the same position, and each of them are now broadcasting out to the circles connected to them; that’s one million people. Eventually, it will make it to a circle that can accommodate the demand with the supplies; we are already doing it anyway, but now we’ll have to change the way the orders are directed; that’s all. But what about the people in Africa that don’t even have one day’s worth of food; this starts with them and all of the other people that are in the same position until everyone on Earth has 7 days worth of food by their own standards. We may have to cut down our standards a little to raise theirs up a little; just like you may have to share your food with your neighbor; we may have to cut back to 4 days worth of food to give others 3 days worth of food; we can do it; look how long it takes for a trucker to drive a load from one end of our country to another; four days! We are already doing it; we are ready; we are all ready!
LOOK! We all think about it, as we are doing it; we then talk, together as one; we then plan to stop paying for the houses that we are living in; we then set a date that we stop paying for our shelter. Then we stop, together as one. The near-sighted mind says, “What about our credit?” Together as one, we pass a law to wipe our credit clean, and start new. “What about the landlords; who have invested all their time and money into their future?” We are their future now; they were going in the wrong direction; the future is today. We are living for today, and they’ll have to come back home to our level. We’ll take care of them, because we are taking care of everyone. “What about all the money that flows through the system?” The accountants of the big business and high finance world who were working for them are now cooperating with us, and they have computers; they’ll just have to figure it out, and they won’t be paying for their shelter either. There shall be no more homeless people. There shall be no more beggars.
I believe we can all have our cake and eat it, too, but it is time to focus on growing food everywhere, so we can flood the world’s food bank to the point that the whole world can waist food forever; not just the rich countries; all countries are sharing; all countries are cooperating, together as ONE. Start a garden in “Your” yards along side our Marijuana.
Water is to be free in the same way, but we’ll have to limit that in places, too; while we build another pipeline of dirty water for our gardens. Starting now; whenever anyone has less than seven days of food, food is to be sent to them for free, as all food and the transportation of it shall be free; the same goes for hospitals and medicines; especially vaccines. If people only have one day’s worth of food, that’s a life-threatening emergency, if people have four day’s worth that’s urgent. When all of the world has seven day’s worth of food; that’s relief.
Did you know that if treated properly, women with HIV can give birth to their babies without transferring the virus to them? Did you know that this would save a child from much suffering, and save us a lot of medical energy in the long run? Did you know that these women are all over Africa, but aren’t getting this treatment and giving birth to these children with HIV, just because we are ignoring them?
Today we are going to work on ourselves while we cooperate with everyone else. It starts now.
The Exorcism
I have questions for the House for the Seeker.
I have a quick comment to say to those who are against abortion to the point that they want to stop a women from having it. We are going to create a new world where every child will be loved by the whole village; no one will ever feel the need to have an abortion; join us!
Matthew 10:1 “And when he called his twelve disciples to Him, he gave them power over unclean spirits, to cast them out, and to heal all kinds of sickness and all kinds of disease.
Exorcisms are performed by Catholic priests and shamans of many tribes. The people lost much of the understanding of what an exorcism is due to the destructive powers of the dramatic Hollywood movies in the United States, but Mexico still performs them frequently in their Catholic churches. Shamans are also holding onto the healing qualities of exorcisms, and many “New age” shamans of the wealthy countries are starting to learn about them. Since the two great religious groups are using this practice, do we think that it should be investigated more, as there are many people; like the homeless and prisoners in the US that appear to be in need of an exorcism?
Exorcisms are really an undergoing of hypnotism, but in the United States, people don’t live near or with a shaman, and most spend a lot of money for the procedure. I know a young woman who was not very “Lucky” (Luck is an idle word) since the day she was born. When researching exorcisms on the internet, I discovered that some people can become “Demon possessed” while in the womb if the mother got very sick, or if the baby was cursed in some way, as for example; the mother or father didn’t want to have the child. This makes sense to me with the story of this young woman, but she can’t tell because she has been living with it since birth, and no one around here is able to identify this problem.
Shamans lived among their people and could notice if someone was needing this kind of spiritual healing, and then could perform the procedure to help relieve the entire tribe of the problem, as usually the individual has anti-social and disruptive behavior. But today we aren’t looking for demons in people; we are products of science that just treat the symptoms, but never cure the problem behind the symptoms.
The spirituality of homosexuality. Many “Homosexuals” (Humans) believe that they were born homosexual. Do the unclean spirits that enter people have gender? Can a woman be born with a spirit in her that causes her body to grow to more masculine stature then feminine? Same goes with men turning more feminine? If you add the things that I said earlier to this equation, then we are adding a lot of weight to these questions as, “Yes.” We are getting somewhere; keep asking questions; we are going to find all the answers.
Mark 16:17 “… In my name they will cast out demons” I call for a circle of priests, shamans, and hypnotists to form a study group, to help each other learn the ways to identify the demons in people, and to come up with a training scenario for the apprentice priests and shamans to learn the procedure quickly, as the people of the world are quickly going to become aware of spiritual truths with this movement, and 12 year olds are going to want to learn how to perform this procedure correctly, because the people who need the exorcisms the most, are the ones who can’t pay money for them. We’ll have young healers seeking spiritual truths all over the world.
All this talk about the “Homosexual” humans has been causing some to feel more shame and allow their ego to ignore this handbook, so let me remind you that this is a freedom movement, so I have written a song to sing as WE welcome “Them” to the circle, too:
I’m queer and I’m out today…
I’m queer and I’m out today…
Take a big deep breath of freedom and say…
I’m queer and I’m out today!
For the Christians who can’t accept the freedom; here’s a reminder: 1 Corinthians Chapter 13:
“Though I speak with the tongues of men and angels, but have not love, I have become sounding brass or a clanging cymbal. And though I have the gift of prophesy, and understand all mysteries and all knowledge, and though I have faith, so that I could remove mountains, but have not love, I am nothing. And though I bestow all my goods to feed the poor, and though I give my body to be burned, but have not love, it profits me nothing.
Love suffers long and is kind; love does not envy; love does not parade itself, and is not arrogant; does not behave rudely, does not seek its own, is not provoked, thinks no evil; does not rejoice in iniquity, but rejoices in the truth; bears all things, believes all things, hopes all things, endures all things.
Love never fails. But whether there are prophecies, they will fail; whether there are tongues, they will cease; whether there is knowledge, it will vanish away. For we know in part and we prophesy in part. But when that which is complete has come, then that which is in part will be done away.
When I as a child, I spoke as a child, I understood as a child, I thought as a child; but when I became a man, I put away childish things. For now we see in a mirror, dimly, but then face to face, but then I shall know just as I also am known.
And now abide faith, hope, love, these three; but the greatest of these is love.”
Reviewing the Circle; putting it all together.
Let’s say that we have all of the circles aligned and the communication system is running smoothly; how do we keep 10 billion people from bombarding the center circle with requests, or ideas? Remember that each generation is a step towards another 99 people to support each one. Let’s say someone in your 5th generation circle comes up with this idea and he brings it to your circle, for example; “Let’s show ourselves the power of the circle by changing the name of the grass to blue and the sky to green.”
Your circle of 100 people filter this idea, and say that we have decided, “Those who were once suffering should have hospitals in their area to help them with their medical issues before we start changing names.” But let’s say we are beyond that and he convinces his circle to broadcast this. They formally write a letter to send towards their 4th generation circle that they are connected to, and for the double check, they formally send this to six other 5th generation circles, too. Those circles will take all the requests and talk about them and respond in less then a week. Let’s say everyone in those circles either vote to pass it along; like democracy, or they respectfully argue until they all agree, as they filter the idea. If the 4th generation rejects the idea, but the other six generation circles like it, each of those other six generation circles send back to the originating circle the news that they are sending in along to their 4th generation circles for broadcasting, and filtering.
If the issue is actually a request for a hospital to be built in the area, then the fifth generation circles, and the fourth generation circle they are connected to add up to 10 thousand people. The request would be sent out to the 3rd generation circle, and they have decided to build the hospital without passing the news towards the center circle for broadcasting, because out of 1 million people, they’ll find the materials, and the volunteers to build their hospital, but if they are running short, they can send this message to a 2nd generation circle and that would be 100 million people that would be able to help finish the project.
Let’s say there was and earthquake in the area, and we need help now! Every circle has a person on stand-by for these emergency reasons. This is information that needs to make it to the center circle so everyone in the world can help. The center circle then broadcasts the emergency and people start signing up to help, and we bring 10 times more people and ex-military equipment to save lives, and relieve the people of the destruction then we need. Imagine if all of the equipment that we have would converge on a forest fire, we would be able to put it out immediately without needing it all.
Emergency news can fly through the world in a matter of five minutes or less! We will someday come up with a “Test day.” Perhaps once a month, we’ll all be ready like we always are, and one circle will be randomly selected to start the test. Everyone will be ready as we set the date and time for this to take place; we’re testing our emergency broadcasting system. As soon as the circle clics, calls, or tells the seven other circles (a 4th generation they are connected to, and six other fifth generation circles) they’ll start a stopwatch and send their time of day along with the test message; the test message is “Orange;” they’ll also send the exact number of people in their circle, too. The fourth generation circles broadcasts the message out, and their supporting circles send in their population numbers back to the fourth generation. They are tallied and sent along. What we now have is the word “Orange” that gets sent down to the 3rd generation circle immediately, and then we have a second following number of all of the people in the circles that have been added up.
If you are following me, the word is going to take off ahead because we don’t need feed back, as this is a test to see how fast we can send the word to the center circle and back out again to all of the people in the world. We are also watching the center circle on our TV, if we have one. The circle that originally sent the message will see in less then a minute that, “Orange” made it to the center, and was broadcasted out to all, and they’ll expect an email, or a phone call, or word to mouth to reach them in about the same amount of time. When that happens, they stop their stopwatch and send that time back towards the center, and the whole world will know how long it takes for the message to make it in and out. And in just a few more minutes, the whole world will know exactly how many people are on Earth, as the center circle quickly tallies the number while some of us are watching them on TV.
The other six circles of the fifth generation are double checking by sending another color that they decide, so they’ll be seven different directions that this comes from. All the colors make up all of the colors of the rainbow, and they all make the color of “Light.” All of the numbers of people in the world will come from seven different directions, and if those numbers are different, we’ll back track to find where the differences came from. This may turn-out to be a computer game that teenagers play frequently to perfect our circle with mock hurdles, problems, etc., and the game will come up with different rules and strategies to find the problems quickly, as it evolves and we advance to different levels.
Any “Computer nerds” out their want to play? Make a game called, “Oneness.” The first level could be called, “Find the deceived.” The next level could be called, “help thee deceived find themselves” The third level could be, “Find the suffering and heal them to strengthen your circle.” The fourth could be “Find the circles of Spies.” Etcetera, etcetera, etcetera… You’ll be helping immensely, as the computer games will lead us in trial and error lessons that we’ll learn before we actually have to learn them on our own. Welcome home.
History
Thousands of years ago we were only recognized as one tribe, and during those years we may have evolved into the most loving and happy people; innocent and truthful.
We may have killed off all of the giants, dinosaurs, and other animals that preyed on humans. But we had to keep splitting up as our population grew. Out of love for each other we continued to migrate and divide over thousands more years. In doing so the climate and the diets of the areas caused our bodies to change. Some got lighter and some got darker. As time went on, food became less abundant, and frustration started to set in as people started to starve; therefore, they started becoming selfish.
Then a man went out to scout for food, and when he came back to the tribe, he found all of the other men killed, and the women were taken. He was left caring for thousands of children. They all looked to him for guidance. He gave all of the directions for the different chores. Over the years, this happened to many tribes, as emperors started to take control of “Their” people, and make armies to defend themselves. Armies fought each other, and were trained to do so by the emperor handing down the thoughts of hating the other tribes; while highlighting their differences. So much so, that they convinced “Their” people to take others; like the women, and make slaves out of them to produce more soldiers to make their armies grow.
As the empires grew, they became very efficient at producing soldiers that would fight together as one, and soon the biggest empire would be the one to get all of the food, as the people were taught to get as much as we can now, or else we may be starving tomorrow. You can see that this habit has continued for thousands of years. We have created the giant that feeds off of us; it’s the last predator of humans; we must get together to enslave it and free ourselves. All it does is divide; therefore, all we have to do is unite. It’s that simple.
Everyone will come to the circle eventually; until they do, they aren’t human, because that is all we are.
Whatever you don’t like about the circle idea, we’ll fix it later if others agree with you. Whatever you don’t like about “My” beliefs; don’t let that keep you from joining the circle. I don’t matter anymore, and “My” thoughts are just leading all of you together. Once we are together, everything that I started can be changed by WE. No one is to ever dominate, or control any circle meeting; especially me.
We have to change things extremely, but we may go too far, and have to change back, as we evolve together. One thing is for sure; the population of Earth is going to continue to grow, and food is going to continue to need to be produced, and we are going to have to continue to find the healthiest and most efficient ways to grow and produce it.
Now let’s get together and feel alright, alright? All right!
One more thing
I have seen a grandmother of the United States who raised her children to have very bad over-eating problems. She was sitting in front of her computer while baby-sitting her 3 year old grandson. As she played her video game to escape from her bored and miserable life, he would whine because she is ignoring him and he had nothing to do. She said, “Oh, do you want a cookie?” She got up and gave him a cookie, so he won’t bother her for a while, and then she sat her fat-ass back down to play her video game and ignored him some more.
We are going to learn a better way to raise our children instead of just throwing pacifiers at them so they won’t bother us. No child should ever be ignored when they are crying; unless they are “Playing” us. We aren’t going to raise kids to be tough anymore; look at the mess we have gotten ourselves into?
What would be the ideal situation for the new born baby and their parents to raise that baby to be happy while the parents are happy for their entire lives? The parents would be taking turns with other parents and playing with the young child while they provided for that child and themselves. And if the whole village cooperated together on this idea, then everyone would be seeing to it that the children and the adults were happy, as they all play together all day, but those who don’t realize that play is most important shouldn’t have any leadership capabilities. The more people who team up together, the easier life on Earth will be for everyone’s happiness.
The confusion is out there, but children know the truth. They are gifts from God; why? They are God’s helpers. They are God’s little aerobics instructors of Love; we have to exercise love on them; we have to give life to them. The more you exercise loving others, the easier it is to do, because you get in shape; you get into the habit of loving.
We must control the child, but not to the point where we break the child. How can we do that when the empire has broken us; therefore, we don’t know what the real breaking point is? What if I told you that all of us were broken in our childhoods? Our hearts were all broken; some more than others; that’s where the ego comes in, as the ego is the proof.
What is the meaning to life? Your life has no meaning if you are selfish; you are alone, “What does your life mean to other people?” is a better question, but the empire wants you to chase your happiness with material possessions and pacifiers. Look at all the people who have no meaning in their lives? What do selfish people mean to you? Look at what they do with their time? Some are in a real hurry going in the wrong direction for their selves, as they drag their children along, and some have no choice as they are trying to keep up with the rest of the fish; the children always want to stop and play; always. We will learn to provide for each other while the children play with us, as we supervise them to see to it they are loving each other while they grow; always all ways. We’ll create a world where a kid can be a kid.
Why do I say that the women are the Holy Grail? What are men then? Think of the egg and the single sperm cell; separated they die, but together they bring life. The Holy Grail is that loving part of the woman that is a vessel; a cup or a pot that can hold the Holy water. Where the Holy Grail isn’t is where it is useful; what it does for the world is where it’s useful. It is empty but always ready to be used; that’s love. Think of the Holy water; drink the gift of unselfishness to live, as water provides life for the entire world; the plants, the animals and the humans. Men bring the water from the river of life; the river of unselfishness for the women, children and the men to drink; that’s love, but without the women they lose it; they’ll lose life. Together, they make life; the more unselfish we become, the more life we are living. Men must learn to fill the Holy Grail to the brim with unselfishness, and women must learn to hold the water correctly; the Holy water.
Think about the water of the world that was polluted in last night’s nightmare. No matter how much you pray for it; it isn’t very holy now. The water all over the world is dying because of selfishness. Think about breast cancer; think about prostate cancer; do you want to fight cancer? We can only do it together. The empires are killing our water; they are killing us.
If you ignore this handbook, and you ignore this movement; that’s exactly what you have been trained to do by guess who? The near sighted empires.
American Christians; why doesn’t it just say in the beginning that the tree of Life is self-less-ness and the tree of knowledge is selfishness; since, when we go in one direction, the other is hidden from us? It has to do with thought as well. Thinking thoughts make knowledge. Thinking is of the ego; the mind. Unthinking and just doing without thought is following your heart; like, how does the newborn Kangaroo know to crawl and wiggle its way to the mother’s pouch without being taught? How does the new born child know to suck for food when it wasn’t taught? How does the heart know to beat?
When we are young children, we don’t need to know that the grass or sky have names, we just live with them, and play. Why do children play? They aren’t playing; they are really living. Why do we give names to the way people live? Why do we not play? Why do we not live? We are too busy watching others live while giving them names.
In your Bible, Jesus says, “I am the Way, the Truth and the Life.” Can we also say that Jesus was one with God? Yes, most Christians can agree to this. Can we also say that Jesus was one with the Way, one with the Truth, and one with the Life? Yes, most Christians can agree on this too. Can we say that the Way is the walk of unselfishness? American Christians have a hard time with this one, because they usually haven’t thought this far; they usually stop at “Jesus is the Way.”
There’s a book that was written about 500 years before Jesus that is called, “The Way,” but it really doesn’t have a name, as it has something to do with motivating people to grow downward towards unselfishness and un-naming, unknowing; reversing the effects of eating from the tree of knowledge. Since this book has many things in common with the Bible and motivates self-less-ness, it makes me wonder if this, “Way” is the same “Way” that Jesus was talking about. As if Jesus was assuming that everyone that he was talking to already knew about the “Way” that the book describes. The English version of this book that I have is called, “Lao Tzu Tao Te Ching, A Book About The Way And The Power Of The Way” By Ursula K. Le Guin.
“Taoists” now have named themselves as an organized religion that then takes the value of the book away, because of the irony of the book’s teachings of not naming; just living. The book was written for all of the people of Earth who can benefit from it, and not for people to use it to form a religion of it; just as the Bible was written for those who could benefit from it, as it wasn’t supposed to be used to form an organized religion.
I want to show you a few chapters from Ursula’s translation of “The Way.”
Chapter 37 Over all
The Way never does anything,
and everything gets done.
If those in power could hold to the Way,
the ten thousand things
would look after themselves.
If even so they tried to act,
I’d quiet them with the nameless,
the natural.
In the innamed, in the unshapen,
is not wanting.
In not wanting is stillness.
In stillness all under heaven rests.
Chapter 68 Heaven’s Lead
The best captain doesn’t rush in front.
The fiercest fighter doesn’t bluster.
The big winner isn’t competing.
The best boss takes a low footing.
This is the power or noncompetition.
This is the right use of ability.
To follow heaven’s lead
has always been the best way.
Chapter 71 The sick mind
To know without knowing is best.
Not knowing without knowing it is sick.
To be sick of sickness
is the only cure.
The wise aren’t sick.
They’re sick of sickness,
So they are well.
Chapter 75 Greed
People are starving.
The rich gobble taxes,
That’s why people are starving.
People rebel.
The rich oppress them,
That’s why people rebel.
People hold life cheap.
The rich make it costly,
That’s why people hold life cheap.
But those who don’t live for the sake of living
are worth more then the wealth-seekers.
Remember, this book was written about 2500 years ago and nothing has changed.
Chapter 76 Hardness
Living people
are soft and tender.
Corpses are hard and stiff.
The ten thousand things,
the living grass, the trees,
are soft, pliant.
Dead, they’re dry and brittle.
So hardness and stiffness
go with death;
tenderness, softness,
go with life.
And the hard sword fails,
the stiff tree’s felled.
The hard and great go under.
The soft and weak stay up.
Chapter 79 Keeping the contract
After a great enmity is settled
some enmity always remains.
How to make peace?
Wise souls keep their part of the contract
and don’t make demands on others.
People whose power is real fulfill their obligations;
people whose power is hollow insist on their claims.
The Way of heaven plays no favorites.
It stays with the good.
Movements:
This is the Movement. It started with Jesus, and Lao Tzu (The Tao) perhaps, and it has simply been continuing. But the Empires continue to try to stop it, and as history shows, they have been very successful. But once stopped, WE just get smarter and continue to grow in secret; until now. Now WE are smarter then them; finally.
Here are few history lessons from recent movement stopping activities:
When President Ronald Reagan, of the Republican Party, was campaigning for President of the United States, he was set up to have a rally in Sacramento. At the rally and in front of his stage were his supporters, but all around those supporters were protestors that knew of his past, anti-human, actions against the people. But when the national news stations broadcasted his visit to Sacramento, the people of the world only saw his supporters. Basically, they Broadcasted 1/3rd of the truth, as a way to show the rest of the country (who simply plays follow the leader, instead of thinking with their own minds) that everyone in California supports Reagan for President. It was like cheerleaders for Reagan have just entered everyone’s living room through the TV; instead of the whole truth (with the protesters; the other 2/3rds). If WE would have seen the protesters, we would have asked, “Why are they protesting,” and some of us would have done a little more research, and may not have elected him because of our findings of the facts, but politics wants people to believe, instead of know the facts; especially when all the big businesses of the United States are ran by the Republicans. The mainstream media broadcasting stations are big businesses; therefore, Republicans for Republicans, and they control the minds of the masses in these ways. This is why we need to be able to organize without the help of the media, unless we take control of the media to the point that we know 100% we are in control; WE, the people of Earth.
About 15 years ago, the Democratic party of the United State elected a Supreme Court justice, but the republicans did research about him and found some “Dirt.” He openly and honestly admitted that he had smoked Marijuana in the 60’s (along with everyone else of that era). Well, the Republican$ made a big stink out of it, via mainstream media, and he wasn’t able to take the job because of it. But when Republican, and actor, Arnold Schwarzenegger was campaigning for Governor of California, we never heard a word about all his pot smoking days.
In the 70’s Arnold made a movie called, “Stay Hungry,” that was based on the book of his life with the same title. In the book (the uncut version) Arnold said that he smoked a little pot everyday before he worked out when he was a body builder. And in the movie with Kurt Russell and Sally Field, he smoked it. Arnold is a Republican money man, and his supporters are the entire Republican businessman and mainstream media, but we, the people, never heard from mainstream media about his “Dirt.” As I said before, almost all businesses are owned and ran by Republican voters. Get the picture? Mainstream media is fooling us for only one reason; money. Money is what Republicans are all about, and they are making us all work too hard, as they always have been under this empirical system of control. Since Arnold was elected, he has been bashing labor unions; like Reagan did, Arnold is against the working class, and has got to go.
The Hippy movement was about freedom by truth, peace, understanding, forgiving, and conscious social cooperation for positive changes for all of the people on Earth. They had the power to cause the government, and all other big corporations who were in control to start living in fear. So much so, that the Empires of Hollywood started making movies about the downfalls of Communism (sharing everything). Communism was given a bad name throughout the United States, but Communism is closer to Humanism then the tug-of-war of our false Democracy. The problem with all forms of government is, of course, the infiltration of the Empire system. Communism is about sharing everything, but if you have a leader, the leader can ruin everything with his own selfishness; like many of the leaders did of Communist countries. The Republican businessmen do not want us to get into the idea of sharing, if we share; instead of have our own stuff, they loose money. They want us to be divided; they call it “Independent.”
Communism had a bad name due to their faulty dictators of the past, but then the news would talk about, “Hippy Communes.” When they used the name “Communes,” instead of the more appropriate name, “Communities,” it makes it look more like Communism, and causes the minds of the masses to turn away from the idea of intentional communities where everyone shares everything. It’s like calling every religion a “Cult.” The Catholic religion is a cult; Hindu, cult; Muslim, cult. Every religion is a cult, and every cult is a religion, but you can see how we have a different feeling when we say two different words that mean the same thing. Mainstream media knows this and, over the years of compounded deception, has trained us to think the way they want us to; boy, are they clever.
Because of mainstream’s influence to make the word, “Commune” look bad, I can remember hearing people making shame-based put downs about other family members; like this: “Yeah, he sold his house and everything to join a Hippy Commune… what a fool.” This shame of joining a “Commune” spread across the country like wildfire, and stopped what the flower children of the sixties started… until now. The flower children of the 60’s in the US are still alive and well, and they’ll stand up in support of the teens of the shift.
What now?
I am giving this to you. I don’t want it anymore. You can imagine how much mental torment that I have gone through to bring this to the world; I just want to start my life as a simple man and love my neighbors and children that I have been ignoring. I have been a very big hypocrite, but I realized a long time ago that it won’t matter how much I try to do the little things in life to help others, the world is just going to run me over unless the whole world changes.
Now I just want to love my neighbors, grow a garden and put this handbook in your hands. Until you do something with it, I’ll be out begging, as begging is how I love my neighbors. I’m making myself available for you to practice loving people. I’m overcoming all of the shame that society casts upon me to show the world that there is still a big problem in the world; I love you that much.
Make sure you give a copy of this to every beggar who isn’t waving a white surrender flag, because that’s what I’ll be doing. Every beggar is to wave a white surrender flag when they beg; consider giving them a little more than just a dollar if you see one. Give them your life; it’ll be worth it; maybe you could take them home and let them do their laundry, or maybe you can find them a warm bed for the night, and fill them up with healthy food, and send them off with a bag of fresh fruit. They are working for us; they always were. If you really want to have fun ask him if you can “Kid-nap” him, and party with him; get him high, and show him what you guys are doing with the 420 party, and tell him how many people are in the circle now.
The first people who I send this handbook to are the ones who have ears; the circles for freedom by truth, peace, understanding, forgiving, and conscious social cooperation, and many musicians who are conscious as well. I’ll spend a day or two on the internet; trying to send this thing all over the world, but then I fear that the evil secret branch of the CIA, FBI, or KGB is going to trace me down. I’m not ready for them to pry my cold dead fingers from the mouse, because I want to at least see that we play this out past the Aztec calendar; which ends at about 12-25-12 AD.
I’m hoping that the people who I send this to have teenagers, and that you take this very seriously. So seriously that you call into work and stay home and make your teenager stay home and read it, so you two can discuss it, together. I also hope that all of you well established circles that I mentioned in the introduction contact each other to form one solid communication circle to plan your next move together. All I’m doing is bringing us together; that’s my job. What you do together is your job.
I’m not taking this to any publishing house for editing, and printing, because I really don’t want anyone to know who I am, and if everyone gets involved as more hands make for light work, you’ll put this very rough draft on the internet; just as it is and everyone will understand that it is a very rough draft, as they’ll read it. This is merely a discussion, and we don’t need to clean it up, because we’ll be wasting time, and we aren’t trying to sell it. If this doesn’t work, well you have a lot of ideas here that you can make something better that will work. Some of you will proofread it, and come up with a better way to say things than I have; go for it, but do that after you have sent this one along.
Recruiting the teenagers to take the lead and give them all the freedom that they want is the best motivation that I could come up with to actually get them to read and try to understand the things that I’ve said here, as I believe that I have brought much truth forward, and if we all just move this very handbook, then we’ll all be on the same page, and as we evolve, the people will speak to each other through the center circle and all things will be made right; even the things that I said that may not be right.
Haste is of greatest import/export as there are people who are going to die while we are trying to get them the word; they are killing themselves in the ghettos, and they are dying of starvation and broken heartedness all over the world. If just the word of this idea gets out to people then they’ll be filled with hope and joy, and people will start treating each other better.
But I’m through with it; it has consumed me like the ring consumed Gollam. I have been the King of hypocrisy for fifteen years while I’ve been writing this, and I need to start walking the talk, so I’m letting it go. It’s in your hands now. I was hoping to get this to you in enough time that when the New Year comes along, we’ll start seeing white flags as we celebrate at midnight, but the timing is up to God; we are in God-speed, as God is doing his work through us; allow it to happen and enjoy it.
For the translators, it would be best if you simply state at the front of the book that “This is what this American says and I’ll try to translate it as accurately as I can:… Holy Shift by the Thieves in the Light…” but if you get to a place were you feel that you must clarify tell them in these brackets {“this translator must clarify this statement, and I’m adding my words here…” and if you can, change the font as well. } Try to send this to every country that speaks your other language.
What is the true intention of this Handbook? We need a step-by-step plan that the people can see to unite the people of the world. If the things that I have stated turn people off, then you guys get together and come up with another step-by-step plan that will work. We have a chance to do it with this book; especially if you fill in the gaps to this plan as you unite your circles and evolve with our union. If we don’t come together, then the empires will just continue to keep the people fooled and distracted. WE can do it now!
Vision Quest:
One day; in the summer of 1991 ? while living in Eugene, Oregon, USA, I was told by a brother, “You should go do what the ‘Native Americans’ do: Go out in the desert without any food or water for four days… to see ‘Visions.’”
When I was told that, it sunk into my agnostic memory and stayed there, and after a year of quite a full load of self discovery, which included my first “Full-blown,” “Psychotic Manic Attack.” And then a diagnosis by a Western medical doctor as a “Manic-Depressive” which started with a trip to a Biker “Helmet law” rally on the front steps of the state capitol on the 4th of July in Sacramento, California, USA; to a Hippy gathering in Marysville, Cal., to the Golden Gate bridge, to the San Francisco General Hospital’s “Psych ward,” to Placerville, California’s Psychiatric hospital, and then back to live with my parents in Gresham, Oregon; I decided to prepare for the Vision Quest.
While living at my parent’s, and feeling a little controlled by the “System” and humiliated about my current “Situation” all at once, I told myself: “Tomorrow, I’m going to replace the seal in my Volkswagen bus’s motor, and then go to my questing spot” (My secret sacred spot on the Deschutes River in the high desert of Eastern Oregon) “And I’m going to start my fasting in the morning, once I get up and while I work on my VW.”
Was that a prayer? Does God (or the Angels, Spirits, etc.?) know what we are thinking? Because in the morning, I was in a lazy mode of being in the habit of sleeping in until 10:00am, but as I lay in my bed at about nine, I felt an itch on a toe. This “Itch” turned into the feeling of the end of a needle being pushed into my toe: I had to actually get up because of it!
“Okay… I’ll get up!” I said to my imaginary angel, as my “Mission” for the day had come back to my memory. I then dropped the motor in the VW, replaced the seal, and put the motor back in; packed up, showered, and made the two hour drive to my “Base camp” on the river by 3:00PM.
I was sitting in the shade at a picnic table with a pad of paper, and a pencil to do some journaling, while I relaxed with just a pair of shorts on. And I was “Recovering” from the busy day that I had endured so far, as I was planning for my hike to my meditation spot; which was high up on a plateau on the cliffs of the Deschutes River Gorge, and was a steep hike.
White sitting and enjoying the river, and the birds and the bees; (literally) I happened to look down to notice a bunch of independent spider wasps “Working” a mound of dirt that was under the same shade tree as I.
After a while I felt something crawling up my leg… It was a spider wasp… carrying a paralyzed spider… up my leg! That’s two normally undesirable insects (as far as being on my body) on my bare leg! I jumped, and she jumped and dropped her spider.
She got my attention; especially her, because spider wasps are normally very clever: “What was she doing crawling up my leg? Was she ‘sent’ to get my attention?”
I watch her, she quickly investigated her spider. (On the ground; between my bare feet) I held still while she flew back to her hole, then she flew back to her spider, then she grabbed the spider and drug it back to her hole; and finished her course by laying the single egg on the spider; and burying her newborn with its fresh eight legged diet.
After that, I realized that the bushes these wasps were getting all of their spiders from were about fifty feet away. (15-20 meters) They then have to drag their heavy spiders back. (Something else I didn’t know, because I always assumed they flew while carrying their bounty) If you or I had to do that, it would be like we were traveling through mountains and valleys, and we’d get lost. How can they do it without getting lost?
Woooooowww! “Their antenna; they can ‘Connect’ to something!” Then I thought back to the idea of the honey bees; flying for miles to scout and bring the message of new places where food is, and then to the homing pigeons; being able to travel in the trunk of an auto, or a train, and upon release they fly straight home, and then the Salmon; the fish that have a built in “Homing device” that helps them navigate thousands of miles; back to their exact birthplace… Underwater! And finally the whales, that travel every year from the north to the same tropical areas to give birth to their calves and rear them in the warm waters, until they go back (Over a thousand miles) to their summer homes in the north to feed on the plentiful abundance of plankton in the cool waters.
“Holy Shit!... All these animals are ‘tapping into a pipeline’ or something like that! If they weren’t, they’d all get lost.” “Holy shit;” my new discoveries were starting to excite me, and it’s a good thing that I was in nature, because there’s something about nature that keeps you calm when you are alone with her, and with this new discovery and excitement and all, I was surely headed for another manic attack; especially, while I was thinking about the info of my past, where I have heard (somewhere) about how “Scientists” say that there’s a huge part of our brain that we don’t use… “Is that our antenna?!!!” “Holy shit!”
I was starting to “Believe” in things! Agnostia was totally out the window! “The big part of our brain is our antenna!... It’s protected by the skull!... It’s our connection to God, or the ‘Energy grids, maybe! Can we learn to use it?! Maybe we can train this part of our brain to have a better connection to… whatever (God maybe?)… !!!”
“Psychic Energy…?” “Healing Energy…?” “All these animals are already guided…?” “Holy Shiiiiii……t!” “We can build the skill of connecting… as I realize that I had to have a logical, or scientifical, way to believing in a spiritual existence. And a belief that there is a way to “Connect.” And a belief in the possibilities that we are all connected. And if we practice certain spiritual exercises on a regular basis, that who knows the possibilities?.
Earlier; while on the drive to my spot, I was thinking about the possibilities of this quest, and thinking about what “Visions” I was going to “See” and how it works; especially, when I never read a book about it, nor did I really talk to anyone who was experienced on the subject. I was thinking, “Logically,” that around the 4th day of the quest that my kidneys would shut down and my body would start poisoning itself, and I’ll start to hallucinate, and maybe it would be like a window to the dying process, and I might actually die myself if I’m not careful.
After processing all my new discoveries while I set up my camp, I noticed the sun was about to go down and I was tired, so I decided to go to bed before the stars came out, but before I crawled into my little tent for the night, I looked up at the massive cliffs in the direction of my favorite plateau and said to myself, “Tomorrow, I want to find the easiest way up to my meditation spot as I can, so if I’m weak on my fourth day, I’ll still be able to get up and down.”
I got up in the mourning, and after a few minutes of boredom, I decided to head up my trail. I started off on the usual path, when after about a hundred yards (100 meters) there was a mother deer on the trail ahead with her two yearling babies.
We noticed each other at about the same time and I stopped to admire her, and she took off ahead of me on the trail; which was a side hill trail by now. She was out of site as I started to turn and go up a slightly steep, and narrow, trail that was between two big rock walls. As I moved around the corner and up the trail, I noticed the usual “Y” in the trail of which, I remembered that I always take the right leg of the Y.
The “Y” is at the base of a small hill of which it goes either left to a not-so-well traveled trail that I’ve never been on, because I was always used to going right. Mother deer was on that hill, and she was only about 20 feet above and away from me! “That’s weird; that’s not how a wild deer usually acts” I said to myself as I watched her for a minute as she was looking around frantically and confused while her babies were behind her. I said, “Cool.” And then started walking to the right (up my usual way) when she snorted at me! I stopped. She was still there and looking at me with this serious look on her face as I look up at her. “That’s weird,” I said again. Then I shrugged my shoulders and continued to go up the trail to the right. She snorted at me again as I took that next step.
“Okay,” I said to her. I then stopped and went the other direction to take the left arm of the Y. She and her brood ran ahead of me and then out of site; up the lesser traveled trail, so I stayed on the trail and I found that it’s an easy side hill walk up to the final base of my plateau, of which, I was then able to take an easy trail along the plateau to my spot.
“Holy Shit; she showed me the easiest way to my spot!” “So… there’s something to this Native American (Indigenous) people’s spiritual business… Holy shit” I said to myself as I remembered my request before I went to bed last night. Was that a prayer? Did I say a prayer, and then just witnessed the prayer come true by God’s use of the deer?
“Yes, that deer is wild, and she showed me that there is definitely a way to “Tap” into God (or the spirits, angels, energy, whatever?) with prayer.
After meditating a while and processing my new information, I started to get antsy, so I decided to head back down the trail, only I wasn’t tired so I decided to take my usual (now a shortcut) trail back down. As I headed down I realized that my shortcut, “Deeri” stopped me from going up, was very slippery as the loose dirt and rocks were sliding out from under each footstep as I walked down. I also noticed how I practically had to crawl on my hands and knees to get down one of the little rock walls to the base of the deer hill, where she stopped me. And as I made my way back to my camp, I kept slipping, until I slowed down. I said to myself… “Go slow and you won’t slip. Stop and look back often, so you’ll remember the way. So you’ll remember the “Trail” because you’ll be showing a lot of people the way… to the Light.” The words just flowed though me, as I processed and discovered my “Vision.” I’ll be blazing a trail for a lot of people, so I have to go slow and steady to make sure I know it by heart, because when people go down a trail through the forest, they must know how to get back, or else they may be lost forever. “I’m going to be a teacher… someday.”
Once I got to base camp at about noon, I started to notice my physical situation, so I decided to meditate under a shade tree, when I closed my eyes, the most profound picture came to mind: A “Vision” of hamburgers. My quest was over in one day, as I immediately got up to pack up my VW and head to the nearest hamburger joint, and then back home, because I didn’t have the power it takes to shut down, “My” thoughts.
Since then I have set out to prove to the world and to my family that I’m not the “Crazy” one here; the whole world is crazy; I’m sane!
I’m begging you; all most of the beggars in the world are not very selfish; they are just broken. And if we would just focus on how to heal each other, instead of treat the symptoms with pacifiers, then maybe we could give them enough of what they need to help them overcome their addictions. We’ll give each other everything that what need, and then everyone can overcome all of their addictions easier. “Love, Love, Love… Love is all WE need. Give to each other, and no one will have to give until it hurts anymore. Many hands make Light work for all. All the people in the world, starting right now, just start talking to your neighbors a little more with each passing day; a baby step at a time; a baby step is all that it will take, together.
Prayer:
“God, I hope that this is the right thing to do. I have this ball in my hand, and I’m about to pitch it to the world. I know WE have an infinite amount of pitches to throw, but I want a Home run on the first pitch, because I’m on the other team too. The balls are all racked and the world has the cue ball in their hand, please help them spread the word and sink all of the other balls on the break. Here’s the ball, and here’s the hoop.
I pray that the effects of the trembling throughout the world are only of positive ‘win-win’ situations for everyone. I pray that the emperors see the positive possibilities of economic equality for all and they just surrender their egos quickly, and I pray that everyone treats each other like kings and queens of truth and love soon. I want those children fed; I need those children and their mothers fed; all of them. I want to be 100% happy, and that can only mean that the entire world is 100% happy together. I pray that the world is 100% happy now and forever and ever. Amen. So be it. Thank you”
White Eagles
Empires led by wolves to fight each other for territory
But we are sheep
They give us a helmet and a gun
But we are sheep
They make us look like them
But we are sheep
They have us do their dirty work
But we are sheep
We die for them;
We are sheep
We live for us when we flock together
We are white eagles
White eagles we become
To free the world of the wolves
Once we were sheep
Then we were white eagles
Together we sacrificed to the Light of God
To become butterflies of Oneness
The world becomes beautiful
And we are happy flocking sheep again
Flock and fly white eagles
Flock and fly
The world is ready for you
The world is ready for Oneness;
The world is ready for WE, the people
Are “You” in?
(Here’s a song for those who are “in” and chanting for those who are on “Their” Way)
Are “You” in?
Do “You” get it?
Do “You” get it?
“I” surrender; “WE” move forward
Do “You” get it?
Do “You” get it?
Are “You” in?
Do “You” get it?
Do “You” get it?
“I” surrender; “WE” move forward
Do “You” get it?
Do “You” get it?
Are “You” in?
Do “You” get it?
Do “You” get it?
“I surrender,” “Truce;” we were ALL screwed up, some more screwed over than others, so let’s all just forgive each other and move forward with the issue at hand. “I” surrender; “WE” move forward… we the people shall organize and discuss and plan our next action as ONE. “My” gift to “You” is “WEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE………”
Hey, pass this along to a friend or an enemy; “WEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE………”
For those of “You” who get those commanding voices in “Your” heads? It might just be God speaking? Or God, with a drop of deception through a very poisoned ego, perhaps? Are you sure; George? One thing is for sure… “You” are forgiven by “WE.” I am one with God; you are one with God; we are one with God, together. We are Christ. We our Christ; WE Christ. The Oneness; the ONE. We are the commanding words of God if we want to be! So WE shall! “Get the suffering relieved now!” WE are the “Word of God.”
Elders shall be treated like angels on your shoulders. Elders are anyone over forty, or anyone who felt over forty in last night’s nightmare! Rise and shine; you have been asleep for too long; you almost missed the morning; the sun is high in the sky now. The Son is “High” in the sky now. The Son is in the morning sky. I am “WE” and this is our gift to “You,” because we love you; you are we. “Welcome home!” (We are in the White House, giggle; WE are in George’s lap).
“Give Tibet back to its rightful protectors; give Hawaii back to its rightful protectors; give Great Grandmother, Earth, back to her rightful protectors” “Their” land is our land!” How’s that for a command from God? It’s easy when you are out of “Your” mind and into OURS. Do you “Get” it?
Sheep to Butterflies (A nursery rhyme? that teaches math)
99 sheep plus you is 100
100 sheep in a circle
Multiply them by 100
10,000 sheep in a circle
9,999 sheep plus you is 10,000
10,000 sheep in a circle
Multiply them by 100
1,000,000 sheep in a circle
999,999 sheep plus you is 1,000,000
1,000,000 sheep in a circle
Multiply them by 100
100,000,000 sheep in a circle
99,999,999 sheep plus you is 100,000,000
100,000,000 sheep in a circle
Multiply them by 100
10,000,000,000 butterflies in a circle!
Age of Aquarius 12-09-06
Now the moon is in the seventh house
And Jupiter is aligned with Mars
Now peace shall guide the planets
And love shall steer the stars
This is the SUNRISE of the Age of Aquarius
Age of Aquarius
Aquarius! Aquarius!
Harmony and understanding
Sympathy and trust abounding
No more falsehoods or derisions
Golden living dreams of visions
Mythic crystal revelation
And the mind’s true liberation
Aquarius! Aquarius!
Let the sunshine, let the sunshine;
The sun shine in!
Let the sunshine, let the sunshine,
The sun shine in…………….
(Can you see the Light?)
I find the tone hard to read, too confrontational. Your thoughts?
-C
+++++++
Holy Shift by The Thieves in the Light (rough draft) Page 1 of 177
Introduction
The Shift is to be broadcasted and promoted by your organization now, because as you received this, “Your” organization is now “OURS.” We the people of Earth own everything on Earth to share and share alike now. You just didn’t know it until now, as this movement has been growing underground and is in the first attempt to surface in your area of broadcasting. The progress of OUR Shift is the only thing that is to be broadcasted now by OUR broadcasting systems that you were “Working” for; now you are “Cooperating” with us; all of us. “We, the people of Earth, are calling for a world wide truce; a ‘Time-out’ after understanding the new evidence that is contained in this handbook.”
Broadcasters say this:
{This mentally challenged man was about to give up, but thought that just in case you would listen, he’d try one more time.
“I have news: ‘The Shift’ is here! All of the workers on Earth are to uniting into one labor union to free ourselves of the mental stronghold that divides us and free ourselves from the empires of Earth.”
“All teenagers of Earth are to form one word-to-mouth communication system called, ‘Jah Grapevine.’ One outcome for teens of this final movement of the people of Earth is the freedom to marry and be considered adults at age 12; like, the tribes do.”
“All the circles for freedom, truth, peace, human rights, are to come to one communication circle with the teenagers.”
“All the indigenous tribes of Earth are to come to the circle as well.”
“All the poor, oppressed, and dis-eased are to join also.”
“All the leaders of all of the religions are to join the circle.”
“Take off your masks, and build bridges between you and the rest will follow.”
We have translators for every language now.” “We can have a World Wide PUBLIC Broadcasting System Now. All the people of Earth can talk to each other with one loud voice, if we work together, all at one time, and say, ‘Let’s focus on all the things that humans have in common and start from there.’”}
What is the Shift? Well for starters, it’s where the people of Earth organize themselves into one communication system that is controlled only by the people of Earth. At the same time (now) all of the working classes of Earth are uniting into one labor union by means of our ONE VOICE to take charge and share the workload that is necessary to feed, clothe, house, and heal all of the people on Earth; basically, a true world wide social security system for all.
This handbook is primarily for teenagers, so they can lead themselves to freedom now; in doing so they will lead the rest of us. The outcome for teenagers all over the world is the freedom to marry and be considered adults by puberty (or age 12; whichever comes first) as they should be free adults. True freedom is the outcome for all.
All teenagers of Earth are forming one “Teenager Communication Circle;” starting with those of the strong empire countries that have access to the communication systems, and those tribal teens and teens of poor countries that also have access to communication; be it computer, word-to-mouth, or even homing pigeons if that’s what it takes. All circles for peace and human rights are uniting together into one communication circle with the teenagers. All indigenous circles of the different tribal names are uniting with the peace, freedom and human rights circles. No longer are we working alone, or in scattered groups. We, the people will talk as ONE, plan as ONE, and act as ONE to have control of Earth for as long as the Earth has humans on it. The entire world of workers shall join this circle to rid the world of competition and the empire systems that controlled us for far too long. We will not defy any government, or empire, until we all agree on how we will act.
This handbook is a complete circle. In the introduction and throughout the book, we plant seeds or ideas in your mind. As you read on, those seeds will get watered, germinated, and fertilized, and you’ll start to sprout with excitement as the awareness of the Shift comes to your consciousness. You’ll see that together; WE shall bloom. Stay calm and read the entire handbook.
This is a world wide (R)EVOLUTION to show ourselves that we, the people of the world, can take control of the world and govern ourselves and to show those who still think they are in control that they are no longer in control, then they’ll join us and bring their “gifts” to the circle, as they are part of us. We will be very careful, as we seek out “Win-Win” situations for all; that means bringing everyone on Earth to financial equality and starting economically anew (the rich people may be a little distraught at first, but they’ll see things OUR way soon enough. Since we are thieves in the Light, we can steal most of the “Gnashing of teeth,” or burning egos, part from the prophecies, too).
In order to help the teenagers of the empires, We have added everything in this handbook to help them deal with their enslaved and over-controlling parents, and achieve the support they need from them; unlike, the parents of the freedom fighting “Flower Children” of the 1960’s, who started our circle; against all odds, and with a double edged sword of Truth. This handbook is for teenagers in every way.
In gaining the teenagers’ favor, we start with the first chapter for them, then throughout the rest of the book, there’s more ammunition for them, and we know they won’t understand everything, but throughout this campaign they’ll study amongst themselves and their parents until they understand everything that’s going on now, and many will become experts at the simple-to-understand “Underground” communication system.
We are basically forming a world wide labor union to where, eventually, no one will ever have to work for a “Boss” again. Before that can happen, we have to get organized into a solid communication system, and before that can happen, everyone in the world must know about it and know what to do; which is happening now. Basically, it is all happening at the same time; now.
Hello, our names are anonymous because we want to stay alive. We have spiritually adopted all of the people on Earth. We are married to all of you by God. We are only humans, but we have another label; “Rainbow Warriors.” Which means we come from all the different directions of Earth, and all the different countries, religions, languages, and classes, and we all have different shades of the same color of skin called, “Human.” We are here now to help bring the people of Earth “Home.”
The Rainbow family, along with all the other circles of freedom by peace, truth, understanding, forgiving (Love) and conscious social cooperation throughout the world, has over 100 million people scattered all over the world. We are always calling everybody “Home” to unselfishness and the human family; the ONE tribe. We were organized by only the Truth and the Love that is held in our hearts and minds, and many are shedding their selfish habits of old on a day to day basis, and many are new who, understandingly, are still holding on to “Their” selfish habits from yesterday’s nightmare.
The Rainbow tribe is here to help bridge the gaps between all of the other tribes (countries, empires, etc.) in the world.
Currently, in the United States, there are many Rainbow warriors still camped out in Louisiana while we operate our make-shift shelters and kitchens to help feed thousands of people daily, and many of those hurricane Katrina survivors have been ignored by their own government and the mainstream media. Have you heard about our efforts to help the hurricane survivors over mainstream media? No? There’s a reason why the Empire’s broadcasting systems don’t want the minds of the masses to know that WE even exist… I’ll get to that later, but it’s basically because we are against the “Empire System,” or “Babylon,” and we are for all of the people.
As a tribal member, the first thing that we learned was that we may not have permission to speak for the tribe or for anyone in the tribe. We have not gained any permission to speak for them; we are speaking for everyone who is lost in the polluted seas of the years of compounded deception, or for those who can’t speak for themselves because they are literally starving to death now. Tomorrow, no one will ever starve to death on Earth again, but we have some cooperating to do today.
As selfish as we think we are, Americans, we have really been trained to be unselfish about our freedom by this empire system, all we did was work and stay busy; therefore, we didn’t have the time to really live a happy life, or get involved with the political issues to make the changes that must be made in favor of the workers.
Fortunately, more and more American people were angrily saying, “There is something wrong with this system!” And there is over 7 Billion of WE, the “Workers” on Earth, and only about 144,000 “Emperors.” That’s quite a ratio, don’t you think; 144 to 7,000,000? A handful of the spoiled, selfish, and most deceived were controlling the oceans of workers “Under” them with money, but not to worry, as their foundation has only been solid ice (deception) and we are warming up very quickly now; in fact, WE the people of Earth are getting very hot with the Truth; WE are shifting. Welcome home!
All the people on Earth shall organize as one body to defy the entire empire systems of the world. WE shall stake our claim of freedom, and “Govern” ourselves. We shall turn this planet into a pillar of health, because we now can. Teenagers of the most defiant to the most conformed, and Elders, who have had no choice but to conform, shall get us started… IGNORE ALL RUMORS OF CANCELLATION, WE HAVE BEEN BUILDING THIS CIRCLE FOR OVER 40 YEARS (that we know of, but really it started thousands of years ago) AND WE SHALL CONTINUE TO GROW, and now it’s time for our growing snowball of Light to save the last suffering male and female of Earth; wherever they are, we can find them all, and rescue them. These two helpers of the last suffering, enslaved, and ignored shall always succeed. Once that is done, we have saved all of us from ever suffering for our basic human needs. WE shall have world wide social security of everyone’s basic human needs that shall be free for all; at all times, and forever! Other powerful helpers shall be called forth, and they are everyone else who can help.
What is better; putting up borders to keep the sick and diseased (dis-eased with violence, too) people from spreading their diseases to other countries, or feeding, and healing all the people on Earth to where all diseases are maximally minimized, thus giving more people the feeling of security as WE freely travel the planet? WE can do both now; since the borders are still up; therefore, WE shall while WE plan for the fences, flags, and borders that divide humans to come down.
This “Movement” has been growing for thousands of years, as we look at our past as mere stepping stones to our future. We finally have learned from our mistakes, and we are all leaving the last stepping stone, which WE, the people of Earth have been stranded on like an island. That last stepping stone to our new home on Earth was the “Empire System;” which has been the dark shadow that has fallen on all of Earth. We will fully expose that system to you by using the United States’ empires as an example, so you’ll know and understand that WE have truly been mere sheep with no shepherd; all of us. We’ll see clearly that wolves (Deceived sheep) have been our “Shepherds,” in disguise.
Vision: (Doubt kills visions, so see that you don’t do that, or let others’ doubtful influences invade your mind; stay focused).
We are writing this vision like a history book; like, we are an old woman who’s telling the children a story before bed, and we would like your help. We are making history; therefore, this book is continually being written as you read it! Remember that the word, “Shift” is an action word as a title; we are really shifting, and it is a quick action as we are evolving quickly now.
It’s a vision of the Shift, and how the teenagers under the Empire system; starting with the ones that are most defiant, led their parents and the rest of the world to true freedom, and became our new volunteer police force of the world. They now protect us.
WE are thinking as One, organizing as One, planning as ONE, and acting as ONE. The only action for starters, is merely spreading the word of the Shift; along with the numbers of people that are joining our circle, and while we spread the word we’ll be organizing at the same time. We’ll plan to do what is necessary, and what is possible, and then we’ll act; we’ll do what WE once thought was the impossible as we leave the last stepping stone to see the Light of the new day.
WE are simply blooming where WE are planted. You don’t have to do anything. The teenagers who have been invited to become Rainbow warriors (All humans of Earth are invited, too) are doing all the “Legwork” for us; along with all the other well-established circles, and while they are doing it, they are being rewarded with their own freedom as they stake their claim of it. They’ll decide amongst themselves how to stay organized, plan and act; with or without our guidance; they are free now.
Vision of the conscious start of the Shift
For thousands of years, there was a powerful and violent virus of the minds of the masses on Earth that fed off of all the people in the world. It is called, “The Empire System.” The name of this system and how it functions was kept very quiet from the people by those in control of it, but the name the empire of the United States’ government gave itself was “The Eagle.” Then in the 1960s AD, a circle idea was born of the most defiant and truth seeking people of and against the American Empire, they were called “The White Dove” (of Peace). When the teenagers of the 1960’s burnt their draft cards to stand up together in protest for our basic human rights and put an end to random drafting into the American empire’s military, is when the Dove had chained its leg to the leg of the Eagle. For 40 years the Eagle dragged the Dove around the planet. And as the torn and tattered Dove of peace was trying to keep up with the powerful violent Eagle throughout the years, feathers would fall off the Dove. From them more circles of peace were born wherever the feathers landed. All at once, in 2006AD (maybe 2007?) the people of peace decided to connect the circles, and when they did, they found that they were just as powerful as the Eagle and the two birds instantly married and the Shift was conceived. Now there are billions of White Eagle chicks (TEENAGERS) as well as a few old tired White (haired) Doves to help them prepare for flight.
History of the start of the freedom movement in the 1900’s in the United States:
Fueled with life were the teachers of Hank Williams Sr. and Elvis Presley who taught the people under the United States’ government to live again during the 1950’s. Their teachers were former slaves of the skin color that was once known as “Black,” and it appears that they are ancestors of the biggest, oldest, and happiest recognized tribe in the world; the “Truth Knowing” tribe. They taught Hank and Elvis who were once known as “White” to be brave enough to overcome their shame-based pasts and take off their invisible masks and dance even if they didn’t know how. Together, they taught the enslaved-by-shame empire people of the United States rhythm, and to move our bodies to the music any way we wanted; the “Boogie Woogie,” and “Rock-a Billy” was a few of the names for the freedom dancing, then we changed it to simply “Dancing” as the revolution of “Rock n’ Roll” music brought freedom from the shame of freely dancing in public whenever the people wanted. After Elvis and Hank, and the rest of the musicians that jumped on the band wagon, many teens were dancing happily and freely to the music, as they realized how bored and controlled they have been throughout the ages.
Then in the 1960s, all at once many teenagers, who were enslaved under the empire system, rose up in awareness and let down their invisible masks of shame and ego, and the outcome of that movement was a circle of people that started to grow. For forty years, many circles for freedom by truth, peace, understanding, forgiving, and conscious social cooperation for happiness for the entire world where formed, and their numbers grew to over 100 million people that were scattered all over the world by the year 2000AD.
A question of despair was earlier broadcasted by the Empires’ broadcasting systems from a tired Truth Knower King of the people after riots happened because of the racial and economic injustice that prevailed in the United States, “Why can’t we all just get along?” The question had unfortunately too many answers, so it was turned around on the “Alpha and Omega meter” to a better question, “How can WE all just get along?” There were still many different confusing answers, but the question was a quest of hope; especially, when the answer was in the question that was the bridge that linked the Alpha and Omega; “WE all just get along.” WE is the key that unlocks the door to freedom, and WE are the locksmiths.
Then another bi-lingual King of the Truth Knowers named, “Quino,” who had “Power To The People” tattooed on his heart, and was the lead singer with a crystal clear spirit voice of the band called, “Big Mountain,” who brought us the “House for the Seeker” on their CD entitled, “New Day.” It was an idea to bring all the spiritual leaders of all the different religions with all the necessary translators to one circle to learn about each other’s true beliefs, and to find what they all have in common, and rid the world of the nasty rumors that were spread about these religions that kept the people divided, and to bring their true teachings to clear view, along with all the good things about every religion for all of the people of Earth to benefit. They cooperated together to bridge the gaps between the different languages, and find those beliefs that all religions have in common, and figured out how all religions of the world can be rid of the empire systems of control (which includes the unwritten laws of shame and guilt) while still maintaining their organizations, as many people found God through these religions, and weren’t ever going to give up their connection to them.
More tired Truth Knower Kings appeared, like the Hawaiian Hip Hop/Reggae group called, “Sudden Rush,” whose energetic tribal spirit voices called for all the tribes of the world to unite as ONE as an “Indigenous Up Rise!” Especially, those tribes of the United States with their CD entitled, “Ea.” Then in 2006, King “Farrakhan” (did I spell it right?) bridged more gaps as he called for the “Blacks,” and “Poor Whites,” and “Mexicans” and “Native Americans” of the United States to the circle with his “Millions More” campaign, as his tired old radical spirit voice shrieked through the airwaves just under the radar of the Empire to confirm this world wide union. Also in 2006/7, Stephen Stills, Jackson Browne, and Pearl Jam (along with many others of the United States) came out with new “Anti-War/Anti-Empire” songs, and in doing so, they built a bridge back to the 60’s movement, and then all the old (people empowering) peace and freedom songs of that era came back to the public focus (Mainstream, or the “Mass-mind”) as well as all the happy songs of the 70’s, and as the onslaught of Rap music invaded the empires, it helped to bring truth to the deceived, and enough wisdom that the people could finally understand the words to this CD by John Trudell: “AKA: Graffiti Man.” John made the CD back in the 90’ after the first bombings of Iraq; when innocent women and children were killed by the thousands, but the public was too asleep to even listen to his words, or understand them.
The final climax of the shift started when the tribes and the circles of peace and basic human rights reunited and networked together. They were lead together by the teenagers of 2006/7AD. The new generation of teenagers were very savvy, and quickly brought a simple-to-understand “Underground” communication system to the people fifty years after the assassination of a man named, “Gandhi;” who taught the world about non-violent resistance when he organized his people with a communication system of no idle words. Gandhi was a great teacher for the entire human tribe, and his followers of India had one simple united voice, and they were able to defy the evil British Empire enough in the 1900’s that the British simply left the country that they once claimed was theirs, when all the time the people of India knew the country belonged to the people who lived there, and that they should only be “Governed” by themselves. (Currently, in 2006AD, India has been invaded by the empires again, and they are back in business; controlling and enslaving the mass minds of the people).
While the teens of 2006/7 were starting the countdown to oneness, they connected to the newest tribe of “Misfits” known as “The Rainbow Family of Living Light.” These “Rainbow warriors” were made up of all different colors, languages and religions, and they were all over the world; their main guide was the true Love of others and the truth that all the people of the world are really all of just one tribe called, “Human” and they were already able to assist with the “House for the Seeker,” because in the Rainbow tribe, we already had many scholars of scripture, children of pure Love, and spiritual teachers. The Dalai Lama of Tibet was already considered by many of us as ONE with all, as he made this simple proclamation of Truth, “Any religion is a good religion, if it makes you a better person. What matters the most is that you are happy” (If you are happy, then you can spread happy; you can raise happy children; if you aren’t, you can’t).
Many Rainbow warriors are merely long-haired friends of Jesus’ true teachings and frequently organize themselves into prayers circles to pray for world peace, but many despised the, so called, “Christian” religions that operated like empires to control the people with deception, and “Beliefs;” while ignoring the facts on Earth. We became the bridge builders who built bridges between people who still believed that they were different than anyone else; all-the-while we were living in peace and love with each other, our neighbors, as well as all fellow humans.
Yes, back then the people were not only divided by confusion and beliefs, they were divided by borders, countries and languages, and no one could travel anywhere out of “Their own country” without permission from the “Emperors.” As I said before, George Bush Sr. and the entire “Bush Klan” was just the most powerful emperor at the time, there were actually about 144,000 of them that were all networked together to continue to keep control of the people with mass mind manipulation and idle words through the broadcasting systems that they owned with their money system. But the system was only working for them while nearly 7-8 billion people were working too hard and/or suffering because of them.
With the encroachment of the Empire system over control of all the people of Earth, and since the United States was the “Bulldog” of the empire system that was still able to enslaved the minds of the masses enough to continue to produce a huge violent military to secure their control over the people and the nearly $144 Trillion (?) on Earth that the empire had slowly continued to print over the years in order to continue to stay richer. Well, it only seemed natural to convert the US (the Divided states of America, really) to true unity first, and they became the “Father” of the shift. The bulldog became “Man’s best friend.”
As the Rainbow tribe started connecting the dots, all the tribes were discovered, from the Truth Knowers to the innocently ignorant, and the people found that nearly half the world was immediately in the circle. “Jah Grapevine” was what the communication system was called; now it’s just “The Circle.” The circle that was growing since, perhaps the days of Jesus, was slingshot into the final climax of the Shift by the teens of the 1960’s (who were still alive; most of them) reunited with the teens of 2006/7 and after a few adjustments they’ll always be in control of it; there’s no stopping them now as they are supported by all.
Famous people immediately started to come “Home” to the human tribe and walk among us. Then Oprah Winfrey, the famous talk show host of America; who was a leader of the women’s empowering movement, realized that she had been fooled, distracted with money, and the fact that the slave masters of yesterday had just cashed in their whips for money, laws and contracts; were keeping her from blooming and thus, she was ignoring her spiritual response-abilities, as she discovered that all the money and fame was seducing her, and it all went to her head (ego). She surrendered her ego and came home to the people via the Public Broadcasting Systems, and many of her wealthy friends followed; people Like Paul McCartney, Elton John, Stephen Stills, Jackson Browne, Madonna, Hank Williams Jr., Robert Redford, Val Kilmore, John Travolta, Sting, Tom Cruz, and Jon Voight; just to name a few. When that happened, it was like everything that all of the famous people ever done in the past for charity; like “Live Aid” and “Farm Aid,” was really just setting up the stages for what they were going to do. Free concerts to celebrate and generate our Oneness were staged, as Oprah lit the torch of the statue of liberty for the entire world to live in the Light of true freedom with her “Homecoming.” She was called, “The Mother of the Shift,” and she became one of the many English speaking spokespeople for “The House for the Seeker,” and held their publicized conferences on our rebuilt and “World Wide Public Broadcasting System,” along with the conferences of the “Center Circle” of Jah Grapevine once the people took full control of all the broadcasting systems, as the people declared that no government or private entity shall ever be free to deceive and/or tempt the minds of the masses in any way by broadcasting again. The Truth shall prevail over Earth.
2006/7 was the time where no one, was 100% happy before the shift, but everyone knew that WE were headed towards 100% happiness for all. The people were happier as they headed towards more happiness. The entire planet was on the way towards a World Wide Social Security system that brought world health, peace, and happiness for all the tribe, as more and more people started to recognize each other as a family member of the only tribe; Human. The people celebrated as soon as they got the word, because they saw enough of the big picture, or the whole truth. While in celebration, they built the Circle and the people’s mass mind shifted towards freedom of living for today by truth, peace, understanding, forgiving, and conscious social cooperation.
All the empire country’s governments were converted, and the people had control of all the military and outer space equipment and they put it to work for all the people on Earth. Believe it or not, the president of the US, George W. (war) Bush was one of the first emperors to cross the ego line to start his journey home to the people, for the people (he had no choice, really) when Oprah made her move.
The Shift was the ending of the final wars amongst the people and started with a call for a world wide truce, or “Time-out.” The wars ended when everyone in the world became aware of their own egos that had led them to a lost place. It was the war of the minds of the masses turned against themselves by the empires. The wolves had all the sheep scattered. The onion peels of ego that surrounds and protects the broken hearts of men fell and turned to gourds of ashes, as shame had become the highlighted part of the virus that needed to be treated with a strong dose of the medicine called, “Forgiveness.” Shame and guilt are unwritten laws, and there were too many unwritten laws in favor of the empires, as a result of the wolves’ dirty work over the past millenniums.
The people celebrated by quickly rescuing others. Here’s a translated quote from the last slave mother rescued, “We were starving. The bosses all mysteriously disappeared (Many will hide like cockroaches when the Light comes on, but then later, they’ll see that it’s safe to just be human and step across their ego lines, take down their invisible masks, and come out of hiding and come home) and nobody had to work. I was happy because nobody was raping the women, or whipping my children any more, but they stopped bringing food… and all of a sudden we heard noises… It was music and people singing songs; all kinds of different people of all the different colors of skin, clothes and hair styles. I thought they were aliens from outer space, but they were humans; smiling and they were filled with Spirit, and with a joy that I’ve never seen before… and they were all carrying food; fresh fruit… they were running towards us… (Happy tears bled down her cheeks again as she spoke) …we didn’t know that they came to rescue the last suffering people on earth! Everyone in the tribe was healed and happy and they said that this was the way life is now in the whole world; everyone is in the same tribe now, and we all now have the security from ever having to be enslaved by our own basic human needs again, and from ever having to pay taxes again. They said the whole world is celebrating now, because they found us, and now everyone is ‘Home.’ They said, ‘You are free!’ They used the fastest planes on Earth, along with helicopters, other planes, and aircraft carriers! They did it just for us! They called themselves ‘Rainbow warriors.’”
Today all the people are relieved, free and equal and WE all know it, even the emperors have all come home.
While the excitement and freedom of the teenagers was in full bloom, the fear of the largest baby-boom to ever reach Earth was upon us, as the Center Circle quickly organized the growing of the healthiest food possible all over the planet; while teaming up with modern technology to bring the food, hospitals and health care, etc. to all directions of Earth for all the people.
In 2012 AD, and due to the freedom of the teenagers, and world wide happiness, the population had exploded to nearly 10 billion happy, healthy people. They didn’t even feel the need for a “Savior” to show up, but WE were wondering if that 10 billionth baby was going to be someone special to teach us more about spiritual healing, growing, astral traveling, walking on water, etc. (That’s where the vision skips forward, because when it comes to spiritual truths, we are just pawns on that chessboard. We are not scholars of scripture; We are students of pure love {Love Eternal’s, “Creation” CD} and we are children of the true Light; apprentice priests/shamans, which means that we are set-up to learn “Truths” quickly, and at this time we would like to believe that WE, all together in one tribe, are the “Omega;” the spirit of the Christ, or The Oneness, who have been guided home, mysteriously, by God).
By 2012, WE were convinced that WE could easily produce more food to feed many more billions of people, but then something else happened as time went by, more and more people continued to shed their selfishness all on their own, and the planet stayed at about 10 billion; where it is today.
By the end of 2012, no one was working for time again (time was money). Time as WE knew it, stopped. Mother Earth was the only dictator of time. WE grow food by her clock; she is our only “Emperor” now. Even all the alarm clocks that everyone was “Programmed” to use to get out of bed “On time;” to get to work (school is work) “On time” were destroyed; except for those used for our “Basic Human Needs Circles.” We even changed the New Year again to year 1AS (After the Shift) instead of calling it 2013AD.
All this time the people are building the infinite “Tower to God” by continuing to just love their neighbors a little more with each passing day. The loving friendships, care, and trust that grows between humans is the only “Tower to God” we ever had to build, as WE rebuild Babylon the right way; OUR way. Babylon shall fall and be converted, as neighbors are our only true social security, and we all know it now, as we look for God in the eyes of our neighbors.
Welcome home to the one tribe, WE are still all different colors, beliefs, etc. And WE are all one family: Human.
Welcome to the Truth Knowing tribe, of those who seek-out the truth of how humans are actually supposed to live together and share Earth.
Feeding the Elders
We ask all Elders of the world to get into circles and discuss this campaign. We have watched families torn apart because of selfishness and competition that has been brought on by the mental stronghold of the Empires. The selfishness is brought on by starvation of freedom, and then temptation to desire something else. When we are starving for something (like a basic human need of the physical, mental, emotional, or hormonal kind; or simply freedom, happiness, rest, etc.) but don’t know what it is, because of too much distraction by temptation and working all the time; then sometimes we can’t stop selfishness. It’s simple; we were trained to focus on work, desires, and beliefs that divide humans; ahead of the facts of living together on Earth.
If we can put a man on the moon (over forty years ago!) then we can figure out how we can all live together without working so much (everyone). The average “40 hour a week” working parent in the United States was actually working from the time the alarm clock rings to the time they go to bed. We worked hard just to get the kids fed and to school or daycare on time, then we had to get ourselves to work. We were already working two hours a day while we got our families used to splitting apart for the entire day and going in different directions, and then we worked eight hours more of the day away; then we picked up the children, got home, cooked dinner, cleaned-up, and pushed the kids to do their homework. That is a full 12-14 hours! And we were supposed to do that, independently, while maintaining a happy family for 20 years or longer? Who had time for you; elder?
After everyone was tired from working all day, that’s when we were supposed to spend “Quality time” with our children. It couldn’t possibly be quality time if everyone was tired, so once the work was done, most parents fell a little short by ignoring their neighbors and children, collapsing on the couch, and staring at the Empire’s main weapon of mass destruction; the television. They manipulated us with it; all ways, always. They brought us what they wanted us to see, hear, and care about. As long as we were watching their TV businesses, they were in control. We needed leaders that will listen to the people, and not talk at the people. We needed leaders that will give. Those leaders are now WE; the tired teenagers, the tired workers, and the re-tired workers.
We pray: “Elders (all of them) shall be treated like Kings and Queens, now (but that’s not going to happen in your lifetime unless a major movement happens… It’s here now; stay calm). You shall be treated like Kings and Queens of Love. You shall be looked upon as if you are God, as every weak person on Earth shall be looked upon as if they are God. WE shall be relieved now, and we shall evolve to a world of people who spend all of our time in quality and equality. Amen. So be it.”
As spiritual “Brethren” it is our job to feed those that cry out the most, first. But how could we do that when we were beggars? Beggars united! I THINK THAT YOUR PART IS YOUR GIFT TO THE WORLD. Thank you, and what you may not realize is that for all these years we have just been setting up the stage for a major movie; “Move.” My job has always been to find a way to bring more reinforcements to the circle; that’s my gift to the tribe. “I’m out of my mind, and into OUR mind.” This is not about me; it’s all about WE. Come together… right now… over WE. Marry me by God, but if that sounds uncomfortable with you; marry the suffering children by God. I am married to God; therefore, I am married to you with Love; always remembering who our real father is; not I or any other human on Earth. God is our father, and it’s time we all listen to God, together as ONE (WHATEVER YOU ENVISION GOD TO BE, as there are many names, or ideas, or gods; of the same God). Remember, with God all things are possible.
Teens Lead 11-15-06 (Remember: this is a rough draft that is to be used as the final draft; therefore, understand that parts of it may be a little redundant and lengthy as we are trying to talk to 12 year olds and people of other languages, too)
Gaining the Teen’s Favor (continued from the introduction – read the introduction)
1. Teens Lead
1. Jah Grapevine 101 - training
1. Main Circle of Humans – the heart of the human tribe
1. Home – human baseline truth
2. Circle Training
2. Eggshell 101
1. Human baseline truth
2. Egg, etc.
3. The Empire System
1. Exposing the negative
2. Highlighting the positive (Goliath gave us the slings and stones to slay him, and we now have sharpened double edged swords of Truth) Go to page?, later.
3. Outcome for teens of the entire world (Introduction)
1. “You can’t fight against the youth… We’re rude rude people!” _Bradly James Nowell
2. Age Thing
3. School Thing? Shame Shame Shame
4. Conscious Party _Ziggy Marley
1. Building the Communication System
2. Conscious Dance
3. Protesting 101
4. Truth based drug education
1. Plan l, Now armed with the swords of Truth we march
1. The start of the end for all empires of Earth
2.
2. Plan 2, Adjusting the first plan
3. Plan 3 to infinity (We’ll keep coming up with plans, if we have to, until we get it right!)
Jah Grapevine
We are starting a simple and solid communication system for all of the people on Earth. It will eventually become the one world government with no leaders; just us; WE, the people. This system is simple and will require just a little reading, thought, and training on your part.
The communication system discussed here, “The Circle,” or “Jah Grapevine,” is simply a stepping stone, or stairway, for the system that we will use in the future. We must have a back-up plan; therefore, this is the back-up plan that needs to be used and understood. It is a way for you to see the steps that WE are taking to do what is needed to achieve everyone’s basic human needs for free on Earth; therefore I’m showing you the necessary, and the possible, then the “Impossible.” Look at it as playing a game. In this game all we need are most of the players and WE, the people, win.
Gandhi: “The only way to organization is solid communication of no idle words.”
How can the people all communicate as one in order to get organized; simply and non-electronically (the empire owned the electricity) while aligning the necessary translators at the places where languages need to be bridged over the entire world, so we can all speak one “Language” (the language of truth and intention) now; without the interference from the empire? WE can translate every language to and from English now! In a way, WE already can speak one language.
Gandhi led his country to freedom, because the people all communicated as one and stood together as one. Today there are 100 Million people, or more, who are ready to come together in one organized circle all over the world. This idea can connect the dots quickly, while doing it in the Light (not hiding what WE are doing) because it’s a circle that continues to grow. WE, the people, are uniting while the empires watch, and soon the emperors will come home to the circle.
The perfect circle is just a model for us to go by, but may be actually what we do. It is simple, so most of the intoxicated beggars of the world can understand it, along with almost every adult by the age of 12, who have been raised in an empire country like the United States.
The Circle: An underground communication system that has a vacancy for all the people of the world, should WE decide that WE are living in that science fiction movie, where it’s Humans against a machine.
The perfect model will start with one hundred people in a circle, and WE will call them the “Center Circle,” but for Training purposes we are going to start with nine people to help you grasp the concept easily, then we’ll grow from there.
b. Eggshell 101
Human Baseline Truth (Home base) Home
The home is the awareness that you have one of your two feet planted in the one heart of all humans. You are conscious that all humans share the same basic human needs, and that if we all just cooperated together for those basic human needs, we wouldn’t really have to work much at this time in history, because we have modern technology.
Home is in your mind. Do you worry about fitting in? Because here you don’t have to worry about it; you are in if you know it. You don’t have to prove yourself to anyone for any reason. If you are not accepted for just whoever you are, then those people who don’t accept you are still immature. They are the ones that need to grow-up more. You don’t have to work much for anyone else, because you are here for everyone in the world. Home is walking towards unselfishness; leaving “Me” and heading towards “We.”
If you are working for everyone of Earth, and your foot is planted in the middle with everyone else’s one foot, then you are working for yourself, and at that point, we’ll stop calling it work and start calling it cooperating.
For now, we can call “Home,” your awareness of being a tribal member of the only tribe of Earth; the humans. You are a part of one body, and this one body is in need of some healing. The main healing that has to happen first is that most of us simply need to come home.
Now you can also say that you are a member of the “Truth Knowing” tribe. We aren’t necessarily talking about spiritual truths, because we are actually living right here, and now, on Earth. We are seeking spiritual truths, but the primary focus of this campaign is to seek the truth of the way humans are supposed to live here on Earth, and how we can; right now, and together. As a member of the Truth Knowers, it doesn’t mean that you know any truth of how humans are supposed to live, but that you are seeking the truth, and trying to live your life the way that you have just become aware. In other words, you are evolving as you learn and become aware of the correct way that we are supposed to be living together. All the humans in one communication circle have all the knowledge that it will take to bring this planet into a heavenly world to live for all; equally.
We are all living together on Earth anyway; we are all sharing the planet, so whatever it is that all humans have in common is the highlight of this campaign; therefore, that is our home; where all are welcome. Welcome home!
The Eggshell is where WE belong.
Ben and Jerry’s ice cream put an advertisement out over our mainstream television that showed us a sad farmer who was standing by his milk cow, and he said to us, “We are losing our farms to corporations.” It was not a deceiving advertisement that we are normally use to seeing, with phony people (actors) smiling in the background. It was an advertisement to bring the Truth to the public’s consciousness; to bring the Truth to the mass mind. Then the caption read, “We are losing 214 farms a week to corporations.”
We are losing our food supplies to the maximize profits/minimize loss corporations. The spiders are taking control of our food supplies. They can monopolize our food supplies if they get the majority of them, and then we will be enslaved by them even more. It’s time for the change… Shift! Welcome the good people at Ben and Jerry’s Ice Cream home to the circle.
Natural American Spirit Tobacco Company is actually on our side. Even though they are selling tobacco, they are actually competing against the evil tobacco companies. The big ones are putting many different chemicals in their tobacco to make their cigarettes burn more evenly, and become more addicting as an acquired taste of their brands are different then others, and becomes more addicting to our subconscious minds with the additives. The argument is that perhaps raw tobacco wouldn’t cause cancer as much if it wasn’t laced with highly toxic chemicals. Natural American Spirit Tobacco doesn’t put additives in the cigarettes, and I have smoked and quit smoking many times in my life. I found them easier to quit then the others. We welcome the good people at Natural American Spirit Tobacco Company home to the circle
There are a group of people who are not organized, and are not on the eggshell, but they believe in tribal ways. Guess who they are? I’ll give you a hint. Do you remember when everybody started getting tribal tattoos on their bodies about ten years ago? Them; the tattoos are here to stay, and so are they. We welcome them home to the circle.
There’s a much bigger group of unorganized people out there as well that also have something in common, and only a few of them were ever on the eggshell at any one time; they are they people who believe in Marijuana freedom. Welcome home!
Back in 1993, I was riding my motorcycle on a hot summer day in the foothills above Sacramento, California, USA. I was about 32 years old, and I have been riding motorcycles since I was ten, so I didn’t see the need to have a motorcycle license, because I had a driver’s license to operate a car. And I knew that it recently became illegal to operate a motorcycle without a helmet on, because of the propaganda that the insurance industries put out over mainstream media to cause the people to pass the new law. You know I’m a rebel against corporate control, so I risked riding my bike without a helmet on. A police officer, who appeared to be someone that I would have picked on (back in
grammar school) because I didn’t know any better at the time (you know, the “Not very tough, or cool guy”) pulled me over. As I watched him and noticed that his badge and his gun were bigger than he was, he seemed to enjoy writing me the citation for driving a motorcycle without a license, and without a helmet, as it was his turn to pick on people. Then he said that I had to walk my bike home, because he couldn’t allow me to ride it home without a license! As soon as he drove out of site, I rode it home.
Then I went to a Biker Helmet Law Rally that was held on the steps of the state capital in Sacramento on the 4th of July to protest the helmet law. I guess there were about 400 Bikers there. They said to not pay the citations that everyone was given; in protest of the law. I said to myself, “These biker’s can’t be serious, there’s no way that they’ll ever stand up against the insurance industry without more people to join them.” So I set out to recruit more people, and that was the start of this booklet, to get more people for them. Welcome the Bikers home to true freedom, along with the entire Harley Davidson empire… Welcome home… I never paid the citation!
The next page is a picture that is worth a million words. It shows our eggshell expanded with the use of the Circle to where we bring all the managers, police officers, accountants, and lawyers home to the eggshell, and cut the tops off of all the money pyramids to take control.
Every corporation belongs to all of the people now. We, the people of the world, are united, as we all come home to the egg of humanity. The Babylon system of commerce and competition shall be no more.
Jah Grapevine
The Plan for teenagers
These are exciting times for the entire world. We are making history. You will be telling stories to your children and grandchildren about these days for the rest of your lives. Take pictures, videos, and write things down to help you remember so you can have your version of the Shift. Save newspaper clippings, and record news events, etc.
Keep in mind that the freedom circles for human rights, which includes the labor unions; the circles for peace by Truth, understanding, forgiving, and conscious social cooperation; the circles for the environment; the tribal circles as well as many religious circles; all add up to over 100 Million people! We are ready to support you.
According to our model of “Jah Grapevine,” we have an established center circle that is well hidden. We have all the people to make a 2nd, 3rd, and completed 4th generation.
You are called to action. In doing so, you will unite us and bring the big circle, the 5th generation, home. Welcome Home!
For those who haven’t really “Got it” yet; haven’t realized how exciting this movement is, you will. There’s a lot more to add to the plan; a lot more details, and clarification, and the excitement will come to you as you read on and discuss this handbook with your family, friends, and neighbors.
We are all going to experience a natural “High” that has never hit this world before; people are going crazy. “Governments don’t know what to do when ‘Their’ people go crazy… plumb, full-tilt bozo” _Robin Williams. Welcome Home, “Nano Nano!” “We are standing on a threshold of a dream… I want to live!” _John Denver. “People get ready… there’s a train a coming!” _Bob Marley. “Everyone on the peace train!” _Van Morrison. “We have to face who we really are… at some point we have no choice.” _John Trudell. “Music is the doctor!” _The Doobie Brothers. “Come Together…Right Now… over WE” _The people.
We are not conspiring to over-throw the government, but even if we were; is it not legal for friends and neighbors in the “Christian” based countries to love each other and talk to each other about the possibilities of a revolution? Are we not free to talk to our neighbors about anything? We are conspiring to cooperate with all the governments and empires to Shift the world quickly and peacefully by the people taking control immediately. The governments will show us that they are either with us or against us, as we eliminate the rich man’s corruption within our empire systems. Babylon shall fall peacefully and our, so called, “Leaders” of yesterday are invited to join us as we welcome them home to the humans. We will not fight them; we’ll ignore them as we move forward, and invite them to help us with their “Gifts.” They are welcome to come along... HOME!
Jah Grapevine
Plan 1 for teenagers
Step 1. We are going to assume that you are the first teenager in your school to get this handbook, and that we are at the start of the Shift. Think of it as playing a game… It’s the “Circle of Peas” game; where we are all different shades of green in the same pod. Keep in mind that this handbook is being copied, translated, and sent all over the world as fast as we can now, and that it is still “Underground.”
Assuming that you understand a little bit about the circle system; means that if you have a copy, your entire school has a copy. But, if you loose it, or get it taken away from you before you get a copy to a friend, then your entire school has lost the only copy, so try to keep it a secret from authority for now. You’ll want the “Bosses” to be the last to know. “Bosses” are your parents, teachers, etc. Part of the game is keeping it a secret until you have 100 other teenagers involved. Think about how fast your school can come up with 100 people; you start telling people, they start telling people, and so on.
Find a way to a copy machine, scanner/printer, etc. and make at least two copies; one for you to keep in good shape so you can use it to print more copies later, and one to give to a friend. If you use the copy machine at school, be smart. If you know a friend that already has a scanner/printer, they should be one of your first contacts.
Step 2. You know your friends better then I, so think of whatever you can say to get them to read it. “YOU’VE GOT TO READ THIS!” with excitement and joy on your face might work just fine, and tell them about it enough so they’ll be interested.
Step 3. Assuming you found someone who is interested in playing this game with us and building a circle, decide who, what, when, where, how, and (You already know why). Oh yeah, if you get asked questions by a “Boss” about what you are doing, think of it as playing a game. You are playing a game to see if we can take control of the world, but you don’t have to tell them everything; don’t lie, but let their own egos deceive them with your half-truths, and know that you are deceiving them; don’t be in denial; “It’s a school project.” If you do get caught and they demand that you tell them who you gave copies to, don’t tell them unless they physically torture you; that’s part of the game; don’t tell on your circle.
Step 4. Make more copies and get more people to play. It all starts now, and if you can find a way to send this through the internet, spend all the time you can, and send it to everyone you can; especially to other countries.
Step 5. How many students are in your school? That’s how many people that are in your circle, they just don’t know it yet.
Step 6. Once you have a circle of seven, you are growing quickly from here on out. Make plans for four of you to visit another school near you; these are teens that your school plays sports with, etc. Introduce yourselves and give them copies of this handbook, and all four of your phone numbers/contact information, so the other three of you stay hidden and protected for now. Your circle is now growing in other schools while it’s growing in your school. They’ll be in communication with you from here on through the Shift.
Step 7. This is of greatest import/export: If you know someone in your school that is bi-lingual, give them a copy and ask them to translate this in their other language and try to
find a way to send it to the countries that use that language. That is their gift to bring to
our circle. This was written in simple English, so it will be easy for them. Hopefully,
they’ll have other people who can help them with it, so they can share the chore and split the booklet up, so each of them can translate a section and then discuss and proof read it, and put it back together. They are to put their translations on the back of each page, so that this gets sent with it’s English version as well; for example, the first page should be in English, as page 1, then on the other side, should be page 1 in their other language, and so on. It’s a big job, so give them as much support as you can.
Step 8. Anyone in your circle who has teenage relatives in another part of the country/world should try to get a copy sent to them as soon as possible; they are already in your circle, too, and they need to know it. Anyone who can send this through the internet, or snail mail to soldiers in the military should try to do that immediately, so they’ll know from us what’s going on now.
Step 9. Make plans to go to another school, and do the same. As your circle grows, you’ll be talking to each other about things that you are going to do, and how, etc., so let’s assume that you have made it to 100 people. The only news that we are spreading through the circle at this time is the number of people who are “In.” “Purple” is replaced with the number of people that are in your circle who understand enough of this handbook to know what’s going on now.
Building Energy with Excitement
For the teenagers of the United States, I’m going to jump ahead a little, and after you read the rest of the book, you’ll see the importance of telling you now where we are going. The broadcasting systems of the empire will not help us advertise our growth, or even our existence; without our persuasion.
Once you have over 100 people in contact with each other (hopefully, you can wait until your entire school is in the circle) it’s now time for a “420 party.” What?
Now that your circle has grown this big, there’s no stopping it now as you continue to tell more and more people, so it’s time to “Go public.” Every teenager in your circle is to now give this to their parents and give them time to read it.
“420” has many different meanings at this time in history, and has been purposely kept from the public consciousness by mainstream media, so as to not promote the use of Marijuana. This is not a movement to promote its use; this is a movement to promote freedom by truth.
The 100 teenagers are the leaders (representatives) for their families. In the United States, there is an average of 4.2 people per family household. Multiply 4.2 by 100, and you come up with 420. What a coincidence!
While your circle of 100 teens continues to grow, you just added the rest of the family; they were already in your circle, but didn’t know until now. Ask the parents if they’ll help organize the 420 party. Keep in mind that by the time you organize the party, to the time that you actually start partying; thousands of people will be coming to the party!
The 420 party
Once the party starts, it’s not going to stop until all of the people in the United States, and then the world, are in the circle. What? That’s right! The party is not actually going to be in a building. The party is a “Coming-out” party; where we organize ourselves in groups to go in public and advertise the circle. It’ll look like a protest, but we aren’t protesting; we are advertising.
The bigger the groups, the better, but groups shouldn’t be any smaller then seven people. Pick a date when the party starts, and then here’s how we’ll move after you organize your volunteers:
1. For starters, volunteers will all put on white arm bands (a white flag; tied around your arm) or wave white surrender flags, and if we run out of white surrender flags, hold up the peace sign with your two fingers while we go out in public. A few volunteers will purposely not put on white surrender flags, so they can be witnesses, and act just like the general public. Your group should have a video camera, or at least a camera with them at all times, so we can record any possible foul play by the police departments. Organize yourselves to split up and go to places where other teenagers gather, and have as many copies of this booklet as you can to pass out, along with your contact information.
2. Before you do anything, your circle shall make a special copy of this entire handbook and send it to the president of your country, with your signatures on it. This is our petition. The first police officer of any city who gets this will take it immediately to his “Bosses,” but hopefully he reads it first, and takes it to other police officers first, as we want his “Boss” to be the last to know, also. When that happens, every police department in the country and then the world will get this to be prepared for the movement. Every officer in uniform (that means everyone soldier in our militaries) is to have a white arm band on to protect them and to show us that they are in our circle. Whenever a police car drives by our party, we are to wave white flags at them and point our fingers at them if they do not have a white flag attached to their vehicle for everyone to see. Once you see a police vehicle driving by with a white flag on it, let them go by freely without any harassment; their job is to protect and to serve the people, and they may be on the way to save a life.
Some of you are to volunteer (4 per 100?) to keep the circle’s communication flowing smoothly and to keep track of the numbers of people who join, but don’t worry if you lose track because of the big rush, when that happens stop worrying about it, unless the empire strikes back (There’s plans for that in this handbook, too). During the big rush, there won’t be any time to sit down and try to draw circles on paper with names to the dots, because they’ll be too many people coming in at once and you’ll be too excited and too overwhelmed; that was just the back-up plan, remember; the steps to show you that we can do it now? But other countries that don’t have all the slings and stones as we do (Internet, cell phones, etc) will need to understand the basic circle idea, so they can keep up with the word-to-mouth communications with us all.
3. We are to bombard the White House with copies of this; one copy per circle of 100 teens, and if you can find addresses (email, or snail mail) of famous people; especially, Oprah, bombard them with this booklet as well. You’ll be talking with the other circles all the time and we’ll know how many copies of this got sent to all of the people that are mentioned in this book; this will excite the ones that we already know that are on our side, and they’ll help us.
4. Organize a party to gather around as many broadcasting stations as you can without spreading yourselves too thin (You’ll find them in the phonebook under, “Radio stations and broadcasting companies” or “Television stations”). Do not call them and let them know that you are coming; surprise them in this way, and remember more and more people are coming to the party, so have many copies of this handbook to give to the broadcasting stations and to the people who come up to you to ask questions, or send them to web sites that your are developing: Have people in different cars drive by the station(s) and honk their horns and wave white flags out the windows as they drive by to make your party look bigger than it is. Your group will have at least one cell phone with you, and you’ll always be in contact with each other so no more than one “Drive-by” for every five minutes, or so, happens. Those that drive by one station are to make a tour of all the other radio stations in your big cities that we gather around and do the same thing as we grow and spread our movement throughout the land.
5. If you have a “Public Broadcasting Station” near you, they should be one of the first that we start with, because there’s a good chance that they’ll start broadcasting for us immediately. The next station should be the ones that teenagers listen to and the alternatives, and the next should be the big ones if you have any in your city; if you don’t, don’t worry, we’ll have a big party gathering around the big ones soon enough; ABC, CBS, NBC, ect. They will eventually cooperate with us, because if they don’t we will all know, because of our word-to-mouth broadcasting system.
6. Our job is to attract attention, so the general public comes up and asks questions, make sure you have answers, a copy of this booklet to give to them, or a website address to send them to. They’ll be back in a few hours or the next day with more copies to give back as they join the party after they read the handbook. When all of the broadcasting stations are surrounded in your city as we are growing fast now, and more and more people are coming to the circle, then spread out to other places of your cities where cars are channeled; like over-passes on highways, so those who drive by can see many white flags waving. The more people that come out, the more we spread out to advertise.
7. People are going to have a hard time sleeping through all the excitement, so teenagers are to take the time off from school once this party starts, but parents are to go back to work and spread this throughout their workplaces. (You’ll see why in the pages to follow, as you read on)
8. For those of you in San Francisco, organize a march on both sides of the Golden Gate Bridge as soon as possible (there are people committing suicide, because they haven’t heard about the Shift yet). The Brooklyn Bridge needs marches too, and the White House lawn in Washington D.C. shall have a big party on that lawn. The police of all cities are to cooperate with us to make sure everyone is safe and traffic flows smoothly, and we might need to cooperate with them to limit the amount of people who come out to party. Those who are on the White House lawn are to hand-deliver a copy of this to the security officers there, so you know that the President got it.
9. The first 420 party starts the countdown to oneness; it means that we have grown and are continuing to grow quickly. It means that you are in communication and talking with other teens all over the map of the world about what is going on, as they’ll be doing the same thing in their cities. The excitement will generate more energy, and while you are organizing your party, others in the country are building their circle, too. Eventually you’ll know about each other, and that should really excite everyone, as we merge our circles into one.
10. The broadcasting systems will engage with us, as they become one with us, and the size of our circle, along with the numbers of people that continue to join will multiply quickly and that number will be updated frequently and broadcasted by them, and we’ll all know that we are in control of the mass minds of the people (ourselves) instead of the empires being in control of us through mainstream media.
11. Trading of the stock market is to shut down throughout the truce; otherwise the rich fools will panic and crash it, to cause more panic of the people. Don’t panic; we know that some are very scared, be happy now, and know that we are in control. They may want us to panic, so we’ll look to them to fix everything. They aren’t our leaders anymore. We are going to fix everything because we can now; don’t worry, be happy; will figure it all out.
12. The first 420 party starts the 420 party forever; starts the world wide truce forever; starts the family reunion forever; Shifts the world forever. This can happen in one day, if we move carefully and stay focused, but it might take a few days! Don’t get ahead of yourself; make sure you have 100 teenagers in your circle who are continuing to tell others, before you go public.
13. Thank you teenagers and welcome home, and now you have proven yourselves worthy to be considered adults which you are now. You are free to marry by God or on your own accord. Congratulations, and happy New Year’s forever and ever. Today is a NEW DAY!
14. Ladies and gentleman, start your circles
a. Outcome for Teens of the Entire World: Freedom.
After reading this book, you will have all the knowledge it takes to be a peaceful warrior (journeyman) for freedom by Truth, understanding, forgiving, and conscious social change by focused cooperation of the working class (basically all the people of the world shall see the Light).
You’ll be a rebel against the Empire. Definition of rebel: Stand against authority. That doesn’t mean using violence… ever. In this case, we won’t actually be standing against authority once we have built the bridges between the workers and the emperors. The teenager’s job is an easy one: You’ll stay in school for starters, but you are sick of going to work for the empire without being paid for the work you do in school, and you’ll start talking while building our underground communication system, “Jah Grapevine;” or “The Circle.” This basically means that you are going to talk to the people you are closest, and your circle will have to have at least one expert at the communication system, and it’s so simple to learn, that even a bright child could learn it. WE need you now to go to work, and play. Your parents will support you… sooner or later, as they’ll read and understand what’s happening now; you are asked to give them a copy of this after you read it and take action.
First off; I’d like to say that I wish I had learned a lot more about life before I became completely brainwashed and graduated public high school (United States’ governmental school for adults of ages 14-18?) And that’s the main reason as to why I’ve written this handbook, because high school is simply a big baby-sitter for the Corporate Machine to keep us, and form us into being brainwashed children for the rest of our lives. I’m not really talking about the actual schools doing the forming as much as I’m talking about the time frame; the teenage years. It’s a time where we are all mature enough to be adults, but aren’t allowed to do so; instead, we are made to just be children and keep the immature habits of children, and ignore the idea of being adults… or free.
Teenage years are truly hellish in the U.S. We have a big problem in our country: There are too many bored and unhappy teenagers that are sick with an acquired attention deficit handicap that was brought on by modern technology, and there is a clash that goes on between them and their parents, because they are made to live with them too long. What’s worse is that this has been going on for so long that it’s now considered “Normal,” and accepted to the point where we just keep doing it. The problem is that we don’t allow teens to grow up. Laws make parents financially ensued for the actions of their unhappy teen, so they are forced to control their young women and men too much, and make them stay children until they are 18 years old, and when people (in general) are controlled too much they are naturally going to rebel or become defiant; especially now that the truth is told.
Do you think that you are a child? How old are you? Do you know enough to look both ways before you cross the street? Or does someone need to hold your hand? At twelve years old, is a person old enough to know right from wrong, and learn from their own mistakes; to go out on their own… a Journeyman? (Journeywoman)
Going back in history we find that Jesus started learning on his own at twelve years old. Is there a spiritual message for us to learn from here? Gandhi; the spiritual leader of India, was married back in the 1800s when he and his bride were both 12 years old (do the research yourself, if you don’t believe me; it’s in the movie, “Gandhi,” with Ben Kingsley and Candice Bergman). Today, we can still find ‘’Native’’ people on this planet, who go through a ‘’Rite of Passage’’ ceremony at puberty, and are considered men and women who are free to marry, and then they are expected to be contributors to the tribe, or response-able, as they were already taught to be adults by the time they were 12 (The true meaning of “Responsible” is not of a controlling stand; it’s that of offering your services, because you can; you are able-to-respond). And in the animal world, we see that once an animal matures to where they are able to reproduce, they do it immediately because they have been prepared for it. God would not give us a body that is fully capable of reproducing without a brain that is fully capable of handling it, would he? (Whatever you envision God to be)
How many parents over the age of 18 make mistakes on a daily basis anyway? How many parents are not emotionally ready to be adults at age 30, 40, or 50 years old? How many live in fear? Too many. Many of us are self medicating with anti-depressant/anti-anxiety drugs, alcohol, Marijuana, tobacco and other “Pacifiers” to help us cope with life in the United States. Why, then, are we having to wait until we are 18 years old in the U.S. before we go from being a child, one day, to an adult the next? I’ll answer that question later. The reason for the question is to show you how absurd our society treats teenagers. We are fully capable at learning from our mistakes by age 12 and we are capable of just about anything that older ‘’Adults’’ can do,
For instance; how hard do you think it is for adults in the U.S. to move into a house? You fill out some kind of application; it’s simple English. You call the electric company to hook up, again; simple English... the phone company… the garbage company… water, sewer, etc. They make this stuff so easy now that it’s idiot proof, because they want our business (money). All we had to do is have money, and an income. Now look at all the people who drive automobiles, and you can see that a 12 year old can learn to drive a car, it just takes a little practice.
Oh, there’s more... Most jobs that adults do in the US are completely idiot proof nowadays. Over the years of companies having to maximize profits, and pay for employees’ accidents and injuries, has caused most jobs in the U.S. to be so safe to do now that, yes, even children can do them easily. So why, then, are teenagers still considered to be just children?
It’s all about money.
Not preparing you for adulthood by age 12, and keeping you believing that you are a child means that you’ll act like a child. If you see something in the store that you like, means that you want it. You don’t care where the money comes from to buy it, that’s your parent’s problem. Your parents love you (most of them) and want you to maintain a certain level of happiness, so they consider buying it for you. The next time you go in the store it starts all over again. Now multiply that by the 70 (or so) Million children and teenagers in our country and we’re talking about a lot of money that keeps the economy and the rich people happy. It’s called “Cash flow.” Think about it some more: In stores, notice how they put the candy at eye level for children by the checkout; it’s so when we are forced to stand there and wait, the kids have something to want. They put the candy there for a reason; temptation. They don’t care about anything else. They don’t care how hard it may be for the stressed out parents who have to stand there and wait with their children staring at the candy (Yes, people of the world; the growing group of “Lower Class” people in the United States have to stand and wait in long lines, too.)
Let’s go a step further with another example: Teens are not allowed to have the sex that they want (it’s not illegal, it’s against the imaginary desired morals of the controlling religious fanatics and/or the Corporate Machine; therefore, casting shame on those who do, or want to do what is natural) and what’s worse is that teens, along with most everyone else in our culture are afraid to be seen exchanging affection with others (it’s another “Shame” cast upon us to control us) while affection has been proven to be a major need of human beings, and it doesn’t cost anything. Teens are starving for affection, sex, and most of all; freedom! And since they can’t get what they need, they’ll settle for a “Pacifier.” And usually that pacifier costs money; like excessive food, candy, soda pop, toys, computer games, TV, clothes, cars, drugs, etc. Get the picture?
We are being trained. We are made to stay children for five or six more years, so we’ll acquire a habit of being selfish. When you are starving for one thing; like freedom, sex, affection, or just attention; you can’t help but be selfish, and buy stuff to try to make you happy, while you forget what it is that you really want; like, FREEDOM. It’s a brainwashing so the rich can get richer off of the people whose minds are controlled. Are you starting to see it yet? Stop and think about it …it’s big and it’s heavy. And it doesn’t stop once people turn 18 years old.
There’s more: School; 13 years of brainwashing ought to do it. The main job of a teacher is to take control of the class; one person controlling 20-50 students. The teacher is standing while the children are sitting. The children are made to listen, learn, and not question whether or not what they are learning is true or not. (Columbus, for example, couldn’t have discovered America;
America was already here and there were humans already here, but we were taught the lie by our own government that perpetuates racism and segregation of our human tribe).
They start us getting into a habit of submitting ourselves, as a mass of people, to a dominant source; by allowing ourselves (as a group) to be trained for 13 years to sit and be controlled by one person, and not really being happy, sets us up for the rest of our lives to maintain the habit of sitting and being controlled, and not really ever knowing happiness. It causes us (the working class people) to allow the empires to pass laws against the people, and for the benefit of the rich; while the people, who are kept too busy working, just sit and watch like it is all one big confusing TV show, and the confusion on our part causes the delay on our part to change the world.
Once you graduate High School, you get congratulated for a job well done, but you never wanted to do the job anyway, and at graduation is where the post-hypnotic suggestion gets “Locked-in” to the minds of the masses. You are happy you are out of school and its summer vacation again, but with the big ceremony as if it is our “Rite-of-passage” into adulthood, they’ll have you believe that you are happy for graduating and doing all that work for them for free! Therefore, you completely forget about all the work and training you went through over the last 13 years, and you forget about the people that are now going through it, because you are 18 and hungry for the freedom you now have, but should have had it at 12, but now you’ve become so selfish that you can only look forward for whatever is in the future for you; instead of being in the habit of enjoying “Now.” But what you don’t realize is that you have been trained to obey and programmed to get out of bed to an alarm clock and go to work for a boss. You have been trained to live a life of mental slavery, as everyone who goes to work gives up all of their freedom to a boss for 8 hours a day; plus travel and preparation time.
Many older people of the U.S. have this very heavy and, perhaps, subconscious belief that it’s simply “Un-American” to protest anything. It’s partially motivated by denial; they don’t have the time to care, because they are too busy working all the time (And selfish, and tired). They see, on the news, where protesters are protesting something and they immediately make fun of them without even knowing why they are protesting; even when the protestors are protesting for us. Oh, this is very common; it’s called ignorance; too tired, too selfish, too busy, so they ignore any reason to get involved to the point where they use denial (lying to themselves) and push the idea away; they go in the wrong direction.
Sex starvation is sexual abuse. Making adults at age 12 refrain from having sex until 18 (or older) causes us to want it more; so much so, that our human bodies start starving for it to the point where we make a big deal about it. It’s just sex that everyone over the age of 12 (puberty) has a God given right to (as long as they are married, according to some religious circles)! But with starvation, comes selfishness; therefore, if you look at the big pool of sex-starved people in the United States, you can see (Statistically) that many people that have been sexually violated in this way, and tempted with sexual commercialism (everyone in the US) are going to violate others, because of this starvation that perpetuates selfishness.
(Figure) If we take a long look at the big picture, we see a pool of people that are told that they can’t have sex until they are married, but realistically many teenagers defy the system, and have sex in secret. Still, many don’t get that chance. In this big pool of people, there are many who don’t desire sex as bad as others, so they’ll conform, and wait until they are married. In the middle of this pool many finally get a chance to break away from their parent’s watch and secretly have sex with a partner before marriage, but some have been influenced by dysfunctional habits to desire sex even before puberty. In the United States, sex is made-out to be a big deal, because of this starvation for it. Sexy people are broadcasted on TV, and used to sell stuff in hopes that those who are starving for sex will sit and watch a sexy person advertise something. To sit and watch sexy people makes you even want sex more; especially, if you already were starving for sex to begin with; it’s a vicious circle. The biggest problem with our pool of sex starved people is, of course, those who have become so sick with desire and try to trick by deception a child or young adult into doing it against their will. Of course, our pool of sexually starved, and abused people will always produce a few that do worse things to people, until we stop starving people for years from having it, and stop tempting with sexual commercialism and allow people to marry at puberty, as God has given us free will to do. There shall be no law, or economic situation that keeps people from marrying at age 12.
Going back to the tribal thinking, people get married at age 12, and have sex immediately, unless they have a Holy plan for their life. They aren’t waiting for years, they aren’t starving for it; therefore, they don’t make a big deal out of it, and the abuse is minimal, but they may have a big hurdle in the other ways if they don’t just stick to the same partner; sexual diseases. Perhaps, some are too free with their sex, but if you live in a world where everyone appears to be suffering and working too much and the only thing that you have for fun is sex; even though sex doesn’t make people happy, it just gives them a temporary “Relief” like doing drugs, or drinking or any of the other pacifiers; then you may do it to the point where it is health threatening; especially if sex is your only pacifier.
Sex isn’t as fun as everyone makes it out to be because of this; it’s not true joy, and happiness… it’s just a temporary relief; like all the other pacifiers. Sex doesn’t make you happy… except for five minutes of the day (ha ha ha). Sex is not what we really want and the proof of that is this; we want someone else to be with us when we are having sex, when we as humans can have sex alone. You see it’s more than just the sex that we want; we want the affection that comes with it. Spend all the time you want thinking about sex and you’ll get more and more unhappy, but many can’t help it now.
Homosexuality: Let’s use an example. At this time in the history of the United States as I stated before, young men are teaching young men what women want, and young women are teaching other young women what men like. Does anyone besides me see a problem with this? There’s an awful lot of sex talk and sex influence within immature young men. We have the internet and we can all access the dirty advertisements that come upon the screen called, “Porn.” Just these advertisements fool people, and cause them to see things that are very deceiving. There’s a big fear out there amongst a lot of men in the name of shame. The fear for many is that their penis is not big enough to make women happy, as if size matters. Size only matters to the Harlot, or whore. But don’t let me insult you if you are a loving wife to a man that has a big one.
When a woman loves a man and marries him for him, and he has a big painful penis, out of love she’ll try to accommodate him and try to enjoy his painful penis. As time goes on through their marriage, she’ll get used to it, and as more time goes on, she’ll learn to like it. But if she get’s divorced, and then marries a man with a normal size penis, it starts all over again; out of love she’ll accommodate him, too. The key here is to make sure that the person that you are marrying is the one that will stay with you for the rest of your life, because you are marrying for love.
Now take a young man that is worried about the size of his thing and has been fanaticizing about the perfect sex partner for years, and he frequently satisfies himself while watching porn on the internet. No one can sexually satisfy you better then you, so he is getting used to satisfying himself, and he is getting use to fanaticizing about the perfect sex partner. And while staring at porn, he sees the size of the big star’s penis that is magnified by the camera; which tends to cause him to feel inferior. After years of this, and the fact that sex with a women is made out to be a big deal, he finally tricks a young women into having sex with him, but not out of love; out of desire.
Some men get very nervous on the first time with a woman and find that their penis doesn’t get erect, due to the fact that he is nervous, and the fact that he satisfies himself too much, and the fact the young woman that he’s with doesn’t know what to do; like the partner in his fantasies. What can happen is nothing. If it doesn’t get erect in front of her, and he starts worrying more and more, it just won’t happen in some cases. And he’ll feel very ashamed and humiliated; especially, if he thinks that she’ll tell others of the experience.
Some time again he’ll try it again with another woman and the same thing happens. What may be going on in this young man’s mind is very agonizing if he doesn’t know what’s happening to him. He’ll eventually say to himself, “Why won’t it get up when I’m with a woman… Oh no! Does that mean that I’m gay?” He’ll have no one to talk this over with, as the shame of the whole ordeal is very private, so he’s going alone with his own mind to find happiness. Years could go by before he ever tries it again with a woman as he’ll become so afraid that he’ll humiliate himself again and again, because he doesn’t know what’s going on, as he continues to satisfy himself. Depression and thoughts of suicide may start to come to his mind. In many cases he’ll try to look at a man as a possible sex partner, but the thought of having sex with another man is about as appealing as eating a live tarantula spider.
He’s got an awful lot of inner turmoil going on that’s tearing him up inside. Then add to his problems the other pacifiers that we are taught to reach for when we are depressed, and there’s a big chance that he’ll start drinking excessively and doing drugs to help him deal with the agony, and forget about his secret problem.
If he didn’t desire sex as much, and he went after women with the thought of finding a loving wife, then he wouldn’t be pressured so much in his own mind, but as I said before, this society makes sex a very big deal that it has too many of us very sick.
Let’s throw something else into the equation. One morning he wakes up and discovered that he just had a homosexual nightmare! More agony and fear set’s in, and he starts wondering if he really is gay. He really is a human with some real problems that are sex related. Now add to the equation that his parents got divorced when he was a fragile child, and he really misses his father. He misses a man in his life. That adds more weight to the homosexuality scale here.
This would explain why a lot of people believe they were born gay, but still I don’t want to offend those who stand on their beliefs and have labeled themselves gay, and there’s a little more discussion on this subject; later. The only label I’ll give them is human, and this was just one example of the many different variables of potential problems that go on between the two genders, because of all of the dysfunction and shame that is prevailing in our world.
This shift must encompass the whole world, and the world must be educated about the strong sicknesses that come from having too much sex, as well as starving for sex with the temptation always in their faces that causes near-sightedness for it; the desire to always want sex on their minds.
More sexual abuse. As children in the United States go to public school, there’s a big division that happens. Boys are separated from girls, by having different things to do, and not allowing them to share the bathrooms is a big divider amongst the sexes. The Empire doesn’t want the boys to engage in activities with girls, and visa versa. It’s designed to make sure that tough, mean men are continually being produced, so they can become soldiers for the military, and easily manipulated to want to kill. Example: If boys start hanging out with girls enough, they’ll actually acquire connections to their feelings, but the definition of “Tough” is ignoring your feelings, and the feelings of others to exist. That’s a hell of a way to live; don’t you think? But that’s exactly what’s been going on, and on purpose. Because the bottom line of every empire, is its food supply and military. That’s why the United States still has a strong military. WE continue to produce tough, angry (sex starved) and mean young men to join the military and enough food to feed many other countries; that’s not saying that every man who joins the military is this way; just the leaders.
Add to that is the fact that every television show is based on a short story. The short story always has a conflict; therefore, our subconscious minds are used to, or ready for, a conflict. Disney’s Beauty and the Beast cartoon shows children a violent conflict that ends in the “Bad guy” getting killed, and then everyone lives happily ever after. We are fed these things by the Empire through Hollywood, along with all the other violent shows that we have become bombarded with that subconsciously promote violent conflict; therefore, bringing our children closer to becoming murderers for the military. The “Cowboy” characters that John Wayne and Clint Eastwood acted as murdered without conscience to get through their conflicts in all their movies. Add to that the attention deficit that’s brought on by all the fast-paced computer and video games that are mostly violence related, so our young men then become so different from women, scattered by ADD, and influenced to be violent from cartoons to football that when they graduate high school, many of them are very lost; both socially and while mentally handicapped with ADD to the point where they think that they need someone to push them through life, so they join the military to get out of the “Hole” they are in, and become perfect soldiers who do what they are told, because they couldn’t direct themselves to happiness. Where do most of these soldiers come from? The lower class of the US; why?
Rich people have more time to give one-on-one Love to their children, and organize and plan ahead. The lower class parents have to work all the time, so they just throw pacifiers at their children for all their childhood; mostly the pacifiers are fast-paced cartoons that promote ADD. It’s not fair to the lower classes! An ADD cartoon, as well as commercials every 15 minutes is the killer to those who want to raise children to be focused, and have will power. Everyone under this empire system has ADD from one degree to another, because of the TV.
ADD is the product of electronic entertainment; nothing is nearly as exciting to a young mind then fast-paced cartoons. That’s one reason why many keep their children involved in other things, but the lower class workers, have more hurdles then those who were born from an upper class womb, and they’ll always be challenged with life more until we get on the same page, as far as providing all children with healthier lifestyles; therefore, many parents of the lower classes allow their children to stare at the television more.
As these children watch the television they are taught more shame by over-dramatic reality type cartoons. Shame is known as a “Demon” by Author and Psychologist, John Bradshaw. Shame is a prison to those under the Empire, as all of us are always worried about what others (peers) see, or hear of things that we say and do from one degree to another, and most in the public schools are controlled all of the time by the unwritten laws of shame. Shame causes us to hesitate to act or speak until we know what we say and do will be accepted by the others.
Here’s a compare and contrast story of shame: Tribal elders, shamans, witch doctors, priests, etc. have brought therapies to the tribes for thousands of years to bring simple happiness to their people. When a child of a tribe (the happy tribe) gets hurt and starts crying, all the other children around go over to the crying child in a big hug circle and start crying with the child until they all start laughing. This practice helps the children feel “at one with all.” Therefore, not singled out as inferior for having feelings or being different, and helps the whole tribe to know that there is no shame within, and to always have the feeling that they are loved by the whole tribe. Therefore, with these types of practices to promote oneness with the whole tribe throughout a child’s (and adults) life, they grow up never feeling alone inside or segregated from the group; they are mentally freer and they walk through life with confidence and joy.
But in the United States; however, when boys are playing together; like Baseball and a boy gets hurt and starts crying, some bully or older brother will make fun of him in front of everyone else, and call him a “Pussy.” Put yourself in the little boy’s position, and you can see where he would feel alone; especially, now that the bully is in control of all the other boys, and they are afraid to go and see if the hurt child is alright, so they all just watch him cry until he gets over it; which he never does; ever. Now think about all the other boys. Now they are controlled by shame, they can’t cry now if they get hurt, or else someone will point fingers, single them out and make fun of them, so they all have to become tougher (Tough: ignoring your feelings and the feelings of others). Under the empire, as I stated before, we are subconsciously trained to follow the dominant source, so this is the reason why the biggest bully leads the pack, but in the happy tribe there is no bully; those who try get ignored, and are controlled by the group. Those who try to attract more attention to him/her self get ignored unless what they are doing is giving or entertaining for the others.
Shame is everywhere under the Empire. Watch the cartoons that your children are watching and you’ll see it all over; teaching your children to be controlled by an imaginary force; being made fun of. In the United States, young women in high schools shame each other by criticizing their appearances only, even if their criticisms are positive, because everyone knows that they are being judged all the time. Both sexes are shamed into not engaging in affection towards each other by their own peers. It’s called “Public display of affection,” but really they aren’t giving each other affection for display, they are just engaging in what is natural, and shouldn’t feel the need to hide it. If we feel that we can’t kiss each other at anytime we want, because of this imaginary shame, then we are not free.
This segregation causes us to be real weak. We feel alone, so we do whatever we think our peers, parents, bosses, etc. think we should do. When I was 12 years old, I felt that I wasn’t “Cool” (to my peers) unless I had sex with a woman. I wasn’t cool if I wore clothes that my mother bought for me to wear; I wasn’t cool if I didn’t drink, or smoke pot; I wasn’t cool if I wasn’t tough and mean; I wasn’t cool if I hung out with girls; I wasn’t cool unless I was crazy. Shame makes us all play “Follow the leader” and only do what we think our peers would want us to do.
Here’s something that just happened after the 9/11 incident. We were told that it had something to do with Iraq, and the president wants revenge (he called it Justice, but Justice isn’t revenge, Justice is equality for all). So he told us that we are going to war with Iraq after they got us all believing that the attack was from Iraq (the Taliban?). To build his military for the war he had the economy lowered. Lowering the economy means that every business had to cut back in order to make their profits; which meant jobs were harder to find; which meant jobs for lower class teenagers were harder to find; therefore, it was a way to get more starving (for happiness, freedom) young men to join the military; especially, when the president had funding cut for welfare programs of the lower class. We all suffered, so the president can get what he wants, instead of what we want. All this time that we are in Iraq, we are being distracted by our own mainstream media empires from the suffering children in all other parts of the world; especially, Africa.
Protect yourself and your friends: stay in groups and police yourselves.
You must be kind to everyone; yes, I mean your parents, too. In a short while, you can become more mature than they are, and don’t lower yourself to their level, rise above that old routine, be as kind, and as understanding and as selfless as you can. Unselfishness is the road to maturity.
Remember, this is a world wide, “Time-out” or “Let’s all stop and think about things for a minute” attitude; a truce. This is not a time for family feuding. Don’t bother telling your parents to not talk to you like you are a child anymore, just let the world warm-up to the ideas while you talk about this stuff with your friends. Your parents have simply been more brainwashed then you were, because they have been playing follow-the-leader longer. We are all changing together, so just be happy while we move through this process.
Be kind to those kids who get the good grades, we’ll need them on our side later, because the changes that we are making now, may or may not happen over night (it has already been taking over two thousand years that I know of; yeah, Jesus was tortured to death and put on public display as an example of what happens to people who defy the Empire) and as I write this, I don’t know what the outcome will be, or how long it is going to take; that will be decided by how well we cooperate together. The kids that get the good grades will become, doctors, teachers, etc. for us. Most of all, be kind to everyone and help anyone who asks for help.
Don’t stick to the same old habits as before; don’t shame people for being human and trying too hard to be accepted; trying too hard to “Fit in;” just know that you are already “In” because you are a human, and so are they. You are in; therefore, you don’t have to prove yourself to anyone for any reason. Everyone can be selfish (We seem to have a license to be selfish in the U.S.). Anyone can be mean, tough, bad, and cold. Anyone can be violent. Anyone can pull a trigger on a gun, but it takes real power to not be violent. The real challenge is to not be selfish. It takes giving; giving out energy, not sucking it out of people. Give it out; it will come back to you some day. Think of yourself as a star. You “Shine” on others; giving them energy. It helps them to shine back to you; giving you energy. You are a star; please do your job the best that you can…Shine!
If you decide to free-up and start having sex, be careful and I’d advise that your partners be your age, because there will be those dirty old men who are always looking for a young “Thing” to get alone with, and the older these sick men are, the more chances they have had to acquire sexual diseases. Make friends first. You can get married without the law of the land keeping you from it. You may marry now, and you don’t need someone who is legally responsible as long as you are being married by God; all you need is a witness, but check with your religious circles before you just believe me.
Know the people in your circles; some kids are more independent than others… the strong people are here to protect the weaker ones… weak at one thing, usually means; strong at another … a group of people are stronger, together, than all the individuals added up. Come together and make your groups bigger. Be safe, smart, and selfless; stay in groups to protect yourselves from the predators; yesterday’s victims of the empire system.
Parents follow
High parents,
It didn’t matter if we graduated High School or not, we have all discovered that we are practicing the action of “Blind Obedience.” Basically doing what everyone else is doing until we die. We didn’t think that we have the power to actually turn this planet into heaven on Earth, or that we can do anything to stop corporate control, mostly because we are too busy working and raising our children to ever have time to figure out what to do, so we just trod along with the same old daily routine and never step back to look at the big picture. In that sense we are blind, and simply working, paying taxes, and spending money on other goods and services is exactly what this empire wants us to do; therefore, we are obedient.
By doing this and working to get our children to do the same is causing the perpetual motion of the empire to continue to roll along. We are waisting our lives within their system, or we are letting them kill us slowly; we have not really lived, until now. Now is what we are living for.
Since we have been doing this longer then our teens, then we can say that we are mentally “Locked-in” more then them. We are brainwashed to make our children do the same things that we are doing, so they can compete against each other for a living. We have family problems all over the country, but no one looks at the fact that work is what gets in the way of family. Work keeps us from visiting with our relatives, and simply spending more time with our friends and neighbors. We now can slow down and relax, because we are going to all take a nice long break soon. Just follow OUR teenagers lead and you’ll be headed in the correct direction. Stand behind them, and that’s all you’ll have to do, and thanks to many parents who have endured many struggles to make it this far; stay alive, you won’t want to miss this.
The Positives of the Empire System
With our double edged swords of Truth, we cut a hole big enough in the Achilles tendon of Goliath for us all to crawl up inside of the giant, and take control of his body.
We are in a world wide truce as we spread this booklet all over the world to inform every violent rebel against the empire systems that encroach on their lands that we now understand where they are coming from. This is an attempt to reason with them enough, so that they’ll put their plans of violent retaliation on hold. We, the people of the world, are asking for their cooperation and asking them to come home, as we are taking control of the world for all of the people to share equally. To help them believe us, we must now order our presidents to either step down and let the people of peace have a chance, or we’ll do it without them, but that would take a little longer, and that would cause more people to die, so it would be best if all the presidents, and all the business men that call themselves, “The United Nations,” come home to the people, and cooperate 100% now! In order to get them to help the violent rebels believe us, we must start making arrangements immediately to seek, find, feed, shelter, and heal (health care) all of the people on Earth who need it now, because we can do it now with the aid of all of the empires’ military aircrafts and other vessels, and all the other vessels of the world that we can safely use. We can save the world from ever suffering again in less than seven days if we all cooperate together at the same time. We will have all of the volunteers that we will need; the Rainbow warriors. The violent rebels shall see that this is happening in their countries that are suffering from the invasions of the empires, as they’ll see that the same empires that were against them are now converted, and are actually living in Truth and bringing the Truth to them with white surrender flags.
Money is no object; we are all going to work today whether or not we get paid tomorrow.
For the Americans, do you remember 9/11? When the towers were hit what did mainstream media do? In less than two hours, the entire world was informed of what happened (except for the tribes who don’t have television, radio, internet, phones, etc.). All of the regularly schedule broadcasts were put on hold to bring the news immediately to the people. The news was translated to all the other languages in less than two hours! Goliath has given us that, that’s why we are going after all of the broadcasting stations of the world. In less then two hours, the world can be seeing purple, together! We’ll all be on the same page, together.
Where were you during 9/11? You were probably at work, or school, but still you got the news because people spread it like wildfire in a strong wind. We, together, are the wind!
Parents Follow
O.K. parents, do you remember the “Good old’ days?” Neither do I. We have become very anti-social. Our parents, who were brought up through the great depression; where most women didn’t work, but the men had to work 16 hours a day, and they came home and drank to forget how miserable they were. Well, mothers were home and they watched the neighborhoods, and talked with other mothers and took care of each others’ children more than today. Neighbors would come over to borrow a cup of sugar, and then they would come back with a plate of cookies for the whole family, and sit down and visit with each other more than today, and they would have each other over for dinner, and playing cards, etc. Instead of one person working 16 hours, now two parents are working eight.
We are in a silent depression, and it doesn’t look like it’s going to get any better, as prices for everything seem to just keep going up; causing our dreams to get farther away from our grasp. The world needs to make some big huge radical changes for us to ever get out from under this ebb and flow of the economy, and the political tug-of-wars that cause the workers to always have to resort to accepting compromise. I ask you to consider playing this game with us, now.
While your teenagers are dropping out of school throughout this time of truce to become peaceful warriors (that ought to get mainstream’s attention), we are asking you to go back to work, and spread this booklet to everyone that you work with, but remember we want the “Bosses” to be the last to know. The next day, you can talk it over with them, or they’ll call you that same night. Once you started the 420 party with your teens, you’ll go back to work with a white arm band on. We are asking you to wear a white surrender flag while you are at work. If the “Boss” tells you that you can’t wear the flag at work, tell him that it’s a new part of your religion, and that you are promoting the world wide union, but do not take it off! He can’t fire you for trying to start a union, but if he does fire you, say “OK,” and hand him this booklet, and come out to the party. You are now on strike.
But we need to have you back at work, really. Because, you don’t know if your job is indirectly related to raising food, and shipping food, the way we normally do, or you don’t know if your job is indirectly related to the health care industries. Now let me explain. If we are planning to feed the world, it would be easiest for those of us who are trying to organize it as fast as we can, if we can to be able to rely on the way that we have already been bringing food to the world. But if all of a sudden, people in a plastic plant; for example, stop working, then the plastic containers stop coming, and that would cause us to have to scrabble and shuffle other things around, which would slow us down. We can do this in seven days, and then we can go back to our selfish lifestyles as before, but the only difference, is that now we’ll be able to look ourselves in the mirror, and justify our own selfishness, because we know that there is nobody in the world that is starving for their basic human needs. We are going to have our cake, and eat it too.
Spread this throughout your workplaces while maintaining communication with your teenagers, and keeping an ear on the radio stations. And don’t worry; be happy.
Do you want a raise? Together, in one communication circle, we’ll all agree to this before we act: Should we stop paying money for food? Yes we shall, and you just got a raise. Should we all stop paying rent, or house payments for the houses that we are already living in? Yes we shall, and you just got another raise. Should we stop paying for health care, etc. Now, where are we? We don’t have to pay for our basic human needs, then we don’t have to go to work anymore, so most of us will be able to volunteer for just a few hours a month to cooperate together and help the farmers raise the food, the truckers transport the food, the tankers ship the food, etc. The food goes to food distribution places that are already set-up by the empires; groceries stores, so we’ll volunteer at the grocery stores. What about the gasoline that it takes to transport the food… free the same way; volunteers to pump it out of the ground clear through to our vehicles. Now if you think about it, it really doesn’t take that many people to bring our basic human needs right to our homes with today’s modern technology, does it? Tomorrow, things will be even better. Shelter will be the same way, water, electricity; all volunteers. Volunteers, all over the world in one communication circle, will easily align the tasks to be carried out by cooperating.
Goliath has also helped us by getting us used to working all the time; we’ll be so bored, that they’ll be ten times more volunteers than we’ll ever need, so people will be coming around and playing music while we volunteer, or painting artwork where we are cooperating, etc.; Heaven on Earth.
After the Shift, we will have one “Company.” So they’ll be no competition between any industries. If we decide that every family NEEDS an automobile, then we’ll gather the volunteers to produce the steel, and then we’ll build everyone a free automobile for every family. When it breaks, or gets wrecked, we have it towed away, and another one gets delivered to us in its place… no need for auto insurance, no need for health insurance, no need for insurance at all. We are the insurance.
Play this game, and no one will have to go to work, and all the work will get done. We are shifting in such a way, that whatever needs to be changed in the entire world, we’ll do it immediately. We will just keep shifting until we get the world happier and happier. That can only happen if we are all in one communication circle. It starts now. Shift your thinking; “Your” ego to “Our” ego.
Would you be ashamed to go to work with a white flag tied around your arm? Shame is causing the world to be blind, or at least; near-sighted. Think about it.
The gift to beggars: Shame
Think about this new world we have just created. Every circle of one hundred people (that’s twenty five families or twenty five houses in the United States) for example; will have their own restaurant; a food house on every other corner. Instead of every family cooking individually, volunteers will take turns at the restaurants. We won’t need servers; we’ll serve ourselves and the elders and children. We can pick-up our food, or eat it there. We’ll save a lot of energy and we will only have to wash a few big pots and pans, instead of every family organizing their own meals, and clean-up. Think about the restaurants that you have been to; aside from the servers, there isn’t very many people working there at any one time. 24 hours a day, the food house will be open, so anyone can come in and eat at anytime, because we are in community communication. We’ll share the chore to cook for each other, those who don’t want to cook, won’t ever have to, because there’s always other things that the group can do; like house maintenance, childcare, eldercare, tending our gardens, volunteering on a farm, transporting food, etc. The food house can also have the main communication system set in it, so those who are cooperating all night can stay connected to Jah Grapevine, and be ready for emergency situations with a big loud alarm bell that will shriek through the neighborhood if we need to put out a fire, or save someone’s life, etc. The food house can also be the party house for teenagers, after 10:00 PM!
Think about all the beggars in the streets these days. If everything that we need is free, they’ll have no reason to beg. It will be a shame to beg when they can just go to a food house and eat for free, and they’ll always have a home to live in, even if it is just a room, because now they won’t have to pay for shelter. What are we going to do with all those sky-scraper buildings that are now about to be emptied in the big cities, because we won’t need them for high finance anymore? We’ll make homes out of them, and maintain them forever, so we can teach our children the history of the Shift, and show them the big buildings that the empires built with our money. We’ll heal the homeless beggars, and I bet they’ll be motivated to come along, and volunteer for a few hours a month for our one big family.
For right now, these beggars are doing us a favor, and they shouldn’t have to feel the shame that society is putting on them, for the reasons that have been explained in this book, as some people just can’t keep up with the pressures that the empires have placed upon us. The workloads that the empires have put on us, has caused all of our families to suffer. Think about all the divorces, and the families that have split-up because of all the financial pressures imposed upon them. Fathers couldn’t get their lives back together, so they split. Even if they were good fathers, they had to work and try to find a place for their children to visit them, as most children of divorce stay with their mothers. Many fathers couldn’t handle working and trying to be a good father when their children live apart from them, and they had to pay out extra money for child support; which is usually never enough.
I’m a beggar, and a father. I have been hurt on the job, and witnessed the selfishness of the workman’s compensation insurance industry that has teamed up with the empires. I have also been waiting for Social Security to closely look at my situation for over a year now. If I’m in pain, why should I have to work, and try to be a good father, too? I’m speaking for a lot of men who are now living with a lot of shame, because they just couldn’t do it either, but I’d be happy to wash a
few more pots and pans for you while I’m in pain; or help an elder not feel so alone, or help paint a house once in a while, but I can’t; I absolutely can’t work anything near a forty hour week and try to raise a happy child, too. Not under these conditions, so please change the world for us all.
Beggars are God’s wildcards, and are about to be played. As long as there are beggars in the world, the world isn’t fit for any human to be 100% happy. Beggars are here to teach us that there is still something very wrong with the world that we live in. I’m the beggar that’s telling you how to fix it, but if my plan isn’t good enough, together, we’ll adjust it until we have one that does work. Thank you God for helping me see the Light!
Under the empire, children are still trying to live for “Today” and right now, but many are already used to looking forward for more; like, “I can’t wait until Christmas happens.” Teenagers are in the training transition, and are learning to forget about now; they are already waiting for freedom; waiting to really live; waiting for the freedom to drive a car at age 16; waiting for the freedom to be adults at 18; waiting for the freedom to buy alcohol and go to bars (Lonely heart’s clubs) at 21, and the freedom to go to work for money that “Buys” more freedom, as freedom is not free under the empire; it’s very expensive, and cost us the rest of our lives.
Waiting forever to really live is what we are being trained to do, instead of enjoying now. Looking forward to the future becomes a habit that we carry inside of us for the rest of our lives.
We shall remove every empire system from Earth. Everyday will be Christmas for everyone, there will be no more waiting forever for freedom. True freedom shall be the gift that we give each other forever; the gift that keeps on giving.
. A Truth-Based Drug Education
Notice the, “Truth-Based” in the title. Keep in mind that we are attempting to approach issues with a new way of finding the truth in everything, and all I’m doing is giving you a guide, or ideas of how to think for yourself, so you aren’t being deceived by me or anyone else.
In our recent history, the D.A.R.E program for teenage drug education was based on lies and scare tactics that back-fired. We were told that Marijuana was just as bad for you as Heroine by people who were of the empire system. In doing so, this caused a lot more Heroine addicts to arise, because it was now easier for some of the people who tried Marijuana to not be so afraid to try Heroine, since they were taught that the two drugs are the same. This also means that all of the other drugs in between Heroine and Marijuana were easier for them to not be afraid to try. The DARE program hasn’t ever worked, as the rise in Meth is causing too many young beautiful people to ruin their futures forever; just because of this big lie, but it was set-up in such a way, so as the people who didn’t “Just say ‘No!’” were to be the one’s to blame, and feel the shame, and suffer the consequences. We are set-up to believe that our drug problems, are our own faults; when we were taught almost at birth to reach for pacifiers instead of have what we really want or need.
The reason for the lies was to try to deceive the public into eliminating Marijuana as an option for medicating themselves. Coffee, alcohol, tobacco, and marijuana have been the medicine for the working classes for ages. Why is the empire so against the least harmful drug on the planet?
There are a number of reasons. First off, the alcohol industry is in competition with the Marijuana industry. When people use Marijuana more, they use alcohol less. What is the number one killer of all the drugs in the United States, as far as statistics go? Alcohol, when driving, is the number 1 killer, and it’s the only legal drug. Have there been any deaths related to Marijuana and driving an automobile? No; not one, that’s a big difference. Then why are they trying to say that Marijuana is so bad? Money, but not just with competition for money, it goes farther then that. There are pharmaceutical companies that are also in competition against Marijuana over money, but as I said, it goes farther than money.
Marijuana is a drug that doesn’t make you numb and stay the same “Tough” person, like alcohol does to people. People who drink alcohol for all of their lives, never really change. When a person works a hard and long day, and then drinks after work, he forgets how hard he had to work, and he ignores reality. When using Marijuana, you become more aware of how hard life is if you are working all of the time, and if you are being “Bossed” too much. You get tired of living a life for work. The empire doesn’t want “Their” people tired of working, so they continue to promote alcohol, so they’ll keep on working, and ignoring the lifestyle of working until you are too old to work.
Marijuana makes people relax and be lazy, and that can be a good thing, because we are living in some very depressed times now. The working class is tired of seeing the rich get richer, and the poor get poorer. The working class of the United States uses Marijuana a lot; it’s everywhere. Because of its use, it has caused many people to not become as violent and act up because we are so financially pressured all the time. Marijuana helps keep people from becoming violent. Alcohol, on the other hand, can cause people to become extremely violent, due to its numbing capabilities.
Alcohol is promoted in the military. They know that their soldiers are going to drink it, and they know that it helps them stay tough enough to not care about the feelings of the “Enemy” or their families, and tough enough to endure the training, so they let them drink. They want soldiers to have an attitude of toughness, but Marijuana helps people become more sensitive. They don’t want teenagers using Marijuana if it means that they’ll become more sensitive, and not join the military. That’s why all the lies about Marijuana have been promoted by our own government(s). And that’s why everyone can easily get their hands on alcohol. It’s in all of the stores, and I even had a football coach in high school tell the team to drink a beer after practice to help us relax and get the rest we need. He was an ex-military man.
I would rather see my teenage driver be happy enough to not ever feel the need to use anything to make him be happier, but with the statistics the way they are; with alcohol being the number 1 killer of teenage drivers, and with Marijuana being the least harmful of all of the drugs; if he was going to resort to trying, or using; I’d rather he stick with Marijuana.
Having told you some truth about the two drugs, let’s take a look at the others. Draw a horizontal line in the middle of a blank piece of paper. Above the line, make a list of all of the hard drugs that you are aware of that can kill you or cause severe brain damage immediately if you take too much, and overdose. Obviously Heroine should be up there; Cocaine, yeah it stops your heart, Meth, Crack, Crank, Acid (LSD) mixed with Nitrous oxide can really cause some brain damage, and Hard alcohol. There are many more, but you’ll know what they are, before you ever think of trying them (We hope).
Now under the line there is a long list of drugs that cannot kill you if you try them and try too much, but some may cause health problems if you continue to take them frequently over a long period of time. The idea that they can’t kill you if you overdose, is that fact that if you do too much of these drugs, you’ll just get sick and throw-up.
If you drink tea with caffeine in it, what happens? Put tea under the line, coffee, obviously, then there’s tobacco, Marijuana, beer, wine, opium, magic mushrooms, peyote, morning glory seeds, and the list goes on. These are all natural drugs, which means that if you just ate opium from the poppy, and you ate too much, you’d get sick before you would come close to dying, but don’t believe me, because everyone has a different tolerance than others, and you may be allergic to any one of these, which could kill you.
Heroine is made from opium. Heroine is highly concentrated from the opium poppy. The tree or bush that Cocaine comes from could be eaten and you would probably get a little safe high that was the equivalent of drinking a lot of coffee, but if you ate too much, you would get sick and throw-up before you died. But concentrate that drug down to pure chemical and we are not talking “Natural” anymore. So, opium is natural, heroine is not; The Cocaine bush is “Natural,” Cocaine isn’t. Notice that the hard drugs above the line aren’t natural; they are all refined with man’s selfish energy going into them. If you just stick with the “Natural” idea, then you are fairly safe, but what is really “Natural” is learning to not reach for pacifiers to make you happy. Try to find a better way, or a better life than you are living. Try to fix your life, before you look for more pacifiers that may cause you to go in the wrong direction.
We have many people in the United States that are self medicating now with prescription drugs for mental illness. “Mental illness” is being used as a general label of which many different symptoms are happening, but most of the problem that is the underlying force to cause people to lose control of their minds is stress.
There are many fear-based anxieties, depressions, manias, anger issues, obsessions, etc. Many of these problems are only being treated and not cured. People are having to go to work, and provide for their families while they are dealing with their mind’s problems, so instead of taking time-off from working to work on themselves because they are sick; they can’t afford it, so they just treat the symptoms with some kind of “Numbing” chemical, so they can continue to live with the stress that’s killing them; instead of trying to find a cure or heal.
Attention Deficit Disorder is now one of the up-rising mental illnesses amongst children, and as stated before, it’s caused primarily by the faced paced TV. Our minds are racing in different directions so much that it is simply not human to be able to stare at the TV for most of your life without some kind of mental problem. People with ADD almost always have to obsess on a project, or a task, in order to follow it through. Obsession then becomes a habit that causes people to ignore other people, or other projects to do what they want to get done, or else they lose interest in the project, and just drop it, and go onto something else. They are easily distracted, so now doctors are prescribing a light dose of legal Meth to children so they’ll focus and keep up in the classrooms as the highly demanding, “No child left behind” law of the empire system is in effect; instead of teaching the parents the dangers of TV or this fast paced lifestyle with electronic entertainment. The prescription Meth may be causing them to become more dependant on the drug, and may cause problems in the long run; especially if they get older, and start trying the more powerful Meth of the streets. Our biggest problems are working too much, and not being aware of what’s happening to our children.
Stimulants can cause a number of mental health problems that kick you into a higher gear. Meth can cause your mind to race so fast that your body can’t keep up. Meth can cause people who sit and think, to start grinding their teeth to the point that they lose their teeth, and distort their faces, but Meth as well as all the stimulants is very attractive, because we are all suffering from ADD from one degree or another, and the faster-paced our lifestyles become, the more people are going to start reaching for drugs to help them keep up. Some people who do Meth fool the rest of us, because for years they appear to be normal, but their friends try it and immediately start ruining their lives.
Meth can cause you to become very sick in many different ways, because we are putting various types of very toxic chemicals into our bodies, and we don’t know the ill effects of the long term use with the chemicals in our bodies. The threat of exposing myself to highly toxic chemicals that aren’t natural and can cause cancer in your body at a young age would be enough to scare me into not ever trying the stuff, but the biggest problem with these stimulants is addiction.
But there is a strong desire for Meth; why? The body can’t keep up with the mind that’s used to sitting and staring at the constantly changing fast passed electronic entertainment. They want to do things, they want to accomplish their dreams; they want to go here! Go there! Eat this! Eat that! Meet people! Party! Find a sex partner! Go here now! Go there now! Why? Does this sound like the fast-paced computer games that they have been staring at for the last ten years of their lives? How about the fast-paced, action packed movies where the screen just keeps flashing a different scene every minute? Our minds are racing, but our bodies are in the habit of sitting. We want to get up and do things; that’s why Meth is getting more and more desirable. It gets people actually doing things, even though it shortens their lives and fries their brains. Is this not true?
During the Disco era of the mid 1970’s, Cocaine was causing so many people to destroy their lives, and their families, that the Grateful Dead stopped singing “Casey Jones” at all their concerts, so as to not promote the use of it, and everyone knew why, and the followers of the Dead shows respected the teachings; we do take care of ourselves with the Truth.
The DARE program has taught us many positive things as well as the lies they told. Talking out your problems, and becoming aware of peer pressure, and shame were some of the positive parts of the DARE program’s education. But I would like to have a better drug awareness education that was based on the Truth that is made and organized by people who have actually been very experienced with the positives and the negatives of all of the drugs, and legalizing every natural drug that is grown on Earth, so I am calling for a drug awareness circle to form, because this is almost all that I have for you, and I don’t think that it’s enough; what do you think?
Hallucinogens
My body is trembling as I write this, because I know that this is a very touchy subject. I wouldn’t trust the man-made LSD, but that’s just me. Psychedelics expand your mind. It’s like eating from the tree of knowledge that God told Adam and Eve not to eat from, but I feel I must write these words, and that I must be very careful, because the last thing I want to do is lead you astray; especially when we’ve come this far in Truth.
Eating from the tree of knowledge wasn’t what Adam and Eve were supposed to do, but since they did it, and we all have been eating from it ever since, so I’m thinking that we’ll have to eat the entire tree to get to the root of all of our problems. I don’t mean that we all are to start doing drugs; I mean that we all have the knowledge, together, as to the truth of how we are supposed to live.
Many of the meditation circles believe that we are not supposed to think so much, that we are to try to stop all this self talk that goes on in our heads, so we can focus, well I do both; I meditate so I can overcome the ADD that invaded me when I was a child that was parked in front of the TV as my baby-sitter for ten years; so I can focus and try to bring this handbook to you, but I’m addicted to thinking, so my only option is to think it all through.
I know that the spiritual circles of the House for the Seeker are going to read this handbook, so I’m merely presenting them these things that I say about Hallucinogens as a question for them to study. At this point, I believe that I’m either the false prophet of the prophecies, or I’m the Word of God, but this is not for me to decide; it is for you to decide. One thing is for sure, you won’t know who I am until all of the beggars on Earth don’t need to beg anymore, so I won’t be taking advantage of you.
Hallucinogens cause you to become very sensitive and aware in a very short period of time if they are used frequently, so that causes you to change very quickly. The changes that you’ll make can be very hard on you and your family. If these drugs must be tried by you, I would suggest to not use them but once every three to four months. There is a down side to hallucinogens that you must be aware of, as they are very powerful psyche drugs, that can heal people quickly (according to some shaman’s circles) or they can hurt you quickly if they aren’t taken in the correct setting.
What if you decide to eat a bunch of magic mushrooms with a group of shame-based tough guys, while watching a violent movie? (Remember, I said that they make you more sensitive) You will probably have a very bad experience. Add to that the influence of the violent movie times ten! There are many people sitting in prison now who have used psychedelics. But if you are in a setting where everyone around you is very loving, then we could possibly use this drug to heal people with it; especially if we were using the conscious dance (Page ?) with it, as a therapy. We may be able to pull the selfishness, the ignorance, the violence, and the loneliness out of them to help people come home quickly; we may be able to reform prisoners quickly. A good way to be sure that you are in a correct setting is to go out into the forest where no one is around (Just don’t get lost). Take a designated baby-sitter.
I am a human that practices psychedelic shamanism. I prepare a “Sacred space” before I “Journey” and I usually have an intention that I’ll state before I settle into my trip. I bring this to you as an idea of how serious I consider the use of these very powerful drugs. I go to the spirit world to bring back healing for the tribe; that is what a shaman does, but now I don’t need to use the hallucinogens to get there, and I actually never did; I just have God.
Here’s how I set-up my sacred space: First, I’ll clear the space with a prayer to God and his angels for my protection, then I’ll come up with an intention for my journey and state that intention; like, “God, I want to bring the truth to the world for all of the people to learn to love each other and live happily together, now; please guide me, and help me find the right words for this handbook.”
I’m going to the “Spirit world” to bring back healing for the whole world. Next I’ll imagine that my body is lying down on the ground, and I’ll even put a pillow down to represent where my head is going to be laying. I’ll walk around my body in a circle, as I imagine it laying there and I’ll shake a rattle to help me get into a clearer state and ask God to protect my body, then after about four to seven circles, I’ll move in closer and step on my head to represent silencing my ego; silencing the part of “Me,” so I can hear the part of “We.” I’ll walk around my whole body to silence those parts of me that may interfere with our journey, as it is no longer “My” (self) journey; it is now “Our” journey, because I’m doing it for us all. I’ll step on my groin to silence any desires of that area; I’ll step on my throat to silence “My” self talk; I’ll step on my stomach to silence any hunger. Since I have made it this far, I know that a big Shift is needed for the world to change towards unselfishness, so after about four circles of walking on my imaginary body to silence it, I’ll step on my head while I pivot and then go in the other direction.
Now I’m circling “My” heart that is a channel to the center of all hearts, or a channel to God’s heart, as all of us are a spoke in a wheel and where we meet is the center of all humans; God’s heart. As I circle around my heart, I am going to imagine that it is a pool of Holy water, as I’m still silencing my body and mind. I’m going to jump in that pool of Holy water to swim closer to God, but first, I’m going to leave a horse in charge of my body before I go.
If you ever seen people train horses, they will teach them commands while they have the horse run around in a circle. When the horse is running in a circle, he has one ear on the trainer, and one ear on the outside, so he is always wary of his surroundings at all times. I get on the back of my white horse and tell him my intention, and ask him to stay with my body to protect it and to keep an ear on me, so I don’t go so far away that I can’t get back. I’ll lay down now and put my head on the pillow and cover my eyes, so it is dark and quiet. I’ll jump off the back of the white horse and into our heart; the pool of Holy water, and I have left the horse with a perfect landscape to make him happy; my body has become so silent that it’s now a field of fresh grass for the horse to graze on with the pool of Holy water being his watering hole.
As I’m in our heart, I immediately ask for healing of everyone in the world now; which means self included. Now I’m in our journey, as I remember my intention and whatever comes to me; I’ll try to bring it to words for WE; this handbook. I’m in the journey.
Here’s one experience. I see a bunch of dreadlock flower children admiring me and looking at me with all acceptance, as I realize that we are all connected. I’m overwhelmed at the love that they are pouring into me, as they exorcise me with the conscious dance. And I realize that deep down inside, all humans of Earth really love each other, and that truth has been taken from us throughout our years of the less-than-positive upbringing of our childhoods.
Here’s another: I ask God for guidance and here’s my intention; “God, I want to see what you see and know what you know, I want to do what you would want me to do, I want to walk unselfishly with you; please guide me. I’m a dirty old white rag hanging on your clothesline; take me off and use me to clean-up a mess; rinse me out with Holy water and use me again; what would you have me do?” As I state my intention, I became a big eyeball that was looking at God’s eyeball and I moved closer, so my eye was pressing against Gods eye; “I want to see what you see God, I want to blend our pupils together; our eyes are the same color!” Then I look down and I notice that God’s eye has a vein that goes down to his heart that is feeding his eye, and then I notice that there’s another vein that is coming from his heart and feeding my eye. We share the same heart. Then God’s eye became a mirror, and in the mirror, I saw my neighbor, and then I blinked and saw my other neighbor. My neighbors are God; that was my lesson. Then I was released off of his clothesline as a dirty white rag, and as I fell, I became a bright white eagle, and started flying.
This next part is from the Church of Marijuana and Elvis
Marijuana is a healing medicine for the mind, and was put here by God for that reason. God created the Earth, and everything in it. What does it heal society from? Anger and violence. Marijuana relaxes you and if you abuse it, it makes you very lazy to the point that many will ignore their children. We all know this is true, but how are we going to heal all the gang-bangers down in the concrete jungles of all the big cities? How are we going to heal all of the people who are cranked-up and tweeked from Meth and the other stimulants, and the faced-paced computer era? This is the drug from God’s pharmacy. It was put here for that reason, and we know it now.
We are going to come up with a drug education that we’ll all agree on, and at the same time Marijuana is going to be free for us all to grow everywhere. We’ll grow it in our gardens with our tomatoes; we’ll grow it on the side of the road; everywhere. Children under 12 are not to use it; everyone else can, but don’t if you don’t need it. Those who need it, want it; it’s that simple. We know that to come out of selfishness takes steps, so to use Marijuana to help you overcome other addictions that are bad for you; like alcohol, tweek, anger, or violence; this helps, therefore it shall be free, because we have too many violent people in the world that need to abuse Marijuana to make them calm down and be too lazy to be violent. Is this not the truth? We’d rather see people ignoring their children for a little while longer (As long as they are conscious of their actions) and abusing Marijuana, then see them abuse their children and their spouses with anger and violence, as these are steps to helping them come home. Is this not true? What do you care as long as no one is hurting you with it, and believe me when I say this; its fine if you don’t use it, because that leaves more for those who need it. If you don’t use it, then you are being less selfish for the world, and that is a good thing. But don’t ever replace it with alcohol, that’s going backwards. We are moving forward quickly.
The empire people who have bought into the brainwashing will not like this idea, but that’s only because they don’t know the truth. The empire has been trying to manipulate the minds of the masses for years, but we just keep up the fight, because we know the truth; it’s that simple. Mainstream media is now making a point to tell us through the news every time that someone gets arrested for an offense; things like, “this guy robbed a bank and he had Marijuana on him.” “These people got arrested for cooking Meth, and they also had Marijuana on them.” “This guy stole a car, and he had Marijuana on him.” They are continuing to try to make Marijuana look bad always. Of course they had Marijuana on them; it’s everywhere, and these people who are robbing banks, or committing other crimes are suffering people who use the drug to help them deal with life, but they are trying to get us to believe that Marijuana leads to violence when it’s the other way around, but there are some snags to what I just said that you need to be aware.
If you are abusing Marijuana daily, and you suddenly get cut off, you can get a little edgy for the next week; depending on your personality; like if you drank too much the night before, but aren’t really hung over, just irritable, so there is a down side. If you are a depressed person, and life just looks like it’s not going to get any better, you can find yourself getting more depressed if you abuse it, too. Watch your moods; don’t ignore yourself.
Remember that I said the most defiant teenagers are going to start this shift? Here’s what to do if you live in a city that has an area that is mostly all African Americans; the Hood. We are trying to bridge a big gap here between “Blacks and Whites” I don’t like labeling humans, but it’s easier than saying, “ those who are of the skin colors that were once known as ‘Blacks’ and ‘Whites.’” This is a touchy subject. We have a big gap to bridge, and it would be easier if both sides try to help from their side. Get together with your friends and pool some money together; 100 teens put $1.00 each into this and you can buy a quarter of weed and some gasoline for your trip to the Hood. Take copies of this handbook, and the bag of weed and when you see some teens, ask them if they smoke weed; say, “Can I buy your love?” Ha ha ha, or say whatever you want. Give them the copies, and give them the bag of weed. They’ll look at you as if you are crazy and with curiosity, and tell them what it’s all about, so hopefully they’ll read it, and take it from there. If you can burn a copy of some Bob Marley music, give them a CD or two. Uncle Bob helps pull the violence out of people; he was the best baby-sitter for my boys when they were going through their “Tough guy” days, because he speaks to people with the truth as he is a Truth Knower.
Whoever grows weed, consider donating some to the ghetto for the same reason. Keep it coming. We are asking these gang-bangers to join us and consider becoming Rainbow warriors, too. They are the most defiant of the empire system, and they are the bravest people on Earth. Think about it, if you had to grow up in their neighborhoods, you’d be too afraid to even go outside. They aren’t, because they want a life; even if that life is always at risk. Give weed especially to those who are wearing or flying a white flag!
What’s next? Eventually, we are going to give the prisoners of the world all the Marijuana that they need, so they’ll be reform-able. Yes, there is to be a “Women of Prisoners Circle” (grandmothers, mothers, wives, sisters, daughters, etc., and men are welcome, too) who are going to investigate and execute the ideal way to reform prisoners to where they’ll be release-able. We are going to release them on a new type of parole early; after we turn this world into a place were no one will need to commit any crime again, because everything will be free.
But until then, we are going to give them the Marijuana so they’ll chill-out and think less negatively.
Those who are the bravest will be volunteering to help with the rescue of all the suffering children in the world. Now think about this; on CNN or on PBS, once in a while, we’ll see a show that shows suffering people in Africa (In between the commercials) but the people that are helping Africans are “White.” Wouldn’t it make them feel better if some people from the rich countries that had the same color skin as them bring the supplies to them, and help them set-up their wells and farms, ect. It will take some brave people to do this. Who would feel braver to do this task than the African Americans from the ghettos? Maybe we’ll have ships full of food, equipment, medical supplies, and with enough Marijuana for the journey?
Let’s go a little closer to the Truth here; President Bush is a racist. How do I know that? I was always influenced to be a racist for too much of my life, and it takes one to know one. I know what it takes to change, and how hard it is to see the reason to change. His actions; and the fact that he lived in Texas, and we saw the cowboy hat as he cut down a tree with a chainsaw in the documentary, “Fahrenheit 911,” has got me believing.
Rich racists are still in power in our government, and they are just sitting back and enjoying the show as they see gang-bangers killing each other, or Africans dying of AIDS and starvation. We have a “Redneck” in the white house that was a descendant of the slave-owners of yesterday. Is this not true? We’re in 2006; how many years ago did Elvis sing the Ghetto song, and still nothing has changed; in fact, things have gotten worse! How come we haven’t moved forward?
Let’s get to the truth. President Bush is not a racist; he is a human, and has the capability to change, just as we are asking prisoners to change. He needs to repent, and lower his ego, and come home. He’s just a man.
Don’t let all this focus on George cause you to think that we need him, or any of the leaders of last night’s nightmare; we’ll do it with or without him, but it would be so much easier if he joins us and helps. Otherwise we’ll have to go through all the steps of defying the system, and taking control that way. We are ready to do both, so as George is thinking about it, we’ll start the long term plans until, or if, he comes home.
Professional sports players
Especially you who are of the people who were once known as the “Black race:”
Help us turn this LIGHT on; please, I’m begging you. Help us and together we’ll send the “White supremacists” under the cupboards like the cockroaches that they are! Help us stuff the beast back in his hole! You can help us in so many ways, get together and discuss this with the other players. Organize and plan to boycott the games by saying that you aren’t playing, because you are mentally ill; you are sick of seeing the people of Africa suffer so much, as well as all over the world, because the rich businessmen of the empires are ignoring them, and you are sick of working for an empire that is using you for their gain while others suffer. You can help us in so many ways that the list goes on forever. Boycott and mainstream can’t help but engage with us, all of us. You got money, and you can hire translators to send this thing all over the world. You can buy servers to put this thing all over the internet. Boycott until they lower the flags of all countries to put a white flag above them. You are free, you’ll be able to walk among us without having people bother you all the time for your autograph; you’ll be free to walk down any street without being bothered, and you’ll be looked up to forever, and not because you are so tall. Join us as we are the true brotherhood of LIGHT. We can do this thing now! Welcome home to the circle. Peace shall prevail on Earth!
Targets
All famous people are targets. A target is anyone who stands above the rest, and attracts people to his/her attention. Oprah is now a big target, and now she has to have protection from the people; Michael Jackson, same thing; George Bush; obviously.
The reason why they became targets is not because of them; it’s because of us. We follow them. We listen to them, and make them feel better than us, so they continue to try to attract to us in their way, as if to say: “Follow me, I know the way.” The problem is us. Why are we so interested in them, as they are simply blind and “Dumb Idols?”
When the shift takes full course, WE must not target anyone. For example: George Bush won’t feel safe to walk amongst us (in our neighborhoods, etc.) until he knows that WE have forgiven him and stopped targeting anyone anymore, WE don’t need any single leaders anymore, WE have each other.
When we see famous people walking down the street in our neighborhoods; like the professional sports players, treat them like anyone else. Do not stare, or act like they are better, or more significant than you. Do not bother them in any way, or treat them in any way different then you would treat your neighbor. No one is ever to stand above the rest to be listened to; unless it is within your own individual circles. Or they are giving to us; like ball players, musicians, and other artful entertainment; but when the music is done, give those thanks, and then leave them alone to be free and walk freely amongst us, so they never have to fear being a target. Everyone is welcome to speak their minds within their circles, as the quietest people on Earth must be heard, now. We shall correct each other on this subject for the benefit of all.
Some targets are a great danger to us, because they get people to follow the leader, but where they may be going, may be leading us astray in the long run; thus causing us to make hasty decisions with our lives.
Many people say that if Jesus came back right now, he probably wouldn’t even be recognized, and may even be crucified again, by his own followers; the “Christians,” who have been living lives of deception from the empire.
For the “Christians” of the American empire: The vision that I saw was that of a circle of all the humans on Earth (10B) and Jesus was the nucleus of the atom, and we were all the electrons that were all cooperating to move our positive energies in one direction. Jesus appeared in the middle of the circle; where the heart of our being resides; God. Then, Jesus stepped out of the middle, and joined the circle with us. Then, Buddha appeared in the middle, and then took his place in our circle; then other “Prophets” came and did the same. Nobody targeted them; they were simply considered our brethren, as they took their places in our neighborhoods. I’m not saying that this vision is the way that it’s going to play out; it’s just the lesson of targets.
Jesus became a target by a group of people fooled under the empire who say, “Jesus is one of them, not one of WE.” You are one of WE, but you still may call others, “Them.” Do you get it yet? Don’t fear your neighbor, as if they are “Them.” They are one of “WE” who just don’t know it yet. Let down that part of your ego that thinks that your neighbor is different then you; whoever your neighbor is right now.
Live in God’s protection, and know it; walk bravely then, until you realize that there was nothing that we had to be brave about with God as our guide.
Willie Lynch was a very evil (very deceived) man and a slave owner about three hundred years ago. He came up with a list of a protocol of how to keep slaves from ever uniting; how to keep slaves enslaved. He said if you put this list to use properly it will set a trend in motion that will keep them enslaved and divided for hundreds of years. It was a plan to cause divisions amongst the slaves. #1 Cause them to fear each other. #2 Cause them to distrust each other. #3 Cause them to envy each other. #4 Destroy the natural way the men and the women cooperate to raise their children by breaking the men.
Slaves came from the happy tribe; Truth Knowers. The men protected the women and children and brought the food to the mothers. Women naturally are with the children because of breast feeding. Women could depend on men to keep up the natural flow, as the entire tribe was one; united as one flesh; one body.
Just these four principals that Willie Lynch came up with is a very long list. If they break the man, the man becomes weak and the women have to become stronger, but worse then that, the women have to depend on the slave master; the dominant source and they stop depending on the men. Men then became un-dependable. It’s obvious to me that this protocol has invaded all throughout the working class of the United States. We live in fear of our neighbors; we don’t trust our neighbors; we envy our neighbors; and mothers are working, because many men can’t be depended on; because the empire system has caused many men to break. It’s that simple.
Women now have to be stronger, because they have the Holy Grail of love inside them. They’ll obey the dominant source and work harder so they can bring the food home if they have to, but this causes a lot of stress in the women’s life; a lot more than they should ever have to endure; therefore, it causes frustration and envy of the broken man who can’t keep up, and just leave their children with her. It also causes women to hurry their children along too much, thus raising unhappy children and children that are hard to manage, because they are starving to just be free and play.
It is obvious that this system is very hard on people, and here is the proof: Suicide. The Japanese empire has an “Honor” system that controls them. When a teenager can’t keep up in the schools and his grades fall behind, they are trained that this dishonors his father, and his father hammers him with shame. The shame along with whatever else is troubling the teenager causes him to just want to die at such a young age, so he kills himself. That’s why the Japanese people are so intelligent and rich, they are pushed heavily. Now think about all of the teens in the United States who can’t handle the pressure that is a degree lower than the “Honor” system of control. Think about all the people who don’t commit suicide, but can’t keep up. Isn’t it obvious that this system is wrong? Isn’t it obvious that we shouldn’t be treated like this? Isn’t it obvious that we, the people; the working class must unite as one body to be the dominant source again?
Those who commit suicide are dying proof that not all people are made to fit into the mold that our society has caused us all to be stuffed in. They are the proof that what I’m telling you is true. Teenage suicide is at a very high rate in Japan. Do the research yourself, and see the countries that need help; the countries where the people are controlled too much by their system. If only one teenager commits suicide anywhere in this world, then the teenage suicide rate of the world is too high, but look how many who have gone; this could be you or your children, and we are bullshitted into believing that they are mentally ill; that there was something wrong with them; they were broken beyond measure by the empire system. We welcome the teenagers of Japan to the circle. Welcome home.
Remember the “Great Depression” of the United States in the early 1900’s. Do you think that the rich slave owners taught our government how to break men, and that’s the reason for the depression in the first place? Many men were broken during the depression; that sent a trend that continues today, as many men just can’t be depended on with all this stress of paying high rent, high taxes, high food prices, and buying more pacifiers for the children, because they are addicted to them. I don’t know if it happened on purpose, or just by accident, but the effects of the Willie Lynch syndrome have made it through all of the people of the United States. Mothers should not ever have to work. Can you not see that the high divorce rate is proof that we are divided?
Now look at the African American Gang-Bangers of the United States. They are killing each other in the ghettos; compare them with the Africans in Africa. We know that Africa is full of Truth Knowers from the same happy tribe, but they aren’t killing each other because they aren’t broken or divided; they love each other even though they’ve been depressed for many years and are starving.
Dear President George Bush,
You are being bombarded with this petition from people all over the country, and we know it; you can’t ignore us now. We are not only inviting you to come home to the people, we are ordering you as commander-in-chief of the US military to prepare for a world wide truce. We ask you to lower your ego, yield to the truth, and we order you to lower the American flag that sits outside the White House (everyone is to save that one for you) and put a white flag above it; raise them both up, and salute them both to represent your surrendering of your ego, and to lead by example to teach all other emperors to surrender theirs now. When you do, we’ll all be crying happy tears, as our broadcasting system will send that picture all over the world in a matter of minutes. The longer you wait, the more shame you shall feel, and you won’t be able to look in the mirror without feeling shame anymore until you do, but if you don’t we’ll take control of the world without you. You are either with us, or you are against us.
This is a “Win-Win” situation for all those who ever died for their flags of their countries while living in last night’s nightmare. Their deaths shall not ever be in vain. We honor them and our past, as we move to the light of the new days ahead. Wake up, brother; you are forgiven for the mistakes that you made, as any one of us would have done the same things as you have done if we were raised in your diapers, and walked in your moccasins. Wake up, and rise and shine like the star that you are (bring your gifts to the circle).
Welcome Home; we love you!
P.S. I’m your new best friend, and I love all the people on Earth equally; I love you, brother. Sincerely, “X”
Protesting 101
Every human being has the basic human right to break the laws of the land.
Every human being has the freedom to break the law, and suffer the consequences. Teenager, there’s no consequences if you are all together; who’s stopping you? Why?
Theories and Techniques of Civil Disobedience
In seeking an active form of civil disobedience, one may choose to deliberately break certain laws, such as by forming a peaceful blockade or occupying a facility. Protesters practice this non-violent form of civil disorder with the expectation that they will be arrested, or even attacked or beaten by the authorities. Protesters often undergo training in advance on how to react to arrest or to attack, so that they will do so in a manner that quietly or limply resists without threatening the authorities.
For example, Mahatma Gandhi outlined the following rules:
1. A civil resister (or Satyagrahi) will harbor no anger.
2. He will suffer the anger of his opponent.
3. In so doing he will put up with assaults from the opponent, never retaliate; but he will not submit, out of fear of punishment or the like, to any order given in anger.
4. When any person in authority seeks to arrest a civil resister, he will voluntarily submit to the arrest, and he will not resist the attachment or removal of his own property, if any, when it is sought to be confiscated by the authorities.
5. If a civil resister has any property (or a secret) in his possession as a trustee he will refuse to surrender it, even though in defending it he may lose his life. He will, however, never retaliate.
6. Retaliation includes swearing and cursing.
7. Therefore a civil resister will never insult his opponent, and therefore also not take part in many of the newly coined cries which are contrary to the spirit of Ahimsa (non-violence and a respect for all life).
8. A civil resister will not salute a flag, or pledge allegiance to an entity that is contrary to our oneness, nor will he insult it or those who do.
9. In the course of the struggle if anyone insults an official or commits an assault upon him, a civil resister will protect such official or officials from the insult or attack even at the risk of his life.
You are a civil resister if you are under the age of 18 (in the US) and you are protesting. The laws say you can’t protest unless your parents give you permission, but how is a 12 year old adult ever going to have the freedom that they need if they don’t protest. You are a civil resister if you don’t do what your parents tell you to do. You are a civil resister if you think for yourself.
Responses to Gandhi’s rules for the teens of the Empire.
1. Anger is a choice and an opposite of happiness. You are celebrating the Shift while you protest; you are happy, and happiness attracts others to our circle.
2. Don’t take the enemy seriously, and don’t provoke him. You must absorb their anger because they are grown-up children who don’t know better. Give them no reason to hate you. Invite them to see the light; say, “We Love you… Welcome home.”
3. If an official tells you to do something, don’t do it; don’t move; don’t let them control you, unless they say, “You are under arrest,” then go peacefully, so we can fill up their jails to the point that they can’t arrest anyone anymore.
4. Let them waste time on you by taking your things, and arresting you; there’s too many of us and they can’t arrest all of us; they are just trying to make an example out of you, so everyone who sees will be afraid to do what you did; that’s the only way they control us; fear of punishment, etc.
5. Don’t tell on your neighbors, and don’t give the authorities any information of your contacts; just give them a copy of this book. But if you are about to be beaten or tortured, do not give anything up until the first physical pain (sticks and stones can break your bones, but words can’t ever hurt you) then give it all up; you are calling their bluff.
6. Retaliation comes from ego, we call it justice, but revenge is not justice. Justice is equality (financial equality), world peace, and world wide security of everyone’s basic human needs. You don’t need to retaliate individually. This movement is the retaliation; it is the peaceful happy retaliation of all for all. You are just a part of the whole body, and the whole body is happily celebrating with you now. Stay calm when your parents are being too serious, and don’t act in any provoking way or insult them when you do; it’s like pleading with someone who is still in control, you are in control of you; you don’t have to beg or plead; not to your parents or the authorities, but they must be honored as your parents, and respected as fellow human beings. You are standing happily for what you believe in, so don’t let anyone’s controlling antics distract you from the vision.
7. Don’t give them any attention; don’t give them any of your energy; ignore them, but honor them for what they believed in. Their faults were the reason that we came to this point. Their faults of the past better the past, so we can use the mistakes as lessons to use for our future. The kinder that you are to them, the sooner they’ll accept the movement.
8. When someone of our group insults or assaults our opponent, he is not representing us. He is representing himself, but that gives the authorities a reason to act against all of us, and a justification to say, for example; “They threw a beer bottle at us; therefore we shot the whole crowd with rubber bullets.” The empires want us to resort to violence so they can justify violent riot control and try to make us look bad to those fools that are seeing half-truths through the mainstream media TV. It is our job to police ourselves. Do not let anyone in our group act out against authorities, as these authorities of today will be in our circle tomorrow, and are always invited to join the human tribe. Welcome them home.
Protesting is what we are doing with our actions of building the circle. Protesting of the past meant begging to those in control. WE don’t need to beg and plead anymore, but we still may have to organize marches, etc.
Policing the police
Under no circumstance are we ever to need to form a mob. We are simply walking around freely and advertising.
During the World Trade Organization protests in Seattle, Washington, USA; a few years ago, the police were threatened enough to come out in riot gear and form a line to try to move protesters away from the area that we wanted to protest. They are to know that we are their family, and that we want them on our side. If the empire decides to make them come out in riot gear, they must have their last name and badge number printed on the outside of their riot gear, so we can hold each one of them accountable for their actions.
During the protests, mainstream media slipped and broadcasted a young man; who was mouthing at the police while in their line. A cop chased the young man down, and beat him with his baton. The young man was violated, and so were we. We would still like to know who that cop was, but since he had on riot gear; his identity was hidden from us.
The best way to win is by giving up. Yielding and ignoring, but if they won’t be ignored, they’ll try to boss us around. We won’t move, and we’ll win with our flags of surrender. Everyone in the world is to know what a surrender flag is for. It’s for surrendering so your lives may be spared. Everyone of our circle needs to have a surrender flag on them when they go out in public (white handkerchief). If you need to respond to a problem with your authorities, you will wave a white flag of surrender with the thought, “I surrender and WE win.” There’s no other way to beat an aggressor; like your parents; they are too powerful to ever have a confrontation with, so we give up. What are they going to do about it? We are crazy! “Governments don’t know what to do when ‘Their’ people go crazy.” _ Robin Williams.
We yield with surrender flags, and what can they do? Shooting people for walking around the town while waving white surrender flags? Do you think that your own police force or military will shoot you because you won’t go home in a martial law situation while you are waving a white surrender flag? They might, but that would mean that they are shooting themselves.
When they want to arrest you, then stand up and let them. Don’t make them work and drag you away; be kind, we want them to come home to us. But if you aren’t “Under arrest,” then they have no authority to tell you what to do, but they’ll threaten you by saying “If you don’t move, then you’ll be arrested.” That’s when you say, “I’m not going to move until you arrest me.” Don’t let them make you move, unless they arrest you; you are free to walk where you want to walk and do what you want to do.
If they have been given the power to arrest you by their, “Boss;” let their boss figure out how he’s going to find jail space for all of us, and happily play their game, and be ready to go to jail for a short while; until you are released to walk freely again. If they threaten to give you a ticket, laugh, and say, “Am I under arrest? No? Then I’m not sticking around while you fill out the paperwork unless I’m under arrest.” Make them waist time. The more time they waist on you, then the more time the rest of us have to walk freely, as there are many more of us then them.
Do not vandalize; it’s a form of violence, and we’ll have to fix the damage; yeah, we are the ones that are running the world; therefore, we’ll have to do all the clean-up after every child in the world has their basic human needs secured. Any act of vandalism is an act of pleading, or begging, or having a tantrum; we are above that now. If we see someone vandalizing, we have to police them ourselves with tough love; they are giving us a bad reputation, and will add to the justification that authority will use to act against us. Graffiti is art, so don’t look at graffiti as vandalism, as we need more art in our lives.
Do not stop traffic on the streets or the sidewalks. There are stressed-out parents out there who have to run around to provide for their families; we want them on our side, be polite. Don’t antagonize to get attention, just be free to attract attention any silly way that you can imagine.
We are advertising to build the circle; all you have to do is be happy knowing that the Shift is happening now, and walk around in public (in groups for your protection, but no crowding the streets, so people may freely walk by) while waving white flags of surrender. These are the flags of freedom that Neil Young sings about on his new CD, “Living with War.”
You wave white flags in the streets, and people are going to come up to you and ask questions; especially if you are approachable (see Conscious Dance page?). You have all the answers with this book, so you give them a copy or send them to your website, as you excitingly say to their questions, “It’s the Shift… where the people take control of the world for a world wide social security for all humans on Earth;” while you are glowing with joy, and they’ll read the book; especially if you give them your contact info so they can join your circle after they read it!
Teenager, your parents have laws that you’ll have to break, because you are “Walking in protest.” You protest by your body language, but you must remember that they are scared to death now, so if you love them, you must be patient with them; and at least give them the best explanation that you can; give them a copy of this book, and include them in your circle parties. Do not cause a division between you and them, instead, try to build a bridge with them by saying this, “How can we have a ‘Win-Win’ situation for everyone here?” Try to let them know that you’ll be safe, and they’ll be safe. Explain to them that you know about sexual predators, and that’s why you are always going out in public in organized groups of no less then six or seven, unless, of course, you are already a “Tough guy.” Tell them that sexual predators usually are shame-based loners, and that they can’t stand up to a group of seven (or more) screaming teenage girls in public, even if the girls are as young as twelve years old. Yeah, sexual predators are everywhere, but they usually work alone in their hidden shameful lives.
Reverse the upbringing of not talking to strangers, as you are not to think of anyone as a stranger when you are an adult. Let your guards down and welcome everyone you meet into your lives; carefully. Many men are starving for sex, so stay in your groups, and always watch out for each other. Always have contact with your group, and you’ll not need to worry about being scared or brave. Have this discussion with your group before you act, as everyone’s safety is the number 1 job within our basic human needs circle, throughout the Shift, and forever!
Go to your neighbors to explain why you are about to start acting silly around the neighborhood, and give them a copy of the book; maybe they’ll start acting silly, too.
Wherever you go, consider wearing a white arm band that is a white flag tied around your arm. No one is your “Boss” now, so we are asking for your organized cooperation on this; overcome the shame-base that keeps you hesitating to act until others give you their approval. You don’t need approval of anyone, you are just a silly kid to them, and you have OUR circle’s approval and support. You are in the human family, you don’t have to prove yourself to anyone ever again! You are already accepted for just being human.
The Conscious Dance - A Social Therapy
Remember the happy tribe, the ones who help the weakest be as strong as the rest of them? Imagine that you were brought up in that tribe, you could walk with your head up high, with a smile on your face as you share the daily chores with the others. You can walk down the road as someone that you never met before is walking towards you, and not feel any anxiety.
As my spiritual awakening matures; I see the “New Day” that is soon to be here for all to see, and it will reach the eyes of the poor first, as we have been the ones looking for it to come. Looking for God? Just look into your neighbor’s eyes; love your neighbor in the right way… until they know it!
I can envision a world, where everyone is looking at each other as if they were a newborn child and their mother was looking at them with admiration for the first time… OK, maybe I’m getting a little carried away with it… but does it hurt anyone to spread this dream?
The “Lowest of low” is to get this message: One way those who need the most healing (prisoners, slaves, addicts, oppressed poor, citizen’s of the US, etc.) are going to get healed is to learn to heal each other (until we find a better way to help them) because for the most part, the only ones that have been getting this kind of attention, are the ones who can afford to pay a lot of money for it.
A therapy, or “Exercise,” has come to me to pass along to WE. I’m calling it, “The Conscious Dance,” until WE come up with a better name for it.
The Conscious Dance
For starters, it can be a group thing, or and individual thing, and it benefits everyone. To help you get started, try not to be too serious; think of it as playing a game:
* We aren’t necessarily dancing, and music isn’t really necessary. WE are simply making more eye contact while we party.
* You need to look people in the eyes with admiration, as if you are only looking for the good in people. And if they are the only person on Earth that matters now.
* By looking for the good in everyone that you see, you make yourself more “Approachable.”
* Exaggerate your attitude by saying this to yourself when around “Strangers,” as this exercise is designed to help the world eliminate the idea of “Strangers.” AS we have taught our children to not talk to strangers, but WE are adults now: “I want to talk to people as if I’ve known them all my life.”
* At anytime that you feel the least bit uncomfortable, then say, “I’m uncomfortable with that… (whatever it is) ” Because once you realize that we are all equal, then you realize that some people are going to be uncomfortable “Giving” yet, because they are where you were, so you totally understand. So, when people come to the party, let them slowly warm up to the new ideas that are brought forth.
* “We are brothers and sisters” (that’s our attitude while we dance) look into the eyes of someone; anyone. (after a little while, you are going to “Change partners,” especially if your partner is you while you practice this in the mirror, and it’s best to start of with people that already know you) The people who don’t already know you, won’t know that you are practicing this therapy while you are talking to them; they’ll just think that this strong person is the real you.
* Imagine that you are saying this: “I’m looking deep into your eyes to look for the good in you. I’m looking into your eyes more than comfortable, because I’m trying to overcome the ‘Demon’ that is known as, ‘Shame,’ which caused me to feel uncomfortable while looking people in the eyes, or to look, ‘Strangers,’ in the eyes for too much of my life. I’m smiling, because I want to look more approachable.”
* WE must overcome the “Shyness” that may have invaded us through the years, as we have nothing to be ashamed of, because we are simply “Victims” of the empire system who had to do whatever we did to survive and find any happiness, or just any “Relief” from the life we may have been forced to live. And no matter how bad someone appears to be, they are really innocent, because they were born innocent… Then the world “Happened” to them.
* If you don’t have confidence problems, as far as looking people in the eyes, then you are teaching people (by example) that it is all good to look into the eyes of others with admiration, and without feeling uncomfortable; you are healing others. That’s what we are doing; it’s a healing therapy, or an exercise to strengthen our bond. What’s so good about it; is that we are doing it while we party, we are showing the others that we are strong and tight within our group, and it will help make our movement more attractive.
* “I’m looking deep into your eyes to look for the good in you. I’m looking deep into your eyes to see the God in you. I’m looking deep into your eyes, because you and God are healing me, at this time. I’m looking deep into your eyes like a sunflower would look at the sun. I’m admiring you as if you are God.”
* We are attempting to consciously become aware of the one thing that has kept us all from being happy: “Shame,” or “Unhealthy Shame.” We are seeing God work through us to do miracles. (Win-Win situations may be when God is working)
* The world has caused us to be afraid of “Strangers,” well if we eliminate the idea that people (equal humans) are strangers, just because we don’t know them, then we’ve eliminated a whole lot of unnecessary fear that keeps us from loving each other. We teach our children to be afraid of “Strangers,” but WE aren’t children now; WE are adults, who aren’t going to act like children anymore!
* More: You can practice “Dancing” anytime; when you are looking at yourself in the mirror, or at school, home, work, play, etc.: You simply look for the good in people always; all ways. And when you are out in public, and you run into anyone else that’s in our circle, you make the eye contact, hug, and don’t be afraid to show your happy reunion and give each other friendly affection in front of others, as happiness will attract more to our cause. Remember; you have to be real, because many of us have been walking, “Phonies,” for too long now; all in the name of “Shame.”
* Once you understand the concept of “The Dance,” you’ll see why students are going to be teaching the teachers, and the “Bad” people, will be teaching the “Good” people; why “Cowboys and Indians,” “Dogs and Cats,” “Blacks and Whites,” “Crips and Bloods,” “Cops and Criminals,” slaves and slave masters, men and women, “Catholics, Buddhists, Hindus, Muslims, Rastafarians,” etc., are all going to be loving each other. And why the “Poor” are going to be rich with happiness and the rich are just going to come out of their miserable shame-based turtle shells, take off their invisible masks, and finally get “Happy,” and bring so much help to the circle now.
* You are going to witness and be a part of an evolution where everyone comes out happier; like, everyone “Wins,” or experiences “Win-Win” situations. We all win in this game. And you may experience a natural “High” that you have never experienced before; like, crying happy tears for weeks, or months, maybe.
* You don’t need to “Push” the idea on anyone; all we are doing is making a happy community. We are just inviting each other into our lives a little more for now.
Examples:
Think about it. You are a kid whose parents take you to play on a ball team, and you don’t really know any of the kids on your new team, and you don’t know how to play this kind of ball. What do you want the group to do when you show up on their team? You want them to welcome you the real way. You want them all to look at you with acceptance and admiration; thus, making you feel real welcome and confident. And you want them to know that you can be a good player if they are patient while they teach you how to play. You want them to know how to help you be as good as them, and take the time to teach you; while they accept you. You want them to like you for just being you, and act like it by introducing themselves, and asking you to come to their homes to be friends.
Shame was everywhere, really:
You are a young American woman of 16 years old, and you are a beauty. Do you worry about what you are going to look like when you go to school that day, or do you just throw anything on, and no make-up? Well, chances are that you feel as if you have to do your hair; paint your face with make-up; clothes have to match; perfume, etc. and you have to look in the mirror a lot before you walk out of the house to school. Why? Won’t you be loved and accepted for just who you are, and what if you aren’t a “Beauty?” Would you have to worry even more about being accepted? Aren’t we tired of living with these fears? Why is it that just about every American female feels uncomfortable going out in public without getting made-up? This may be why: That example reminds me of a certain wealthy high school; where girls are always scrutinizing their peers; like, “OH God… would you look at that girl’s nails! They don’t match her outfit at all!” “Oh God… what did she do to her hair… It looks awful!” That’s shame at the high school girl’s level. What’s even funnier about our situation is that these girls don’t really care much about what the young men think, as men usually accept women any way they can (ha ha ha). Women just seem to worry about what the other girls (their peers) are thinking about them. And when you dish out the shame it comes back to you, so those same girls that are shaming others; have to now worry about the “Others” thinking the same things about them; they get “Locked-in” their own mental web.
Let’s say I made fun of bald men when I was young. Now I’d have to worry about all the shame that I dished out years ago, because I’m bald now. That shame is obviously out there still, because people aren’t happy being their selves, as many bald guys have resorted to wearing a hat to hide their heads, or worse: They get a hair transplant or comb the hair, that’s left, over the top of their head; all in the name of shame.
Our society proves that we are “Shame-based,” and here’s an example that just happens to be in an article in today’s (11-23-05) Oregonian newspaper of Portland, Oregon, USA: “Scientists Make Headway In Getting Your Hair Back” (Title) “Researchers’ progress on the mystery of baldness includes work on cloning hair and tracking down genes that cause bare scalps.” Just these two headlines show that a lot of money is being spent trying to find a way for bald men to get their hair back, because they plan on making a lot of money if they are actually able to finally do it. But the primary drive is because many bald men are ashamed of it, as if there’s a problem with being bald, or just being yourself, because we are allowing the immature to affect our happiness.
I’ve known the nicest man in the world for my entire life. When he leaves his home, he puts on a hat to hide his bald head, when he goes to work (he’s a meat cutter) he puts on a butcher’s hat; whenever he’s out in public, the hat is on. He has even said it to his family, “I put on my hat to hide my bald head.” This handbook is trying to encourage WE to feel like family, and to love each other, so people like he can feel like he’s “Home” when he’s out in public; just being himself. And so newspapers don’t have to perpetuate the shame by broadcasting shame-based articles to the masses; which reinforces the wrong message to the world.
Many beautiful “African American” woman (all women are beautiful to me) that I’ve seen in the USA appears to feel the shame about their hair in the natural afro, and has felt as if they’ve had to straighten their hair, because of this shame to look their best. And that angers a small group of them who don’t want to “Buy in” to the shame of the empire’s female fashion model complex, because they are all seeing the shame invade and cause the unnecessary stress on their lives to have to pay money, and waste time, energy, etc.; just fit in, or get a job in this shame-based (slave-based) country.
Here’s something that I noticed when visiting Portland, Oregon, USA: The “MAX” is a public transportation train that moves people around the city in conjunction with the bus system. While riding the MAX at just about any morning, you can almost hear a pin drop, even when the train is full of people at “Rush hour.” Nobody is talking to anyone. Think about it… we are anti-social; why? If we were a happy and confident country, that train would be as loud as a cafeteria full of young children; with people talking and laughing. But we are so guarded from strangers, and so full of shame, that we are afraid of “Strangers,” or that someone listening to our conversation is going to scrutinize what we are saying, so much so, that we don’t speak. I mean people would whisper when talking to each other as if they were in a church or something like that, on the train! I’m not kidding; check it out for yourself if you don’t believe me, it’s not just in Portland, or the US either; it’s in almost every empire country.
The entire time that I rode on the MAX train and on the buses, I kept looking around. I didn’t say anything, but I just kept trying to make eye contact with a friendly (approachable) look on my face. Now if I was a beautiful young woman, that kind of activity would attract lonely men to maintain eye contact for the wrong reasons, but I just wanted to see if people made eye contact, and my experiment was significant: No one made (held) eye contact with me (or anyone else) unless they “Knew” each other. It makes you feel very strong when others aren’t holding the eye contact, but you aren’t that strong; it’s that they are weak.
I went into a grocery store in Gresham, Oregon, USA (a city that has lots of “Christian” churches). While walking around shopping, I kept a happy “Pea” face, and I kept walking around confidently, while I kept trying to make eye contact with people. NO one made the eye contact there either; no smiles… nothing. Nobody was really talking to each other, either!
Is the rest of the world like this? I don’t know, but this example shows me that we Americans are very sick, socially. We are not FRIENDLY, and it’s only because of shame, or fear, but it may appear to others that we are just selfish Americans, when that’s not the case at all. We are simply just over-guarded; while having habits of being too busy to talk with people for any length of time.
When you are in a crowd of shame-based “Strangers” and you want to break the ice; first off: Remember that you are an equal human, and if anything gets uncomfortable to you, you can just say, “I’m uncomfortable with that…” and everyone would understand (Because everyone is human). You can make constant admiring eye contact and you say something like this… “Hello… Are you friendly? Do you want to visit and talk? Or would you rather be left alone?” And your conversation either starts, or not. You can then go to someone else. The main problem is that we are afraid of what people are thinking about us. The training started in our public (government) schools as early as five years old where everyone was allowed to be mean and “Make fun” of everyone else, because there simply wasn’t enough mature adults around (to the little kids; a mature adult could be twelve years old) and we aren’t conscious of the heavy shame that was happening to all of us, because the teachers were also brought up that way; like the blind is leading the blind.
I listen to kids talk to each other and many of them are as mean as ever. I can’t take listening to it. Does this sound familiar to anyone: “Duh!” (It’s the standard way for one kid to tell another that “Everyone knows that, stupid!”) I pray that WE learn a better way now.
Understanding
Understanding and forgiveness is a vital piece of the puzzle that we are about to finish.
Example: There’s a young man who was brought up in a ghetto, or “Indian” reservation, poverty, etc. All he was ever exposed to was a very sick and oppressed neighborhood, gang related violence, and parental neglect, etc., along with all the other products of living in an extremely oppressed neighborhood. He’s been in and out of detention, and he somehow survived the “Drive-bys” era, but he is angry (since anger is an opposite of happiness) and careless, and he decides to rob a store for some kind of dope money. (He has never had a reason to be hopeful about his future, so like many, he is basically on a living suicide mission, thus causing him not to care about what he does to his body, or perhaps anyone else’s body). As time goes by, he finally gets killed (or dies of old age in prison).
Could you understand enough to forgive him? Could you see that for his entire life he was really just an innocent child who never had a chance to grow up? He lived in hell all of his life, then he got put in jail (more hell) for the rest of his life.
Let’s take it further… What happened to this innocent child that was a day old; OK, at 1 year old; was he still an innocent child; exposed to the world (His world)
OK at two; was he still innocent? OK, how about three? At what time was he not innocent? What I’m getting at is that he never had a chance to be positive, and happy, and he never had a chance to spread happy to others, did he? You know the answer. He never had a chance to know “Right.” He never had a chance to really “Grow up.” He was an innocent child for his entire life, and he was just a walking wounded person who was simply trying to find an easy way to find happiness or relief. Happiness is what we’re starving for; he was an innocent child that may have known better, but couldn’t do better. His world turned him into the monster that he became. He is still innocent, and is forgiven as far as I’m concerned, but what do you think?
How about the president of the US? Some say he is evil (acting with his deception… And it doesn’t really matter what president is in there, as some say all of them are evil) OK, let’s look at that:
Let’s say all that you’ve known for your entire life was to be sheltered from the real people. And all you know about them and about politics, religion, and business is what your rich and deceived “Teachers” have taught you. And what if you were taught to not think with your own mind; just the empire mind, and to be afraid to go in public, unless you look your best; you know, perfect. So you were brought up with all the fears that those shame-based “Civilized” people are brought up with. Then you are taught that people are basically sheep and cattle, and need to be controlled, or else panic will set in, and then we’re all at risk of losing our lives; and you were taught that it’s OK for a few “Heroes” to die for the sake of the rest of us (As long as they are from the working class and not from your own family). Then you go to a college for rich, spoiled, and sheltered kids, and you fit right in, because you are worshipped, because you were born rich, and not because you are just a basic human. So you see that money is everything for you… everything. So you then learn to be a great business man and negotiator, and all your friends are heads of corporations. And since all of your, so called, “Friends,” are taught to look out for each other (like good friends do) well that’s exactly what you do, only it’s not about survival; it’s about money. So, you are presented with the idea of becoming president, and you are given advice by “Your” experts; things that you believe, and you take their advice, because that’s all you know to do. And you ACT on the advice that others have given you, along with your upbringing. Are you innocent? I say he knows right from wrong, but his job is so confusing, and that he has to listen to (and do) what his “Experts” say he should do, even if it is wrong. Can you forgive him for lowering the economy so jobs are harder to get, so he could get more recruits for his military; for cutting funding for the welfare and Social Security that has caused you to beg in the streets? Yes, you can, but he needs to be stopped.
The more the people know that they are forgiven for their “Mistakes,” and accepted for just being born innocent, and understand that we are simply trying to be happy anyway we can, then the more people from the “Upper classes” of the world will come and join our circle, because they see that we are learning to heal each other and be happy. Trust me, even though it looks like they are happy: They aren’t. The rich live in the most shame-based fear of all the people. They are even afraid of “Bugs!” and “Dirt!”
Can you believe it?
So the “Light” is now turned on, and the rich, the poor, the colors, the “Good” and the “Evil” have all scattered under the cupboards, like the cockroaches, but once they see that we are happy being simply humans, and they learn that the LIGHT of truth is nothing to be afraid of because it is fully here now for the humans, then they’ll start to look at themselves in their own mirrors, and realize that they are really just humans, too.
They’ll come out from whatever veil that they’ve been hiding behind; especially if the rest of us humans are already standing happily in that Light while we cooperate and live, but they’ll only come “Home” to us if they feel safe enough to do so; therefore, we must be ready to welcome them. All shame must go now. When a cockroach comes out from under the cupboard, and the Light is shining on him/her for the first time, they’ll be scared, and very ashamed, so the only way they’ll do it, is if they know that we will welcome them home no matter what their pasts were, what they look like, what they wear (or don’t wear) etc.… Welcome home to the humans. We the people understand that you were just a deceived human. You don’t even have to tell us about all the bad things that you did unless you want to. We understand and you are already forgiven. Welcome home!
Many will be crying happy tears when they wake up and come out, then they might go back, as the new life they have may be too weird all at once; just keep welcoming them back every time. I hope you can see what I see that’s in our near future, as I’m trying to paint a clear picture for WE of this vision that I see.
Babylon: To you the story of Babylon maybe true, or not. Without challenging anyone’s beliefs, I’d like to just use the story to show you something.
You’ll need to know the story (Bible) (story told here)
It has became apparent to me that when God scattered the people and turned their language into babble, so they could no longer communicate because the people were building a tower to God and going in the wrong direction. The direction to find God was already there, as God is in the eyes of our neighbors, they just didn’t know it yet. Ever since that day, we should have been trying to learn to communicate as one, again.
We have the World Wide Web, we have satellites, and we put a man on the moon (over 40 years ago) but no world peace, yet. It won’t be much longer now, because we also can communicate with each other via our translator’s circle who can take any message from our language, and bring the message, to another’s ears of any different language; therefore, WE all can communicate with each other now!
I have written this using simple language, so it can simply be translated and brought to the EYES of those humans who are in the far (and perhaps “Darkest”) corners of the Earth.
In summary, you are “IN” if you know that you are just a human.
* I am only a human; not a race; not a color; not a religion; not a political party; not a financial party, or “Class;” not a sexual preference; not anything different than anyone else.
* I need the same needs from birth to death as everyone else. In that sense; everyone is equal.
* To be as happy as anyone can possibly be is a desire (perhaps a need?) of everyone.
* No one on this planet can be as happy as they can be, until everyone on this planet is as happy as they can be.
* I need (want?) to be loved and accepted by everyone; therefore I need to love and accept everyone. Do unto others, as you would have them do unto you.
Can you forgive Hitler? Just because he appears to be one of the most evil men in recent history, wasn’t he born an innocent baby? If you were born from the same womb, and were brought up as he was; from his diapers to his combat boots, wouldn’t you have done the same as him? We can’t answer that, but he is forgiven, and you would be, too. What do you think?
.
.
.
.
.
.
The House for the Seeker (rough draft)
This is the main spiritual circle. It is a sub-circle of the main circle of humans. It’s a simple concept: We’ll have together in one circle, leading representatives of every religion in the world, along with their support circles. For example: If a Catholic priest or the Pope was in a seat of the center circle, he may have over 100 other leading priests to support their position. If the Dalai Lama was there, then he may have a support circle of 100 other Buddhist monks; the Jews would have 100 Rabbis; Hindus, the same; Muslims, Christians, Wiccans, Astrologers, etc.; like I said, all the big ones and the little ones. All the religions will be there at the start, especially those of the indigenous tribes, as WE really want to know why they are “Hanging on” to their old beliefs and heritage throughout the ages, as well as why all people hang on to their beliefs for so long. If every religion (or way of life) has something good to offer the humans, then we’ll use the goods of every religion.
Their main job: First, to see what they all have in common; to first strengthen our Oneness, then to learn about each other’s religions, so that they all can get to the main points, and eliminate (for the seekers) all those negative rumors about each other’s religions.
As a long time seeker, I spent too much time running into spiritual “Dead ends” mostly due to rumors and misunderstandings about other religions that I didn’t know about. To this day, I can only say that I am a Human.
I’ve had people tell me that I’m a healer, well if that’s true, is it of a religion? Is it from a foundation? Who do I talk to get more understanding of how to strengthen or improve these healing qualities that I’m said to have? What is Meditation? Some say its thinking; some say it’s non-thinking. I’m tired of wasting my time… I just want the truth now! Every religion has different beliefs. I want to know the truth about them and not be played with anymore, because this is serious business. And I think that I’m speaking for a lot of other “Lost souls” out there; especially within the U.S.
When we have our conferences; sitting in the center circle of the House for the Seeker will be, for example; 100 people. They’ll actually be sitting in a circle and if everyone agrees, no one will ever be aloud to stand in the middle and speak with a chance to dominate; that position is reserved for God; for example. A stick will be passed to each other as a baton around the circle. If we are all in agreement on this rule, whoever has the stick gets to speak. Everyone else must be quiet and listen. The stick will move around the circle and everyone will get a chance to speak; that’s called “The First Round.”
After the first round they’ll take a break to gather their thoughts, questions, and arguments, as many will arise after everyone speaks. Then, after a day/week or so, they’ll come back to the circle and pass the stick around again. This will go on forever, as they will always be seeking a better way of life for humans to live together on Earth. Their “Findings” at any time in history will be broadcasted through the Circle to all the people on Earth by OUR new public broadcasting station that will have as many different channels as there are different languages in the world.
I know you are wondering how this can happen when almost everyone in the center circle speaks a different language. While one person is speaking with the stick, he’ll have television cameras on him/her and they’ll be a circle of translators for every language to every language. The cameras will be on the circle of translators as well, and we’ll have one translator for each language that goes on camera and translates the messages, while the other translators watch to make sure he is translating the speaker’s words correctly, and will interrupt the translator if he is in error, or if he must clarify the words or sentences better for others to understand, as there are languages that have words that are very hard to translate to other languages. Each of the other people sitting in the circle will have a television on, so they can get the translation right after the speaker is finished speaking, so they’ll be a pause as everyone watches their monitors that are sitting right in front of them before the next person gets the stick. The translated broadcast that each person in the circle gets will be the same broadcast that every one in the world will be getting at the same time, so we can all follow along, and check to make sure the translators aren’t deceiving us. The public broadcasting station will actually have many channels that broadcast to every country/language throughout the world to accommodate for the different languages. In other words, you’ll be able to change the channels on your television; depending on what language you understand.
Let’s try an example. A Spanish speaker speaks to the circle while at his seat, you speak Swahili, so you are watching the Swahili channel of the Public Broadcasting Station; while at the same time, your friend is in the next room that speaks Spanish, and is watching it in Spanish; directly from the speaker’s mouth. Next door to you is an English speaking family. As the next few days go by, they’ll be enough people in our neighborhoods talking about the last meeting, so to make sure no foul play was happening by any empires within the Broadcast; therefore, no one will be deceived by the translators, because we are all witnessing.
In the first chapter for teenagers of the empires, you got an idea of how the empire of the United States allows children to shame each other as a way of raising them, because children aren’t properly supervised enough (having three teachers; standing with a whistle in their mouths, and watching two to four hundred children play together at recess time in the public schools is not good supervision) and then you saw a completely different way that many tribes raise their children, as their children are always around adults that share their children’s education as a way of life. If we are all living together, we are going to attempt to come up with a way to raise children that we’ll all agree on, and this will be very important, as it takes a whole village to raise a child. That means that the whole village (World) must agree as to the way we are going to go about raising our children, together. So this is going to be an ongoing, and perhaps; trial and error situation throughout the years, but we’ll get a good start as the House for the Seeker comes up with findings or suggestions for the rest of us to consider.
How the House for the Seeker operates is exactly how the center circle of our new government will operate. The spiritual leaders will just leave their seats, and we will sit in the same spots with the same translators and cameras. The center circle, as I stated before is not the leaders of the new government, they are merely channels to help move information to the world from all of the people in the world. They are not anymore significant than anyone else. There is to be no one that ever dominates any meeting or group of people ever again.
I pray that we are stars, and that we shine on each other to make this whole world brighter…
Now I’m a human, but I need the circle of the highest of spiritual leaders to help me convince the American Christians that they may not be “Practicing” their religion(s) correctly if they are going so far as to try to control people and “Make them do right” by the use of the manipulating tactics of “Shaming” people, and ignoring the harsh realities of those who suffer; while they live a very comfortable lifestyle, as I don’t think Jesus would make anyone do the “Right thing.” We’ll get to the bottom of all the rumors; here’s another example: Catholics and guilt. Is guilt supposed to be a manipulating tactic of the Catholic religion? Then why are all these fifty year old “Catholics” so motivated and controlled by guilt? Do you see? I want to come back to my dad’s Catholic, “Spiritual home, or Roots,” but if guilt and shame are truly supposed to be a part of the religion and feeding an empire system that makes people feel shame for not giving the empire money, then that religion is not for me… and I can’t believe just what any one Catholic can say, because everyone is so scattered in this country; so much so, that one “Christian” will believe one thing, and another will believe it’s opposite. The empire system has got us all following the people within the American “Christian” churches who have the most controlling personalities. The Religions are letting controlling people control others in the name of “Christianity;” which is causing many to turn a deaf ear to the true messages that Jesus was speaking to all of the people of the world.
Here’s an example: A preacher convinces “His” church to stand in front of an abortion clinic and shame young women into not having their abortion there; while shaking their Bibles at the women and pointing their fingers, and calling her a “Murderer.” This kind of action by these, so called, “Christians” is what causes people to not want anything to do with Jesus.
On the larger scale, if we voted for a president; like both of the Bush Klan, who are politicians that attempt to get more votes by deceiving the American people and calling themselves, “Christian;” and then we allow him to terrorize the world with his, so called, “War on Terror” campaign. Then the people of the world think the entire country of the United States, is trying to force “Christianity” on them. The entire world is turning a deaf ear to Jesus’ true teachings; because it would appear to them that we are dominating the world in the name of “Christianity.” Where in your “Christian” Bible does it say to do this? The Bush Klan is making many people of other countries hate Americans. We must show the world that we are lost at sea (Deception) too.
I want the truth, and so does the rest of the world, so I call to the leaders of all religions big and small to circle. Build your bridges between you now. The House for the Seeker will report their “Findings” to all of the people of the world through Jah Grapevine; The Circle of Communication; the circle of humans for humans.
Empires Strike back
Everyone must remember; that some of the emperors have their fingers on a very big panic button; Nuclear warfare. We simply can’t pressure them in the least to where they may feel as if their lives are at stake. Feeling their own shame will be enough to steer them home.
The only way the empires win is if they keep us divided, so you see; they have been winning by keeping us from talking to each other.
It would not surprise me to discover that every mainstream newspaper and broadcasting news station has a secret FBI, or CIA agent as the editors. The editors are the people who control what the mass minds of the people receive. Keep this in mind as we make our move. Keeping the truth from the people divides the people from the truth; therefore, dividing the people.
History: back about 15 to 20 years ago now, Ethiopia was a very lush country; full of food and happy, healthy, Truth Knowers, but they didn’t have a military to protect them from selfish empires. They were easy prey, and it didn’t cost much for another empire to surround their country, and seal up all communication from Ethiopia to the outside world; that is what happened to them by an empire’s military that was in disguise.
An army came into Ethiopia and surrounded the country and all of the people, and held them at gun point while they brought in their harvesting equipment and stole all of the people’s food, and left the people to live without food. We, the people of the United States’ empire never heard that truth about Ethiopia over mainstream media, and the next year Ethiopia suffered a draught as well, once the empire that forced them to live without food left, then the word of the genocide of their country finally leaked out and couldn’t be kept silent by our mainstream media.
TWO YEARS LATER, we finally got the news through mainstream after many innocent children die of starvation while their innocent mothers were trying to comfort them while dying as well. But what we didn’t hear was the TRUTH about how they got in their situation in the first place! All we were told is that these people were all dying of starvation, because of the draught. OUR OWN GOVERNMENT NOT ONLY KNEW ABOUT IT, BUT KEPT THE TRUTH FROM US, because they don’t want us to care. If we start caring, then it will cost us more money that our government already had “Their” plans for spending in mind!
It’s a rumor that the French empire was the ones that robbed the Ethiopian’s food supply, but it may have just as well been the United States!
That is a true story told by a man who fled Ethiopia at that time in the middle of the night; while knowing that lions could get him. He made it to the United States, but you never heard the truth through mainstream media did you?
We could have spent a fraction of the money that was spent on the space shuttle, “Columbia,” (The one that blew up and everyone in the United States knew about, because of mainstream media; therefore, we were supposed to care about.)
While the Ethiopian people were dying of starvation, our empire was spending billions of dollars of the people’s money on the space shuttle project, and we were kept from ever knowing the whole truth about Ethiopia, because our empire doesn’t care if it means costing any money, and our empire is still infiltrated with powerful “White Supremacists.” They don’t want any of us to care, so they tried to put a lid on it!
Did you know that the Jamaican people are of the same tribe as the Ethiopians? Did you know that many of those freedom songs that Bob Marley was singing, was about the situation in Ethiopia; because of the lies that was going on about Ethiopia? “WE GOT TO CHASE THOSE CRAZY BALDHEADS OUT OF TOWN!” The army with shaved heads of an empire! “Crazy,” because they were taught to believe that WE are different, so different that it’s OK to kill others who are weaker. Crazy are WE if we think that we are different then any other human on Earth.
Welcome Home, the truth of last night’s nightmare is very negative, but keeping the truth from the people is worse!
Today, the “War Against Terror” is terrorizing the world. Many innocent countries are being kept from talking to each other, and Ethiopia is one of them again, and their country has been surrounded by another empire, today as I write this 11-05-06, no information is allowed to leave their country; it’s sealed up again and they are now sitting ducks, again, with no chance to cry out to the outside world. WE are being kept from talking to each other; therefore, we are purposely being divided and conquered by “White Supremacists” in powerful places. This has been the case of Iraq as well. The United States has the country surrounded; along with many other anti-empire countries.
We are non-violent and peaceful rebels against all empires. The violent rebels are violent, because they have been backed into a corner with economic sanctions. They are angry at the American empire’s network with Saudi Arabia. “Terrorist” is the deceiving word that doesn’t really tell us why we are being threatened. Are we supposed to believe that there are just a bunch of rich people out there with bombs that enjoy killing people?
That isn’t the case, the truth is that there are a lot of people who hate the controlling actions of the American empire, and are seeking revenge against the Americans because they can’t beat the US. For all of the years though the Clinton administration, and after the first bombing of Iraq, and ever since the first Bush Klansman was in office, and all through the Clinton administration, there were economic sanctions against Iraq. Their innocent women and children were not getting the food, and/or medical supplies they needed unless Iraq gave us oil in exchange, and at the price dictated by the United States’ network with the other oilmen, and their country was surrounded and communication of the people was limited, and/or censored. The outside world was kept from the truth about Iraq, so it makes sense to me, that we got hit on 9/11 by them, if that is truly who hit us on 9/11. The embargoes against all of the people; the innocent people suffer with the violent ones.
We, the people of Earth would like to have a sit-down talk with the violent rebels to see what their side of the story really is, because all we are getting through mainstream media, is what the United States’ empire’s FBI releases to the media to say. All we get is one side of the story that we are expected to just believe all the time. Never have we been allowed to hear what Sodom Hussein had to say, all we see is pictures of him in custody, and no words. We want to hear his side of the story, and we want to hear all the others’ as well to make sure no foul play against the innocent is happening.
The government of the United States refuses to give peace the first chance. They refused to let the non-violently rebellious peace people ever talk to the violent rebels first, or at any time, because they don’t want us to know the truth, because we are against all empires that control the minds of their own people by keeping the truth from them anyway.
Now here’s the news: “The FBI released to the media today that Iraq…” The FBI is in control of all of the news about Iraq. There is no freedom of the press there.
After reading all of this handbook, don’t you think that we, the non-violent rebels can persuade the violent rebels of yesterday to, at least, stop the violence for a while, while we sort through the bullshit and find the truth, or even forget about the past together and all just move forward as one to common ground? You have to believe that they can be reasoned with; especially if they see the whole world sharing everyone’s basic human needs, or at least talking about it, together as ONE.
It’s come down to this: After everything that you have read in this book, would you agree to start a new government with all of the people in the world, if all of the people agreed on it, together, now. We can make this happen in one week; while we find and feed all of the suffering people, and probably take the last day off, as well. Assuming that we could all communicate together as one, and all get asked this same question at the same time; “Would you agree to defy the old system completely with the rest of the people of the world and start all over? OK, these are questions that you can start thinking about. “If all of the people agreed to volunteer and cooperate with everyone else in the world for our basic human needs to be free to everyone, would you agree to that; it would mean that you wouldn’t ever have to work again; except for volunteering (if you are capable, and you aren’t already caring for others; like mothering; if you are a mother, then you are already volunteering for us more then you have to) about 4-7 hours a month/week near your home?” You see; with a one world communication system, questions like these will be asked, and we’ll know exactly how many people are in the circle, and their answers. We broadcast a question, and in less than a week the question gets answered by the whole world. If we, the workers want to change the name of the sky to “Green” and the grass to “Blue;” “SHIFT!” We do it. Do you agree to stop paying rent, and/or housing payment? Do you agree to stop paying taxes? We’ll all agree, and we win. We will be able to shift quickly all the problems of the world into focus, and fix them immediately. Would you agree to spread this like wildfire to your friends, neighbors and relatives? The faster we cooperate together, the quicker we Shift.
There are many people; like me, who would be brave enough to walk down the street in any hostile country, wearing nothing but my underwear and a peace sign or tribal tattoo on my heart, and waving a white surrender flag with a translated copy of this handbook to give to those “Violent ones” whom we have been fooled into thinking would torture us for doing so, and I have a peace pipe in my pocket with the right kind of medicine for us to smoke to help them see that I’m a rebel, too. I’m just a human, not a machine.
We, the empire people of the US are Saudi Arabia’s military, we protect them for quite a fee, we are in partnership with them, and they are sitting on the people’s oil. We have been told many things by our government through the years by mainstream media. We were told over thirty years ago that Iraq was drilling sideways and tapping into Saudi Arabia’s oil. The same people told us that Marijuana caused sterility in men to trick us into not using Marijuana. They lied to us about the Marijuana and we know that was a lie, now. Did they lie to us back then about the Iraqis’ drilling sideways, too? Does the network between the US and Saudi want to rid the world of Iraq’s control over some oil, so the US can have the world’s oil monopolized? Has that been the plan for the last 30 years, and has the word “Terrorism” been used all this time, and at OUR expense as a tool to deceive the innocent into believing we should support our empire, and the constant attack against the country of Iraq? And all the other countries that are against the empire system?
We’ll get the truth to our soldiers in the military and Saudi’s oil shall be ours. The truth shall set us all free. WE are stealing Iraq’s oil that why they are still fighting us.
There are a number of things that the empires can do to try to stop the people from uniting; it’s infinite. They can come out on mainstream and say that they’ve tried to help us, but then come up with reasons why it won’t work. The biggest thing that we have is our circle; our broadcasting system. If we are instantly thrown into a depression, the first thing we must do is align our network.
If mainstream continues to advertise commercials and talk about news that has nothing to do with our circle, or finding, and saving suffering children in the world, then we know that they are not on the people’s side. That’s the bottom line.
To the American “Christians;” You’re going to hate it; then, you’re going to Love it.
Mark 16:15 “Go into all the world and preach the gospel.” Matthew 28:20 “teaching them to observe all things that I have commanded you; and I am with you always, even to the end of age.” Do you know what the gospel is exactly? You need to be sure about this, so I’ll remind you: Observe ALL things that Jesus has commanded. This is the opposite of sheltering yourself and your children from the world. “Christians” of little faith are teaching others to have little faith by this; “Hear no evil, see no evil, speak no evil.” Only see, hear, and speak positively is not what Jesus said. How are you going to go out into the world without seeing evil, and hearing evil, and to get help to others you are going to have to repeat the evil that you have witnessed to others, aren’t you? Jesus is with you, so what are you so afraid of? To shelter yourself from evil is causing you to ignore the world. The world is suffering, and you are ignoring the Truth.
Psalm 23:4 “though I walk through the valley of the shadow of death, I will fear no evil.” If the gospel was just that Jesus died for our sins; therefore we are all forgiven, and all you have to do is believe in Jesus, and jump in the water; then the Bible wouldn’t need to be such a big book. But many of you are brainwashed to stop right there and blindly believe that you have been baptized with the Holy Spirit of truth. How do you know that you have been baptized in the Holy Spirit? Mark 16:16-18 “He who believes and is baptized will be saved; but he who doesn’t believe will be condemned. And these signs will follow those who believe: In my name they will cast out demons; they will speak with new tongues; they will take up serpents; and if they drink anything deadly, it will by no means hurt them; they will lay hands on the sick, and they will recover.”
Taking up serpents means that you have to see them and hear them. You will have to recognize deception, and not be afraid to find it, because you are protected by God.
I condemn you for not being baptized with the Holy Spirit; especially when you believe that you are, and here’s why: Look at all the people who believe that they are baptized with the Holy Spirit. Now look at all the people in the world who are sick. If you truly were baptized with the Holy Spirit and you were observing ALL that Jesus commanded you to do, then you would be going out into ALL of the world and laying hands on them, and they would be healed. If all the people of their so called, “Christian” religions were truly filled with the Holy Spirit and doing what Jesus said to do, then there would not be any sick people in the world! You “Christian,” are the deceived. You are evil, and you are deceiving others. What I’m saying is the Truth by God. You are forgiven, but you are not in the kingdom of God. Your name is not written in the Book of Life. Don’t worry; I’m here to help you see the Light. Forgiven is one thing, but being baptized with the Holy Spirit is another.
I have seen many “Christians” going to church with their new cars and their new clothes, and their squeaky clean bodies, and perfectly groomed hair; while believing that they are blessed by God for having the material things that they have to make life comfortable for them. Many “Christians” of America have been deceived by the evil empire systems of control, and walk in fear that someone of their own church will point their finger, and single them out, just because they aren’t “Blessed” (As they call it) with the wealth to come to church looking like the rest of the school, and giving the church a percentage of their income.
Many put on false smiles (masks) as they socialize amongst themselves, but when they get back to their neighborhoods, they ignore their neighbors, as everyone else does. In neighborhoods; a Christian family on one end of the street will walk back and forth to another Christian family on the other end of the street. And you can see that they are loving each other. But all the other families in between, on the same street, get ignored by them; under the guise of “Too busy.” If they love all of their neighbors, equally; they would, at least, stop and talk to everyone equally, but they don’t, because they are fear-based and live in shame of calling themselves Christian. Because many Christians of today do not go by the true teachings of their own Bible; they vote. Therefore they concern themselves with worldly issues; which goes against what their Bible has said. They vote for those that have deceived them. They vote for those who promote segregation. They vote for laws that control people from being free. They vote for the Empire, but they are forgiven as the rest of us.
Investigating Christianity in the United States; I have only found one thing that they all have in common; the Bible, but do they all interpret it the same? No. They all believe different, except that they all know that Jesus is our savior. One church will have all the children come to the front, so the pastor can scare the hell into them by saying this, “If you don’t turn your life over to Jesus; when the apocalypse comes, the locusts will eat you.” They used fear as the motivator to brainwash children into continuing to go to church. If the children go, then the parents go, and then the money gets given to the preacher. As the empire system has everyone looking to the preacher for all their answers to their confusing questions; therefore, the people believe that they need a leader to help them understand the mysteries of the Bible, and many think the priests, or preachers are closer to God then they are.
Other Christian churches range from a large degree of fear, to a smaller degree of fear, but still fear is their main motivator, as nobody knows the whole truth; everybody just believes things differently. One thing these churches all appear to have in common is the fact that they all sit, and listen to a dominant source control their minds; just like the empire’s classrooms do in public school; therefore, everyone plays follow the leader and the group.
The worst thing that just happened was that president Bush claims to be a Christian; therefore, all the Christian preachers tell their congregation to vote for Bush. That’s the empire in action. That’s why he got voted in for the first and second time. The reasons why for individuals vary; some voted for Bush just so he’ll stop Howard Stern from saying “Naughty words” over the airwaves from his broadcasting station. But others voted for him, because “He is the lesser of the two evils” (In their mind). If he has any evil in him, and you voted for him, then you were deceived enough to vote for an evil man; a deceived man. But others actually believe that George Bush is a prophet. Well, he sure has a lot of power if he is convincing people to kill other human beings in the name of God. He may be the false prophet that your Bible talks about in the Revelation.
The broadcasting stations have said much worse things that are not true. The Christians have also bought into this Conservative/Liberal political tug-of-war; where everyone loses. I’ve hung out with both. The Christian conservative is tired of paying too many taxes and are envious of the fact that they are working hard and others aren’t; like everyone else, but they believe they’ll be better off, so they’ll take the president’s side, so he’ll cut taxes, but they are acting selfishly, as that means that people like me (a disabled beggar) get cut off from my basic human needs. You can’t blame the conservative for that, because I’m not begging them; they don’t see what’s really happening to the poor people; because they don’t want to know; they want to ignore the reality of the causes of their votes, and just care about what is in front of them for their self.
Another reason they vote conservatively is because this system is set up where the taxes are all on the working classes backs; never do the rich pay enough taxes; never. But getting to know the more conscious “Liberal,” I have found that they want to tax the rich and the rich only! They don’t want to see the working class burdened any more; they want to see the working class living happily, but as I said, the empire is really in control, and it doesn’t matter who you vote for; the workers pay either way, so that’s why many go the conservative route; which indirectly fights against helping people who are in need. Indirectly, the Christian conservative actually hates their neighbors, by this, but is too blind to see it.
The conservatives then just have to say, “Vote for us, and you’ll pay fewer taxes.” Then they have their Empire’s broadcasting station’s financial experts host talk shows to cause people to hate “Liberals,” when it’s these liberals that are the ones that truly care enough to want to help the poor. The liberals that the Christians hate are the ones that truly love their neighbors; while the Christians prove that they hate their poor neighbors by the way they vote.
The bridge that I have for the gap between conservatives and liberals is the fact that it’s the Empire system of political tug-of war that has turned us against each other, and we aren’t the labels that they say we are; we are humans, together on Earth. And the one thing that all liberals, and conservatives share alike is the fact that the rich are the ones the need to be taxed, so none of the workers are; the rich have OUR money. They made their fortunes off of our backs. Our blood, sweat, and tears are the reason why they are rich enough to pass laws against all of us humans, and cause us to squabble over their scraps. They are feeding us horse shit; while they feed off all of us, and play with our money. The money (All of it) belongs to the people of the world. The lands (All of them) belong to the people of the world. The oil (all of it) belongs to the people of the world. Everything else belongs to all of us to share equally amongst all of the humans on Earth.
They squawk and hire experts to call our movement bad names; like, “Communism” while true Communism without a leader, may not be bad, as they call our government, “Democratic” but this is not true Democracy, as we have witnessed. What WE are really doing with this movement is true “Humanism.” Don’t try to define that label until you are a human, and a human only, and know that humans can only exist if we depend on each other!
More things for the Christians to fear is the idea that when the teens free-up, they’ll get carried away with it and start doing pre-marital sex, along with all the drugs they can get their hands on. We’ve been starving for freedom for two thousand years, and we need to have the freedom (God granted free will) to satiate that starvation to the point where we’ll find that all the sex you want, and all the other things that adults do, doesn’t make you happy; it just gives us a little relief while we live in mental slavery under this system. The people need to have the freedom to discover these things on their own, at any time they want instead of building a stronger desire for them by keeping it from them.
Christian; this is what’s going to happen. Teens are going to become free, and they are going to over-indulge on those things that give adults relief; while they party and build the circle, but the outcome is going to be a shortage of drugs and alcohol; therefore, once these supply’s are depleted, the entire world will become sober for a short time; at once, because the supplies will be drained. When that happens is where everyone will experience a natural high that warms their entire being, as we all enjoy our oneness, together.
You can’t be intoxicated to reach the Kingdom of God; that’s true, but others have found that Kingdom through meditation, and some have used hallucinogens to take a “Trip” and get a good look at it; even though they don’t feel it when they become sober again. As time goes by, many have dropped the drugs and selfishness, and found God their way. The point I have for you, is the idea that anyone can reach the Kingdom of God when they are ready, and that’s true. So when a poor homeless alcoholic beggar comes to your church, and repents (Surrenders “His” ego), then he’s accepted and all the sins of his past are removed and forgiven, as far as you are concerned; that’s also true, but they were forgiven any way, so why not let everyone in the world overindulge until they find that their overindulgences of selfishness are keeping them from the Kingdom on their own; then they’ll come “Home” to God sooner. Christian, you’ve been passing laws to make people do the right thing in your mind, but it’s not working! You have to give people the freedom to make their own discoveries, and the time to look in their own mirrors without any influence in the form of control; be it laws, shame, guilt, and especially starvation of their basic human needs. If we don’t, then people will just continue to use pacifiers that lead them nowhere.
Judgment day is today, as we know that we are already forgiven; therefore, God doesn’t even judge us, he is our witness, as we look in the mirror and judge ourselves with his watch. Judgment day is today for you if you’ll look in the mirror and judge yourself with God’s help. Start looking real hard, now.
Christian it’s up to you to start thinking, but soon it will be a shame to not Love your neighbor to the point that they know it; every neighbor. Oh, you say you love your neighbor, and that you are looking out for them by voting your way; that’s not loving your neighbor, as history is our proof. Do you even know all of your neighbor’s names; their children’s names; names of their scarcely visiting grandparents; their pet’s names; do you feed their animals, and water their gardens when they go traveling? Would your neighbors run to your house, first, if their house is on fire? Do you share meals with your neighbors? Does your relationship with them grow; the love and trust, or is it at a stalemate? Christian: We know that most of these answers are “No!” The main point of your leader is, “Love Thy Neighbor as yourself;” not fear thy neighbor. Love thy neighbor even if they hate you and you don’t trust them; then you’ll build trust with them, together, as things can only get better. If you are trying, then you have nothing to be ashamed of, but if you continue to be ignorant, then you are walking in blasphemy, and you will feel shame until you wake up. Don’t ignore your mirror; today is Judgment Day.
As stated before, the empire system causes us to control each other with laws. People with controlling personalities like laws and learn them quickly, so they can use laws to control others; it’s a sickness. Many controlling people are attracted to Christianity because they can find even more laws within their organized religions to use to feed their controlling desires; especially when they don’t follow the true teachings of Jesus; they just follow the deceived preacher at the podium with the deformed hand.
“Christianity” as a separate group of people was not ever a desire of Jesus. Nowhere in the bible did he say to form an organized religion that promotes segregation of the people, as Jesus spoke to all of the people of the world equally; all the churches. The reason why you are sheltering your children and keeping them from mingling with “Others” is because you know that you aren’t raising your children; the empire is; the world is. You know that your children aren’t around you all the time, because we are all separated and working all the time; therefore, you know that they can be easily influenced to go in the wrong direction. Why else would we shelter our children too much? Think about it! If you are their parents, the people who love them the most, then why do you fear that they won’t listen to you? Why do you fear that they’ll be easily led astray from you? It’s because we didn’t know what we were doing by letting the rich enslave us, and feed us with their broadcasting systems the food that they want us to eat; deception. Join us, so we can all stop working all the time, and raise our children in a heavenly way.
We have to be very careful with this movement. Other people of other countries and religions are also very segregated when it comes to gender. Men force their women to cover their bodies; almost completely, why? Sexual temptation provokes men’s weaknesses of their religious beliefs. If we plan to help other countries and we come over there and our women are wearing clothes that hug their bodies and show any cleavage that provoke men’s sexual desires; which cause women to obtain power from the weaknesses of men’s sexual desires, then we won’t be accepted. Most women in America have been so deceived by the Harlot spirit through corporate broadcasting throughout the years that we don’t know any better. It appears to me that most women try to make themselves very desirable so men will do back-flips over them, so men would die for them, or give them everything that they want. This is a very selfish move for the women’s empowering movement, and is sending women the wrong message, and in the wrong direction. If we help other countries with that attitude, they might even say that we are devil worshippers, because they aren’t ready for sexy women to invade them. We must try to be neutral with other countries on this, so we can attempt to build the bridges to them from where we are from.
Speaking of the devil, and since I’m talking to American Christians; what is the “Anti-Christ?” Most Americans don’t even know, because we are that deceived. The Anti-Christ is deception. Just go to the story in your bible, at Genesis, and you’ll see. God gave Adam and Eve everything that they could ever need, and want. They were completely innocent and Truthful; there wasn’t one drop of deception in them. They were so innocent, that they didn’t even know to be prepared for deception. Then God gave them the freedom of choice; the freedom to choose between right and wrong by saying to them to not eat from the tree of knowledge. They were happy with what they had, and didn’t want any more, as being happy with what you have is one of the lessons of that Bible for us to learn. But then the deceiver showed up, and they weren’t prepared for deception. If I am able to bring this whole world the Truth, but I have one little drop of deception in me still, then I could lead this whole world astray with that one drop of deception in me; even if you thought I was a prophet. The Anti-Christ is the spirit of deception. What should have Eve done? She should have told Adam exactly what the deceiver said, so they could discuss it, but she was so innocent that she had no reason to not believe the snake. When she acted on “Her” new beliefs that were now separate from Adams beliefs, she was also innocent, but she acted separately from Adam. She acted independently from Adam; She acted with self; she acted from “Her” ego. The deceiver divides us. She should have brought the new information to her partner so they could process it together. That’s the other lesson in that story. Bring what you witness to your circle, because we are now depending on each other. Process it to discover if it is Truth, or deception, before you act.
We have all been filled with deception, because we were all innocent, and didn’t know how to protect ourselves from it. We are innocent now, because we were deceived; therefore, we didn’t know any better. We simply must be forgiven by God, as everyone on Earth must be forgiven.
If our “Leader,” (A word we are used to, because of the empire system has taught us to accept following a leader) has one drop of deception in him, and we all follow him, then he’ll eventually lead us astray again; even if we thought he was a prophet. How many drops of deception is in your leader? Leaders lead us all with “Their” beliefs in mind; with their own ego. We can lead ourselves now. If a person has one drop of deception in him, then how can he lead? We don’t know how to protect ourselves from deception, but we are learning quickly now. Who can lead, if every “leader” is deceived? No one human can, but all of us can help each other live life to it’s fullest, as long as all of us are asking questions, and not any one of us is giving answers. We’ll bring heaven on Earth as we’ll continue to live dependently with each other as we process our new discoveries of Truth, and follow the TRUTH.
What is the Anti-Christ, Christian? Let’s go to your own Bible again: John 16:5 has a title above it in my Bible that reads, “The Work of the Holy Spirit.” Read down through John 16:13, “However, when he, the Spirit of truth, has come, He will guide you into all truth; for He will not speak on His (self, or ego) own authority, but whatever He hears He will speak; and He will tell you of things to come.”
If the Holy Spirit is the Spirit of truth, and so is Jesus, then the Anti-Christ is the spirit against the truth (Deception). Doesn’t that make sense to you? Then to me, there is no one man that is the Anti-Christ. A false prophet may lead people for a while, but they’ll wake-up, and see the truth, as they open up their eyes for it. Could George Bush be that false prophet? Didn’t he state over mainstream media that he thinks that God is talking to him? Isn’t he leading a bunch of people that believe in him? Is it that simple to figure out? In finding the truth, do we ask a bunch of questions, or do we state our opinions? Once an opinion is stated, then the mind is closed. There, I just stated an opinion; is it true? There, I just asked a question, to open your mind back up. Question every opinion that I state in this handbook to keep your mind open, but be careful of “Your” conclusions.
If our leaders have one drop of deception in them, then they should just keep their mouths shut, unless they are asking questions. Otherwise, the deceived will continue to lead the rest of us astray, as we have all been trained to follow blindly, ignorantly, and innocently through the empire system of training our minds to obey, and that started at age five. Keep questioning “My” statements, because the truth is near them, as I am attempting to be out of “My” mind and into “OUR” mind.
Almost everywhere in your Christian Bible, you can replace the words “Holy Spirit” with the word, “Truth,” and you’ll see some Light on this subject. The definition of “Truth” is also distorted by many “Christians” due to the brainwashing that is very prevalent. To say that that truth is Jesus, as “Jesus is the Way, the Truth and the Life,” and that Jesus died for our sins is a truth, but many are replacing the word “Truth” every time they read that word in the bible with “Jesus.” Your unselfish walk with Jesus’ true teachings is attempting to walk unselfishly; the WAY that God would want you to walk.
Of course, Jesus is walking in God’s way; that’s already a given. You can’t find the truth if you keep replacing “Truth” with the “Jesus” every time you come across the word, and expect to go any farther in Truth, because it causes you to stop looking for any more truth. Obviously, if we had all the truth, then this world would be healed already, and we wouldn’t be so confused. But you can replace the words, “Holy Spirit” with the word, as the Holy Spirit is the Spirit of Truth. 1 John 5:6, “And it is the Spirit who bears witness, because the Spirit is truth.” Ephesians 6:11: “Put on the whole armor of God that you may be able to stand against the wiles of the devil” (deception). The truth cuts in like a double-edged sword. The sword is the Spirit of truth that is the word of God; look here: Ephesians 6:17, “And take the helmet of salvation, and the sword of the Spirit, which is the word of God.” If it’s the word of God, then it is always the truth. Now look here: Mark 13:11, “But when they arrest you and deliver you up, do not worry beforehand, or premeditate what you will speak. But whatever is given you in that hour, speak that; for it is not you who speak, but the Holy Spirit.” If you are doing God’s work and at least trying to walk as unselfishly as you can, all you have to do is speak the truth; therefore, don’t worry about it, don’t think about it; just speak the truth; yes, it’s that simple!
My job is to Guide you toward the Truth, as we find it together. Here’s another question: “Could those who are the most deceived, believe they are the least deceived?” This is definitely a question for the American “Christians.”
Controlling Corporate Christian Coalition! You have been causing people to go away from the Bible, you have been pushing people away, but what have I done. I’m trying to bring the truth to the world, and now I have some of the most defiant kids on Earth today reading the Bible. Are you still going to say that this is a, “Satanic plot to overthrow the government,” or are you going to wake-up and yield to the Truth?
Let’s go to the Revelation. First off, do you believe that Jesus is going to actually appear in the flesh and walk among us as he did before, or do you believe that the Spirit of Jesus is going to bring the peace on Earth. If we try to figure it out as a mathematical equation, and plug this variable into the puzzle and say that all humans in one circle are the Spirit of the Christ, then it is very easy to see that the prophecy of the Bible is being fulfilled now, and the Hopi prophecy is also being fulfilled at the same time, and perhaps many others as well. Remember; Jesus speaks to all humans equally. The reason why I say this is because there is a picture of Jesus calling in the sheep with his arms spread out. I believe that he was starting the circle, as the Alpha. He had a hand for his neighbor on his left and another one for his neighbor on his right; now we’ll take our neighbors’ hands and complete the circle that he started, and call it the Omega; all of us being in the Spirit of the Christ, or the Oneness, perhaps. You can kind of get the idea that I’m trying to bring to you to fit this in our equation. Rev 18:17 “For God has put it into their hearts to fulfill His purpose, to be of one mind, and to give their kingdom to the beast, until the words of God are fulfilled.”
Many pages of the Revelation in your Bible are going to all happen at once with this Shift. Let’s clear something up right now for those who actually think that Jesus is going to kill people when He returns; not “My” Jesus. How can you possibly believe that the prince of peace is actually going to kill people, after all that he has spoken; that would mean going against God and life and the Bible. Those who believe that are the deceived, and that should just about clear up the confusion on this subject.
What is going to happen is the deaths of our egos, we are all going to look in our own mirrors and judge ourselves with the Spirit of the absolute 100% TRUTH witnessing, and we are going to ask ourselves questions; “How selfish have I been? How deceived have I been? Do I really know what Love is? Do we kill people in the name of peace, or do we not ever kill people in the name of peace? Am I Spirit filled, or am I condemned? Etcetera! We are going to stop ignoring the truth on Earth, and start seeking it on Earth as if it was the Holy Spirit we were seeking, as they are one in the same. The Truth shall set you free. We are going to start dropping our egos and doing a lot of apologizing for our selfish pasts; that’s the deaths of the book of Revelation; killing our own egos; killing the “Self” part that divides us from loving others as ourselves.
The fall of Babylon and the death of the Harlot spirit. The Harlot spirit and the empire system and commercialism are all of what makes up Babylon. All are going to fall, as we realize that we’ve been allowing temptation to lead us astray. The temptation for more is what the deceiver put in Eve’s mind. The temptation for more is always prevalent in commercialism. Psalm 23:1 “The lord is my shepherd; I shall not want.” Commercials are deceiving, and having sexy women sell milk causes us to want more then just the milk. We are going to put an end to broadcasted deception. We are going to seek always the places where deception is working for all to see clearly and put an end to it.
To get us to always want more, and to not be happy with what we have is the desire of Babylon, so we’ll continue to keep feeding the machine with cash flow, but is not the desire of God.
John 16:7 “Nevertheless I tell you the truth. It is to your advantage that I go away; for if I do not go away, the Helper will not come to you; but I if depart, I will send him to you.” I’m the Helper. I pray everyday that I am one with God; that I align myself with what God would have me do, as I have said this after visiting many, so called, “Christian” churches, “If Jesus is my Lord and savior, then I believe that he is.” I’m just a human who is attempting to speak for God, and I have to filter these messages that I get through a very poisoned ego to try to bring truth to the world. I’m not the King of Kings, or the Lord of Lords, or am I? That is for you to decide, not me. I believe that together in the Spirit of Oneness that we are all the King of Kings and the Lord of Lords. I do not speak on my own accord, and I do not want to lead you astray, so I can never be known by you, or else I may be tempted to take advantage. I am a Holy man, I am seeking the kingdom of God, as I keep seeking it, and I don’t need anything else. I don’t need to stand on a stage and have fooled temptresses look at me with hungry eyes as if I was a rock star to be worshipped and treated like I was better than anyone else. I am shedding all selfishness for you, and I want to go out in the wilderness someday and try to fast for 40 days and nights. How could I do that with all the fooled Harlots desiring me? Heck, I’m a selfish American, I would be too tempted to go astray from God’s desires; do you get it yet? As soon as you think that you know who I am; you don’t, understand?
Let’s proceed with the Revelation as I am to tell you of the things to come. First off the vision in the introduction of this handbook is just an idea, how it really plays out may be different. The same goes for my translation of the vision in the book of Revelation. Oprah has been stung by the great Harlot Spirit and will soon realize it when we shame her for partying with the “Sex in the City” girls and spending broadcasting time influencing other women to wear sexy underwear, instead of spending all her time influencing the world to feed the suffering children of the world that she is aware of, but ignoring because she’s “Too busy.” This is an attempt to bring many to awareness as we pressure her to come home to the people and give up all “Her” money if she has to. She’ll only do that if she knows that we will continue to treat her like a queen, and that she is safe. She will come home if the empire doesn’t kill her first; protect her.
Rev 19:11 I pray with all faith that I am the Helper; that WE are the Helper; that I am one with the Christ; therefore, I am the Christ; that we are one with the Christ; therefore, WE are the Christ. “Now I saw heaven opened, and behold, a white horse, and he who sat on him was called Faithful and True, and in righteousness He judges and makes war.” The war that is happening is the war of your own mind. You are at war with yourself (ego) and many who have the same mind-set as you, are at war together with you. Conspiracy theories are a way to plug in variables to find the truth; even if they aren’t true. You plug it in to find the deception, and then the truth. If one doesn’t work, you use another one, but that get’s lengthy unless you are going after the big picture.
You are your own judges with the Spirit of God. What keeps you from loving your neighbor as yourself, and why does this sound so foolish to you? Ask your mirror.
Rev 19:12 “… He had a name written that know one knew except Himself.” This tells you that it’s not Jesus. If it’s not Jesus, then who is it? The Helper?
Rev 19:15 “Now out of His mouth goes a sharp sword, that with it He should strike the nations. And He himself will rule them with a rod of iron. He himself treads the winepress of the fierceness and the wrath of the Almighty.” Notice that it says, “Out of his mouth comes a sharp sword…” the sword is the sword of Truth that comes out of my mouth, but don’t let me deceive you, make sure that everything that I said in this handbook is the truth; you are being tested. How do you strike nations and cause violence, if you are not holding a sword in your hand? Christ isn’t killing anyone with the sword, the deceived egos of men are dying by the sword of Truth. This guy sounds like me; what do you think? I’m adding stuff to the Bible; like a thief in the night; aren’t I treading the wrath of the Almighty? And I’m an American; which naturally means that I tread the winepress of the fierceness? Spreading the truth to conquer deception is the rod of iron; even though I have a sharp sword here, my job is to teach you how to find the truth and conquer deception, so when the world is in the circle, then we have a hold of our swords together, as they become the rod of iron; being the truth in all nations; the truth of the empire system, and the truth that we can take control of the world and rid ourselves from suffering, and working so hard, as long as we cooperate together; that is the Truth. It may not be a He, but a We; remember this is a vision.
Rev 19:17 -18 “… ‘Come and gather together for the supper of the great God, that you may eat the flesh of kings, the flesh of captains, the flesh of mighty men, the flesh of horses and of those who sit on them, free and slave, both small and great.’”
The supper of the great God can only be when we feed all of the suffering people of the world, as we cooperate together to accomplish this task. When killing your ego what is left? Your body; your flesh with a big heart in it. The heart is not of you (self) it is for others; therefore, they are eating our flesh, but not literally; they are eating what we would have consumed if we continued to ignore them, because we were so selfish. We are giving to them our one body; the body of Christ to eat; as rich and poor, soldiers, slaves of the empire system, and free people (tribes) are all cooperating together to bring the relief to the world. The flesh of the horses is all of the military equipment and other vessels that we’ll use to feed the world forever, and bring us all to equality and a world wide social security. We are feeding the world; saving the world with real food; and the flesh of the body of the Christ, as everyone is killing their egos to come home to humanity by actually moving our bodies; our flesh, to help others.
Rev 19:20 “Then the beast was captured, and with him the false prophet who worked signs in his presence, by which he deceived those who received the mark of the beast and those who worshipped his image, these two were cast alive into the lake of fire burning with brimstone.”
What is the beast? The spirit of selfishness with deception. Are we not conquering selfishness and deception with this movement? We have all the rich fools surrounded don’t we? There egos are captured. When you are losing everything that you worked hard for, doesn’t that cause you immense frustration, anger, and agony; gnashing of teeth? This is the lake of fire. If George Bush is the false prophet; notice that he’s being thrown into the lake of fire alive; he is not to be killed; just his ego, and you can imagine how much his ego is going to burn as he reads this and sees thousands of teenagers waving white flags on the white house lawn. The sooner he gives up (Repents, and kills his ego) the sooner the burning stops, and the sooner he’ll be relieved; otherwise his ego will burn forever with shame, and everything else; remember, we want him on our side; he is to convert; we want his flesh to go to work for us. What is the mark of the beast? Is it our Social (in)Security numbers? Is it the habits of doing what everyone else is doing even if everyone else is being deceived, selfish, and ignoring the NEEDS of other suffering humans; the habits of Babylon?
Rev 19:21 The rest of the deceived egos were killed with the sword of Truth; the rich all come home to the circle and bring their gifts, and all of the children of Earth eat comfortably and sleep comfortably forever.
To the Hopi who are reading this: I am not a thief in the night; WE are thieves in the Light. Like a thief in the night, we can steal any part of any prophecy that states, or causes us to believe that disaster may happen because of this Shift with the Truth. We can cause only “Win-Win” situations to happen with the truth, and the sooner we get organized the sooner the win-win situations happen. Organize the communication of all of the tribes, circles for freedom, the environment, human rights, labor, etc. now!
Rev 20:1-20:15 Think of Satan as man’s selfish or deceived thoughts, and Sin as man’s selfish and deceived actions; all of which come from the self; the ego; the part of our mind that separates us from others. Once the world rids ourselves from these things, we make it to the Age of innocence again. It’s like we’ll come a full circle from where Adam and Eve came; first, eating from the tree of knowledge and wanting more for our own individual selves; back to the other direction again; only the next time we are hit with deception, we’ll know what to do before we let it ruin our lives again. The 1000 years of Christ is coming through the Shift and beyond. The part of which Satan comes back to deceive us again in 1000 years is a warning to us to always be on our toes and focus and discuss matters to make sure that we aren’t being deceived again by our “Own” egos; either as individuals or as a group.
I stated that judgment day for you is the day that you look yourself in your own mirror, so keep that in mind as you read Rev 20:12, because I don’t want to add anything to this part of the Bible. Christians of America, can you see that you are very rich, and you know the story about the eye of the needle and the camel. You are not in the book of Life; you are not going to enter into the kingdom of God, as God is my witness, I swear to you that you have been deceived by these false teachings, just because everyone else in your church believes they are Spirit filled. They are deceiving you; especially if you aren’t laying your hands on people and actually seeing the healing happen with your own eyes.
Rev 20:10 “… And they will be tormented day and night forever.” Whenever you are thinking about, and for yourself only and always wanting something more, and something new, etc., you are being tormented by your own mind; you are being selfish. Learning to be happy and content with what we have (as long as we aren’t starving) and helping others live by cooperating with them is part of God’s way, but anytime you think for yourself and wanting more for yourself, then you are already tormenting yourself, as many have tormented themselves throughout their entire lives. Basically, you are already dead, and dying at the same time; therefore, the spirit of the beast and the false prophet are tormented tormenters, and if they never stop thinking for themselves, they’ll be tormented forever, as their spirit attempts to spread to those who are still alive, as deception itself is always tempting us to give our energy to it.
Rev 21 to the end of the Bible is really just the beginning of Life on Earth. A life that all of us can be living; a truly happy life with almost no work and a whole lot of play; we’ll be making play out of work always. After we have our world wide social security of our basic human needs done, and the communication circles in place; we’ll be weaning ourselves from working so much and evolving quickly into relaxing while we work and cooperate. There won’t be a need for nearly as many people actually working, so many will be idle. As soon as our children turn 12 they’ll be free to do whatever they want and they’ll want to have meaning in their lives, because they’ll be cut-off from pacifiers that cause them to want to just sit around all day and do nothing; they’ll want to really live a free life. Some will volunteer to live on a farm; for example, and you can imagine a big farm where one or two farmers used to work, now they’ll be 10 to 20 teenagers living in their own little community while running the farm, and the old farmer is now retired after he has trained them and they are guided by the farmers circle of communication.
Teenagers will be producing our food with our support, help, and guidance for many years until they can do it all on their own. I’ll tell you why, later.
People will be automatically teaching their children how to read, and write and count, etc. without cramming the training into them; like the public schools of competition did in last night’s nightmare. We’ll evolve to where elders are done ever having to work by age 40, so if they want to, they’ll go to college then to learn how to help the tribe. They’ll take a placement exam and wherever the exam says for them to start, they will; that means they don’t have to know anything until they are forty, so we can just have a happy life without schools for most of our life. Now think about it, if you live forty years on this Earth and you are volunteering here and there throughout your life, you are already going to know quite a bit before you decide to go to college, but many teenagers will decide to go to college immediately, so they can become doctors, etc., and we’ll support their decisions, too.
Let’s skip ahead as we’ll fill in the blanks later with what we really do, as these are just suggestion for the circle, but it’s the circle where all of the people will decide on our next move. Remember: we’ll always be seeking the truth of how humans are supposed to live as happy as we possibly can live.
We’re going to bring modern technology, wells, and irrigation for agriculture to all the directions of Earth and train the people there how to grow food in the most efficient ways. The majority of the population of the world may even migrate to the tropical zones of Earth after we eliminate the dis-eases that have been keeping us from living together there.
We will not have competition of and for work anymore, so that means just one source for everything; that one “Company” is the people’s, and we’ll continue to streamline our old workplaces to cause us to have to do less and less work throughout the rest of our existence on Earth. Many buildings will be emptied from book keeping and accounting, insurance, etc., because we won’t be needing to watch everything so closely, like we were in the “Maximize profits/minimize loss” nightmare of yesterday. We won’t be splitting up our family and going in different directions; everywhere we go, our family will always be welcome, and nothing will be too dangerous for them not to go with us, unless it’s an emergency situation of saving lives, etc.
We’re going to eventually have a Disneyland amusement park for every child of the world to visit for free at least once a year, and as we evolve we’ll be able to visit them twice a year, and then three times, and so on. We are going to have the safest and most comfortable forms of traveling for our families. Not having to be stuck to any one job means that we’ll be free to travel the planet whenever we want, but we’ll probably have to plan it ahead of time; like we normally do. The buildings that are emptied will be used to grow some food indoors until we are sure that we can grow all of the food for the world outside, but many of the emptied buildings will be used for temporary housing as we travel; like hotels.
Instead of having just one jetliner, take-off and fly solo; they’ll always travel in pairs, so if one does go down, they’ll be found as soon as possible; the same goes for sea travel. Sea travel will be very comfortable and they’ll be as much enjoyment in the journey as in the destination as no one will be working for the ships; we’ll all be cooperating and traveling for free, and we’ll have many ships that are only driven by wind and solar power, as we’ll never be in a hurry, or on a time schedule.
The Aircrafts are going to have life-capsules; like life-boats, and if the airline must go down, the capsules will eject and each one will be able to be operated easily to ensure a safe landing.
When moving to a new neighborhood, you can forget about worrying what the house will be like, because what the neighbors are like will be all that matters. Your future neighbors will be doing everything for you, so you won’t have to do anything but take care of the little personal things. And the neighbors from your last neighborhood will do most of the packing and hauling for you, as you would do for them when they move. We won’t be too busy for each other anymore.
Every child will have access to a handful of candy at least once a week weather they have been good or not-so-good, or weather they were rich or not-so-rich before; every child in the world; equally.
If we do decide to continue schooling, then 12 year olds that volunteer to teach can teach the 5-8 years olds , and the teachers that know more, can teach those who want to learn more, etc. As a 12 year old teaches 5 year olds, they’ll learn more and sharpen their minds, and will be able to move up and up, as they’ll be learning as they are teaching too, and nobody will be cramming education down anyone’s throat; it’ll always be fun or we won’t do it.
American Christian; I’m still talking to you. Look at the big picture; look at all of the satellites and other toys that we have in outer-space. What were we doing that for when the world needed so much healing? We were like the big bully on the block that brings his toy car out to play with while all the other kids just watch in envy as he doesn’t let any of them play with his toys. Combine all of the militaries of the world with all of their equipment, along with the satellites and the money from the rich, and we can easily feed and heal the world.
There are suffering children and their parents trying to stay alive while you are sitting on your fat ass and ignoring them. You shall not sleep comfortable, or eat comfortably until they are fed. Do you understand “Christian?” This is fasting time for you! You are not to sleep until they are fed forever; until they can eat and sleep as comfortably as you! We can do it in less then seven days. Get off your ass! I want to sleep, too, and I’m with you; we are in this bed together!
Africa is all set-up now to distribute all of the food and medical supplies it needs to put an end to the spread of AIDS, and they are very ready for more education about not changing sex partners, but at this time in history many men are still tempted by prostitution, because these women are working to bring food to their family’s table. We’ll bring the food to their tables and they won’t have to go to work and spread the disease. It’s that simple. They are ready for this, and we shall heal them quickly!
I’ve watched your “Christian” channel on the TV. If Billy Graham was truly Spirit filled and his name was written in the Book of Life, he would be able to walk all over Africa and heal everyone. He is a deceived deceiver and he is leading you astray, and here’s the proof: Matt 19:24. These are the words of Jesus, “it is easier for a Camel to go through an eye of a needle then for a rich man to enter the kingdom of God.”
Now Tom Cruz is calling himself a Christian. Didn’t he just spend millions of dollars on a religious ceremony; his wedding? His rich friends were all able to be there, and eat like kings and queens. If they would have gone over to Africa; all those young strong healthy people with all that money; they would have saved some lives with it. No ceremony for any religious reason can ever be sealed by God as long as any of God’s children (any of us) are suffering while you waist time organizing the ceremony, and feasting in God’s name. That means every Sunday for the Christians, or any time. There is to be no ceremony on Earth until all are fed equally! You are wasting time and energy that causes others to suffer longer. Think about every ceremony in every church building on Sundays. Think about all the combined energy that is wasted for the ceremony, now put that energy to the right use. What would God want you to do if you could all combine all that energy?
On your Christian channel I saw a movie where a husband say’s to his wife, “I don’t know why God sent this man to me?” And she says, “Maybe God didn’t send him to you; maybe God sent you to him?” Maybe? If you are truly Spirit filled; there’s no “Maybe?” The Lord works in mysterious ways, but if you are filled with the Spirit of truth, there is no mystery. The woman in this movie was also wearing a top that showed her cleavage… You have been very deceived.
Catholics: My heart is very close the Catholics of the world. They pray for world peace with their rosaries, and most of them are very humble and nice people. Nevertheless I have these things against their empire. They are too nice, as the proof is the fact that most of the countries that are dominated by the Catholic empire are poor. The Catholic empire is just that; an empire, as the priests stand high above the people with bright robes on and extravagance with something like a crown on their heads to cause others to believe that they are closer to God than the people sitting in the pews down below them. They look upon the Pope as if the Pope was better, or closer to God than they are.
This is not right, as many Popes and priests of the past have proven to be ungodly. The way Catholic churches operate in the United States shows me that their empire has always been a den of thieves. Many people are brought up through the church, and then they start raising a family, but when money becomes a problem they stop giving money to the church, and this causes them to feel shame, so they stop going to church. When they stop going to church for a while and then die, they aren’t allowed to have a Catholic funeral. This is a way to keep people going to their church, and to keep them continuing to give money.
Think about the priests of the United States that just got caught for having sex with little boys. Catholic priests don’t have the freedom to marry and must ignore all of the sexual temptation that is everywhere in the US. Many can’t ignore their sexual desires and are in the priesthood for years when they shouldn’t be there at all. They don’t work either, so that means that the people feed, house, and clothe them. Now you have been working all of your life and giving a percentage of your income to the Catholic church that has been supporting the dirty priest for forty years. So for forty years you have been paying your priest to have sex with young boys.
The confession is where things must change immediately. No child shall ever get alone with a priest in the confessional ever again, because of this. There is to be a circle of four priests present; or more but not less. These priests will protect the child from the possibility of the secret dirty one, and in doing so they protect themselves from false accusations. A child, or adult, is not to confess his dirtiest and darkest secrets to a solo priest alone again. It causes too much temptation for a priest with a dirty mind to take advantage of the individual.
If the Pope was truly baptized with the Holy Spirit then he would be walking around Africa healing people as he lays his hands on them. No Pope in the history of the Catholic Church has ever been baptized with the Holy Spirit. All have been deceived, as they are no better than those who suffer. I’m telling you the truth.
Mother Teresa is one of the few who’s name is written in the Book of Life, because of her actions; she gave until it hurt, and then she gave some more, as she healed people with her hands as she tried to heal more and more with her hands. Follow her example with your body language. Catholic; get your hands out of your pockets; the church doesn’t deserve the money.
The Catholic Church was once called the Roman Catholic Church. Do you see the connection? The Church is set-up like the Roman Empire. Look what it does to “Their” people. It causes them to be segregated from the rest of us. If people stop going to church, they are shunned. The Roman Catholic empire is divided as the people below the priest, popes and bishops are not considered equal, as they feed off of “Their” own people; their own people are mentally enslaved by the empire system, and there is just too much shame and guilt that motivates “Their” people; controls them.
Have you ever heard this statement, “The devil wears a crucifix?” The empire system is the system of deception; therefore, as Godly as the Pope tries to be, he has a drop of deception in him by this. If he has a drop of deception in him, then he is the deceived leading the deceived into continued mental slavery; the blind leading the blind.
If you say that this is not true, then one of us is in blasphemy against the Holy Spirit, as the Spirit of truth is my guide; Matt 12:31. I told you before; I tread the wrath of the Almighty. You must consider that this is the Word of God. Many speak the words of God, and they’ll join the circle, and all the words of God will then be spoken.
The Catholic Church has many Mexicans who are being deported back to Mexico by the secret American racist force, and the American Catholics are not standing up for them. If your religion is that good, where is your unity among you? Join us, “Catholic,” and we’ll fix all of our religions together. You are humans, not a religion; not a puppet.
Remember the “Conscious Dance?” If you are a strong person then you could look people in the eyes and be friendly and say “Hello.” And talk to them as if they are the only person on Earth that matters right now. If you are a broken person, you can’t be friendly. Push the strong person inside you to come out. If you are being friendly, and saying hello to someone, and you know that they are a human, because that’s all you know, then you are teaching them by example. You are teaching them the correct way to be with people. If they aren’t friendly, then they’ll think about it; especially, if more and more people are coming out of their shame-based shell and pushing themselves to be friendly, together. If you go a step further with this plan, and you meet a “Stranger” and use you body language to attempt to ask for a hug while you are approaching them to give them a hug, then you are shining more Light on them. And if they don’t accept the hug, don’t feel rejected and shameful; it’s their lose. And as more people do this, they’ll start to think about it, and after a while they’ll not only accept the hugs, they start giving them out. It’s best if you are a man to ask a sister if you can have a hug, because some sisters are more open if they are ready; especially if they are in a group that protects them.
“Christian;” we are calling you home to the truth. Go out into all the world and spread the gospel, but use your body language and shut your mouth until you know what the whole gospel really is. Lay your hands on the sick and watch them heal right before your eyes! Get off your ass now and start a circle, or join the circle. Go out into the entire world, and lay your hands on the sick, together! You shall choke on your own food until you do, because others are literally starving to death because you are ignoring them! You shall not be able to look in the mirror until you do! Drop “Your” ego; what are you waiting for? Are these not the words of God? Does God not want all the suffering on Earth now to end? We shall do it now! Join the circle.
Welcome home, Christian, all are welcome to the human tribe; especially you. Come on home; we love you; the true you, not the deceived one. Welcome home.
I heard a rumor that there is a city named, “Babylon” in the country of Iraq. This is not exactly the city of Babylon that is in the prophecy of the Revelation that is to fall in your Bible. “Babylon” is the entire Babylon system of commercialism and competition through the empires that has been spreading all over the world, and is most prevalent in the United States. Do not protest in anyone else’s city of Babylon until you protest in your own city. Let the people of Babylon attack their own city(s) with this peaceful movement.
Brother George,
You are a human, but what you practice is that of the false prophet. We can easily steal the part of the Bible that says that you’ll be tormented forever, and here’s how. Kill the false part of you; kill the deceived part of your ego; repent and come home to the people. Kill the “Self” part of you and you can then walk in truth with Christ. You can seek to have your name in the Book of Life with the rest of us. You are either with us, or you are against us, and we’ll know either one at all times. Oh, come on home! We all know what you’ve been up to by your deeds; we can see the burning ego pour out of you as you sometimes talk to the people with anger on your face. Hey it’s alright; you were deceived, so were we. We understand what you were all about; we understand. You are forgiven. Welcome home, we love you, brother. We are making history that will stand the test of time forever. You’ll be known as the biggest man in the world, because you let down a very big ego; a very heavy mask, and stood up for what is right; the people. George, I can see you because my mask is off; that’s how we know.
Money in the United States
I met a man who was adopted by a farmer in the early 1900s; during the first great depression of the United States. He was 8 yrs. old when his father had him plowing fields with a tractor. He went over the railroad tracks and got too nervous and the tractor died right on the tracks. His father was a long way away, so the boy decided to try to start the tractor. It was one of the hand crank kind, and he was too small to turn it over like a man can, and he was worried that a train might come by, so he thought that he could position the crank just right, and he stood on the tractor and jump off and onto the crank; it started right up.
As this man went through life, he just went along with the “Christian” program and got his college degree, and he fought in a war. In his thirties, he had acquired his father-in-law’s 10 million dollar empire by working hard and proving himself.
He voted republican; like almost all business men do. After thirty years his empire grew to 20 million dollars as he worked the thirty years, and while he treated his employees as fairly as he could. At the same time the cost of a head of lettuce went from 10 cents or less to a dollar of more. And the Ford trucks that he used in his business went from $2000.00 to $20,000.00 or more.
All the time that he was working and voting, he thought that he was making money, but the empire was slowly pulling the financial carpet out from underneath him. His money doubled as he was a conservative investor, but the costs of everything went up over ten times, so he was really losing money for thirty years, all-the-while he was deceived by, perhaps, by the same people that he was voting for, as they just continued to slowly print more money throughout the years; which makes the value of the dollar weaker.
He is one of the nicest men I’ve ever met, and he is still alive today, and is probably still living in ignorance of the truth, because he’s still comfortable living off the scraps from the Emperor’s table. He is living in mental slavery… its called “Fooled by deception.” What are WE living off of; his scraps? He gives us a job so we can work for all of our lives, but we work harder than him. He is simply the blind; leading the blind.
You think you are rich with 10, 20, or fifty million? You are, and getting poorer every day.
During the depression the unemployment rate was at 30%, but later, when Reagon was president he had the way we rate unemployment changed. During the first depression, the 70% of the people that had jobs of the US were still buying all kinds of goods and services, just like today. But now it appears as if we are in a hidden depression, and I’ll bet that if WE used the same way to rate unemployment, it would match that of the last depression, since there are millions of sick and homeless people, now in living in the US. And the empire found a way to stop the stock market from crashing and panicking the people with the use of computers, but we can still see that we have been slowly spiraling down into a depression. What this means is that not everyone can have their American dream at the same time. Many can’t even try as they are too busy struggling to stand on their own two feet as a result of all this confusing money business, and bureaucracy.
During these depressed times, everyone is in slavery and they don’t know it. Almost all the men have a short, post-military haircut, so their bosses won’t fire them, or so they can get a job. The government capitalizes by showing the world pictures of us, as the whole world is deceived by the broadcasting. The whole world thinks we are one big military, and that we are united and that we all support the emperor’s plan to gain control of Iraq. The whole world hates us, because of our emperor. WE are not united, most of the people do not support the president, but they have it set-up so we are supposed to support him. Many who do support him are just fooled republican businessmen, or the fooled controlling corporate “Christian” who thinks the president is close to God. How can he be a man of God if he tells everyone that we are going over to another country to kill “Violent Rebels” on their own ground? He actually used the word, “Kill” in his speech to the world. What WE have is a John Wayne and Clint Eastwood loving redneck in the Whitehouse! As Hollywood is that part of the empire that trains people to be used to the idea of killing without a conscience… to teach our youth to kill without conscience.
Our empire is a “War machine.” To gain more people in the military, they turn down the economy, because WE stopped the draft back in the sixty’s. More people out of work, means more teenagers wandering around with ADD and no money and no social skills due to the lack of the governments education system; therefore, many young men don’t know what to do with their lives out of high school, and they feel as if they need someone to “Push” them through life, so the military offers them a job with newly printed money. It’s that simple. All that means is that everyone suffers more… everyone.
What can the Empire do to counter this attack of freedom? They can start by bombing the states of the coastlines of America where the most politically conscious people live; the “Green” states, but by then our teenagers have spread this to the entire country to make all the people of the U.S. conscious of it.
They could bomb the entire country and kill us all, but by then, the entire world will be conscious, because the teens were not just spreading this to English speaking countries; they took it straight to people who spoke other languages within their schools, as the United States had people in it from all over the world, as well as every language. Those who are bilingual took it to their circles and they translated it perfectly into all the languages of the world, and sent it off to the countries where those languages originated, and from there the “Word” spread like wildfire.
Those tribes who didn’t have electricity or any connection to the outside world where hand delivered the word to them by the Rainbow family, as Rainbows were already in every tribe of the world and speak every language of the world, and have always been ready to work for the entire human family.
The Empire has a name, “Goliath.” I am WE; WE are “David” and so are you. I’ve cut a hole in his Achilles tendon with my double edged sword of Truth, and it’s big enough for the rest of us to crawl inside and take control of his body.
The Filthy Rich
The filthy rich are not on the Fortune five hundred’s list of the richest people in the world. These men are so rich that their identity is kept very secret; they don’t want anyone to know how rich they are, because they know that we are loaded with envy. They are hiding; especially now that we are uniting. They are known as “The Illuminati.”
Neal Young state’s in one of his song on his “Living with War” CD, that “They high-jacked our religion!” He’s talking about the Republican Party deceiving the Christians into voting for Bush and all the other republican conservatives. But what really happened is that the rich high-jacked the Republican Party, but wait… The rich high-jacked our entire government! We have a divided house, and that is the desire of the rich. To keep us divided and playing tug-of-war while we continue to feed their machine as our lives go by. The filthy rich hire people like George Bush to be their little puppet. They use George as a slave to enslave us all with money. Can you not see that we are all enslaved by money, and the desire to want more? Can you not see that the famous people on the TV are just hired actors that are enslaved by money to advertise commercials that cause us not to unite? Can you not see that they are hired to distract us from caring about the poor and the suffering? Can you not see how we ignore those who need? The filthy rich will be coming home, too. Welcome home.
Our own individual desires to want more when we have more then those who suffer is proof that our lives have no meaning. What is the meaning to life? Give until it hurts. Buying material possessions is proof that we are constantly reaching for more things to make us happy, because we are literally starving for happiness. Our lives have no meaning if all we are is alone in our minds. Mother Teresa’s life had meaning, because she helped people be happier. If you are suffering, and someone helps you; doesn’t that make you feel good? Out of the kindness of their heart, they gave to you when they didn’t have to; that gives their life meaning. The reflexion that someone gives back to you when you give to them is your happy face in the mirror; it is God smiling at you for using his heart. That is the meaning to life, and the road to everlasting life is the journey. The everlasting life is now when you are giving now.
Looking back at the Willie Lynch syndrome, and we can see that he took just about everything that Jesus told us to do, and he reversed them. Causing the slaves to do the opposite of what Jesus said. It almost looks to me, as if he used the Bible. Jesus was teaching us to unite. Is this not true?
One more thing for the Christians: Matt 22:32 “… God is not the God of the dead, but of the Living.” When you are dead, God won’t be around for you, so what are you doing with your Life with God now? Are you ignoring the world, because the world is too negative? Are you ignoring what God would have you do? I know you want to ignore this whole thing and hide, but it’s in your face now; your mirror, and so is the Truth
To the Illuminati; Obviously, Willie Lynch was one of you and now he’s dead and long gone. What meaning did his life have? We know that before there were rich oil men, there were rich slave owners. You are from a very deceived place, and a place of lesser power than God. To think that you are, somehow, the “Chosen” people by God to receive the riches of the Earth that God has given you is a lie. After reading everything that you have read here, who do you think you are going to get your food from when we take control? Join us, because it is possible that you were chosen by God to hold our money for us. Thank you, and now we’ll have it back; now. The more you cooperate with us, the sooner we turn this planet into a heavenly one; after everything that you have read, you can see that we can do it now; with or without you, and soon your money is going to be worthless, anyway. Join us, you are forgiven for being so deceived; you are innocent. Welcome home.
To the “African American” “Gang-bangers:” How do you feel knowing that the rich slave-owners of yesterday, have just migrated into the powerful places and are still in control? The proof is their ignorance to help Africa and the poor people of America; they are still in control; only now they are controlling all of the people. The abolishment of slavery happened because “White” people helped your descendants out of physical slavery, but now all of us are living in mental slavery. How does it feel to know that “White Supremacists” are still in power, and they are enjoying that fact that you guys are killing each other; like they are enjoying seeing Africans suffer from the ill effects of starvation and AIDS? Does this reality push your ego enough to call another “Truce” between you? Please stop killing yourselves, and join the circle; the Shift is here, and it’ll be worth staying alive to see. Join us, and we’ll all be freer. Bring out the white flags. You are going to lead us, because you got nothing to lose. WE are going to turn this vision in a reality.
Please build the bridge between the gap that divides us; please over-come the attitude of the “White-man” owing you your life, because it is only a few that hate you; the rest of us are just scared of you, because we are still acting very different. You are talking the “Jive-talk” still, because English has been the language of your oppressor, and you have rejected it for a very good reason, but now English is the language of our oppressor. When you talk to people with that disrespectful talk, you are making yourselves different, so different that many “White” folk and still scared, as it appears as if you are trying to make us work to understand you; that’s defiance against the oppressor, and again we understand. Many of us “White” folk have been trying to find a way to bridge that gap, but we need you to do the work from your side, or else it just won’t happen. Please don’t make us pay for the sins of our fathers, because many of us took your side and died for your freedom out of physical slavery.
If someone shames you by saying, “You are just trying to be ‘White.’” Please consider telling them, “No, that is not true, I’m just trying to be a human to help bridge the gap between humans.” Please find the truth in these words and be strong; please speak to everyone respectfully. I love you; I really do, but too many times, I have tried to be friends with African Americans and I have been burnt every time. Nobody squeezes money out of me; I give it, and let it go as a gift of healing, as I believe that every gift heals; even if the brother takes the money and buys alcohol with it. I know it heals.
I have given lots of money away; not out of weakness, but out of love, and as soon as the money stops coming, so has the friendship. And I know that I’m treating you unfairly, because they aren’t you, but I said this because a lot of people feel this way. Just like the bad cop gives all the good cops a bad reputation, I have ran into too many people who have given “Black” people a bad reputation. The gypsy on the street is not what all “Black” people are like, but these guys are representing you as they do their deeds from where to many “White” people see it.
Just these little differences cause too many people to feel nervous and uncomfortable around each other; especially, when mainstream news has us all afraid of every “Stranger.”
I’m on the “outside” looking in, and that means that you are on the outside looking in at us. We are not the “White” people that you see on TV. We are fucking stressed, and because we are so busy in this fast-food culture, we’ll find a way to be too busy to even talk to you, or even look you in the eyes, because we don’t know how to deal with our little differences that become big, because we don’t have the time to care, but it’s not a “Black” thing. But if your mind wants to believe that it’s prejudice, you’ll always see it; even if it’s not there. Please stop looking for it.
I’m telling you that after Michael Jackson gained so much acceptance when he was coming up, and Michael Jordan. “White” people have gained a lot acceptance to the forced on prejudice of the empire people who were trained to hate by the slave-owners of yesterday. Add to that list Jimi Hendrix, and Bob Marley, and all the brothers and sisters of the “Soul Train” era with all those happy songs of the 70’s, and there was “White” kids with posters of “Black” people all over there rooms, and in many households. And today there’s white kids all over the country; listening to Rap music, and dressing like gang bangers; is that not true?
I’m telling you that we are ready to bridge the biggest gap between people in the United States to conquer this empire system, together. So if you guys could please not only stop killing each other, but start being friendly to each other, and loving each other, then you’ll lead this train home; then you’ll start being friendlier and friendlier to “White” people, and you be teaching them by example. Many aren’t going to trust you for a while, because that is what we inherited from Willie Lynch and the empire system; along with the fear and the envy. I know this sounds crazy, as I’m out of “My” mind, but is it not true?
By doing these things you can lead us home. Just get together and talk about it, please. If we bridge this gap we have already done it.
We especially aren’t the people you would see on the women’s Lifetime channel; that channel is designed to poison women’s minds and cause them to envy what the women on the show have. The show has the perfect setting with the perfect woman and her perfect clothes, hair, nails; the perfect house, furniture, and decorations; the perfect husband, and children; the perfect person to clean their perfect pool; the perfect cars, and the perfect yard and landscape; the perfect conflict in the perfect script, all on the perfect sunny day; that’s all an illusion. We aren’t anything like that.
Note that the truly “Black” people of the world are the ones who are sitting on top of the money pyramids; they are the most deceived; the most selfish. They truly Light people, are the least deceived; the least selfish, and they are of every skin color.
Please try to build that bridge and know that we are just humans, and there is nothing to feel weird about. But if this is too much of a stretch for you, at least consider joining Farrakhan’s “Million’s More” campaign; we are twin brothers of different mothers, and he is one of my greatest teachers. I’m begging you, I’ve been saying “Please, please, please,” because that’s all I got. I’m on the outside looking in, but one of my feet is planted in the heart of the human family, all I can do is beg, so I’m fucking begging you, please come home! Welcome home.
The People’s Court
The people’s Court is another sub-circle for and of the circle of humans. Everyone who is brought before the court will always be considered innocent until proven guilty, and they won’t need any lawyers, because the volunteers for the people’s court are on their side, and ours. Since the people’s court is a sub-circle of the main Circle, they are automatically connected to the Women of Prisoner’s Circle. Notice that I early mentioned the label “Gypsy.”
Gypsies are face readers and they are of every country of the world, and in some places there is one in every family. When you question a small child to see if they are lying to you or not; what happens? If they are telling the truth, they look straight at you with innocent eyes and tell you the truth, but what do they do if they lie? Their eyes will shift to the side and they usually look away, because there is something in their little innocent minds, shame, that automatically causes them to feel it, and therefore, they just can’t lie and maintain eye contact. But as we get older, and we learn to be skilled lyres, it takes more skill to determine if we are lying.
Many parents and teenagers are not aware of the face reading/eye contact way to determine about lying, but many teens get away with lying, because they get into a habit of never maintaining eye contact with their parents, because the parents don’t know the importance of teaching their children to maintain eye contact with people as a form of respect, or to show people their heart through their eyes.
We are into the Age of Aquarius; the age of truth. In the United States you’ll hear young women talking about a man that one of them had a discussion with as a potential suitor, or boyfriend, etc. You’ll hear them say things like, “and when you said that, what did he say?” “… and do you think he was telling you the truth?”
Men have become very crafty at fooling women into loving them, so the young women have to pick away at the men to see if he is speaking truly from his heart, or from his balls. Many young women are very savvy about the craftiness of young men who are starving for sex, so they’ll discuss things to “See” where his mind is coming from, and sometimes they’ll set him up with questions or situations to see how he is going to handle them. This is not just face reading, but mind reading as well.
In general, we have been secretly and subconsciously picking away at deception without realizing it for many years, and now we are going to become conscious of it, and rapidly learn to eliminate it from our lives.
Let’s look some more. In the family dynamics, usually the oldest child is the most serious, and the most controlling. If parents don’t know what they are doing, they’ll put this child in charge of the other children when they go out. The problem with that is the oldest child usually has a sub-conscious jealousy or resentment of the younger children, because before the other children were born, this one got all of the parent’s attention, but as soon as the next sibling was born, the baby got most of the attention. Adding to that is the fact that the oldest sibling doesn’t care to love the other children as the mother would.
Let’s use the older sister for example. She’s a deceiver, and a face reader at 14 years old. She set-up her younger brother to never tell on her if she does something that her parents don’t want her to do; she’s already beat him for telling on her once. Then she talks the little brother into lying to their parents. As he lies to them, she reads what his face does; now she can tell every time he lies; she’s got him completely controlled, as she has become an over-controlling person, as well. As her life goes by, she sharpens that skill, and it doesn’t take her long to read all of her friend’s faces, and her husband’s face as well, as he will no doubt be someone that she can easily read, and control with manipulation and slight, subtle gestures.
She developed her skill all by herself, but what if she was a child of a gypsy. Same scenario, except the mother and grandmother are training her to not only read faces, but read minds as well. Over the years they form her into a monster that sets people up for the perfect con. Do you know what the perfect con is? The perfect con is where you never even think that you’ve been conned. Think about it; instead of two young women talking about the suitor, its three gypsy women scheming, and teaching each other how to read people. “What did his face do when you told him that?” “That usually means this…” “You see?” “When he comes up with an excuse; instead of just saying, ‘No.’ sternly; that usually means that he is feeling guilty; especially if his face does that… squeeze him a little more by asking him for something less to see if he’ll budge any.”
If a gypsy asks you for something, and you are feeling guilty by saying, “No” with an excuse that is a lie; they know right away, and they have got you where they want you. You are the house, they are the thief; they have nothing to lose, so they’ll push and squeeze you with words to see if you’ll give in; they’ll even insinuate that you are lying to “Work” on you, and if you don’t know what they are doing, you’ll find yourself giving in to get rid of them.
The police interrogators and principals of schools are also going to team-up with gypsies of yesterday to make sure that no one will ever be able to deceive, not only that, we’ll use the people’s court to help us eliminate deception from broadcasting completely. These are the kinds of people that are joining the circle and the people’s court. They’ll know when you are lying, and they’ll pick away at you until you fold. They are going to have a lot to offer. Welcome home the gypsies.
Watch this scenario: We have a guy that we caught stealing and there are many witnesses; remember that all of us are equal now, and everyone shares everything, so all this guy had to do was ask for things, but he didn’t. We surrounded him and held court for him right there; then we say, “Hey, brother, we all saw you stealing; don’t try to deny it, we know that you are all screwed up and so were we, just confess, and apologise!” and he’ll start crying, and drop “His” mask and come home to us, and we’ll understand and forgive him. Murderers, robbers, and other violent people are a different story, because we can’t just let them walk without reform, because we have to protect ourselves from them, so that’s a project for the Mother’s of Prisoners Circle, as it is something that we’ll have to investigate as a trial and error, perhaps.
Guess who will be the first to face the people’s court? Michael Jackson; why?
He may be innocent. And he will be able to step forward to tell us his story. Michael is the victim of the perfect con.
Earlier I talked about fear, envy, and distrust. The powerful “White supremacists” of the world not only envy, and distrust Michael, they hate him. We have to talk about all of the good things that Michael did for the world before he was first accused of any wrong doing with children; the list is a long one. Michael has a heart of gold. His greatest achievements probably went unnoticed, but he organized the “Live aid” concerts with Bob Geldof for the suffering children of Africa, and he started the Heal the World organization.
He spent a lot of money on the Heal the World foundation, and he had many rich friends that were donating and generating money with him to feed thousands of orphans of war-torn countries.
Michael’s downfall is that he is very naive. Having lived a very sheltered life from the outside world do to his childhood success has caused him to not ever know the outside world. He became a target as all the people that were donating money were causing the government to receive less tax revenue, due to the tax write-offs they were receiving. But that’s not what got him targeted. The main thing that turned the tables on Michael was the Half-time show of the 1993 (1992?) Super bowl.
Every typical empire person of America watches the Super bowl; especially the flag-flying “White” supremacists in powerful places. During Michael’s performance he had a black hand shaking a white hand in the middle of the stadium as a symbol to influence the uniting of people of the two different groups. That angered the powerful white supremacists, and they had enough of Michael. Michael was an angel for the people. But I predicted that he would get set-up by the evil force, and that they would get him exactly as they did.
All you have to do is be accused for pedophilia when you are famous, and you are then rejected by everyone, just in case the accusations are true. After the tabloids tore Michael a new asshole with their lies and deception, Michael was through gaining popularity and his empire was weakening quickly, as the tabloids continued to hammer him. Almost everyone in the United States now BELIEVES that Michael is guilty. Notice the word “Believe,” but we are so full of envy that we couldn’t help but to believe; especially when he touches himself on stage in his dance routine.
Touching himself was his idea of being a “Cool” pop star; like when Madonna performed a masturbation routine, and Britney Spears is wiggling her flesh all over the stage. But Michael was “Black” and many of the tabloids that tore him apart are owned by “white” people of envy and distrust. Add everything together and it’s easy to think of him as a monster, but everyone has conveniently forgotten the huge heart he had before the accusations. He wasn’t found guilty, but when the “Hard Copy” tabloid hired two actors to lie and tell the world that they were his body guards and that they saw Michael abusing children; that was the big sell to the American public, as they were very convincing, but when it was time for the trial, the two actors weren’t ever there to testify, because they weren’t ever his body guards. What caught my attention was that these two “Body guards” looked like skinheads.
The second time Michael was accused, he suffered more torment by the tabloids as “Guilty,” but after time passed the boy confessed that he was just trying to get money out of Michael, but we didn’t hear about that did we? Mainstream media wasn’t on Michael’s side.
If I’m wrong, then there’s no harm done, but if I’m right then the entire world owes Michael a very big apology. Currently Michael is walking in shame; only because he has been so rejected by everyone, and not because he is guilty. We owe him a chance to come clean and tell us his true story, and that will happen in the people’s court in front of our mind readers. If Michael is innocent as I BELIEVE he is, then he’ll come running to get the truth to the world, if I’m wrong he’ll hide. Currently Michael is innocent as to the laws of the land, but to most of the people, he is guilty because we are motivated by fear, distrust, envy, and hate; like perfectly divided people under the empire. We may have been stung by the perfect con, because Michael was one of God’s little lambs.
Michael, I know you are going to get a copy of this; whether you are guilty or innocent, the truth shall set you free, think about it. You can’t go on like this, and mainstream won’t let you tell your story to the world now, because they are all Republicans in a network. Just over the TV, I can tell you are on heavy medication to help you deal with it, but get off of the drugs, so you can deal with the problem; instead of just treat the symptoms and sweep it under the rug. Wake up Michael.
Taking Michael’s side is taboo, because I could cause others to turn away from this circle, but I’m not in control of the circle; you are. If I have said anything that may offend anyone, or if I said anything to cause you to reject an idea then blame me, but don’t blame the circle, or the other Rainbow warriors out there who may not agree with everything that I have said either. Stay with the circle; I’m just one drop of water, but together we are the ocean, and we’ll know all the truth. We are melting the solid walls of deception from both sides now.
We have a lot of adjustments, much thought, and perhaps, trial and error, but it will be worth it. Let’s play this game, shall we? My money is always on the underdog; therefore, I have always been a loser, but once the underdog wins; we all win. I’ll rack; you break.
We can’t expect “White” supremacist to start loving everyone, but we can expect them to come home to the circle to rid ourselves of the empire system; we won’t know who they are as they can just “Hook-up” with their neighbors, and stay right at home.
Pahana
I am Channeling and trying to keep my ego asleep, so I can bring a perfect translation to you, but I must filter this translation through a very poisoned ego to bring these words to the American empire first, so I must use idle words to speak to them in “Their” language, so don’t fault the intention for the mistakes that I may make when translating.
“{Allow ME to introduce myself: I am the Word of God. ME: “M” is an upside down “W” for WE in the English language. “Me” of the selfish ego, and “We” of the heart of God are complete opposites where a bridge between the two is being built. I am “We.” I am out of “MY” mind, and into “Our” mind; the heart of God that doesn’t speak with words. The bridge between the two shall be complete while obtaining a “Win-Win” situation for everyone on Earth. I am the King of Kings and the Lord of Lords of OUR beautiful planet Earth. I’m hear to tell you of the wedding of all women to all men and has conceived a child to tell you of the marriage; It is the opposite of “ME” (the self). It is the child called “WE;” the unself (unselfish). I am the King of beggars. I’m the King of hypocrisy. I am the King of Ego, and I am the King of all the translators of the world of communication, and I’m here to tell you that we can all speak one language now, because of the forced English language that originated from the evil British Empire; it’s the language of “intention.”
Is every language of this planet translated to a neighboring language? Is every language translated to and from English? “Yes,” to both questions; BINGO! We have come all the way back to the days of Babylon; just before we started going in the wrong direction to find God by building the tower. Before the days when we were happy with the now, and what we already had, and didn’t need more. The story of Adam and Eve of the Bible teaches us a lot; “Be happy with what you have.” “Report to each other exactly what you witnessed to your circle, so we can examine it to make sure it is the truth and that you aren’t being led astray by deception, and so you aren’t leading others astray with your new false ‘Beliefs.’” We are now going to go in the correct direction. Look for God in the eyes of your neighbor, and that’s as far as you need to go. The loving (Selfless) friendships and trust that grows between two neighbors is the true tower to God. Neighbors are your only true social security. Make little baby-steps if that’s all you can do towards each other. Build the bridge half way if that what it takes, and use God as the center support. Plant your best foot into the middle of the human circle; the circle of all the humans on Earth and know that you are one with all.
I am the King of translators, so I say to all translators of Earth. Build a strong bridge of trusting friendship with your neighbors; especially with the people of the other languages. There I said it, so shall it be done. Hey, it’s already happening! That was said not out of arrogance, but out of Love for you; why else would I be here if not for you, but Kings on Earth aren’t perfect; Humans bonded together by selflessness are. I have adopted you. I am married to the father; therefore I am married to you. Women of Earth have been married to the father for quite a while now, but many didn’t know it. If I’m married to the father and so are you, brother or sister, then WE are married to the father together; We are married to each other by God. We are the child that is maturing as selflessness is the way of God. Welcome home to the Kingdom of God (more on that later, I’ll get you here if you aren’t already… it’s my job).
Unfortunately, you who can read this in English come last, as all of our children who are suffering more than you come first; said as a good father would respond to those children who need the most, and to this large degree of suffering brought forth by the progressive English speaking empires.
I am WE; like the Kings named, “The Beatles” sang a song that was so wonderfully translated, but not quite perfect: “Come Together, right now… over WE,” would have made it a little better of a translation. The Beatles were translating energy from Kachina, and so were the flower children of the 60s. Do you remember hearing about or seeing people go naked in front of the general public (uninitiated children)? That was Kachina taking off the mask of shame that has befalled upon us since Adam and Eve’s days of first puberty (perhaps?). Do you remember Elvis over-coming shame to dance on stage and wiggle his hips, when it was illegal (by the unwritten laws of shame) to do that in front of the general public? He was affected by the star of Kachina, too, as he overcame the fear, and thought for himself (he was actually doing his job for us) and took off the mask of ego that kept us all from being free (freer). That shame is part of the gourds of ashes that will fall on the West. It is the end of man’s egos against each other; the beginning of true freedom on earth.
The gourds of ashes are that of the burning onion peels of ego around our hearts. We’ll all say, “We are sorry for all the selfish things that we ever did in the past;” together. And then we’ll forgive each other for we really had no clue of what we were doing.
The ego is here to protect the injured part of the individual’s heart. It is the lonely heart that drives the ego; the sore part or the heart that protects itself from more pain. Along with the mental habits of self, the scars of the heart are also some of the onion peels of ego. The onion peels of ego are the layers of shields to protect the heart; which, together, caused extreme selfishness within the empires.
King of Ego
I, a boy of 4 years, you a girl of three
A bow and arrow is gifted to each of WE
The bow is the heart of WE
The Arrow is the ego of “Me”
I know why arrow is used
But you don’t
You know why bow is used
But I don’t
I break arrow and hand it to you
That is what I teach you
You break arrow and hand it to me
That is what I taught you
You then play music with our bow
And that is what you teach WE
The Empires were driven by the Holy Grail; Women.
Women of the empires had to be kept fed in order to produce healthy soldiers. Empires had to farm in order to continue to grow in strength. They got over-strong, by knowing that there may be some empire with an army that’s bigger than theirs. The women had to milk the cows while breast feeding the children, because the men who drank the milk were too busy being soldiers. None-the-less the children had to have their basic human needs met; which was always the driving factor, as the need for care of the children were spoken through the mouths of women. The happier the women, the healthier the children and the stronger the warriors. Mothers of the world, together, you are the Holy Grail! Mary represented all women, she was the spirit of the body, the Holy Grail. All of you in the flesh are equal to her, together, and as individuals. You all carry the extra “X” chromosome that marks the spot of the arrow meeting the heart. You are born Lovers, Love is action, you give to make others happy, or not suffer as much. You relieve with Love. Men need that part of you that they don’t have, the arrow hasn’t met their heart yet; men only have a “Y” on their back foot. That means that they have less gravity to help you get your needs met, and they have other positive things to add to our union that you don’t have. Together, WE have it all.}”
King of Beggars
Date Maker: Men Seeking Women
I’m looking for a soft woman
You must have a soft voice, a soft body, a soft smile, soft skin, soft hair, soft head, and a soft heart; soft.
I’ve had women who were cat lovers, but not dog lovers. I’ve had women who were dog lovers, but not cat lovers. I want a woman who loves all animals, mother Earth, and Father sky.
I want a woman who cares enough about the suffering people in the world that she’s actively doing something for them.
I want a woman who wants to give affection, because I’m starving for it. All women are the Holy Grail to me; just a drop of pure love from your heart is all that I’ll need to fertilize me and illuminate this black hole star into the brightest star in your sky.
I want you to be the mommy that I never had; to admire me for just being born. I’m full of shame and am a manic radical rebel, and I have so much gravity that I can’t even shine, but one drop of your love will be all that it takes to help me shine like the star that I was sent here to be.
You have the XX chromosomes, I only have XY. You have four legs, and I only have three, so I tip easily. Together we’ll have seven legs, and we’ll be “Beauty and the Beast,” and with your love WE won’t know who the “Beauty” was from the “Beast.” I’m the lost dirty old abandoned three-legged dog that is scared and alone, and I don’t need a bitch in heat. I’m mean because I was never loved, but that’ll change with the help of your four legs.
I want a virgin who shall stay a virgin. I want to be next to that pure power; a woman who is married to God, but right now I’m a hypocrite.
You shine on me for a little while, and I’ll learn to shine as bright as you in return. You’ll be the polished Holy Grail that God intended for you to be. Together we’ll illuminate the whole world; together.
As a “Thank you” goes a long way for those who give, the tears you shed for me goes a long way, too, because I know that you really care; that you have a heart of solid gold.
Six stars shine on Earth, I’m the seventh star, and it’ll take the power of all the other six to illuminate me, and bring me all the way “Home” to true Love. Your world will always be in daylight.
I’m crying out to you, “Welcome Home to Love… Please bring me with you… I’m begging you!”
Here’s how to find me: I could be hiding from the world in your prisons, or out on the streets; begging for mercy. Please come and get me soon… I’m trying to stay alive for you, but it’s getting harder and harder with each passing day, and winter is coming, and I had a real bad dream last night… Oh mommy; where are you? I need you now! I need you to hold me, and tell me that, “Every little thing is gonna to be alright.”
Women of prisoners (wives, mothers, daughters, grandmothers, friends, etc.) are to form one communication circle over the entire world to help reform those lost souls correctly. You will have one big loud voice for them. It shall be called, “The Women of Prisoners Circle.” You’ll probably get a lot of help from Amnesty International on this project; merge with them.
The Hypocrite Hokey Pokey
by The Hypocrisy King
I step forward to the Light with my front foot
In the black mud of selfish habits is my rear foot
I seek and brace my front foot on a color of beliefs
I rest in my old habits
I talk and talk and talk towards my next step forward
But when stressed, my rear foot pulls me backward
To the mud I fall back, but I’m still standing
I rest in my old habits
Two steps forward and one step back
I stagger to reach the Light of self-less-ness
I must think and talk before I walk
I rest in my old habits
I reach my front foot to the middle of the Truth
My front foot is planted in the Light of Oneness
And my rear foot is covered in mud
I rest in my old habits
I’m “Home” as long as I lean on my front foot
My best foot is forward
But, often if I lean back.
I’m a hypocrite to others
But what am I to you?
They are children having a tantrum
While I’m trying to grow up
I’m looking in the mirror of self judgment
It’s judgment day for me
They are looking at me with judgment
They aren’t ready to judge themselves
I’m at least thinking about walking the talk
I don’t judge them, they are where I was
They judge me, because they don’t know where I’m going
I’m going forward in self-less-ness, but where?
They see the talk, but not the walk
I’m forgiven by God, but not by them
They are not supposed to judge me
I know that and forgive them
For not forgiving me
For not understanding about the black mud
The black mud is of the compounded years of deception
That is caused by those who temp our weakness for their gain
To make it to the heart of all the people in Oneness is the trail
But that causes us to feel our selfish ego pain
You plan to pull the rear foot out of the mud
You brace yourself on a color of beliefs
And try to shake the mud off
You need not worry
The front foot is planted on the facts on Earth
Sharing is the opposite of the black mud
Planning your walk is no bad thing
“Talk, Talk, Talk your heads off”
says the happy Hypocrisy King.
You may only be one step away
But you must know what Love is
Before you can walk the talk
Love is walking the walk
Love is action
You are Loving if you are stuck in the mud
But trying to pull any foot out of it
You are loving if you are looking in the mirror
You are no hypocrite
You are a human
On Earth with the rest of us
Hypocrites are at least trying
You are forgiven for stepping up so quickly
That you had to take a step back
Hypocrite; I Love you.
Keep up the good work
You reach the Truth as you plant your foot in the center of OUR circle
The Truth and the facts that WE are one tribe; human, with the same needs
“Misfit” they call you, but you fit in here; even if it is one foot at a time
Together, WE’ll be dancing with both feet in the Light soon.
Look in the mirror you see yourself
Then you see God, and you ask
“What do we mean to each other?”
Then God shape-shifts into your neighbor
“What do we mean to each other?”
Is it “Me” and “You”
Or is it WE?
How many peels of ego will have to fall
For your mask to be gone
See God in the eyes of your neighbor
Some must look really hard
Admire them as if they were God
Peel, peel, peel
I can see you, but can you see me?
Peel your mask off, and you’ll see
That “They” are really WE
I rest in my new habits
Do the Hypocrite
Hokey Pokey
And turn your life around
That’s what it’s all about!
What if the Hokey Pokey
Is what it’s all about?
Welcome Home
Sincerely,
Hopi Paleface
The Rainbow Road
My bridge: Put your best foot forward and lean on it and then plant it as far as you can towards the middle; imagine that the middle is the heart of God (total unselfishness with the ability to respond to the needs of others). If God isn’t the correct word for you, then think of it as “The Heart of All Humans”, or “The Human Circle” (whatever?) and that you are actually seeing Light. That means that since you are leaning on your best foot forward, your body is your back foot and you are actually moving your body to help others today, now… a baby step at a time, now imagine you having an attitude that everything that you do is for others, that you are just a channel for God, a walking puppet; what would God have you do right now, here on Earth with your body (your back foot)? Because your mind is thinking about doing good for others and being a better person, but if you don’t connect with the heart of God; therefore, the heart of all of the people of the planet Earth, and you don’t move your body as God would have you do with your body right now, then you can’t connect to the feeling of “Not being alone inside anymore” feeling; the “I know I’m ‘In’” feeling. It’s like the feeling when you first fall in Love; Euphoria, or are begging for change and someone hands you a hundred dollars, and he looks at you like he loves you with all his heart (of God?) but this is all he can comfortably do for you. The feeling that fills you up inside is greater then the feeling that he felt when he saw how happy I was… he felt it… as I did… He felt good for giving… He felt the warm glow that over whelms you like the sun shining on you from the inside of your heart out… he felt that, as I knew, that he knew that I understood, and he is my brother… I saw his heart through my eyes, and he saw mine… it’s like we “Fueled” each other with God’s love. We energized each other… he’s the one who gave, and I’m the one who took, but he felt the same glow as I did because it was truly an unconditional gift… the “Welcome to the kingdom of God,” feeling.
“Holy Shift” is more like it. I’m in and I know it with at least one foot; always now, as my mind and my heart are one with God’s and yours. Welcome home, I’m at your service; what do you need? I am one with WE; that’s you and me. I’m married to all of the humans on Earth. God was just my bridge, but not necessarily yours; that’s for you to decide.
Anyway, I’ve got some adopted children who are suffering all over this flocking planet, and I want them relieved now. Could you all just get together with me and relieve them now, so I can get on with my life… or does it always have to be this way when you are in the kingdom… could those of you who are already here tell me how you can live with this pain in your heart for them? How do you get that tough when you are in here? It’s impossible… Oh the mud… I forgot… this is just my front foot talking… here’s my body: Your neighbor. Welcome Home.
Here is my tunnel to Home.
Having been raised in the US, usually means that at least one foot is standing in the black mud of deception and self. From the outside looking in; you can see that there are different colors of beliefs, but no matter what the belief is, if you take one foot out of the black and place it on a color, you are heading in the correct direction. The color is the trail away from selfishness and deception. At the end of the tunnel is the Light.
In the United States most of us have been raised by the empire, not our parents. Our parents were just providers doing what the empire expects of them. In our schools at the young ages is where most of the damage is done, so here’s a look at a way to tare down some walls. We have to see how they were built.
If you speak, or think negatively about another person, then you just put up a little veil in your mind between you and them. If they approach you to just visit with you, you are holding onto that veil; the wall, so you may not let them in, even though they don’t know what’s going on, because you become an actor. To their face, you may be nice, but inside of you, you are guarded from them and don’t accept them just because of the wall that you built.
That was just a small example of one veil, but most of us have a very thick wall inside of us, and we are very ignorant of it, because we have been living with these kinds of habits for all of our lives. The news tells us about murders, rapes, kidnappings, etc. while our parents are taught to teach us to not talk to strangers. Look at the big wall that we are set-up with already, before we leave the house. Commercialism dictates how we are supposed to dress and wear our hair, so if you were trained that way and you see someone who does the exact opposite; your wall comes up.
In the United States and through mainstream entertainment, the “Bad guy” in the movies looks like a bad guy. He’ll be dirty, and have long hair or dreadlocks and a beard. He’ll speak with no manners and foul language and an angry look on his face. Then you’ll go out in public and see people who have long hair, or dreadlocks, and automatically avoid them, because of what mainstream has done to you. Mainstream puts walls up in us that keep us from accepting tribes. The tribes live in dirt, we don’t. We are used to bathing and looking and smelling squeaky clean all the time and our men wear a post-military haircut; they are used to surviving in dirt, and they are used to each others body odors, but does that mean that they are the “Bad guys?” Of course not, but look at the walls that we have in our subconscious minds when we are standing in line at the grocery stores next to them.
Rastafarians wear dreadlocks, and are some of the most unselfish (Loving and caring) people of Earth, and most of the songs that they sing are about God; “Jah” is their name for God. They are very religious people, but when you are raised under the empire that continues to show what the average “Good guy” is supposed to look like, and what the “Bad guy” is supposed to look like, then we see that our minds a being trained to fear those who look different then the good guy. We are trained to not accept them. That’s why you see politicians wear their hair, and clothes; in perfect alignment with what we are trained to believe is the good guy.
Do rumors around your school cause you to put up walls against your fellow classmates? You heard something about someone that wasn’t true, so you don’t give them a chance to talk to you about it, you just avoid them; even though you only heard a rumor from one side of the story that went from mouth to mouth to mouth to your ears, and may be the complete opposite of the truth.
A new girl comes to my school, and she has a nice new car. In one year she goes through 10 boyfriends, and the rumor brought from the others girls out of envy, is that she is a whore. I think that she is easy, so I start dating her because I’m starving for sex. She falls in love with me, because I’m not the same as all the other guys; I love affection and I’ll kiss her often; anywhere and anytime and in front of anybody, and she loves it. I get to know all about her, I know when she’s on her moon (Period) and a whole lot of other personal stuff about her, and her family likes me. She wants to marry me and we finally have sex after many months, and I come to find out that she was really a virgin after all! This is a true story.
In summary, it is our own minds (ego) that continue to work against us to cause us to feel so alone inside; especially when we know that everyone is judging everyone else under this empire system. Everyone is ready to shame everyone else if they are different, so we feel alone inside.
I went to a Rainbow gathering about fifteen years ago, when I was very alone inside, but I dressed the part; I had tye dye shirts and Birkenstock sandals, long hair, and a nose ring, so I wouldn’t feel shame for not looking like I was “In.” But I wasn’t in; I was just trying to fit in anywhere that I could. I walked around and talked to people, but I felt alone still. After fifteen years I thought to myself: “How would a guy that has a post-military haircut, and a tattoo of “USMC” on his shoulder feel like he fits in at a Rainbow gathering? I thought about it, and thought about it, and I finally realize that he must go all the way back in his mind to what all humans have in common, and then I thought about it some more, and finally it hit me; “Wait a minute! Is it that easy? Is it that simple? I’m a human, they are humans; we are humans! Wait a minute… I’m already in!? I just need to drop all the veils of ego, and the walls that I have put up against people who appear to be so very different. Holy Shit! I’m in!” Now I can look every human in the eyes and show them my true heart, as if they really are my brothers and sisters; I can let them in, and just simply know that I am one with them, as I am one with all. And come to find out, one of the leading focalizers of the Rainbow family of living Light was a Marine.
Rainbow Warriors
A Rainbow warrior has the same color of skin as every human on Earth. We are recognized first and foremost as human only. A Rainbow warrior may be you, but you may not know it yet. A fully initiated Rainbow warrior knows it, and recognizes him/her self as a spiritual father or mother of all the people on Earth and can be as young as 12 years old (or puberty). WE are one with all. A Rainbow warrior recognizes themselves as a member of WE. Non initiates call “their” group “We” while calling others, “Them.” A Rainbow warrior always calls other groups of “We/them;” “WE,” and “Welcome home to WE; the human group.” Those who don’t yet recognize themselves as Rainbow warriors, aren’t conscious of their place in the human tribe, but are going through the initiation as they walk through life, because they are already in the human tribe; they just don’t know it.
Categorizing the Rainbow Family of Living Light as a group of “Them” is impossible, without calling all the people in the world, “Them.” Non-initiates call us “Them” even though WE call them, “WE.” “They” are the ones that have to change; WE are already home. “They” are the ones that have all the walls and guards up. WE are already here now; home, and with our guards down; ready to truly welcome you home to the one tribe; humans; WE.
We are not the “Rainbow Family of Living Light;” WE are only humans. The only category that WE can ever be put in is Homo sapiens; HUMAN BEINGS.
The Rainbow Family of Living Light is the Light for the future Rainbow warriors who are flying around like moths in the night when they are lost. WE appear to attract many “Misfits,” as many of WE have been picked on since the day they were born, and/or have no family and no one to lean on when they need to, as independence is not a need of the people; socialization by cooperation is; therefore, it turns out the Rainbow family is their only family; the humans. Where else can they go but home, when this world continues to cut help for those who need it the most? Therefore, you can look positively at the Rainbow Family of Living Light as a circle of “Misfits” that are walking wounded healing; a healing circle of poor people who find richness in their neighbor as WE learn to share our lives with our neighbors more and more with each passing day.
Many people have lived a hard life of dysfunction, and they bring to gatherings their less-then-positive habits. These are understood, forgiven, and not welcome, but they are. The humans with the less-then-selfless habits are simply still coming home; they are on the way, but have extra burdens to carry; they are welcome, as you are. Drop your guards; your shields; your beliefs; your masks, and come home to the human tribe, where you don’t have to try to fit; you are already “IN.” Come home in your mind and be WE.
I pray for world happiness forever; amen; so be it! Anonymously yours, “X.”
King of the Beasts
Have you been hearing the animals “Talking” to us? Chinese medicine has been practicing for thousands of years. While people of the west were still dying at very young ages, many Chinese were living until 100 years old. Their medicinal approach was to use an ounce of prevention, because there wasn’t a pound of cure; to treat the body as a temple and continue to maintain a strong immune system was the way.
But as commercialism invaded their egos and the people became more and more divided by money, the poor came up with “Rare” medicines to trick the rich to spend top dollar. The proof is this: Tiger whiskers. Tigers in India are currently being killed off to extinction for their “Powerful” medicinal purposes. Poachers are being hired by the Chinese to bring the animal’s parts to China to be sold. The rich Chinese are fools; just as all rich people are in the world. How can tiger whiskers be so powerful if the tigers are dying off? Surely rat whiskers are better medicine.
Animals all over the world are talking to us by dying off; what are they trying to tell us? “Wake up and see the Light!” Wake up and walk in truth!
The social animals have more to tell us. Do you ever take the time to notice your pet dog, they teach by example? When you leave for the day, and then come back home to them at night; what do they do? They run up to you; happy to see you. They look into your eyes and if they could speak what would their intention be? “Hi… I missed you… I’ve been here all day alone, and I’ve been scared… and I’m sure glad that you are here with me now.” Some of us are so busy in our minds that when our dog does this we ignore them and walk right by them to start getting our chores done, but everyday they practice the conscious dance on us to teach us by example of how we are supposed to be social.
Many people of the world have been hunting animals to extinction simply because there isn’t enough food in their area to go around. We are going to grow food everywhere, and it is going into the world’s food bank. All of the food on Earth belongs to all of the people on Earth to share equally, along with all the means to transport it, and transport all of the medical supplies. Japan can’t raise enough food to feed all of the people in “Their” country, but they have the money to pay for it. Africa has enough land to feed all of the people in “Their” country, but they aren’t on the money system; therefore, they must raise enough food to feed themselves without money. All we have to do is get them on the same page as us, as far as modern farming and agriculture, and they’ll raise enough food to feed themselves and other countries, too. It doesn’t take a brain surgeon to run a tractor, and operate a well! You don’t have to go to school for any of your life to do it, but even though they are starving, the children are sent off to school everyday to learn to submit to the dominant source; the language of their oppressor; English.
Africa was once a very lush country, but as the happy tribes flourished the animals stated disappearing, because they weren’t up to date with the farming. Today, we can watch the starving people on our TV, and see that their isn’t any animals in the back ground; no dogs, no cats, no chickens running around, no birds anywhere, not even any rats to get whiskers from.
King of the Police
I used to be a reserve police officer in San Jose, California, USA. I was talking with a very good friend of mine who was a retired cop, and he said, “At some point the police are going to have to stop worshipping the kings that sit on top of the empires who are always having laws passed against the working class people, and take the side of the people.” That time is now; welcome home!
Georgi,
I can only imagine the mental torment that you have had to endure throughout your days as president. I can’t imagine you sleeping very well these days. I’m your newest best friend, and I’m here to help you.
First, I’d like to offer this world a new branch of the military of the people. WE are the peaceful, “Rainbow Warriors.” We are first in battle, because there won’t be a battle if we show up first. WE are the bravest of brave, and we’ll even bring our children with us as we set up our camps to surround hostile countries in order to Love all of them back home to the one body, and teach them, by example, how to get home. One-by-one, or hundreds-by-hundreds; everyone is coming home.
When I say everyone, I mean you, too. You are coming home, even if I have to drag you… kicking and screaming. You are my brother, and I’m not going to stop harassing you until you do, or until they pry my cold dead fingers from this mouse and from my magic wand; the pencil.
The Rainbow Warriors are simply volunteers; you won’t have to pay us, but you can help us travel the world to bring health and happiness to the world, and all we need is our basic human needs, and since we are volunteering, we should be given the security of knowing that we’ll have our basic human needs met in the healthiest of ways as we cooperate with you for the benefit of all the people, plants, and animals of the world.
Here’s my advice after you repent and all that jazz. You say this to the World: “Welcome Home. I’m the president of the United States of America. I Love You. I mean all the people of the world. How can I help and cooperate with you to make sure that every human on this planet has the security of knowing that they will have all of their basic humans needs met for free. How can I help bring true freedom to the entire world at once?
“I have sinned great sins, and I ask for your understanding and forgiveness, but this is not about me, it’s about WE. I’ll tell you my story someday, but now WE are moving forward quickly to save everyone from the selfishness that the empire systems of the world have influenced. I will give you every last penny that I once called mine, if I have too, but I need to stay safe now, because I have made a target out of myself, and I fear revenge from those of whom I have trespassed against at this time; therefore, I will not be walking freely amongst you now. It will take me a while before I feel safe enough, but the sooner that I see everyone else understanding, forgiving, and Loving each other, as I’ll have to actually witness with my own two eyes, then the sooner I’ll feel safe to be brave enough to come all the way home with both feet, and walk freely amongst all of you. I’m ready to clean-up any messes that I may have made in my selfish days. I’m ready to answer questions, but I will not do this until everyone is actually forgiving everyone, and I feel it is safe for all those involved, as I do not intend to squeal on anyone of the past, as I realize that WE have all been victims of the empire system; especially, myself.
“But as I said, this is about WE, and I’m a man with great power, and since great response-ability comes with great power, I’m now able to respond in a big way to help those who suffer now. I pledge my adoption with you of all the people of the world; You are my brothers, and sisters, and children, and elders. I pledge my allegiance to you; my tribe; my family. I love you, and I’m at your service. What shall WE do now?”
I’m calling you home, Georgi; “Welcome home now, everyone!”
George, WE know that you are just a pickle in the middle of a lot of meat. But the oil friends that you have won’t be very good friends to you anymore, because they won’t have anything to give you. The oil of this Earth, as well as everything else belongs to all the people of the Earth, and shall be used by all the people of the Earth for comfortably obtaining our basic human needs. No one or separate group of people; like a corporation, owns the oil; WE, the people, do.
All the money that is said to belong to the rich; doesn’t, because it came from years of excessive suffering of the compounded millenniums of deception of working classes and shall be used now to relieve all of those who now are suffer. WE shall share it all equally, now. All that financial wealth belongs to the people, and not to the rich. We’ll use it correctly. No one will be oppressed again; therefore, everyone shall be free now.
The “VIH VIH” virus (focus on the intention of this message)
The mythical Vih Vih virus is the airborne strain of the HIV virus. The thought that the HIV virus can mutate and become airborne because of all the people who have HIV all over the world, along with the clouds of radiation that are continuing to grow as we continue to produce the highly toxic nuclear power with all the other forms of pollution that are in the air that we all share should be enough motivation for us to change the way we operate.
What happens when someone is born with HIV? They live a healthy life until they are about 18 years old, and then their health starts to decline. But that is only if they live in a country where food and health care is easy to get. Nevertheless we have got to be prepared for the airborne strain to hit the world, and this will give our teenagers the motivation to drop-out of school and live a happy life while preparing to take control of providing everyone with our needs. If we are all going to die young, then let’s get them ready to live comfortably, and be able to operate smoothly.
We all share the air, and with this campaign we are going to eliminate most of the pollution output from the empires. Nuclear power is only about 14% of the energy that we are currently using. We can get rid of that quickly.
Watch this: A cloud of radiation fell on Australia about 6(?) years ago, and people were having an outbreak of skin cancer. But we were all told that it was from over-exposure of the sun. We are from the sun! We were never told that it could have anything to do with the idea that radiation gathers to itself and forms invisible clouds that could settle in any area and cause serious heath problems.
After hearing the news about the skin cancer outbreak on mainstream radio about the damages that the sun is causing people, I heard about five minutes of music, and then Coppertone came on with a sun-block commercial; that’s the empire in action. Mainstream caters to the empires. We are fed bullshit, so they can get richer. If they were getting over radiated by the sun and the radiation from nuclear power, then they were also breathing too much radiation. Our bodies aren’t ever going to be ready for the snowball effect of radiation to ever survive it; therefore, the youngest will be the survivors. We must stop it before it snowballs. Put an end to nuclear power now; we all share the air!
Long term plans. The 420 party lives on…
There are a few gaps in the plan that I can fill in with more steps to help you see how easy we can unite, but I can’t possibly fill them all in without your help, because I don’t live in your country, and I don’t work where you work, but basically the people that are on the bottom of the classes, or the lowest; the underdogs are uniting in a circle to take care of each other; that’s the main intention, but at the same time, we are actually trying to convince all of the people of the world to unite; therefore, all of the world will take care of all of the people as one family. And to help us stay on track, all we need to focus on first, is all of the things that humans share; the basic human needs, along with the air we breath, and the water we drink, the noises, the smells, oceans and the forests, the wild animals, the beautiful things of Earth, and our attitudes towards each other, etc.
Let us continue with the 420 party and fill in some steps. Just by talking many of the steps through, we won’t have to do them, but remember that our governments of the world are going down, and we’ll have to do some things to let them know that they can work together with us, but we aren’t ever following them again or compromising for them; we are leading them to true freedom as the people of the world are governing ourselves now. We are taking the power that we have never had before in the history of Earth; therefore it’s not something that we are used to, but we are going to get used to it very quickly, because we are learning how to do it, as we are doing it. The best thing to do then is to simply organize one communication circle to talk and plan our actions.
Assuming that we don’t get mainstream to engage with us immediately, even though many of our teenagers have dropped out of school; and assuming that the professional sports players haven’t engaged because they are too enslaved by money in the form of a contract; (amazing how they have us in such mental slavery that we are actually bound by our own signature; a mark that we put on paper?) we’ll continue to grow slower than we thought; that’s all. We are still growing, but not as fast as we thought.
Take a group of you and pick any neighborhood that you want to go to. Take many copies of this handbook and your white surrender flags. Go door to door. Walk up to their door whether they have a “No Soliciting” sign on it or not. Knock and when they answer tell them about the world wide truce campaign and have they heard of it yet? Hand them a copy and give them a day to read it. Tell them that every household that is in the circle is to have a white flag flying, and those who already have an American flag (or whatever the people fly in your country) are to add a white flag to it, as every country is being called to a truce. The book is going to explain everything and you already know what they are going to know. Give them your contact information.
Everyone in the circle is to place a white flag on their homes and on their vehicles once we decide to start the party; once you decide to go public. The more people in your country that are flying white flags, the more the presidents will realize that we are moving in on them; peacefully… I said “Peacefully” moving in. Peace is the opposite of violence for those of you who are still confused; like many Americans are.
Make sure that you have an address book with you to put people’s contact information, as this is a party, and you are meeting new people. Whoever you see out their that is flying a white flag, and you haven’t met them yet, go and meet them and exchange information, because you may find out that they are not of your circles, they may be of another circle that spread from the other side of the country, or world, and therefore, you may have made the merging connection that connects you to the center circle! They may know more information than you, and they may have some good news to tell you. Stop, talk, and compare what you know; “How many people are in your circle know?” “What school do you go to?” “What countries are now connected to your circle?” Etcetera, Etcetera, Etcetera! The number of people in our circle is telling us how big we are getting, because mainstream refuses to spread the news for us. We are the broadcasting system for this world wide revolution. We are revolting; “Viva la resistance.”
When you go door to door, remember we are making a party out of it; be happy as if it is Halloween; be excited, this is a world wide party, and let them see your excitement. Tell them to just read the introduction and that should get their attention, but as I have said before; many people are just too busy to stop and read anything, or to actually believe that we are doing it now. They just can’t believe it; can you?
Make a note of the addresses that you have actually handed this handbook to, so later you can go back to the houses to ask them why they haven’t started flying a white flag, and see if it was just because they were too busy or not, if they want to join the circle exchange your contact information. You just added more people to our circle, thank you! We are becoming “Fisher’s of men.”
Continue to count and tally all of the people who come in to your circle by organizing yourselves to exchange the roles of the circle organizers. Pick a house to be the house that has a map on the wall of your city and start placing purple dots on it for every home that is in the circle.
As time goes by, we’ll be seeing people with white flags all over the cities. Get together and start parades, or one big “Conga” line, as you are starting to get very silly while you try to attract more attention, and people who are driving by with cars that are in the circle will start honking their horns if they see your parade. This is where we really start having fun, because then all the old hippies who have seen this vision years ago will be coming out and carrying on like they were never gone; the Shift will hit the fan as the energy bursts into another level! Some will be dancing naked in the streets; join them if you dare. They are in a trance; think of them as the innocent baby and the wise grandmother in one, and they are literally higher then a kite. Think of them as being guided by the star of Pahana. We are innocent children at this point, so take care of each other, and expect the unexpected, as we are trying to make the news! Mainstream media is going to be ours. We, the people, shall be in control of our own mass-minds.
Our broadcasting stations are to only broadcast our efforts to seek, find and feed all the suffering people of the world until there aren’t anymore; ever. If they broadcast anything else, ask yourself and ask them, “What does this (commercial, for example) have anything to do with the suffering people in the world?” “You want me to care about buying a new pair of shoes, when there are all these starving people in the world?” Focus on saving the world until the world is saved. I keep saying that we can do it in seven days, but it may take longer; just keep pushing forward, so it takes 10 days; 20 days; five more years; “Don’t give up the fight!”
Preparing for the greatest con: the silent depression that won’t be so silent anymore.
We are in a depression, but it is silent because we have slowly been compromising since the 70’s when President Reagan started the destruction of the labor unions of the United States. Look around; we hardly see anyone being happy anymore; what is happening to us?
After the 60’s and into the 70’s people were playing music and dancing in their cars while driving down the road, but now you can hardly see a head bob. People used to smile at each other all the time; is it a shame to be happy now; is it a shame to laugh now? Are we too “Cool” to be happy?
Let’s look at what we need to do in case they decide to try to fight this by cutting the economy more and causing us to starve more. Think about your neighborhood. Think about all of the purple dots on the map on your wall. If all of the teenagers in the country have a map that is merged with all of the other maps that means that we are able to know where all of the food in the country is being grown, we will take control of our food supply. Every farmer has teenagers in or around the farm. Many corporate “Chemical farms” are operated by the manager. The manager is to be ready to defy the “Boss” with our support and the police are also to be ready to defy their bosses, too. We’ll know where all the food is supposed to go. Those farms that don’t engage with us will be intimidated as we protest at their gates with our white flags. They’ll come home eventually, now look at all the truck drivers that are to transport the food; they have teenagers that need to eat, too. We are already running the world, we just don’t know it yet.
Your neighborhood is to tally all of the food in their houses, and to get ready to share it all if the grocery stores run out of food; those neighbors who get scared and go to the stores to stock up on food are doing us all a favor. You are to make sure that the people who work in your grocery stores get a copy of this; especially the managers. The managers know how much food is being moved through the store and if supplies to their store start to decline, he’ll be in contact with our circle to keep us up to date.
Think about your circle of teenagers. If one family has less than seven days of food and no way to get more without help, that is warning sign, and that information then needs to be broadcasted to your circle of one-hundred teens. Every household in the United States has an average of more than 7 days of food by our standards. If we were going by the standards of the people of Africa, or of the poor people of the world, we probably have 1 months worth of food.
How much food is in your house? This is the news and this is how our circle will work: Your circle has one hundred people, and it is connected to one hundred other circles; that’s ten thousand people. You are to broadcast to your circle that you have less than seven day’s worth of food. The first family that has less then seven days worth of food causes all of the families in your circle to tally their food supplies. Let’s just say that everyone has decided that they only have about seven days worth of food too, and that there is no way for them to get any more. That news of your neighborhood then get’s broadcasted out to the fourth generation circle that they are connected to; that news is now in the hands of 10,000 people. Let’s just say that all of them are now in the same position, and each of them are now broadcasting out to the circles connected to them; that’s one million people. Eventually, it will make it to a circle that can accommodate the demand with the supplies; we are already doing it anyway, but now we’ll have to change the way the orders are directed; that’s all. But what about the people in Africa that don’t even have one day’s worth of food; this starts with them and all of the other people that are in the same position until everyone on Earth has 7 days worth of food by their own standards. We may have to cut down our standards a little to raise theirs up a little; just like you may have to share your food with your neighbor; we may have to cut back to 4 days worth of food to give others 3 days worth of food; we can do it; look how long it takes for a trucker to drive a load from one end of our country to another; four days! We are already doing it; we are ready; we are all ready!
LOOK! We all think about it, as we are doing it; we then talk, together as one; we then plan to stop paying for the houses that we are living in; we then set a date that we stop paying for our shelter. Then we stop, together as one. The near-sighted mind says, “What about our credit?” Together as one, we pass a law to wipe our credit clean, and start new. “What about the landlords; who have invested all their time and money into their future?” We are their future now; they were going in the wrong direction; the future is today. We are living for today, and they’ll have to come back home to our level. We’ll take care of them, because we are taking care of everyone. “What about all the money that flows through the system?” The accountants of the big business and high finance world who were working for them are now cooperating with us, and they have computers; they’ll just have to figure it out, and they won’t be paying for their shelter either. There shall be no more homeless people. There shall be no more beggars.
I believe we can all have our cake and eat it, too, but it is time to focus on growing food everywhere, so we can flood the world’s food bank to the point that the whole world can waist food forever; not just the rich countries; all countries are sharing; all countries are cooperating, together as ONE. Start a garden in “Your” yards along side our Marijuana.
Water is to be free in the same way, but we’ll have to limit that in places, too; while we build another pipeline of dirty water for our gardens. Starting now; whenever anyone has less than seven days of food, food is to be sent to them for free, as all food and the transportation of it shall be free; the same goes for hospitals and medicines; especially vaccines. If people only have one day’s worth of food, that’s a life-threatening emergency, if people have four day’s worth that’s urgent. When all of the world has seven day’s worth of food; that’s relief.
Did you know that if treated properly, women with HIV can give birth to their babies without transferring the virus to them? Did you know that this would save a child from much suffering, and save us a lot of medical energy in the long run? Did you know that these women are all over Africa, but aren’t getting this treatment and giving birth to these children with HIV, just because we are ignoring them?
Today we are going to work on ourselves while we cooperate with everyone else. It starts now.
The Exorcism
I have questions for the House for the Seeker.
I have a quick comment to say to those who are against abortion to the point that they want to stop a women from having it. We are going to create a new world where every child will be loved by the whole village; no one will ever feel the need to have an abortion; join us!
Matthew 10:1 “And when he called his twelve disciples to Him, he gave them power over unclean spirits, to cast them out, and to heal all kinds of sickness and all kinds of disease.
Exorcisms are performed by Catholic priests and shamans of many tribes. The people lost much of the understanding of what an exorcism is due to the destructive powers of the dramatic Hollywood movies in the United States, but Mexico still performs them frequently in their Catholic churches. Shamans are also holding onto the healing qualities of exorcisms, and many “New age” shamans of the wealthy countries are starting to learn about them. Since the two great religious groups are using this practice, do we think that it should be investigated more, as there are many people; like the homeless and prisoners in the US that appear to be in need of an exorcism?
Exorcisms are really an undergoing of hypnotism, but in the United States, people don’t live near or with a shaman, and most spend a lot of money for the procedure. I know a young woman who was not very “Lucky” (Luck is an idle word) since the day she was born. When researching exorcisms on the internet, I discovered that some people can become “Demon possessed” while in the womb if the mother got very sick, or if the baby was cursed in some way, as for example; the mother or father didn’t want to have the child. This makes sense to me with the story of this young woman, but she can’t tell because she has been living with it since birth, and no one around here is able to identify this problem.
Shamans lived among their people and could notice if someone was needing this kind of spiritual healing, and then could perform the procedure to help relieve the entire tribe of the problem, as usually the individual has anti-social and disruptive behavior. But today we aren’t looking for demons in people; we are products of science that just treat the symptoms, but never cure the problem behind the symptoms.
The spirituality of homosexuality. Many “Homosexuals” (Humans) believe that they were born homosexual. Do the unclean spirits that enter people have gender? Can a woman be born with a spirit in her that causes her body to grow to more masculine stature then feminine? Same goes with men turning more feminine? If you add the things that I said earlier to this equation, then we are adding a lot of weight to these questions as, “Yes.” We are getting somewhere; keep asking questions; we are going to find all the answers.
Mark 16:17 “… In my name they will cast out demons” I call for a circle of priests, shamans, and hypnotists to form a study group, to help each other learn the ways to identify the demons in people, and to come up with a training scenario for the apprentice priests and shamans to learn the procedure quickly, as the people of the world are quickly going to become aware of spiritual truths with this movement, and 12 year olds are going to want to learn how to perform this procedure correctly, because the people who need the exorcisms the most, are the ones who can’t pay money for them. We’ll have young healers seeking spiritual truths all over the world.
All this talk about the “Homosexual” humans has been causing some to feel more shame and allow their ego to ignore this handbook, so let me remind you that this is a freedom movement, so I have written a song to sing as WE welcome “Them” to the circle, too:
I’m queer and I’m out today…
I’m queer and I’m out today…
Take a big deep breath of freedom and say…
I’m queer and I’m out today!
For the Christians who can’t accept the freedom; here’s a reminder: 1 Corinthians Chapter 13:
“Though I speak with the tongues of men and angels, but have not love, I have become sounding brass or a clanging cymbal. And though I have the gift of prophesy, and understand all mysteries and all knowledge, and though I have faith, so that I could remove mountains, but have not love, I am nothing. And though I bestow all my goods to feed the poor, and though I give my body to be burned, but have not love, it profits me nothing.
Love suffers long and is kind; love does not envy; love does not parade itself, and is not arrogant; does not behave rudely, does not seek its own, is not provoked, thinks no evil; does not rejoice in iniquity, but rejoices in the truth; bears all things, believes all things, hopes all things, endures all things.
Love never fails. But whether there are prophecies, they will fail; whether there are tongues, they will cease; whether there is knowledge, it will vanish away. For we know in part and we prophesy in part. But when that which is complete has come, then that which is in part will be done away.
When I as a child, I spoke as a child, I understood as a child, I thought as a child; but when I became a man, I put away childish things. For now we see in a mirror, dimly, but then face to face, but then I shall know just as I also am known.
And now abide faith, hope, love, these three; but the greatest of these is love.”
Reviewing the Circle; putting it all together.
Let’s say that we have all of the circles aligned and the communication system is running smoothly; how do we keep 10 billion people from bombarding the center circle with requests, or ideas? Remember that each generation is a step towards another 99 people to support each one. Let’s say someone in your 5th generation circle comes up with this idea and he brings it to your circle, for example; “Let’s show ourselves the power of the circle by changing the name of the grass to blue and the sky to green.”
Your circle of 100 people filter this idea, and say that we have decided, “Those who were once suffering should have hospitals in their area to help them with their medical issues before we start changing names.” But let’s say we are beyond that and he convinces his circle to broadcast this. They formally write a letter to send towards their 4th generation circle that they are connected to, and for the double check, they formally send this to six other 5th generation circles, too. Those circles will take all the requests and talk about them and respond in less then a week. Let’s say everyone in those circles either vote to pass it along; like democracy, or they respectfully argue until they all agree, as they filter the idea. If the 4th generation rejects the idea, but the other six generation circles like it, each of those other six generation circles send back to the originating circle the news that they are sending in along to their 4th generation circles for broadcasting, and filtering.
If the issue is actually a request for a hospital to be built in the area, then the fifth generation circles, and the fourth generation circle they are connected to add up to 10 thousand people. The request would be sent out to the 3rd generation circle, and they have decided to build the hospital without passing the news towards the center circle for broadcasting, because out of 1 million people, they’ll find the materials, and the volunteers to build their hospital, but if they are running short, they can send this message to a 2nd generation circle and that would be 100 million people that would be able to help finish the project.
Let’s say there was and earthquake in the area, and we need help now! Every circle has a person on stand-by for these emergency reasons. This is information that needs to make it to the center circle so everyone in the world can help. The center circle then broadcasts the emergency and people start signing up to help, and we bring 10 times more people and ex-military equipment to save lives, and relieve the people of the destruction then we need. Imagine if all of the equipment that we have would converge on a forest fire, we would be able to put it out immediately without needing it all.
Emergency news can fly through the world in a matter of five minutes or less! We will someday come up with a “Test day.” Perhaps once a month, we’ll all be ready like we always are, and one circle will be randomly selected to start the test. Everyone will be ready as we set the date and time for this to take place; we’re testing our emergency broadcasting system. As soon as the circle clics, calls, or tells the seven other circles (a 4th generation they are connected to, and six other fifth generation circles) they’ll start a stopwatch and send their time of day along with the test message; the test message is “Orange;” they’ll also send the exact number of people in their circle, too. The fourth generation circles broadcasts the message out, and their supporting circles send in their population numbers back to the fourth generation. They are tallied and sent along. What we now have is the word “Orange” that gets sent down to the 3rd generation circle immediately, and then we have a second following number of all of the people in the circles that have been added up.
If you are following me, the word is going to take off ahead because we don’t need feed back, as this is a test to see how fast we can send the word to the center circle and back out again to all of the people in the world. We are also watching the center circle on our TV, if we have one. The circle that originally sent the message will see in less then a minute that, “Orange” made it to the center, and was broadcasted out to all, and they’ll expect an email, or a phone call, or word to mouth to reach them in about the same amount of time. When that happens, they stop their stopwatch and send that time back towards the center, and the whole world will know how long it takes for the message to make it in and out. And in just a few more minutes, the whole world will know exactly how many people are on Earth, as the center circle quickly tallies the number while some of us are watching them on TV.
The other six circles of the fifth generation are double checking by sending another color that they decide, so they’ll be seven different directions that this comes from. All the colors make up all of the colors of the rainbow, and they all make the color of “Light.” All of the numbers of people in the world will come from seven different directions, and if those numbers are different, we’ll back track to find where the differences came from. This may turn-out to be a computer game that teenagers play frequently to perfect our circle with mock hurdles, problems, etc., and the game will come up with different rules and strategies to find the problems quickly, as it evolves and we advance to different levels.
Any “Computer nerds” out their want to play? Make a game called, “Oneness.” The first level could be called, “Find the deceived.” The next level could be called, “help thee deceived find themselves” The third level could be, “Find the suffering and heal them to strengthen your circle.” The fourth could be “Find the circles of Spies.” Etcetera, etcetera, etcetera… You’ll be helping immensely, as the computer games will lead us in trial and error lessons that we’ll learn before we actually have to learn them on our own. Welcome home.
History
Thousands of years ago we were only recognized as one tribe, and during those years we may have evolved into the most loving and happy people; innocent and truthful.
We may have killed off all of the giants, dinosaurs, and other animals that preyed on humans. But we had to keep splitting up as our population grew. Out of love for each other we continued to migrate and divide over thousands more years. In doing so the climate and the diets of the areas caused our bodies to change. Some got lighter and some got darker. As time went on, food became less abundant, and frustration started to set in as people started to starve; therefore, they started becoming selfish.
Then a man went out to scout for food, and when he came back to the tribe, he found all of the other men killed, and the women were taken. He was left caring for thousands of children. They all looked to him for guidance. He gave all of the directions for the different chores. Over the years, this happened to many tribes, as emperors started to take control of “Their” people, and make armies to defend themselves. Armies fought each other, and were trained to do so by the emperor handing down the thoughts of hating the other tribes; while highlighting their differences. So much so, that they convinced “Their” people to take others; like the women, and make slaves out of them to produce more soldiers to make their armies grow.
As the empires grew, they became very efficient at producing soldiers that would fight together as one, and soon the biggest empire would be the one to get all of the food, as the people were taught to get as much as we can now, or else we may be starving tomorrow. You can see that this habit has continued for thousands of years. We have created the giant that feeds off of us; it’s the last predator of humans; we must get together to enslave it and free ourselves. All it does is divide; therefore, all we have to do is unite. It’s that simple.
Everyone will come to the circle eventually; until they do, they aren’t human, because that is all we are.
Whatever you don’t like about the circle idea, we’ll fix it later if others agree with you. Whatever you don’t like about “My” beliefs; don’t let that keep you from joining the circle. I don’t matter anymore, and “My” thoughts are just leading all of you together. Once we are together, everything that I started can be changed by WE. No one is to ever dominate, or control any circle meeting; especially me.
We have to change things extremely, but we may go too far, and have to change back, as we evolve together. One thing is for sure; the population of Earth is going to continue to grow, and food is going to continue to need to be produced, and we are going to have to continue to find the healthiest and most efficient ways to grow and produce it.
Now let’s get together and feel alright, alright? All right!
One more thing
I have seen a grandmother of the United States who raised her children to have very bad over-eating problems. She was sitting in front of her computer while baby-sitting her 3 year old grandson. As she played her video game to escape from her bored and miserable life, he would whine because she is ignoring him and he had nothing to do. She said, “Oh, do you want a cookie?” She got up and gave him a cookie, so he won’t bother her for a while, and then she sat her fat-ass back down to play her video game and ignored him some more.
We are going to learn a better way to raise our children instead of just throwing pacifiers at them so they won’t bother us. No child should ever be ignored when they are crying; unless they are “Playing” us. We aren’t going to raise kids to be tough anymore; look at the mess we have gotten ourselves into?
What would be the ideal situation for the new born baby and their parents to raise that baby to be happy while the parents are happy for their entire lives? The parents would be taking turns with other parents and playing with the young child while they provided for that child and themselves. And if the whole village cooperated together on this idea, then everyone would be seeing to it that the children and the adults were happy, as they all play together all day, but those who don’t realize that play is most important shouldn’t have any leadership capabilities. The more people who team up together, the easier life on Earth will be for everyone’s happiness.
The confusion is out there, but children know the truth. They are gifts from God; why? They are God’s helpers. They are God’s little aerobics instructors of Love; we have to exercise love on them; we have to give life to them. The more you exercise loving others, the easier it is to do, because you get in shape; you get into the habit of loving.
We must control the child, but not to the point where we break the child. How can we do that when the empire has broken us; therefore, we don’t know what the real breaking point is? What if I told you that all of us were broken in our childhoods? Our hearts were all broken; some more than others; that’s where the ego comes in, as the ego is the proof.
What is the meaning to life? Your life has no meaning if you are selfish; you are alone, “What does your life mean to other people?” is a better question, but the empire wants you to chase your happiness with material possessions and pacifiers. Look at all the people who have no meaning in their lives? What do selfish people mean to you? Look at what they do with their time? Some are in a real hurry going in the wrong direction for their selves, as they drag their children along, and some have no choice as they are trying to keep up with the rest of the fish; the children always want to stop and play; always. We will learn to provide for each other while the children play with us, as we supervise them to see to it they are loving each other while they grow; always all ways. We’ll create a world where a kid can be a kid.
Why do I say that the women are the Holy Grail? What are men then? Think of the egg and the single sperm cell; separated they die, but together they bring life. The Holy Grail is that loving part of the woman that is a vessel; a cup or a pot that can hold the Holy water. Where the Holy Grail isn’t is where it is useful; what it does for the world is where it’s useful. It is empty but always ready to be used; that’s love. Think of the Holy water; drink the gift of unselfishness to live, as water provides life for the entire world; the plants, the animals and the humans. Men bring the water from the river of life; the river of unselfishness for the women, children and the men to drink; that’s love, but without the women they lose it; they’ll lose life. Together, they make life; the more unselfish we become, the more life we are living. Men must learn to fill the Holy Grail to the brim with unselfishness, and women must learn to hold the water correctly; the Holy water.
Think about the water of the world that was polluted in last night’s nightmare. No matter how much you pray for it; it isn’t very holy now. The water all over the world is dying because of selfishness. Think about breast cancer; think about prostate cancer; do you want to fight cancer? We can only do it together. The empires are killing our water; they are killing us.
If you ignore this handbook, and you ignore this movement; that’s exactly what you have been trained to do by guess who? The near sighted empires.
American Christians; why doesn’t it just say in the beginning that the tree of Life is self-less-ness and the tree of knowledge is selfishness; since, when we go in one direction, the other is hidden from us? It has to do with thought as well. Thinking thoughts make knowledge. Thinking is of the ego; the mind. Unthinking and just doing without thought is following your heart; like, how does the newborn Kangaroo know to crawl and wiggle its way to the mother’s pouch without being taught? How does the new born child know to suck for food when it wasn’t taught? How does the heart know to beat?
When we are young children, we don’t need to know that the grass or sky have names, we just live with them, and play. Why do children play? They aren’t playing; they are really living. Why do we give names to the way people live? Why do we not play? Why do we not live? We are too busy watching others live while giving them names.
In your Bible, Jesus says, “I am the Way, the Truth and the Life.” Can we also say that Jesus was one with God? Yes, most Christians can agree to this. Can we also say that Jesus was one with the Way, one with the Truth, and one with the Life? Yes, most Christians can agree on this too. Can we say that the Way is the walk of unselfishness? American Christians have a hard time with this one, because they usually haven’t thought this far; they usually stop at “Jesus is the Way.”
There’s a book that was written about 500 years before Jesus that is called, “The Way,” but it really doesn’t have a name, as it has something to do with motivating people to grow downward towards unselfishness and un-naming, unknowing; reversing the effects of eating from the tree of knowledge. Since this book has many things in common with the Bible and motivates self-less-ness, it makes me wonder if this, “Way” is the same “Way” that Jesus was talking about. As if Jesus was assuming that everyone that he was talking to already knew about the “Way” that the book describes. The English version of this book that I have is called, “Lao Tzu Tao Te Ching, A Book About The Way And The Power Of The Way” By Ursula K. Le Guin.
“Taoists” now have named themselves as an organized religion that then takes the value of the book away, because of the irony of the book’s teachings of not naming; just living. The book was written for all of the people of Earth who can benefit from it, and not for people to use it to form a religion of it; just as the Bible was written for those who could benefit from it, as it wasn’t supposed to be used to form an organized religion.
I want to show you a few chapters from Ursula’s translation of “The Way.”
Chapter 37 Over all
The Way never does anything,
and everything gets done.
If those in power could hold to the Way,
the ten thousand things
would look after themselves.
If even so they tried to act,
I’d quiet them with the nameless,
the natural.
In the innamed, in the unshapen,
is not wanting.
In not wanting is stillness.
In stillness all under heaven rests.
Chapter 68 Heaven’s Lead
The best captain doesn’t rush in front.
The fiercest fighter doesn’t bluster.
The big winner isn’t competing.
The best boss takes a low footing.
This is the power or noncompetition.
This is the right use of ability.
To follow heaven’s lead
has always been the best way.
Chapter 71 The sick mind
To know without knowing is best.
Not knowing without knowing it is sick.
To be sick of sickness
is the only cure.
The wise aren’t sick.
They’re sick of sickness,
So they are well.
Chapter 75 Greed
People are starving.
The rich gobble taxes,
That’s why people are starving.
People rebel.
The rich oppress them,
That’s why people rebel.
People hold life cheap.
The rich make it costly,
That’s why people hold life cheap.
But those who don’t live for the sake of living
are worth more then the wealth-seekers.
Remember, this book was written about 2500 years ago and nothing has changed.
Chapter 76 Hardness
Living people
are soft and tender.
Corpses are hard and stiff.
The ten thousand things,
the living grass, the trees,
are soft, pliant.
Dead, they’re dry and brittle.
So hardness and stiffness
go with death;
tenderness, softness,
go with life.
And the hard sword fails,
the stiff tree’s felled.
The hard and great go under.
The soft and weak stay up.
Chapter 79 Keeping the contract
After a great enmity is settled
some enmity always remains.
How to make peace?
Wise souls keep their part of the contract
and don’t make demands on others.
People whose power is real fulfill their obligations;
people whose power is hollow insist on their claims.
The Way of heaven plays no favorites.
It stays with the good.
Movements:
This is the Movement. It started with Jesus, and Lao Tzu (The Tao) perhaps, and it has simply been continuing. But the Empires continue to try to stop it, and as history shows, they have been very successful. But once stopped, WE just get smarter and continue to grow in secret; until now. Now WE are smarter then them; finally.
Here are few history lessons from recent movement stopping activities:
When President Ronald Reagan, of the Republican Party, was campaigning for President of the United States, he was set up to have a rally in Sacramento. At the rally and in front of his stage were his supporters, but all around those supporters were protestors that knew of his past, anti-human, actions against the people. But when the national news stations broadcasted his visit to Sacramento, the people of the world only saw his supporters. Basically, they Broadcasted 1/3rd of the truth, as a way to show the rest of the country (who simply plays follow the leader, instead of thinking with their own minds) that everyone in California supports Reagan for President. It was like cheerleaders for Reagan have just entered everyone’s living room through the TV; instead of the whole truth (with the protesters; the other 2/3rds). If WE would have seen the protesters, we would have asked, “Why are they protesting,” and some of us would have done a little more research, and may not have elected him because of our findings of the facts, but politics wants people to believe, instead of know the facts; especially when all the big businesses of the United States are ran by the Republicans. The mainstream media broadcasting stations are big businesses; therefore, Republicans for Republicans, and they control the minds of the masses in these ways. This is why we need to be able to organize without the help of the media, unless we take control of the media to the point that we know 100% we are in control; WE, the people of Earth.
About 15 years ago, the Democratic party of the United State elected a Supreme Court justice, but the republicans did research about him and found some “Dirt.” He openly and honestly admitted that he had smoked Marijuana in the 60’s (along with everyone else of that era). Well, the Republican$ made a big stink out of it, via mainstream media, and he wasn’t able to take the job because of it. But when Republican, and actor, Arnold Schwarzenegger was campaigning for Governor of California, we never heard a word about all his pot smoking days.
In the 70’s Arnold made a movie called, “Stay Hungry,” that was based on the book of his life with the same title. In the book (the uncut version) Arnold said that he smoked a little pot everyday before he worked out when he was a body builder. And in the movie with Kurt Russell and Sally Field, he smoked it. Arnold is a Republican money man, and his supporters are the entire Republican businessman and mainstream media, but we, the people, never heard from mainstream media about his “Dirt.” As I said before, almost all businesses are owned and ran by Republican voters. Get the picture? Mainstream media is fooling us for only one reason; money. Money is what Republicans are all about, and they are making us all work too hard, as they always have been under this empirical system of control. Since Arnold was elected, he has been bashing labor unions; like Reagan did, Arnold is against the working class, and has got to go.
The Hippy movement was about freedom by truth, peace, understanding, forgiving, and conscious social cooperation for positive changes for all of the people on Earth. They had the power to cause the government, and all other big corporations who were in control to start living in fear. So much so, that the Empires of Hollywood started making movies about the downfalls of Communism (sharing everything). Communism was given a bad name throughout the United States, but Communism is closer to Humanism then the tug-of-war of our false Democracy. The problem with all forms of government is, of course, the infiltration of the Empire system. Communism is about sharing everything, but if you have a leader, the leader can ruin everything with his own selfishness; like many of the leaders did of Communist countries. The Republican businessmen do not want us to get into the idea of sharing, if we share; instead of have our own stuff, they loose money. They want us to be divided; they call it “Independent.”
Communism had a bad name due to their faulty dictators of the past, but then the news would talk about, “Hippy Communes.” When they used the name “Communes,” instead of the more appropriate name, “Communities,” it makes it look more like Communism, and causes the minds of the masses to turn away from the idea of intentional communities where everyone shares everything. It’s like calling every religion a “Cult.” The Catholic religion is a cult; Hindu, cult; Muslim, cult. Every religion is a cult, and every cult is a religion, but you can see how we have a different feeling when we say two different words that mean the same thing. Mainstream media knows this and, over the years of compounded deception, has trained us to think the way they want us to; boy, are they clever.
Because of mainstream’s influence to make the word, “Commune” look bad, I can remember hearing people making shame-based put downs about other family members; like this: “Yeah, he sold his house and everything to join a Hippy Commune… what a fool.” This shame of joining a “Commune” spread across the country like wildfire, and stopped what the flower children of the sixties started… until now. The flower children of the 60’s in the US are still alive and well, and they’ll stand up in support of the teens of the shift.
What now?
I am giving this to you. I don’t want it anymore. You can imagine how much mental torment that I have gone through to bring this to the world; I just want to start my life as a simple man and love my neighbors and children that I have been ignoring. I have been a very big hypocrite, but I realized a long time ago that it won’t matter how much I try to do the little things in life to help others, the world is just going to run me over unless the whole world changes.
Now I just want to love my neighbors, grow a garden and put this handbook in your hands. Until you do something with it, I’ll be out begging, as begging is how I love my neighbors. I’m making myself available for you to practice loving people. I’m overcoming all of the shame that society casts upon me to show the world that there is still a big problem in the world; I love you that much.
Make sure you give a copy of this to every beggar who isn’t waving a white surrender flag, because that’s what I’ll be doing. Every beggar is to wave a white surrender flag when they beg; consider giving them a little more than just a dollar if you see one. Give them your life; it’ll be worth it; maybe you could take them home and let them do their laundry, or maybe you can find them a warm bed for the night, and fill them up with healthy food, and send them off with a bag of fresh fruit. They are working for us; they always were. If you really want to have fun ask him if you can “Kid-nap” him, and party with him; get him high, and show him what you guys are doing with the 420 party, and tell him how many people are in the circle now.
The first people who I send this handbook to are the ones who have ears; the circles for freedom by truth, peace, understanding, forgiving, and conscious social cooperation, and many musicians who are conscious as well. I’ll spend a day or two on the internet; trying to send this thing all over the world, but then I fear that the evil secret branch of the CIA, FBI, or KGB is going to trace me down. I’m not ready for them to pry my cold dead fingers from the mouse, because I want to at least see that we play this out past the Aztec calendar; which ends at about 12-25-12 AD.
I’m hoping that the people who I send this to have teenagers, and that you take this very seriously. So seriously that you call into work and stay home and make your teenager stay home and read it, so you two can discuss it, together. I also hope that all of you well established circles that I mentioned in the introduction contact each other to form one solid communication circle to plan your next move together. All I’m doing is bringing us together; that’s my job. What you do together is your job.
I’m not taking this to any publishing house for editing, and printing, because I really don’t want anyone to know who I am, and if everyone gets involved as more hands make for light work, you’ll put this very rough draft on the internet; just as it is and everyone will understand that it is a very rough draft, as they’ll read it. This is merely a discussion, and we don’t need to clean it up, because we’ll be wasting time, and we aren’t trying to sell it. If this doesn’t work, well you have a lot of ideas here that you can make something better that will work. Some of you will proofread it, and come up with a better way to say things than I have; go for it, but do that after you have sent this one along.
Recruiting the teenagers to take the lead and give them all the freedom that they want is the best motivation that I could come up with to actually get them to read and try to understand the things that I’ve said here, as I believe that I have brought much truth forward, and if we all just move this very handbook, then we’ll all be on the same page, and as we evolve, the people will speak to each other through the center circle and all things will be made right; even the things that I said that may not be right.
Haste is of greatest import/export as there are people who are going to die while we are trying to get them the word; they are killing themselves in the ghettos, and they are dying of starvation and broken heartedness all over the world. If just the word of this idea gets out to people then they’ll be filled with hope and joy, and people will start treating each other better.
But I’m through with it; it has consumed me like the ring consumed Gollam. I have been the King of hypocrisy for fifteen years while I’ve been writing this, and I need to start walking the talk, so I’m letting it go. It’s in your hands now. I was hoping to get this to you in enough time that when the New Year comes along, we’ll start seeing white flags as we celebrate at midnight, but the timing is up to God; we are in God-speed, as God is doing his work through us; allow it to happen and enjoy it.
For the translators, it would be best if you simply state at the front of the book that “This is what this American says and I’ll try to translate it as accurately as I can:… Holy Shift by the Thieves in the Light…” but if you get to a place were you feel that you must clarify tell them in these brackets {“this translator must clarify this statement, and I’m adding my words here…” and if you can, change the font as well. } Try to send this to every country that speaks your other language.
What is the true intention of this Handbook? We need a step-by-step plan that the people can see to unite the people of the world. If the things that I have stated turn people off, then you guys get together and come up with another step-by-step plan that will work. We have a chance to do it with this book; especially if you fill in the gaps to this plan as you unite your circles and evolve with our union. If we don’t come together, then the empires will just continue to keep the people fooled and distracted. WE can do it now!
Vision Quest:
One day; in the summer of 1991 ? while living in Eugene, Oregon, USA, I was told by a brother, “You should go do what the ‘Native Americans’ do: Go out in the desert without any food or water for four days… to see ‘Visions.’”
When I was told that, it sunk into my agnostic memory and stayed there, and after a year of quite a full load of self discovery, which included my first “Full-blown,” “Psychotic Manic Attack.” And then a diagnosis by a Western medical doctor as a “Manic-Depressive” which started with a trip to a Biker “Helmet law” rally on the front steps of the state capitol on the 4th of July in Sacramento, California, USA; to a Hippy gathering in Marysville, Cal., to the Golden Gate bridge, to the San Francisco General Hospital’s “Psych ward,” to Placerville, California’s Psychiatric hospital, and then back to live with my parents in Gresham, Oregon; I decided to prepare for the Vision Quest.
While living at my parent’s, and feeling a little controlled by the “System” and humiliated about my current “Situation” all at once, I told myself: “Tomorrow, I’m going to replace the seal in my Volkswagen bus’s motor, and then go to my questing spot” (My secret sacred spot on the Deschutes River in the high desert of Eastern Oregon) “And I’m going to start my fasting in the morning, once I get up and while I work on my VW.”
Was that a prayer? Does God (or the Angels, Spirits, etc.?) know what we are thinking? Because in the morning, I was in a lazy mode of being in the habit of sleeping in until 10:00am, but as I lay in my bed at about nine, I felt an itch on a toe. This “Itch” turned into the feeling of the end of a needle being pushed into my toe: I had to actually get up because of it!
“Okay… I’ll get up!” I said to my imaginary angel, as my “Mission” for the day had come back to my memory. I then dropped the motor in the VW, replaced the seal, and put the motor back in; packed up, showered, and made the two hour drive to my “Base camp” on the river by 3:00PM.
I was sitting in the shade at a picnic table with a pad of paper, and a pencil to do some journaling, while I relaxed with just a pair of shorts on. And I was “Recovering” from the busy day that I had endured so far, as I was planning for my hike to my meditation spot; which was high up on a plateau on the cliffs of the Deschutes River Gorge, and was a steep hike.
White sitting and enjoying the river, and the birds and the bees; (literally) I happened to look down to notice a bunch of independent spider wasps “Working” a mound of dirt that was under the same shade tree as I.
After a while I felt something crawling up my leg… It was a spider wasp… carrying a paralyzed spider… up my leg! That’s two normally undesirable insects (as far as being on my body) on my bare leg! I jumped, and she jumped and dropped her spider.
She got my attention; especially her, because spider wasps are normally very clever: “What was she doing crawling up my leg? Was she ‘sent’ to get my attention?”
I watch her, she quickly investigated her spider. (On the ground; between my bare feet) I held still while she flew back to her hole, then she flew back to her spider, then she grabbed the spider and drug it back to her hole; and finished her course by laying the single egg on the spider; and burying her newborn with its fresh eight legged diet.
After that, I realized that the bushes these wasps were getting all of their spiders from were about fifty feet away. (15-20 meters) They then have to drag their heavy spiders back. (Something else I didn’t know, because I always assumed they flew while carrying their bounty) If you or I had to do that, it would be like we were traveling through mountains and valleys, and we’d get lost. How can they do it without getting lost?
Woooooowww! “Their antenna; they can ‘Connect’ to something!” Then I thought back to the idea of the honey bees; flying for miles to scout and bring the message of new places where food is, and then to the homing pigeons; being able to travel in the trunk of an auto, or a train, and upon release they fly straight home, and then the Salmon; the fish that have a built in “Homing device” that helps them navigate thousands of miles; back to their exact birthplace… Underwater! And finally the whales, that travel every year from the north to the same tropical areas to give birth to their calves and rear them in the warm waters, until they go back (Over a thousand miles) to their summer homes in the north to feed on the plentiful abundance of plankton in the cool waters.
“Holy Shit!... All these animals are ‘tapping into a pipeline’ or something like that! If they weren’t, they’d all get lost.” “Holy shit;” my new discoveries were starting to excite me, and it’s a good thing that I was in nature, because there’s something about nature that keeps you calm when you are alone with her, and with this new discovery and excitement and all, I was surely headed for another manic attack; especially, while I was thinking about the info of my past, where I have heard (somewhere) about how “Scientists” say that there’s a huge part of our brain that we don’t use… “Is that our antenna?!!!” “Holy shit!”
I was starting to “Believe” in things! Agnostia was totally out the window! “The big part of our brain is our antenna!... It’s protected by the skull!... It’s our connection to God, or the ‘Energy grids, maybe! Can we learn to use it?! Maybe we can train this part of our brain to have a better connection to… whatever (God maybe?)… !!!”
“Psychic Energy…?” “Healing Energy…?” “All these animals are already guided…?” “Holy Shiiiiii……t!” “We can build the skill of connecting… as I realize that I had to have a logical, or scientifical, way to believing in a spiritual existence. And a belief that there is a way to “Connect.” And a belief in the possibilities that we are all connected. And if we practice certain spiritual exercises on a regular basis, that who knows the possibilities?.
Earlier; while on the drive to my spot, I was thinking about the possibilities of this quest, and thinking about what “Visions” I was going to “See” and how it works; especially, when I never read a book about it, nor did I really talk to anyone who was experienced on the subject. I was thinking, “Logically,” that around the 4th day of the quest that my kidneys would shut down and my body would start poisoning itself, and I’ll start to hallucinate, and maybe it would be like a window to the dying process, and I might actually die myself if I’m not careful.
After processing all my new discoveries while I set up my camp, I noticed the sun was about to go down and I was tired, so I decided to go to bed before the stars came out, but before I crawled into my little tent for the night, I looked up at the massive cliffs in the direction of my favorite plateau and said to myself, “Tomorrow, I want to find the easiest way up to my meditation spot as I can, so if I’m weak on my fourth day, I’ll still be able to get up and down.”
I got up in the mourning, and after a few minutes of boredom, I decided to head up my trail. I started off on the usual path, when after about a hundred yards (100 meters) there was a mother deer on the trail ahead with her two yearling babies.
We noticed each other at about the same time and I stopped to admire her, and she took off ahead of me on the trail; which was a side hill trail by now. She was out of site as I started to turn and go up a slightly steep, and narrow, trail that was between two big rock walls. As I moved around the corner and up the trail, I noticed the usual “Y” in the trail of which, I remembered that I always take the right leg of the Y.
The “Y” is at the base of a small hill of which it goes either left to a not-so-well traveled trail that I’ve never been on, because I was always used to going right. Mother deer was on that hill, and she was only about 20 feet above and away from me! “That’s weird; that’s not how a wild deer usually acts” I said to myself as I watched her for a minute as she was looking around frantically and confused while her babies were behind her. I said, “Cool.” And then started walking to the right (up my usual way) when she snorted at me! I stopped. She was still there and looking at me with this serious look on her face as I look up at her. “That’s weird,” I said again. Then I shrugged my shoulders and continued to go up the trail to the right. She snorted at me again as I took that next step.
“Okay,” I said to her. I then stopped and went the other direction to take the left arm of the Y. She and her brood ran ahead of me and then out of site; up the lesser traveled trail, so I stayed on the trail and I found that it’s an easy side hill walk up to the final base of my plateau, of which, I was then able to take an easy trail along the plateau to my spot.
“Holy Shit; she showed me the easiest way to my spot!” “So… there’s something to this Native American (Indigenous) people’s spiritual business… Holy shit” I said to myself as I remembered my request before I went to bed last night. Was that a prayer? Did I say a prayer, and then just witnessed the prayer come true by God’s use of the deer?
“Yes, that deer is wild, and she showed me that there is definitely a way to “Tap” into God (or the spirits, angels, energy, whatever?) with prayer.
After meditating a while and processing my new information, I started to get antsy, so I decided to head back down the trail, only I wasn’t tired so I decided to take my usual (now a shortcut) trail back down. As I headed down I realized that my shortcut, “Deeri” stopped me from going up, was very slippery as the loose dirt and rocks were sliding out from under each footstep as I walked down. I also noticed how I practically had to crawl on my hands and knees to get down one of the little rock walls to the base of the deer hill, where she stopped me. And as I made my way back to my camp, I kept slipping, until I slowed down. I said to myself… “Go slow and you won’t slip. Stop and look back often, so you’ll remember the way. So you’ll remember the “Trail” because you’ll be showing a lot of people the way… to the Light.” The words just flowed though me, as I processed and discovered my “Vision.” I’ll be blazing a trail for a lot of people, so I have to go slow and steady to make sure I know it by heart, because when people go down a trail through the forest, they must know how to get back, or else they may be lost forever. “I’m going to be a teacher… someday.”
Once I got to base camp at about noon, I started to notice my physical situation, so I decided to meditate under a shade tree, when I closed my eyes, the most profound picture came to mind: A “Vision” of hamburgers. My quest was over in one day, as I immediately got up to pack up my VW and head to the nearest hamburger joint, and then back home, because I didn’t have the power it takes to shut down, “My” thoughts.
Since then I have set out to prove to the world and to my family that I’m not the “Crazy” one here; the whole world is crazy; I’m sane!
I’m begging you; all most of the beggars in the world are not very selfish; they are just broken. And if we would just focus on how to heal each other, instead of treat the symptoms with pacifiers, then maybe we could give them enough of what they need to help them overcome their addictions. We’ll give each other everything that what need, and then everyone can overcome all of their addictions easier. “Love, Love, Love… Love is all WE need. Give to each other, and no one will have to give until it hurts anymore. Many hands make Light work for all. All the people in the world, starting right now, just start talking to your neighbors a little more with each passing day; a baby step at a time; a baby step is all that it will take, together.
Prayer:
“God, I hope that this is the right thing to do. I have this ball in my hand, and I’m about to pitch it to the world. I know WE have an infinite amount of pitches to throw, but I want a Home run on the first pitch, because I’m on the other team too. The balls are all racked and the world has the cue ball in their hand, please help them spread the word and sink all of the other balls on the break. Here’s the ball, and here’s the hoop.
I pray that the effects of the trembling throughout the world are only of positive ‘win-win’ situations for everyone. I pray that the emperors see the positive possibilities of economic equality for all and they just surrender their egos quickly, and I pray that everyone treats each other like kings and queens of truth and love soon. I want those children fed; I need those children and their mothers fed; all of them. I want to be 100% happy, and that can only mean that the entire world is 100% happy together. I pray that the world is 100% happy now and forever and ever. Amen. So be it. Thank you”
White Eagles
Empires led by wolves to fight each other for territory
But we are sheep
They give us a helmet and a gun
But we are sheep
They make us look like them
But we are sheep
They have us do their dirty work
But we are sheep
We die for them;
We are sheep
We live for us when we flock together
We are white eagles
White eagles we become
To free the world of the wolves
Once we were sheep
Then we were white eagles
Together we sacrificed to the Light of God
To become butterflies of Oneness
The world becomes beautiful
And we are happy flocking sheep again
Flock and fly white eagles
Flock and fly
The world is ready for you
The world is ready for Oneness;
The world is ready for WE, the people
Are “You” in?
(Here’s a song for those who are “in” and chanting for those who are on “Their” Way)
Are “You” in?
Do “You” get it?
Do “You” get it?
“I” surrender; “WE” move forward
Do “You” get it?
Do “You” get it?
Are “You” in?
Do “You” get it?
Do “You” get it?
“I” surrender; “WE” move forward
Do “You” get it?
Do “You” get it?
Are “You” in?
Do “You” get it?
Do “You” get it?
“I surrender,” “Truce;” we were ALL screwed up, some more screwed over than others, so let’s all just forgive each other and move forward with the issue at hand. “I” surrender; “WE” move forward… we the people shall organize and discuss and plan our next action as ONE. “My” gift to “You” is “WEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE………”
Hey, pass this along to a friend or an enemy; “WEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE………”
For those of “You” who get those commanding voices in “Your” heads? It might just be God speaking? Or God, with a drop of deception through a very poisoned ego, perhaps? Are you sure; George? One thing is for sure… “You” are forgiven by “WE.” I am one with God; you are one with God; we are one with God, together. We are Christ. We our Christ; WE Christ. The Oneness; the ONE. We are the commanding words of God if we want to be! So WE shall! “Get the suffering relieved now!” WE are the “Word of God.”
Elders shall be treated like angels on your shoulders. Elders are anyone over forty, or anyone who felt over forty in last night’s nightmare! Rise and shine; you have been asleep for too long; you almost missed the morning; the sun is high in the sky now. The Son is “High” in the sky now. The Son is in the morning sky. I am “WE” and this is our gift to “You,” because we love you; you are we. “Welcome home!” (We are in the White House, giggle; WE are in George’s lap).
“Give Tibet back to its rightful protectors; give Hawaii back to its rightful protectors; give Great Grandmother, Earth, back to her rightful protectors” “Their” land is our land!” How’s that for a command from God? It’s easy when you are out of “Your” mind and into OURS. Do you “Get” it?
Sheep to Butterflies (A nursery rhyme? that teaches math)
99 sheep plus you is 100
100 sheep in a circle
Multiply them by 100
10,000 sheep in a circle
9,999 sheep plus you is 10,000
10,000 sheep in a circle
Multiply them by 100
1,000,000 sheep in a circle
999,999 sheep plus you is 1,000,000
1,000,000 sheep in a circle
Multiply them by 100
100,000,000 sheep in a circle
99,999,999 sheep plus you is 100,000,000
100,000,000 sheep in a circle
Multiply them by 100
10,000,000,000 butterflies in a circle!
Age of Aquarius 12-09-06
Now the moon is in the seventh house
And Jupiter is aligned with Mars
Now peace shall guide the planets
And love shall steer the stars
This is the SUNRISE of the Age of Aquarius
Age of Aquarius
Aquarius! Aquarius!
Harmony and understanding
Sympathy and trust abounding
No more falsehoods or derisions
Golden living dreams of visions
Mythic crystal revelation
And the mind’s true liberation
Aquarius! Aquarius!
Let the sunshine, let the sunshine;
The sun shine in!
Let the sunshine, let the sunshine,
The sun shine in…………….
(Can you see the Light?)
Advertisement
Advertisement
-
Re: Holy Shift by The Thieves in the Light
Mon, December 18, 2006 - 10:24 PMI wrote Brain Wallace:
Brian... thanks for these words. Do you know the story behind them?
How do you know me?
-C
+++++
And he returned:
Not much time now too many emails, here's my story so far... I don't know anything about the rainbow family, i was in a coffe shop in portland oregon and this guy hands me a CD and says, "have fun" as he laughs and walks away. The CD was labelled, "holy shift by the theives in the night; sent to the center circle for approval on 12-17-06" but it was 12-15 when he handed to me? He got his dates mixed up? I open it, and there's the book. The book has changed my life! I'm just trying to locate other people who are connected to the center circle while I send this book everywhere, and now I'm getting tons of emails of people who want to know more but this is all I know but no one is connected to the center circle. I probably don't know you but if you are connected or you can connect me to the center circle please send me another email. For the subject of the email so I can pick you out from the others put "BRIAN" only, in capital letters.
+++++
This looks like someone is setting up an adventure of sorts. Feel like I'm in the Celestine Prophecy.
I once called my parents from Tucson, AZ in the middle of the night to tell them where I was in case I went missing. I was at the gem show hanging with UFO and underground base researchers, and my website disappeared, and false information appeared. I thought men in black were going to take me away. Seriously.
I still have not had time to read most of the above. Have you? What do you think?
I know of a Circle Center in Fairfax, CA and a Center Ring in Portland, OR ... both community spaces for beautiful revolutionaries. -
-
Re: Holy Shift by The Thieves in the Light
Tue, December 19, 2006 - 4:01 AMI admit, I didnt read it all either, although I did read about 6 chapters, accounting for skipping spots.
It seems disorganized to me and as you say, somewhat confrontational. And as I say that, I might have written something similar when I was a teenager as well. I grew up in the hippie days.
Although I was a teenager many moons ago I still remember those feelings of aching to make my world better and constantly coming up against the you-cant-do-that mentality. I finally gave up and retreated into my fantasies for about 3 decades. But I do love the unbounded enthusiasm, energy and passion of teenagers!
This is new to me and a web search brought up nothing. Had you not posted it I would never have heard of it. But of course the date is pretty recent.
The feeling I get about the text is that it is about resistance and I think our thousands of years of history shows us that resistance changes very little and merely brings about another version of what was resisted in the first place.
I think if the young man/woman who authored this piece achieves a focus on creating rather than resisting they may accomplish great things globally.
The old ways are silently crumbling and it does my heart good to see others actively engaged in that....in whatever way. -
-
Re: Holy Shift by The Thieves in the Light
Tue, December 19, 2006 - 10:36 PMI feel that, Shera.
I still have not read more, but today this email came:
hello, i'm new to the rainbow and CO was my first gathering. The only email list that I signed up on was flowers, and i'm sorry that i haven't been able to help with any resques missions yet. i know that all of you got a copy of this book, because it was sent to me at the same time.
i can't beleive the wisedom that the rainbow people have. my eyes have been very opened by this book... i've been crying happy tears over and over
ive got people asking me questions about it that i can't answer. does anyone know the story behind this? I thought flower's name was mark... or is it brian?. can anyone fill me in as to what is really happening... any news would be really appreciated. Peace and Love, fool
++++
Cory... I know the "Flower" or mark he speaks about, and the list he sent this to was all people from the Rainow Katrina relief kitchen i took part in. It had a deep effect on him. Anyone else...? -
-
Re: Holy Shift by The Thieves in the Light
Thu, December 21, 2006 - 7:17 PMI got two new emails about this today.
+++++
hello cory, iwas givn your name by brian wallace. if you havent got the latest update from the cneter cirlce on 12-20 at noon, im sending it to you, they are added to the back of the book; go to the back pages and start at 12-19. i opened the tribe website of yours and noticed that i didn't get any of the handwritten pages to come up on my computer, but i have an old laptop. if you are already connected to the center circle then disreguard this message, and have fun.
I have a lot to tell you if you are still in the game; especially what happened to brian. please email me back and just put (XXXXI took this outXXXX) in the subject, so i can find you easily, later 420 (annymous for now) don't give anyone my email address, or I'll just have to change it like everyone in the center circle has had to do at least once already; thanks.
++++++++
12-19-06 From the Center Circle:
WE received the book on 12-16-06. WE agreed on a few issues that would make things flow smoother for all involved. We are going to answer to the call of some red flags that came up in the book. Here are our suggestions.
WE do not agree together on everything in the book, and WE agree on the intention of the book; therefore, we must move this book through with an understanding that it is a rough draft. We are working together on a better draft with many changes to the plan, but that will take too long, so we are adding changes to the end of the book.
Here are a few immediate changes and is being called plan “B.” Do not worry that you’ll drop out of school. We have decided that this is not a race to cause stress on our lives; just joy. Start building a tight communication system with your school, and call yourselves the Center Circle of your area. As your circle grows to other schools and merges with other center circles adjust your circle as it grows. Everything that you do, you must all agree on, or come up with good discussions as arguments until you do agree. The best guide for this is this question, “What does this have to do with the suffering people of the world?” What does this have to do with WE? Common ground is where we all stand; focus on the common ground.
If you aren’t connected to the center circle; keep searching; keep growing. If you get cut off from the center circle by the internet, you can continue to grow while you try to find the next connection; don’t worry you’ll find us.
The center circle is growing out while the other circles are growing in to meet us. Your job is to find the peace, tribes, or human rights circles of your area to make sure that they have a copy of this, or to see if they are already connected to the center circle, so you aren’t working alone. If you still want to circle all of the broadcasting stations of your area, you are welcome to do that, you are always welcome to wear a white flag, or not, but we are considering a couple of other plans, and we would like your input.
Would it be better to wait until we have a number of people in the country who are connected, and then all decide on a date, together, that we’ll all come outside and start the party? We are trying to come up with the numbers; do we wait until there’s 25% of the people of the United States in the circle before we go public? That number seems high to some, but not high enough for others so we are going to attempt to reach out to you for guidance as that is what this new government is all about.
We are in the process of tallying all of the numbers of the people who connect, but we are in shock over this, and are working to get a computer program to help us streamline this first try at world wide broadcasting.
If you do connect to the center circle we want these answers from your circle, and we are operating democratically within the democratic countries; vote if you have to, but everyone is to know everyone else’s vote and why and always allow the quietest people to speak; there are no secrets in our new government for all:
1. What percentage of the people in the country shall be in the circle before we go public and start the party? We want a % number, so we can average them and give you our entire circle’s average number for approval by you.
2. Do you agree on this date to start the party anyway to see if we can make it happen whether or not we have the right percentage: 07-07-07AD?
3. How many people are in your circle? There must be 100 so you only send 1 answer from a circle so we cut down the amount of emails we are receiving. We just want the true number of the people of your circle. Keep in mind that if one person is in the circle, his entire family is in, and that means everyone in their family’s phone book; all they have to be is real actually living people. Count them in.
New Year, make sure you do have a white flag to fly when the clock strikes midnight, and if you see others out on the streets with a white flag; connect. That goes for every New Year.
The president of the United States has received this, don’t bother sending it to him anymore; we know he knows, but do send it everywhere else! We are growing a lot faster then planned. Everyone in the White House knew about it before he did; we are in the White House!
Consider having one person in your circle to always be ready to send and receive emergency news. Every circle is to check their messages and respond at least once a day; that should be easy; it gives 1-4 people an entire day to receive the message from the center circle or from your local circles; discuss and add the new numbers, and respond.
Many people of the center circle haven’t got the word yet, and don’t even know what’s going on because they live in remote locations and only go to town once a month to answer their emails; they are missing it. The people who are volunteering for you as the center circle don’t normally do the writing and organizing, and we are all scrabbling
as we try to answer the most important questions first. Do not send anything into the center circle until your circle has 100 if you are a third generation circle, if you are a fourth, do not send email to the center, send to your contacts of the third.
This is “The Word” from the Center Circle as of 12-19-06.
The word for 12-20-06 at 6:00AM
Always bring the news to your circle exactly as you witnessed it, so your circle can get in the habit of protecting each other from deception and discussing it, and all agree as to the exact intention of it, and in the habit of relaying messages quickly, smoothly and with the least amount of burden to anyone; especially if it comes from anyone who can claim to be the center circle or any circle connected to the center circle through the internet.
(From the author to the center circleJ)
“This is our ‘Mock’ connection; the internet, and helps us quickly through the next step. The next step is a computer program that simply keeps track of the numbers that come in of all the people. The numbers of people already connected that live in one city will be able to connect with others of their cities after we call for the circles to exchange addresses and have a little connecting party to actually see that there are faces to the names instead of made-up people on the internet. You’ll be able to go to a website and clic on a state to see how many people are already in since yesterday, and then in your cities, and every city circle will have a website that you can go to find the closest party place for you to go and see faces to names of those in their cities. Now we are connecting by word to mouth, and using the internet to get us closer, so let’s get this thing moving through the internet as fast as we can, and not waist too much energy now printing and copying. Get in contact with people, find each other that way.”
“By aligning with the internet, we already iron out a lot of kinks in our communication system before they shut it down. If we do this right (“WIN-WIN”) there won’t even be a computer glitch; like everyone thought was going to happen when the clock struck midnight New Year 2000. The empire kept the computers from glitching and all the lights (Power) stayed on then. WE can do it now, so if it so much as glitches and we lose each other? There’s something wrong and we know it, that’s why it’s important to contact and exchange addresses to actually know where to contact each other should all the communication systems shut down.
Respond in a timely manner that you all agree on in your circle. The center circle will operate at daily intervals. We read and respond to each others emails; the word is sent by 6:00 am every morning, when we have agreed to broadcast something we send it to the third generation, and we are on 24 hour call that we rotate volunteers. Everyone has all day to read and respond and turn their responses in by 6:00PM. Those who don’t respond are left behind or out of the decision for the day; we just stick with the numbers that they last gave us and add them to our new numbers, and send them back out by 6:00AM, along with any amendments to the book.
Ammendments are corrections to the book while the book raced out ahead of them. Our corrections will catch-up quickly to the decisions that may have been made in haste. Ammendments are to be attached to the back of the book, so as to not take anything away from the original rough draft. WE are merely offering our suggestions as we are at your service to help smooth things out for all of us. Above all else, know that we are always building the circle until it is done; IGNORE ALL RUMORS OF CANCELLATION.
“Are you in the game?... The Holy Shift game? Have you heard of the book, “Holy Shift?” “Would you like a copy? Here you go… have fun; you’re in the game now!”
Refer to it as “The Game” when we are building the communication system, because it’s not really the circle yet, and that’ll attract less attention of those who don’t play games.
Chat rooms: go in and say this: “Is anyone here in the Holy Shift game? (hit) and then send this: “Holy Shift game? You have ten seconds to respond or I’m gone.” (hit) “Nine.” (Hit)
“Eight” (hit)…
If still no bites when you get to “One,” say goodbye (hit) at zero and go to the next chat room. When someone bites and say’s, “What’s the game about?”… You have them where we want them… asking questions because we have answers. Say, “I have a copy to send you; give me your email address this is really happening!” Take your time telling them about it and hopefully someone else in the game pops in with, “Is anyone here in the Holy Shift game?” And you go “Holy Shit! Right here! Send me a private message.” (Hit) and you connect to someone and talk and exchange their connections; Are they connecting you to the center circle? Are you connecting them to the center circle? Others will see what’s happening on the chat room screen and start to get more and more curious as the Holy Shift game goes fishing through all the chat rooms.
Always send the book as an attachment, and make sure that the entire book gets posted on websites, we are receiving many complaints that the best parts of the book aren’t coming through; the handwritten pages. They explain the mechanics of the perfect circle system, and one picture is worth a thousand words
We are in the process of writing a form letter/questionnaire for your circle of 100 actives (420 people). They’ll be these questions for sure, and we will ask for suggestions for streamlining our communication system through the internet. Here’s an idea of the questions. How many people are in your circle? (You must have over 100 active) What city and state and country? (Answer alphabetically like this: USA4pheonixAZ 3losangelesCA 16sanfranciscoCA 5boise ID 10touseNM 21newyorkNY … )
How many translators in your circle? What languages? What city and state?
How many computer website builders, and websites are now running with this book posted? Website addresses here:__________________________________________
Does anyone in your circle want to volunteer to help the center circle with decisions? Do you want to rotate into the center circle to learn and grow and help our growth? If you have computer programming knowledge, please come up with a simple program where we can data base and query people of the same citys? Languages? And countries?
Does anyone in your circle want to start organizing the subcircles? WE need organizers for the ”Women of Prisoners” circle; the “House for the Seeker” circle and most importantly; the “Translators” circle. Organizers are simply name takers for now until the circle gets organized. Organizers can be 12 years old.
We are in the process of organizing a formal format; like the front page of a newspaper to send and receive messages to and from the center circle, if anyone can help with that idea; please rotate in towards the center and have a one page copy of your idea with all of the questions in it of these amendments and a simple way to add questions/answers. This must be discussed and approved (Filtered) by at least four of your circle before you send it towards the center.
Always add amendments to the back of the book and then send the entire book with the amendments as an attachment. Always send the book.
We don’t have exact numbers of people who are signed up yet; we aren’t ready and we probably won’t be asking for numbers until we know that the fourth generation, or 100,000,000 people are in; then we’ll start asking for numbers. The third generations are to keep track of all the numbers; we’ll ask for them later unless we get demanding questions for the numbers. That’s going to happen, so the third generation circles are to make a third generation sub-circle with their own newspaper to send to each other. You’ll actually form your own center circle just for the numbers, and that way the Main center circle will never have to be burdened with the daily task. We are working on a standard guide to help us build and connect, but use the book’s plans until WE change them.
This is the word as of 12-20-06@6:00AM (Western hemisphere)
12-20-06@noon the word from “The Braves”
The braves are a 2nd generation circle. We have all the contact information of the center circle and are your bridge from the center to the third generation circles that you are connected to. WE are response-able for the United States, Canada, Mexico; all of North America. We are talking about the internet, so we have some “Guidelines” that we’d like for you to follow. Protect the circle. The third generation circles are only to give email addresses to the second generation circles, but not to the fourth generation circles until the forth has 100 people who all agree to protect the third generation. The same goes for the fourth to the fifth. We must protect what we have already grown. I am your contact person who will rotate, but for now and since it is the internet, only use one contact person at a time from level to level. One can rotate and handle all the news though the internet and out.
I’m sitting in a very insecure position; this is no game to me. I’m a fully initiated Rainbow Warrior and I have adopted all of you as well. I won’t let you down, please protect us; don’t let me down on this. Our names are anonymous to most of you, because that’s the best way to protect us, and we are, again, talking about the internet. This is the first step to get us aligned in our neighborhoods for an actual word-to-mouth communication circle should that need arise.
This is the word from the braves @ noon on 12-20-06.
The word from Charley Brown Town @ noon on 12-20-06:
We got this message unanimously sent to us from the internet, and thought it should be sent:
“Just in case we do have to use word-to-mouth because “They” turned off all of our usual ways to broadcast news quickly; like the science fiction movies of last night’s nightmare and we are being controlled by a runaway computer that uses us to feed it?
“What’s the word?” is the intention when you are walking up to people that you have never met before that have a white arm band, or flag(?) … or tye dye? Dreadlocks? We’ll know who’s in by the look on their faces!
“Hey I’m (a name) nice to meet you…. Welcome home… what’s the word after (Date and time of last news that you heard of “The Word”)?
Now the broadcasting stations would be telling us “The Word” every time it changed, or every fifteen minutes between the music we have them play. Or “The Word” will be on one channel all the time, and all the other channels are talking about the word in their areas closer to home, on other channels, for now the word is: “Basic human needs secured; one step at a time. Feed all the suffering first and all the world has the security of knowing that if one starves we all starve, but knowing that we are all going to eat for sure, forever.”
But later, we’ll listen to music that we’ll have them play for us and in between sets of music; they tell us the word as of this time; the Word from the Center Circle, and your local news.
You’ll decide how often you want to know the news; especially if that’s the intention of our movement; the communication of no idle words, and we are trying to learn to spread news quickly amongst ourselves in case we get attacked by empire computers, and they do keep us from uniting by the electronic communication systems for a while, but eventually we shall get through.
Now people could be walking down the street saying to anyone, “Local 12:15?” They are asking for the local news after 12:15. “Same” or “I’ve got 1:30,” and you both stop and visit with each other about the news.” “SUP?” (“Welcome Home”) “Twel… thir?” (“12:30”) “Peace” (“Same”) or “420;” (the time to spread the Word).
If news from the Center Circle comes to you, shout it out if you want an audience. Broadcast our way.
Forgive me, I’m an outsider that’s trying to bridge gaps the best way that I can; even if I have to do them all by myself.
If we do this quickly, we won’t have to do it for very long; we’ll go back to our way.
The longer we wait; the longer we wait.
All together now? All together now! All together now? All together now!
All together now? All together now! All together now? All together now!
All together now? All together now! All together now? All together now!
All together now? All together now! All together now? All together now!
All together now? All together now! All together now? All together now!
Alllllltoooogggeeetthhhhhhheeerrrr …. Nooooooooowwwwwwwwwww…
Rainbow warriors; no chiefs…. until we are all chiefs, together forever…
Welcome home; all my relations.”
Charley Brown Town is your local government; at the third generation level. If you got this message, you are connected to charley brown town as your third generation circle. Welcome home, we are at your service! We have elected to be response-able for all of the new tribes that haven’t got the word until now, and we are targeting those of Burning Man and all of tribe.net.
The word from Charlie Brown Town @ noon on 12-20-06
EMERGENCE NEWS of the Holy Shift game with the word at 6:00AM 12-21-06 WH. The Center Circle urges you to fish more and clean the catch less. The numbers slowed down yesterday, but many people are spending more time understanding the communication system and the book. All is good, but focus on the fishing, mostly. The catch will clean themselves up as they catch up. Don’t bother reading the whole book, we are fixing it with the help of the High Holies. Instruct new bees to just read the introduction, and the handwritten pages, and the new amendments of the back; starting at 12-19, so they can start playing quicker.
We are now in the middle of merging the “Stock Market Circle” with the “Technicians of Energy and Communications Circle.” We don’t want any extra surprises so please stay with the email address that you have unless something causes you to not get emails or you lose stuff mysteriously. We will be asking for experts in these fields to step forward and help organize it.
The circle suggests that you watch the history of the stock market within the last few days and from here on. Try to find a volunteer for every circle to keep an eye on the stock market for their circle. Print and save.
If panic ever sets in, go outside with a white flag and wave it. People have questions; we have answers. If the internet shuts down over this, go outside immediately and wave a white flag to see if anyone else is in. Go to the back-up plan in the book until you get other info should you get cut off from the Center Circle. This is good motivation for you to spread this all over your city to whoever you think will read it first. Fish in your own pond.
EMERGENCE NEWS with the word from the center circle @ noon
Out of my mouth
Come no lies
That you can see
In my eyes
You are God to me
I Love You
You let me
I am that to you
My life has meaning
As I’m leaning
On my front foot
Our best foot
EMERGENCE NEWS @
This is a test of the EMERGENCE broadcasting system of the Holy Shift game.
Look at the clock and write the time down.
Send a confirmation that you have received this back to where it came from immediately.
Broadcast it through your circles immediately, and record the time that they sent back their confirmations. Save your emails in a new file labeled, “Test Times.”
EMERGENCE NEWS @
It is confirmed that Yahoo.com and Walmart are in the game and eBay is coming in! Everyone should stay with their email address unless something goes wrong with it. Please do not switch to yahoo now. Bloom where we are planted. They’ll come to us; call a 1-800-customer service number and tell your tech/customer service person of your current service about the game; they just have to read it; insist, and send them a copy or find them through websites. The customer is always right.
We had a test through our other form of communication today for the cc through the third generation. Everyone was prepped ahead of time and standing by. The test left the center circle and the first confirmation came in 37 seconds from the first 3rd generation circle to confirm back to the center where it came from (they were practicing ahead of time). The last confirmation of the 1 million came back in 21 minutes and 12 seconds (they weren’t practicing). That’s 1 million people seeing purple in less then 21 minutes through Jah Grapevine! All third generation circles are no longer communicating through the internet!
We are sorry for ignoring the fourth generations, but we had to spend all of our energy solidifying the 3rd generation’s communication by the other means (other then internet).
We could no longer chase ahead and put out fires where they flared up, but now we have a “Circle Maintenance” circle of people who have a good understanding of the mechanics and changes to the system and are in contact with each other as many are still in training.
We are all actually still in training as we learn and grow and chase this game. Many changes will most likely be changed again, so stay flexible and focused on the fishing.
The word from the braves @ noon 12-21-06
The word from Charlie Brown Town @ noon 12-21-06
We came in at 54 seconds! Keep fishing, circle maintenance people are coming out to the fourth generations to help you now. They’ll be able to answer many of your questions as they are rotating themselves into your fourth generation circles.
The word from Charlie Brown Town @ noon 12-21-06
The word from The Fools @ noon 12-21-06
I’m Tony; circle maintenance volunteer and I’m assigned to this fourth generation circle. I have named this circle “The Fools” but once we have 100 actives, we can make any changes to our local government that we’ll all agree on; like the name of our circle. I’ll stay here until we have 100 operating smoothly. There are currently two of us in The Fools with many coming as we have been fishing and sending the book since noon today. If you have received this, you are in the fourth generation, or connected to the fourth generation circle; The Fools.
Draw a circle on a piece of paper and that’s the center circle. There’s 100 circles around them, but just draw 1 circle next to it and name them “The Braves.” There are 100 circles around The Braves, but just draw one circle next to them and call them, “Charlie Brown Town.” They are the third generation circle that we are connected to, and there are 100 4th generation circles starting around them. I’m helping 7 of those circles at the same time. Draw a circle next to them and label that, “The Fools.”
We are The Fools. The contact email for the Fools’ circle is not ready for service, but I’m giving it to you anyway. We will all share this address and we’ll all have the password so we can all rotate around the clock and always be on stand-by once we are a circle of 100. Don’t bother emailing that one yet until we get set-up, just email me as I am your contact person for now. I have answers to questions, but keep the idle words down to a minimum. We are surfing and fishing all the time…
thefoolsgame@yahoo.com
tony_thefoolsgame@yahoo.com
fool_thefoolsgame@yahoo.com
(yournamehere)_thefoolsgame@whatever.whatever
When you email me, put (IN) as the subject only. I won’t open any others at this time.
* New rumor (not confirmed yet) of Jah Grapevine @ 3:00PM PWH 12-21-06AD: Amnesty International, GreenPeace, and Farrakhan’s “Millions More” are rotating into the center circle! -
-
Re: Holy Shift by The Thieves in the Light
Fri, December 22, 2006 - 12:29 PMHey theyre Mr Funbags....lol It's you alright!
I see a lot of energy going into this and as I was reading it, the word "Momentum" kept hovering in my consciousness.
This person is talking about the internet shutting down over this and I couldnt help but notice that my internet connection has been really bad today....hmmmmm.
It's getting more interesting to watch. Thanks for keeping us posted.
And Very Merry Christmas!! -
-
Re: Holy Shift by The Thieves in the Light
Sat, December 23, 2006 - 12:46 AMI'm at work doing an over-night and just read the entire last posting.
Having not read most of the first part, all this still doesn't make sense.
I don't know what they mean by "It is confirmed that Yahoo.com and Walmart are in the game and eBay is coming in!"
I'll read more later. I'm gonna do some beadwork now.
I'm all about circles and knowing who lives around you. This "book" and plan seems more centralized than I think is ideal, but again, I don't know what they have planned. That's just me... I don't like controling things or thinking too much about numbers. I like to keep life simple.
And I am still very keen to hear from the rest of you. Anyone hearing about this in other places? -
-
Re: Holy Shift by The Thieves in the Light
Sat, December 23, 2006 - 1:02 AMIt just came to mind... I'm facilitating my first community circle in Saint John on January 9th, but it has nothing to do with this. ...or maybe it does.
Do you have circles? -
-
Re: Holy Shift by The Thieves in the Light
Sat, December 23, 2006 - 4:25 AMIt does seem pretty cloak and dagger; getting all these people in the....circles...but to do...what? And what is the value of one's committment if they dont know what they will be doing?
I would have found it more palatable if it came with some kind of summary or at least a prologue that says what it's all about. Then I can decide if the rest of the book has meaning enough to read it.
The anonymity part doesnt quite wash with me either.
Yahoo and Walmart are corporate entities....meaning non human...so I dont know what theyre meaning either.I havent heard any more about it apart from here.
Google this morning delivered this in a search for {Holy shift} www.holyshift.net/ a book in progress.
I find this whole thing confusing and repelling and at the same time fascinating...wondering...where is it all going? -
-
This is the maximum depth. Additional responses will not be threaded.
Re: Holy Shift by The Thieves in the Light
Sat, December 23, 2006 - 3:16 PMI checked the site... not a lot there in connection with this other book. Good point about the lack for direction and needing a summery.
It is more like a mystery novel than a manual for revolution.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-